Articles posted by

Jamie Stewart





IMMUNITY - ALASKA

Steward v. State

Supreme Court of Alaska - April 11, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1408549

After fatal car accident, estate and surviving spouse of motorist brought negligence action against state. The Superior Court  granted partial summary judgment to state and, following jury trial, entered judgment in favor of state. Estate appealed.

The Supreme Court held that:

  • Discretionary function immunity applied to state’s decision not to reinstall a removed guardrail;
  • Trial court’s exclusion of motorist’s estate’s expert witness on accident reconstruction from courtroom, during testimony of police officer witness for state regarding his conclusions about what occurred during accident, was error; but
  • Such error was harmless error.

 




EMINENT DOMAIN - ARIZONA

City of Phoenix v. Garretson

Supreme Court of Arizona - April 17, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1499642

City brought eminent domain proceeding to determine the amount of just compensation due to property owner who lost access rights of ingress and egress to abutting street when city constructed light rail tracks adjacent to owner’s property, but who retained access rights to his property from another street. City moved for partial summary judgment, arguing that property owner was not entitled to compensation because he had alternate access to the property. The Superior Court granted motion. Property owner appealed. The Court of Appeals vacated and remanded, and city appealed.

The Supreme Court of Arizona held that:

  • Property owner may be entitled to compensation if the government, in the exercise of its police power, eliminates the owner’s established access to an abutting roadway, even if other streets provide access to the property, and
  • Landowner had a claim for compensation under eminent domain provision of State Constitution when city completely eliminated landowner’s preexisting access to street, leaving him with no means of ingress or egress to that street or any replacement roadway in that location.

 




IMMUNITY - CALIFORNIA

Martinez v. County of Ventura

Court of Appeal, Second District, Division 6, California - April 8, 2014 - Cal.Rptr.3d - 14 Cal. Daily Op. Serv. 3825

 Motorcyclist brought personal injury action against county, alleging that asphalt berm constituted a dangerous condition of public property. The Superior Court entered judgment on special jury verdict for county. Motorcyclist appealed.

The Court of Appeal held that county failed to satisfy the “approval” element of county’s affirmative defense of design immunity, in motorcyclist’s personal injury action alleging that asphalt berm and raised “top-hat” drain constituted a dangerous condition of public property, even if county repeatedly used the drain design for 25 years, absent evidence that the drains were designed before they were built in the field, and absent evidence that county exercised its discretion to approve the drain system before the drains were installed.




TAX - CONNECTICUT

Longview Estates, LLC v. Woodin

Appellate Court of Connecticut - April 22, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1464321

Mobile park owner commenced summary process action against homeowners for alleged failure to pay rent for lot on which their mobile home was situated. Following entry of judgment of possession and order of execution in favor of park owner, park owner petitioned for finding of abandonment and for order of public sale. Town filed objection to petition based on park owner’s disclosure of defenses in town’s prior action to foreclose tax lien against homeowners and park owner. The Superior Court granted petition and, following sale, entered judgment of conveyance in favor of park owner, which extinguished town’s tax liens. Town appealed.

The Appellate Court held that park owner did not waive its statutory right to recover costs of selling abandoned mobile home by its disclaimer of any interest in home made in town’s prior action.

The Appellate Court held that mobile park owner did not waive statutory right to recover costs of selling abandoned mobile home by filing disclosure of defenses, stating that park owner had “no legal or equitable interest” in the home, in town’s later-withdrawn tax lien foreclosure action against homeowners and park owner.  Park owner did not have interest in mobile home at the time of disclosure, costs of sale were not a known right at the time of the disclosure, and expression of lack of interest was not binding on park owner’s summary process action.




EMPLOYMENT - DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

District of Columbia Metropolitan Police Dept. v. District of Columbia Office of Employee Appeals

District of Columbia Court of Appeals - April 10, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1386458

Police officer, who was convicted of driving while intoxicated (DWI), appealed his termination. The Office of Employee Appeals (OEA) upheld the termination, and appeal was taken. The OEA Board reversed and remanded. On remand, the OEA reduced officer’s termination to a thirty-day suspension, with ten days held in abeyance, and police department appealed. The Superior Court affirmed and police department appealed.

The Court of Appeals held that:

  • Unpaid suspension of police officer was an authorized interim administrative suspension authorized pursuant to the District of Columbia Comprehensive Merit Personnel Act (CMPA), and therefore, officer’s subsequent termination did not constitute double punishment, and
  • OEA erred by overturning termination of police officer, which was consistent with the range of penalties permitted for such conduct, without assessing police department’s analysis.

 




PUBLIC RECORDS - FLORIDA

Barfield v. School Bd. of Manatee County

District Court of Appeal of Florida, Second District - April 11, 2014 - So.3d - 2014 WL 1396592

Michael Barfield appealed the trial court’s order denying declaratory relief and access to public records, raising two issues.  First, he argued that the trial court erred in concluding that several requested items contained in a School Board litigation report were exempt under section 119.071(1)(d), Florida Statutes (2012) concerning attorney work-product.  Second, Barfield argued that the School Board policy of suspending an administrative investigation while a corresponding criminal investigation is pending does not preempt the statutory presumption that an administrative investigation is presumed inactive after sixty days.

As to the first issue, the District Court reversed because the School Board failed to prove its burden of entitlement to the exemption under 119.071(1)(d) due to the fact that the cases in question had been closed prior to the request.   The court affirmed the second issue without further comment because the School Board offered uncontroverted evidence that it had a reasonable, good faith anticipation that an administrative finding would be made in the foreseeable future.




EMPLOYMENT - ILLINOIS

Houzenga v. City of Moline, Illinois

United States District Court, C.D. Illinois., Peoria Division - April 14, 2014 - Not Reported in F.Supp.2d - 2014 WL 1464408

Scott Houzenga began his employment with the Moline Fire Department on September 8, 1997. On May 17, 2004, Heather Oepping was hired as the first female firefighter on the Department. During his September 2008 annual evaluation, Houzenga commented that he felt he was subject to a hostile work environment from Oepping because he had given her poor evaluations of her work.

On June 12, 2012, Houzenga filed a Complaint in the Circuit Court for Rock Island County, Illinois alleging claims of: (1) discrimination on the basis of gender; (2) retaliation; and (3) intentional infliction of emotional distress.

Under the indirect or burden-shifting method, the plaintiff must first make a prima facie showing that: (1) he was a member of a protected class; (2) he was meeting legitimate employment expectations; (3) he suffered an adverse employment action; and (4) similarly situated employees outside the protected class were treated more favorably than he was.  Additionally, in a reverse discrimination case such as this, the plaintiff must show background circumstances suggesting that the employer has a reason or inclination to discriminate against men.

The court noted that Houzenga was going to have just a little trouble showing that similarly situated employees outside the protected class were treated more favorably than he was due to the fact that the “outside the protected class” group consisted of just one single woman.

As to Houzenga’s Intentional Infliction of Emotional Distress claim, the court stated that, “it is well-settled that indignities, threats, annoyances, petty oppressions, and other trivialities fail to qualify as outrageous conduct actionable in an IIED claim.”  Good to know, as the BCB workplace subsists solely on a diet of “indignities, threats, annoyances, petty oppressions, and other trivialities.”



CONTRACTS - LOUISIANA

Akers v. Bernhard Mechanical Contractors, Inc.

Court of Appeal of Louisiana, Second Circuit - April 16, 2014 - So.3d - 48, 871 (La.App. 2 Cir. 4/16/14)

This breach of contract claim arose from a public works project to renovate the Shreveport Fire Maintenance Facility. The dispute stemmed from a subcontract to provide the vehicle exhaust system for removing CO gas from the building while fire trucks are being serviced.

The City of Shreveport awarded the general contract to A & R General Contractors. Bernhard Mechanical Contractors won the mechanical subcontract on the job.  Bernhard awarded the exhaust system subcontract to David Akers.

The city rejected Akers’s submittal for “no prior approval.”  Ultimately, the city installed a different exhaust system.  It used a small portion of Akers’ equipment, authorizing Bernhard to pay Akers $3,861 for it.

Akers filed this suit against Bernhard, A & R and the City of Shreveport. He demanded the full bid amount, 18% interest, and attorney fees under the Public Works Act, La. R.S. 38:2246.

In response, Bernhard filed a third party demand against the city, citing a Department of Revenue certificate issued by the city to Bernhard, granting sales tax exemption for the project. The third party demand asserted, “To the extent that Bernhard is found to be the agent for the City of Shreveport with regard to the materials and/or equipment furnished by [Akers] then the City of Shreveport would be obligated to pay any and all amounts awarded to [Akers].”

The court ruled in favor of Akers against Bernhard, awarding him $40,773.00, subject to a credit of $3,861.00, with 18% contractual APR.

The court also granted judgment on the third party demand in favor of Bernhard and against the City of Shreveport, for $40,773.00, subject to a credit of $3,861.00, with 18% contractual APR.  This award was based upon the court’s finding that the city had in fact approved Akers’ submittal, followed by an abortive attempt to retract that approval.

The court rejected the argument that the tax exemption certificate made the city and Bernhard equally or jointly responsible for a breach of contract.  The exemption applies to sales and use taxes for the purchase of component construction materials, taxable services and leases and rentals of tangible personal property for the project. It does not make Bernhard the city’s agent for all purposes.




CORRECTIONS - NEW JERSEY

Thomas v. Cumberland County

United States Court of Appeals, Third Circuit - April 11, 2014 - F.3d - 2014 WL 1395666

 Following attack by other inmates at county correctional facility, inmate brought action against county and corrections officers at facility pursuant to § 1983 and the New Jersey Civil Rights Act, alleging failure to train, failure to protect, failure to intervene, and incitement. The District Court granted summary judgment in favor of county and officer. Inmate’s claims against other officer proceeded to trial, and jury found in favor of officer. Inmate appealed only District Court’s grant of summary judgment in county’s favor on § 1983 failure to train claim.

The Court of Appeals held that triable issue remained as to whether county exhibited deliberate indifference to the need for pre-service training for officers in conflict de-escalation and intervention and whether the lack of such training caused inmate’s injuries, precluding summary judgment on inmate’s § 1983 failure to train claim against county.




ZONING - NEW YORK

Albany Basketball & Sports Corp. v. City of Albany

Supreme Court, Appellate Division, Third Department, New York - April 3, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 02370

 Proprietor of auditorium petitioned for Article 78 review of a decision of a city’s board of zoning appeals (BZA), which found that current use of premises was not permitted use under city code. The Supreme Court, Albany County, dismissed proprietor’s application. Proprietor appealed.

The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, held that term “auditorium” did not require fixed seating.

Although a reviewing court will generally grant deference to the interpretation of an ambiguous zoning ordinance by a municipal BZA, where the issue presented is one of pure legal interpretation of the underlying zoning law or ordinance, deference is not required.

Local zoning regulations, being in derogation of the common law, must be strictly construed against the municipality which has enacted and seeks to enforce them, and any ambiguity in the language used must be resolved in favor of the property owner.

Resolving ambiguities in city’s zoning ordinances in favor of auditorium proprietor, term “auditorium” was not limited to area of concert hall, theater, school, or other structure in which audience sat, but instead included building for public gatherings or meetings or large room or building where people gather to watch performances, hear speeches, or other similar activities.  Thus, city’s BZA unreasonably interpreted that term as requiring fixed seating, and on those grounds finding that using premises for “rave” party, nightclub, dance club, or other similar events did not constitute permitted use under ordinance applicable to commercial office zoning district in which auditorium was located.




EMPLOYMENT - NORTH CAROLINA

Blakeley v. Town of Taylortown

Court of Appeals of North Carolina - April 15, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1457794

Terminated Police Chief, Timothy Blakeley, brought wrongful termination action against the Town of Taylortown.

The jury was asked to answer four issues: (1) Was the plaintiff’s refusal to participate in conduct which violated public policy a substantial factor in the defendant’s decision to terminate him?; (2) Would defendant have terminated plaintiff if he had not refused to participate in that conduct?; (3) What amount of damages is plaintiff entitled to recover?; and (4) By what amount should the plaintiff’s actual damages be reduced?  The jury returned a verdict and answered the issues as: yes, no, $291,000, and $191,000, respectively.

The appeals court granted the town’s motion to amend the verdict based on the jury’s failure to properly offset the amount of damages by the amount of money plaintiff earned in other jobs and in unemployment benefits, remanding for the trial court to reduce the judgment by $5,886.97.

 




INVERSE CONDEMNATION - NORTH CAROLINA

Beroth Oil Co. v. North Carolina Dept. of Transp.

Supreme Court of North Carolina - April 11, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1477931

Landowners brought action against North Carolina Department of Transportation (NCDOT), alleging inverse condemnation and seeking declaratory relief after NCDOT identified transportation corridors for the construction of a highway project known as the Northern Beltway.  The Superior Court denied landowners’ motion for class certification. Landowners appealed. The Court of Appeals affirmed. Landowners petitioned for discretionary review.

The Supreme Court of North Carolina  held that:

  • As a matter of first impression, findings of fact in a class-certification order are binding on appeal if supported by competent evidence;
  • As a matter of first impression, conclusions of law in a class-certification order are reviewed de novo;
  • Unique nature of parcels of land combined with diversity of proposed class precluded trial court from analyzing merits of claims when determining issue of class certification; and
  • Individual issues predominated over common issues, and thus certification of class was unwarranted.

Unique nature of parcels of land combined with diversity of proposed class precluded trial court from analyzing merits of landowners’ inverse-condemnation claims against NCDOT when determining issue of class certification.

Individual issues predominated over common issues regarding landowners’ inverse-condemnation claims against NCDOT, and thus certification of class was unwarranted.  Proposed class included over 800 landowners, not all of the landowners had same property interests and expectations, and each individual parcel was uniquely affected by NCDOT’s actions.

 




LAND USE - PENNSYLVANIA

ION Geophysical Corp. v. Hempfield Tp.

United States District Court, W.D. Pennsylvania - April 10, 2014 - Slip Copy - 2014 WL 1405397

ION Geophysical Corporation brought a Declaratory Judgment action against Hempfield Township, seeking permission to conduct seismic testing in Hempfield Township and prohibiting the Township from interfering with ION’s operations in conducting seismic testing in connection with natural gas exploration and extraction.

The basic issue was whether a township can prohibit seismic testing on a township road.

The District Court granted ION’s motion for a preliminary injunction, concluding that ION had shown a reasonable probability that it would succeed on the merits on its claim that the Township’s conduct violates ION’s substantive and procedural due process rights and ION’s equal protection rights under the United States Constitution.

“Had the Township entered into a Seismic Agreement with ION, such an action would be an implicit approval of seismic testing on Township roads. Any agreement entered into would then be the result of a reasoned and informed negotiation in which both sides’ interests were taken into account and addressed. Similarly, if the Township had passed an ordinance with regard to seismic testing, then the ordinance could not be vague, arbitrary, or unreasonable. Moreover, any ordinance purporting to regulate seismic testing would have to be in compliance with the preemption provision of Pennsylvania’s oil and gas law as set forth in Title 58 of the Pennsylvania Consolidated Statutes.”

“We agree with ION that the Township’s ban on seismic testing on its roads is an attempt to regulate seismic testing by omission, in the absence of any ordinance regulating seismic testing. By refusing to pass a relevant ordinance or otherwise engage with ION, the Township’s conduct is unreasonable and arbitrary and deprives ION of any avenue to seek accommodation or review of the Township’s ‘regulation by inaction.'”

 




BONDS - TEXAS

National Public Finance Guarantee Corp. v. Harris County-Houston Sports Authority

Court of Appeals of Texas, Houston (1st Dist.) - April 15, 2014 - S.W.3d - 2014 WL 1464654

In 1997, Harris County and the City of Houston created the Sports Authority pursuant to Chapter 335 of the Local Government Code. Since its creation, the Sports Authority has issued several series of bonds pursuant to a written Indenture of Trust to finance the construction of sports venues in Harris County.

This dispute primarily concerned the Series 2001 bonds that were used to fund the construction of Reliant Stadium. The Convention Corporation is a local government entity created to serve as the landlord of Reliant Stadium.

On several occasions since the issuance of the bonds, the revenues raised by the Sports Authority were insufficient to make the minimum principal and interest payments due on the bonds. To cover these shortfalls, the Sports Authority made claims on the financial guaranty insurance policies issued by National Public Finance Guarantee Corporation and MBIA Insurance Corporation (collectively, “National”) as provided for in the Reimbursement Agreements.

National contended that these claims impermissibly reduced the reserve fund provided for in the Indenture that is intended to secure the bond obligations. It also argued that, because the Sports Authority was authorized by statute to impose an admission tax up to 10% of ticket price and parking tax up to $3 per vehicle, the Sports Authority was required by the Indenture to raise admission and parking taxes at Reliant Stadium to legislative maximums in order to cover the shortfalls.  The Sports Authority refused to raise these taxes on the grounds that the Funding Agreement capped these taxes at $2 per ticket and $1 per car, that any additional revenue raised by these measures was required to be rebated to the Texans and the Rodeo under the terms of the Leases and the Funding Agreement and would therefore never be available to service bond obligations, and that it was not authorized to raise these taxes without voter approval.

On January 2013, National sued the Sports Authority, claiming that it had breached the Indenture by refusing to impose admissions and parking taxes at the legislative maximum. National also asserted other breaches by the Sports Authority and a claim for reimbursement. In addition, National requested a declaratory judgment against the Sports Authority, the Convention Corporation, the Texans, and the Rodeo, that the Indenture requires the Sports Authority to impose admissions taxes and parking taxes up to their legislative maximum, and that the provisions of the Leases and the Funding Agreement should be modified and interpreted to permit the incremental revenue generated by these increases to be paid to National.

The Authority and the Convention Corporation filed pleas to the jurisdiction, asserting that they were governmental entities and, accordingly, immune from suit. In response, National asserted that both the Sports Authority and the Convention Corporation had waived their immunity to suit by entering into the agreements related to the bond issuance.  The trial court granted the plea.

National contended that the trial court erred in granting the Sports Authority’s plea to the jurisdiction because (1) the 2007 Act amending Government Code chapter 1371 waived the Sports Authority’s immunity by ratifying the waiver of immunity in the Funding Agreement that was incorporated into the other deal documents, (2) Texas Local Government Code section 271.152 waived the Sports Authority’s immunity because all of the agreements that the Sports Authority entered into related to the bonds were contracts for services, and (3) the Sports Authority was not entitled to immunity because it issued the bonds in its proprietary, rather than governmental, capacity. In its fourth issue, National contended that the trial court erred in granting the Convention Corporation’s plea because Texas Local Government Code section 271.152 operates to waive the Convention Corporation’s immunity in this case.

The Court of Appeals reversed the trial court’s grant of the Sports Authority’s plea, holding that the 2007 Act amending Chapter 1371 of the Government Code waived the Sport Authority’s immunity.

The Court of Appeals affirmed the trial court’s grant of the Convention Corporation’s plea, holding that Texas Local Government Code section 271.152  did not waive the Convention Corporation’s immunity because a section 271.152 waiver covers only breach of contract claims and National had asserted no breach of contract claims against the Convention Corporation.

 

 

 




ZONING - VIRGINIA

Lamar Co., LLC v. City of Richmond

Supreme Court of Virginia - April 17, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1499592

City brought enforcement action against property owner and property lessee seeking lowering of lessees’s billboard located on property to a conforming height. Property owner and lessee sought declaratory judgment and city filed demurrers. The Circuit Court sustained the demurrers. Property owner and lessee appealed.

The Supreme Court of Virginia held that zoning statute prohibiting local governments from removing nonconforming uses on property for which taxes had been paid for at least 15 years, based solely on a property’s nonconforming status, was a restrictive statute limiting municipal power rather than a permissive enabling statute.




ZONING - VIRGINIA

Lamar Co., LLC v. City of Richmond

Supreme Court of Virginia - April 17, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1499584

Property owner and property lessee sought variance to allow lessee’s billboard on property to remain at its existing height.  The Circuit Court upheld the zoning board’s denial of the variance. The lessee appealed.

The Supreme Court of Virginia held that the proper standard of review for denial of a variance is whether the board’s decision was contrary to law or an abuse of discretion, rather than whether the decision was fairly debatable.

The “fairly debatable” standard is the standard of review that a court applies when a governing body acts in a legislative capacity, such as when it adopts a zoning ordinance or grants a special use permit; it is not the proper standard of review to apply when considering a board of zoning appeals’ decision to deny a request for a variance.




BONDS - VIRGINIA

U.S. ex. rel. Prince v. Virginia Resources Authority

United States District Court, W.D. Virginia, Harrisonburg Division - April 15, 2014 - Slip Copy - 2014 WL 1463786

Although short on details, this case appears to be the final phase of a long-running crusade by Mr. Prince to challenge the funding of public projects by or behalf of Shenandoah County.

After filing, and losing, four state court suits against the Virginia Resources Authority (VRA) challenging the legality of certain bonds issued under the Build America Bonds (BAB) program, Prince brought this action in federal court alleging that VRA and others violated the False Claims Act (FCA) by knowingly presenting, or causing to be presented, a false or fraudulent claim for payment or approval related to federal subsidies and tax exempt status for certain bonds through the BAB program.  Prince asserted that the bonds were issued in violation of Article VII of the Virginia Constitution and that the defendants falsely claimed that the bonds were legally issued in the course of participating in the BAB program.

The District Court held that the Rooker-Feldman doctrine was inapplicable to this case, but that the matter was governed by Virginia preclusion law. Because the critical legal issue—the legality of the bonds issued by VRA and others—had already been decided in previous litigation between Prince and VRA, Prince’s claims were barred by issue preclusion, also known as collateral estoppel.

Prince had named four other defendants: the Shenandoah County Board of Supervisors, U.S. Bank National Association, Suntrust Bank, and SunTrust Equipment Finance & Leasing Corporation. None of these defendants, however, had been served.

The court took the unusual step of stopping any further actions in its tracks.  “Finally, nothing but dismissal with prejudice will prevent the harm posed by re-litigating of legal issues that have already been decided. In light of the foregoing, the court finds that it is appropriate to invoke its inherent authority to dismiss with prejudice for lack of prosecution.”

“In sum, Prince has had ample opportunity to litigate the legal issues underlying this case. His attempt to litigate against VRA yet again in this federal forum is barred by issue preclusion. Likewise, the court will not allow Prince yet another bit at the apple by finally serving the remaining defendants, or by filing a new a suit against them making the same claims. Prince cannot use a tactic of delayed service as a means for further re-litigation. The court will accordingly dismiss VRA as a defendant and dismiss the remainder of the case with prejudice for failure to prosecute.”




Orrick: Update on Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative.

On March 10, 2014, the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) announced that issuers and underwriters of municipal securities may voluntarily report materially inaccurate statements made in offering documents regarding prior continuing disclosure compliance through a program called the Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative (the “MCDC Initiative”).

Orrick and BLX Group have issued a client alert with key information.

Posted on 

by  and 




Portland Will Drain 38 Million-Gallon Reservoir After Teen Urinates in It.

Portland administrators will flush 38 million gallons of water from Mt. Tabor Reservoir 5 after a 19-year-old man urinated in the city’s drinking supply.

“Even though there is very minimal public health risk, the bottom line is that our commitment is to serve water that’s clean, cold and constant,” said Water Bureau administrator David Shaff. “That doesn’t include pee. Not from people, at least.”

Surveillance video of man urinating in Mt. Tabor Reservoir in SE Portland Around 1 a.m. Wednesday, April 15, 2014, the security officer who monitors video cameras at Mt. Tabor Reservoir complex in SE Portland spotted a man leaning against the iron fence at Reservoir 5, and, after a moment or two, hitching up his pants and pulling away from the bars.

Around 1 a.m. Wednesday, the security officer who monitors video cameras at the reservoir complex spotted five people with skateboards “hanging out near the gatehouse,” Shaff said.

Three of the men headed toward Reservoir 5, the kidney-shaped landmark on the western flank of Mt. Tabor.

The camera caught one man as he stopped, leaned against the iron fence and, after a moment or two, hitched up his pants and pulled away from the bars, Shaff said.

“When you see the video, he’s leaning right up because he has to get his little wee wee right up to the iron bars. There’s really no doubt what he’s doing,” Shaff said.

“It’s stupid. You can see the sign that says: ‘This is your drinking water. Don’t spit, throw, toss anything in it.’ He’s four feet away from that sign. Unless he’s from North Dakota and just moved here, he’s got to know that’s our drinking water.”

The video also shows two men trying to climb the fence. One made it and may have stepped in the water — “If so, he discovered that it’s really, uncomfortably cold,” Shaff said. Then the men spent some time taking cell phone pictures of themselves.

While the group was documenting its visit to the reservoir, a Water Bureau security officer and Portland Police officers headed in their direction. Police stopped a car on Southeast 69th Avenue near the east entrance to the park and cited three men on accusations of trespassing; one was also given a citation accusing him of public urination. Police have not released the names of those cited and have not decided whether to charge anyone with additional crimes.

The Water Bureau used to keep security guards on duty at the Mt. Tabor and Washington Park reservoirs around the clock. But those posts were cut several years ago in an attempt to limit rate increases.

Now the bureau has guards patrol all Water Bureau property, including the reservoirs, and officers who monitor reservoir security cameras from the city’s Emergency Operations Center in east Portland. Shaff said he does not believe having a security guard posted at Mt. Tabor would have sped the response Wednesday morning.

Water Bureau officials turned off the pipes that carry water to and from Reservoir 5 immediately. They expect test results on the water to come back Thursday, and to show no contamination or health risk. Still, crews will flush the reservoir — and give it a second spring cleaning on top of the one it received about a month ago — over the next four to six days just to be safe and to reassure consumers.

Strange things end up in Portland’s water supply all the time, with minimal risk or impact to users. And this is not the first time human beings have attempted to interfere with the stuff that comes out of Stumptown taps: In 2008, a man and a woman caught skinny dipping in Mt. Tabor were sentenced to 16 hours of community service each.

Three years ago, the city flushed 8 million gallons of water after a 21-year-old Molalla man peed in Mt. Tabor Reservoir 1.

City officials estimated that flushing the water and cleaning up after that episode cost $35,000. Shaff said he wasn’t sure what this effort will cost. The current shutdown at Mt. Tabor won’t impact Portland water users, he said.

“Right now we’ve got 100-plus million gallons of day free flowing down the river because the Bull Run reservoirs are as full as they can be,” he said. “I’ve got tons of water available that doesn’t have human pee in it, so I’m going to replace this.”

The federal government has ordered Portland and other cities with open-air reservoirs to cover them. City leaders are waiting on results of a May ballot measure that could shift control of the Water Bureau from the City Council to a new independently elected board to decide how to proceed.

BY  | APRIL 18, 2014

(c)2014 The Oregonian




Keystone Pipeline's Fate Now in Hands of Nebraska Supreme Court.

The focus of the Keystone XL debate has shifted from a fierce lobbying war in Washington to Lincoln, Nebraska, where the state Supreme Court has been asked to weigh a legal challenge to the pipeline.

The U.S. State Department, which is responsible for reviewing whether the project is in the nation’s interest, said April 18 that it would delay making a recommendation until questions about the way the route was approved through the prairie state are resolved. That could spare President Barack Obama from having to decide on a project that splits supporters of his in the environmental and labor movements before an important congressional election in November.

“Once again, the administration is making a political calculation instead of doing what is right for the country,” Terry O’Sullivan, general president of the Laborers’ International Union of North America, said in an e-mail. “It’s clear the administration needs to grow a set of antlers, or perhaps take a lesson from Popeye and eat some spinach.”

If the seven-member state Supreme Court upholds a lower court decision, TransCanada Corp. (TRP), the Calgary-based company that wants to build Keystone, will need to apply to the Nebraska Public Service Commission. The commission by law has seven months for its pipeline reviews.

The State Department said the possibility of a new route coming out of that process justified hitting the pause button. The announcement drew a strong reaction from all sides — including pledges from congressional leaders to force a decision sooner by legislation.

View Full Story from Bloomberg

APRIL 21, 2014




Bankrupt California City Fighting for Right to Withhold Pension Payments.

When this bankrupt, working-class city took the unprecedented step in 2012 of stopping its required pension contributions — arguing that it could not otherwise make payroll — other financially stressed California cities took notice: Could San Bernardino defy Calpers, the powerful agency that administers the state’s huge pension system?

The resistance ended last year when the city resumed its payments. But now, with a mayor who swept into office last month promising to deal once and for all with skyrocketing pension costs, San Bernardino is in another fight with Calpers that could embolden other municipalities seeking relief from crippling payments to the nation’s largest public pension system.

“We are under the microscope, no question about it,” said Carey Davis, 61, the mayor. “San Bernardino took a different approach in bankruptcy as related to pensions, and everybody is waiting to see how it comes out.”

At issue is the $17 million in back payments and penalties that San Bernardino failed to make between declaring bankruptcy in August 2012 and resuming payments in July. Calpers has maintained that it is owed in full. But now in bankruptcy negotiations, the city is hoping to pay only a fraction of that, arguing that the city’s creditors must all share in the bankruptcy pain. The amount may be small, given the system’s assets, but if San Bernardino gets a reduction, the precedent could be huge, opening the door to other struggling municipalities using bankruptcy law to justify delaying or withholding payments to the pension system.

“This city has taken on the 800-pound gorilla, which is Calpers,” said Ron Oliner, a lawyer for the San Bernardino Police Officers Association, which represents the city’s uniformed officers. “Everyone in California is watching San Bernardino, and everybody in the nation is watching California.”

Calpers has for many years resisted all efforts to allow cities, for whatever reason, to stop making their required payments. (Federal law allows bankrupt companies to slow them greatly.) While agreeing that “significant progress has been made in the mediation,” Rosanna Westmoreland, external communications manager for Calpers, said the pension system’s hands were largely tied by statutes mandating that all the pension system’s participants make their full contributions on time and that no workers’ benefits be reduced. “It is the law,” she said.

The problem is that it remains unclear whether, in cases like this, federal bankruptcy law trumps state pension laws. A federal judge hearing the Detroit bankruptcy case ruled, for instance, that federal laws took precedence in that case, so the benefits of city workers in Detroit could be reduced in defiance of state law. But Calpers has insisted that this does not apply to the situation in California, an assertion that may be tested in court, if the mediation provides no solution.

“With Vallejo and Stockton and other cities, everybody is looking at pensions and those obligations,” said Rikke Van Johnson, who, with 10 years in office, is one of the few remaining veterans on the City Council. “We’re all in the same boat. Some of us are just in a little deeper.”

Even before a recent wave of municipal bankruptcies hit California, the California Public Employees’ Retirement System, known as Calpers, had also insisted that under state law, no local government or public agency could reduce the benefits of current workers or retirees.

View Full Story from The New York Times

APRIL 21, 2014




Report of the City of Lincoln Park Financial Review Team.

A state review team has declared a financial emergency in the city of Lincoln Park and sent a report to Gov. Rick Snyder for his review. According to the report, Lincoln Park officials committed a number of big public finance no-nos, including, borrowing $2.5 million from its Water and Sewer Fund to make an annual pension payment and defaulting on a loan from SunTrust Bank.

Read the report.




S&P: U.S. State And Local Government Credit Conditions Forecast.

 

Many state and local governments have taken advantage of the recovering economy in recent years to shore up their finances. As Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services has incorporated the improving financial positions across the sector into its analyses, an upward trajectory in rating trends has resulted. In our view, however, there is an emerging question about where things go from here, especially among the states.

The slow motion economic recovery that began in 2009 has produced only gradual tax revenue growth for most state and local governments. Governmental credit quality has improved in this environment, but only because of sustained vigilance when it comes to budget management.

After five or six years of restraint, however, we perceive that “austerity fatigue” has begun to set in for some states. But relaxing budgetary restraint now — either by raising spending or cutting taxes — could converge with a revenue plateau. Such actions could prove ill-timed from a credit perspective if revenues were to decline in response to a correction in the equity markets, for example.

At the local government level, budget development tends to be less politicized than it is for states. When combined with their greater reliance on property tax revenues, local governments may be better positioned from a budgetary perspective at this stage. And recently released U.S. Census Bureau data confirm that the housing recovery is now materializing in the property tax collections, most of which flow to local governments. But the housing recovery, this time fueled in part by investor-buyers, has generated less accompanying economic activity than in most previous periods of home-price appreciation. (Watch the related CreditMatters TV segment titled, “What’s Behind Standard & Poor’s U.S. State And Local Government Credit Conditions Forecast,” dated April 14, 2014.)

Forecast Summary: Fundamentals Point To Ongoing Expansion

Our forecast that real GDP will increase 2.8% in 2014 is up a bit from December’s forecast (2.6%). The increase might have been somewhat higher, but the cold winter shaved around 0.2% off of our annualized GDP growth expectation. Regardless, the slight uptick, while favorable, is largely inconsequential to state and local government credit conditions, in our view. More important is the suspension of the federal debt limit and the Murray-Ryan budget agreement, which have helped keep the risk of recession low, at 10% to 15% during the next 12 months, according to our forecast.

Table 1  |  Download Table

2014-2015 Industry Economic Outlook For U.S. State And Local Governments
Forecast* / Scenarios Actual
Comment Downside (10%-15%) Baseline (65%-75%) Upside (15%-20%)
2014 2015 2014 2015 2014 2015 2013
Macroeconomic indicators
Real GDP (% change) Baseline growth in 2014 might be 3.0% but for cold winter weather and expiration of extended unemployment benefits. 0.58 1.84 2.75 3.17 4.13 4.01 1.86
Federal government purchases Reduced federal fiscal policy drag contributes to higher overall growth rate. (3.00) 0.10 (1.50) (0.10) 0.90 (0.60) (5.20)
Unemployment rate (%) Payroll growth, averaging 183,000 per month during the past 12 months has helped bring down the unemployment rate. Slight February uptick was due to labor market re-entrants. 7.59 7.68 6.37 5.80 6.05 5.00 7.35
Real consumer spending (% change) Retail activity took a hit during cold winter months, but recent indicators point to stronger trends into the summer. Rate of growth may be linked to sustainability of housing recovery. 1.30 1.25 2.70 3.05 3.34 4.01 1.95
Housing starts (mil) Price appreciation of 13.5% in 2013 and 22% since trough in January 2012 could begin to price out new buyers. Cash transactions–at 35% of existing home sales–could taper as bargains become less available. 0.82 1.08 1.12 1.48 1.40 1.68 0.93
Core CPI Very low–below Fed target; minimal formulaic cost driver implications 0.80 1.84 1.81 2.08 2.13 1.61 1.76
S&P 500 Common Stock Index Bull market has surpassed five-year mark. The index is hovering near record high valuation levels since December, about when makets began exibiting greater price volatility. 1,589 1,659 1,870 1,960 1,988 2,102 1,643
*Baseline forecast is based on “U.S. Economic Forecast: Springing Into A Warmer Economy,” March 24, 2014. Upside/downside forecast is based on “Two Economies Diverged In A Wood,” Dec. 5, 2013.

Economic fundamentals continue to strengthen in our forecast and support our generally positive macro outlook. The underlying economic drivers we focus on for state and local governments should also continue in a favorable direction, albeit at a tempered pace, according to our forecast. We expect the unemployment rate, a key indicator, to continue its downward drift. As of March, the unemployment rate was 6.7%, and we forecast that it will fall to 6.4% for the annualized rate in 2014 from 7.4% in 2013. Assuming no changes in the labor participation rate (63.2%), the economy would need to create about 111,000 payroll jobs per month to keep up with population growth without a rise in the unemployment rate. For the 12 months through March, the economy added 183,000 payroll jobs per month, thus explaining the nearly full percentage point decline from March 2013, when the jobless rate was 7.5%. Most of the overall net payroll job gains have been from private sector hiring. After averaging a decline of 47,000 payroll jobs per month for the 48 months through 2012, the private sector added 194,000 per month for the 15 months through March 2014. Both measurements are a bit weaker when we look at total payroll jobs, including government workers.

Although overall sales tax trends for state and local governments have been growing at a slower pace throughout the economic expansion compared with prior growth periods, they will likely accelerate somewhat through the second quarter. Retail spending took a hit during the cold winter months, but there are nascent signs of resurgence with the arrival of spring. Retail sales edged up 0.3% in February, with core retail sales, which exclude auto, gasoline, and building materials sales, also up by 0.3%. We like to keep an eye on this measure because it guides the real consumption component of GDP.

We have dialed back slightly our forecast of housing starts in 2014, to 1.12 million from 1.14 million in December. While the change is modest, we track this closely because each start can translate to two to three jobs, not all in the construction sector. Additional supply would benefit a housing market that is already short on inventory. A relative dearth of supply has pushed up prices which, when coupled with higher interest rates, have begun to make first-time home buying a less-realistic proposition for many new entrants to the market.

Inflation remains well-contained, if not too low for the Federal Reserve. And although the unemployment rate edged up to 6.7% in February, it was mostly because more people entered the labor force, signaling greater optimism among those without jobs. On the other hand, if we exclude those that have been unemployed for more than 27 weeks (considered long-term, reflecting some structural economic factors), then the unemployment rate is closer to what the Fed considers full employment at 4.3%. Given this, we expect the Fed to continue tapering its bond purchase program. In March, the central bank shaved another $10 billion off its buying, bringing monthly bond purchases down to $55 billion. Those purchases will likely end in October, and we don’t expect the Fed to raise rates until sometime in second-quarter 2015 — as long as the economy continues to strengthen.

Why Hasn’t The Recovery Brought A Stronger Revenue Bounce For Local Governments?

Census Bureau data show that total general sales and gross receipts taxes tend to rebound following the end of recessions as pent up demand is released. For example, by 2003 and 2004, two and three years, respectively, after the 2001 recession had ended, sales taxes nationally began to bounce back, increasing 4.5% and 8.6%. But recovery from the Great Recession has been much more subdued. Collections increased just 3.6% each in 2011 and 2012, the second and third years after the end of this recession.

Previously we have stated our view that consumers were focused on repairing their household balance sheets, which depressed retail spending. But now, with equity market and home prices having strengthened, sales taxes still haven’t followed the historical pattern. Why not? In our view, it’s partly explained by the nature of the housing recovery currently underway. Research by economists Atif Mian (Princeton University) and Amir Sufi (University of Chicago) highlights how the recent phase of home price appreciation differs from that of the mid-2000s. A higher portion of home purchases have been for cash suggesting that much of the buying has been by investors as opposed to owner-occupiers. Therefore, despite the recovering home prices, the greater-than-usual participation by investors has muted somewhat the economic multiplier that typically accompanies a housing recovery resulting in softer sales tax trends (see chart). However, this might be changing. Nevada has reported that traditional sales accounted for 70% of home purchases in February, up from 51% in the prior year. What we don’t know is whether this is because owner-occupiers are entering the market or if investor-buyers are exiting.

With still-slow wage growth and higher mortgage rates, the price increases might be bumping up against what home buyers can afford. We are more guarded in our view about some housing markets than others. According to the S&P/Case-Shiller Home Price 20-City Composite Index, after falling 34% from April 2006 through January 2012, home prices have since rebounded by 23%. The recovery in some markets, such as in the Las Vegas metropolitan area, which fell 66% from peak-to-trough, has been more pronounced, up 44% from the bottom. But if much of this appreciation reflects investor activity, it’s not clear to us how much upside remains without it.

Download Chart Data

image

A Word Of Caution About An Otherwise Positive Forecast

Although the macroeconomic forecast is generally positive, we see some reason for caution when it’s applied to the state and local government sector. Most state and local government budget forecasts anticipate a continuation of the gradual economic expansion. This is similar to our view, but we recognize that in June, the current expansion will have reached its five-year mark. And the reality is, since the late 1950s, the U.S. economy has retrenched into recession once every 6.6 years, on average.

Likewise, a bull market in equities has already surpassed the five-year point. Equity market performance in particular has become an important determinant of state revenue trends because many states tax capital gains as regular income. While the price gains to-date have been a crucial bright spot for state budgets in an otherwise lackluster economic recovery, we see some downside risk. For one, considering that valuations have hovered around record levels since December, we can’t rule out the possibility of an equity market correction. In addition, we are aware that the Federal Reserve’s accommodative monetary policy stance has been supportive of asset values throughout and subsequent to the Great Recession. To the extent that the Fed’s withdrawal of monetary stimulus — real or perceived — triggers a sell-off in the equity markets, it could weaken states’ revenue outlooks.

State And Local Government Employment Trends Diverge

As service providers, state and local governments spend a sizable share of their budgets on personnel costs. In fiscal 2011, Census Bureau data show that 37% of spending on current operations went to wages and salaries. By accounting for such a prominent portion of governments’ spending, staffing reductions became a central component to state and local government cost-containment strategies. Outright workforce reductions as a way to lower personnel costs also faced fewer legal hurdles than did reducing current or deferred compensation and benefits.

Payroll positions in the state and local sector peaked in August 2008. But beginning in September 2008 and through January 2013, state and local governments would go on to slash 744,000 positions, or 3.8% of total employment in the sector. Although state and local government employment may have troughed early in 2013, restoration has been slow and uneven. To the extent job gains have occurred, they have been among the states, as opposed to local governments. In the 58 months from September 2008 through June 2013, states cut their workforces by 3,100 per month and 189,000 in total. But since the start of fiscal 2014 (in July 2013), they have reversed course, adding an average of 3,400 payroll jobs per month through March. Just since July, therefore, the states have replaced 21% of the positions they had previously eliminated.

In contrast, local governments have been more reticent. In the 59 months from August 2008 through June 2013, local governments cut 9,500 jobs per month. Since June 2013, they have restored only 3.7% (2,300 per month) of the positions they had previously cut. Slower job growth at the local level has macroeconomic implications since local governments account for 73% of total state and local government employment.

Second-Quarter Credit Conditions Favor Local Governments

Local governments can look to continue their trend of strengthening credit quality, in our view. Property tax receipts were up 3% in the fourth quarter of 2013 compared with the same period in 2012. When these are coupled with governments’ ongoing spending restraint, as demonstrated by local government employment figures, we anticipate improving balance sheets at the local level.

States begin the second quarter of 2014–which for most is the final quarter of the fiscal year–with the wind at their backs. But in our view, the states’ fiscal situations are not without risk heading into fiscal 2015. Strong income tax receipts in late 2012 and the first half of 2013 have slowed. And with equity markets hovering at near-record levels, we cannot rule out the possibility for a downside correction, which would likely undercut personal income tax collection trends.

The Regions

New England (Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island, Vermont)

We expect credit conditions in New England to remain stable as economic growth, albeit still modest, should continue to strengthen through 2015. In our view, a stabilizing credit factor is New England’s residential real estate market, which we forecast will remain relatively favorable. According to our forecast, housing starts in 2014 will stay positive, fueled by gains in both single-family and multifamily construction activity. Thus, communities should continue to benefit from higher building fees and other ancillary revenues relative to years past. In addition, recent data indicate that the region’s median home prices will remain positive into 2015, which bodes well for a continued recovery in local assessed values. Because the primary revenue sources for local governments in New England are property taxes, a stable real estate environment is important in assessing a municipality’s overall budgetary environment.

Our base-case forecast shows that New England’s economic growth will be 2.32% in 2014, down slightly from our December forecasts (2.38%). Rising home prices along with a strong stock market have restored confidence, which has translated to higher consumer spending and an uptick in construction activity compared with years past. We anticipate that federal spending will remain weak, although recent year-over-year cuts are beginning to moderate. Although the effects of sequestration and cuts to federal spending have hampered GDP growth in the past few quarters, the impact has varied from state to state. Looking ahead, while all states in the region are affected to some extent, we believe given the size of each state’s respective economy, Connecticut, with its heavy reliance on defense manufacturing, and New Hampshire and Maine, home to the Portsmouth Naval Shipyard, are the most vulnerable.

Massachusetts is the largest economy in New England, and we project that it will be the strongest, with GDP growth of 2.6% in 2014 and 3.0% in 2015. This is in contrast to Connecticut, the region’s second-largest economy, which we forecast growth to be among the lowest in the country at 1.9% in 2014 and 2.4% in 2015. Maine continues to be the weakest state in the region, with forecast growth of 1.60%, a slight improvement from our December forecast. Leisure and hospitality, a traditional strength in Maine, has seen some growth, along with construction and professional and business services; however, we believe Maine’s economy will continue to rely primarily on U.S. economic growth, as will regional growth to a certain extent, so it will continually lag behind its regional peers.

New England continues to have the weakest employment growth prospects nationally, mainly due to demographic factors and lower labor force growth rates. Our data suggest that growth in total nonfarm employment will increase 1.19% in 2014 and 1.52% in 2015. Nominally, the largest gains in total nonfarm employment will be in Massachusetts. Employment gains will be heavily concentrated in the health care; professional, scientific, and technical services; and administrative support sectors, which are the state’s most consistent drivers of economic growth. We expect the regional unemployment rate to decline only gradually, to 6.43% in 2014 from 7.0% in 2013.

Mid-Atlantic (New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania)

Growth in the Mid-Atlantic states is among the weakest in the nation. However, despite the chill of the polar vortex, the Mid-Atlantic states’ economic growth rates are gathering steam: Revised 2013 figures show annual growth of 1.97%, which is up from the 1.85% projected in December. For 2014, we project regional growth at a slightly slower, albeit improved, 1.91% pace (relative to the 1.83% projected in December), with momentum picking up in 2015, with 2.60% growth projected (as compared with 2.54% projected in December).

Regional employment growth substantially lags behind the rest of the nation and may have suffered during the long winter, with growth projections weakening to a stagnant 0.98% in 2013, and we expect it will slow further to 0.90% in 2014 before picking up some speed in 2015 at 1.48%. The professional and business services sector showed the most consistent employment growth momentum in 2013 across the three states. While the leisure and hospitality sector showed growth in New York and Pennsylvania, it actually shrunk in New Jersey, which may be due to the Superstorm Sandy hangover and some of the struggles that the Atlantic City casinos have experienced. Unsurprisingly, employment continues to shrink in the government sector, with further contraction forecast in 2014 before slight growth (0.09%) in 2015.

Housing starts continue to show momentum, with 20.4% growth in 2013 (though down from the 22.9% projected in December) and 14% projected for 2014 (also down–from 15%). New Jersey’s housing market continues to experience the most softness, with high mortgage delinquency rates (second only to Florida, according to IHS Global Insight) and a large pipeline of foreclosure activity. Personal income grew slightly to 1.04% in 2013 from the December projection of 0.8% and we expect it will gain momentum in 2014 and 2015, at 2.18% and 3.42%, respectively. Retail sales growth projections have also slowed to 1.41% in 2014 –as compared with the 2.02% projected in December — but we project improvement in 2015 at 2.19%.

Regional 2014 agendas include significant road and bridge investment: Pennsylvania passed a long-awaited transportation bill in November providing up to $2.3 billion per year for roads, bridges, and mass transit with funding from the phase-out of the wholesale franchise tax cap, likely leading to increases in retail prices at the pump. The Port Authority of New York and New Jersey has plans to invest in improvements for three bridges providing connections to New Jersey: The Goethals Bridge, the Outerbridge Crossing, and the Bayonne Bridge. New York’s $4 billion Tappan Zee bridge replacement is also underway.

South Atlantic (Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia)

Based on ongoing consolidation and sequestration, federal employment continues to show weakness. We forecast a 2% reduction in federal jobs in the region in 2014 and a similar level in 2015. Meanwhile, nonfarm employment continues to show positive gains; we have revised our forecast for growth to 1.85% from 1.75% in 2014. This growth rate is higher than in New England, Mid-Atlantic, and East South Central; it is also close to the West South Central’s growth rate, a region that has the highest nonfarm job growth. We have also revised the 2014 employment forecast in financial activities to 1.4% from December’s 0.39%. The service sector growth is somewhat offsetting the government job loss. Across the region, we have seen job creation in manufacturing, financial, education, and professional services.

Consistent with the national trend, we have revised South Atlantic region’s GDP growth by almost 0.2% to 2.8% in 2014. While taxable values have not returned to pre-recession levels, the region’s housing starts and home prices continue to rise. We project total private housing starts to rise 16% for 2014, with continuous improvement in 2015. Our forecast for existing median home prices remains similar to 2013’s, at 8% for 2014 and slower growth in 2015. Meanwhile, there’s been a slowdown in foreclosure activities across the region. However, foreclosure remains paramount in Florida, and rising mortgage rates could affect the pace of recovery. The overall housing improvements in the region have had a profound effect on consumer sentiment and spending expectations, as consumers appear to be more willing to spend and generally feel more optimistic about their finances. Forecast for retail sales remains positive at 2% growth for 2014, with projected improvements in 2015. Although the winter has kept consumers at home and deterred spending, many local governments have reported a slight increase in sales tax revenues when compared with the previous period two years ago.

The incremental improvement in taxable values has also provided local governments some revenue-raising flexibility, and fueled their capital needs. As wages were stagnant during the Great Recession, during labor negotiations now governments are being pressured to raise them, given the improved economy. The net result from rising capital and personnel expenditures and tax revenues has been positive so far to the credit quality of local governments.

East South Central Region (Alabama, Kentucky, Mississippi, Tennessee)

As stated in previous reports, the East South Central (ESC) region’s economic recovery will be slower compared with the nation on the whole. Although the region has recorded solid gains in the past few years, and we do expect a recovery, it will take more time than in other regions of the U.S. In our original projections, we anticipated much of the region’s economy would return to pre-recessionary levels by mid-2015, and even though recent trends indicate employment is somewhat tepid, we believe that this is temporary. Much of this slower recovery is due to lackluster employment opportunities in the government sector and the region’s dependence on the volatile manufacturing and trade industries. The good news is that the ESC region’s favorable tax laws, plentiful and affordable land, and large nonunionized labor force will continue to attract manufacturers; and this typically leads to jobs. What’s more, several auto manufacturers in the region are continuing to beef-up facilities, providing additional prospects for employment. Housing starts remain at low levels, but affordable land and relatively affordable housing will position the region for resurgence in home construction. In fact, we expect housing starts to increase by as much as 39% by the second quarter of 2015.

Tennessee and Kentucky have historically carried much of weight in the region’s overall economic recovery. And although this is still the case, they have experienced job losses in recent months. In Kentucky, year-over-year comparisons indicate that the state’s employment trends have been fluctuating and the most recent figures indicate that manufacturing and trade jobs have declined. This is particularly puzzling, because in the past few years, the state has had solid growth in these sectors. So why the drop-off now? Probably much of it is due to manufacturers slowing down hiring to adjust for post-recession product demand. Tennessee’s economy, like Kentucky’s, rallied for several years after the recession; however, in recent months this trend has also soured. Much of Tennessee’s previous employment growth has slowed and unemployment has exceeded the national level. For instance, Tennessee’s unemployment rate reached 7.9% in November 2013, which exceeded the nation’s 7.0%. Again, the good news is we do not expect this trend to continue. We are confident that these states will experience an uptick in manufacturing-related employment, primarily because several auto manufacturers are planning expansions in the next year or two. Toyota plans to expand its Georgetown, Ky. plant to support the production of one of its Lexus vehicles; and Ford also has expansion plans underway. In Tennessee, several automotive manufacturers, including Volkswagen and General Motors, will be expanding facilities in the near term.

In comparison to the country’s overall employment growth, Alabama is lagging, evidenced by its ability to recover about 30% of its recessionary job losses, compared with a 90% recovery rate in the rest of the country. The job market is bleak, though improving. The state’s lackluster employment opportunities are in part due to the shrinking government sector, which accounts for about 20% of Alabama’s total payroll. Federal government spending and employment for the ESC region have continued to drop during the past several years and this is likely to continue. So, while the entire region will realize the impact of federal spending and employment declines, Alabama will feel the cuts most keenly. Despite lackluster public sector employment, the manufacturing sector in Alabama is expanding. Several manufacturers, both U.S. and international, have recently announced plans to open plants in Alabama.

Mississippi’s overall employment is stronger than second quarter last year, evidenced by employment growth in several of its key sectors, which we view as promising. However, the state is still lagging the nation in recovering from recessionary job losses. It has recovered about half of its pre-recessionary jobs. Much like Alabama, much of Mississippi’s near-term job growth will be in the professional and business services sector’s administrative and support functions. The relatively low level of completed postsecondary education make the state less able to compete for higher-paying professional jobs and expand in industries that tend to offer higher salaries.

In aggregate, although there’s been weakness in the region’s employment trends, we don’t believe it will be long-lasting. The region experienced a deeper recession than the country as a whole. We believe recovery for the ESC region will be slower than average, but we expect the region to recover. We anticipate that the lull in employment activity will end and that housing starts will increase. Furthermore, we also expect consumer spending to rise. Overall, we believe the region is positioned to bounce back; it just will take longer than most other regions.

East North Central (Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Ohio, Wisconsin)

While the good news for the Midwest’s Great Lakes region is that the regional economy is growing, the bad news is that it lags the nation. For 2014, its growth trails behind all regions except the Mid Atlantic, with modest 2.16% real regional GDP growth. In 2015, it comes in last, according to our forecast.

Likely both symptomatic and a cause for the region’s slow growth, its construction sector has recovered more slowly than the other regions’. Our forecast projects just 1.63% growth in housing starts for fiscal 2014, although this growth is likely to accelerate to 42.15% in 2015. Existing median home prices are brighter, growing at a more average 7.29% in 2014, albeit slowing to 2.11% for 2015. Local governments, however, will likely not begin to benefit from valuation growth until 2014 or 2015, given lagging property valuations. In addition, Wisconsin’s local governments’ permitted levy growth is limited to new construction. Although assessed valuation across the state may rise in the next two years, without new residential or other construction, governments will not be able to realize revenue growth.

We project employment gains for the region, although again, growth is not as robust as that of peers. Unemployment will likely fall to 7.36% in 2014 and 6.72% in 2015, but remain above the national average. The manufacturing sector remains key to the region, and we project manufacturing employment to grow a tepid 1.57% and 1.98% in 2014 and 2015, respectively. Job availability is critical to maintaining population, and slow employment growth is likely a contributing factor to an 18.66% projected net migration loss for the region in 2014. We also expect minimal total population growth for the region. Our local government criteria view projected population loss as a negative credit factor that has was a significant offsetting weakness for many Midwest governments, including Cuyahoga and Mahoning counties and Detroit.

West North Central (Iowa, Kansas, Minnesota, Missouri, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota)

The western Midwest’s growth prospects are more positive than its eastern counterpart’s and are moderate when compared with the other regions’. However, rapid growth in North Dakota’s Bakken Shale area is inflating projections for the region as a whole. Although real regional GDP growth may be modest at 2.55% in 2014 and 3.11% in 2015 across the region, the region weathered the recession well, and therefore local governments are less dependent on significant growth to restore their balance sheets.

The farming economy is likely to be relatively stable for the next two years. It boomed in 2011 and 2012 as crop prices soared during the drought but agriculture GSP dropped 29.02% in 2013 as crop prices fell. We expect agriculture GSP will grow a moderate 5.33% in 2014, followed by 4.14% in 2015. Passage of the Agricultural Act of 2014 has reduced uncertainty for farmers but eliminated direct federal payments. Slower net income and higher borrowing costs will likely limit agricultural equipment purchases, and we expect moderation in farmland values. Rising farmland market value has resulted in high single-to double-digit year-over-year assessment value growth across much of the western Midwest. While residential values have been declining or stable, rising farm values have offset these losses and have contributed to rising property tax revenues. As growth moderates, so will property tax revenues, but we expect that local governments in the region will have ample flexibility to balance their budgets.

 

Supported by drilling across the Bakken Shale and a low cost of doing business, Fargo and Bismarck are among the fastest growing metropolitan statistical areas in the country. Soaring oil and gas tax revenues have contributed to North Dakota’s recent and budgeted surpluses, and the state has also been sharing revenues with its local governments. The threshold of profitability for oil production in the Bakken Shale is high, and further expansion could diminish quickly, but we expect economic growth in the state to continue. Our forecast indicates 12.75% growth in the region’s mining real GSP for 2014, rising to 13.14% in 2015. Balancing rising infrastructure and service costs while maintaining reasonable debt burdens will likely be among local governments’ greatest challenges for the region as oil production continues.

West South Central (Arkansas, Louisiana, Oklahoma, Texas)

The region remains a leader for the nation in terms of real GDP growth; our projections indicate a stronger growth rate estimate than what we reported in December, at 2.9% for 2014 and 3.7% for 2015, with Texas leading the pack. Although robust, the region’s GDP growth represents a deceleration from 2012 due to the federal spending sequester, higher mortgage rates, and slower growth in the energy sector. As consumer confidence recovers, we anticipate regional housing starts and retail sales will continue to garner momentum. The region’s housing market did not see the big boom in prices in the pre-recession years and, therefore, did not experience a big bust as other regions did. But given the region’s low cost of living and affordable home prices, we expect that a stronger construction sector will aid healthy growth in total housing starts through 2015.

While the arctic weather in the beginning of 2014 has not dampened the region’s economy to the extent it has in the midwest and northeast regions, we believe that better weather will result in stronger consumer confidence, retail sales, and construction activity for the remainder of the year. Furthermore, the region’s states are susceptible to event-related risks (primarily hurricanes, flooding, and tornadoes) that could hinder GDP growth and migration levels annually.

The energy sector continues to be a large contributor to the region’s economic strength and rate of recovery. We project that the region’s mining GSP will increase 1.6% for 2014 and 2% for 2015, which is down significantly from 15% annual growth in 2012. We feel that this slowdown is a reflection of the energy sector entering the mature phase of its business cycle.

The region’s unemployment rate remains well below the national level and our projections indicate that it will continue to decline to 5.1% in 2015 as many workers outside the labor force jump back into the labor pool as they see new jobs emerging. More specifically, we expect expansion in the professional and business services and construction sectors to contribute to employment growth through 2015. Texas, Louisiana, and Oklahoma have surpassed their pre-recession employment levels whereas Arkansas, the one state in the region that did not benefit from the high energy prices during 2011 and early 2012, has seen lackluster employment growth, well below the national average. The Arkansas labor force participation rate has declined but we project that the state will reach its pre-recession employment level by the end of 2014 due to anticipated growth in the professional and business services and education and health services sectors.

Federal government employment projections for the region reflect a 2.6% decline for 2014 and a 0.8% decline for 2015; however, we forecast state and local government employment to continue to increase at a modest pace, with 0.7% growth in 2014 and 1% growth in 2015. Our projections for federal spending for the region reflect a nearly 1% decline in 2014 and a nearly 0.5% decline in federal spending in 2015. The 2015 U.S. Defense budget indicates that defense spending will be flat through fiscal 2015, which should provide some stability for defense contractors; however, we could see another pivotal decline in defense spending should the sequestration remain in effect in fiscal 2016. The federal defense budget will likely have an impact on local governments in Texas more than the other states in the West South Central region due to the significant presence of both military bases and defense contractors.

Mountain (Arizona, Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming)

We expect Utah, Nevada, Arizona, and Colorado to be among the leading states in terms of payroll employment growth rates through 2018, setting the pace for regional job growth of 1.9% in 2014 and 2.9% in 2015. A robust population expansion, which will help fuel the cycle of growth, should accompany these gains. The region’s aerospace, defense, and high-tech clusters will continue to attract a highly educated workforce and employers to the area, along with service sector jobs to support them. Meanwhile, its attractive climate and natural resources ensure that leisure and hospitality remain strong.

We continue to forecast strong housing starts and home price appreciation in both the Mountain and Pacific regions. Median home prices in the Mountain states are forecast to grow 10.4% this year, with housing starts topping the list at 34% growth. However, it remains unclear how much future housing demand will be fueled, as it was in 2012 and 2013, by strong investor participation. If a slowdown in investor-led home purchases leaves a vacuum that consumer demand is unable to fill, it could put the brakes on the housing recovery (or at least ease up on the gas) until individual households are able to pick up the slack. In the Mountain region, that day may come sooner rather than later: With Colorado, Utah, Arizona, and Nevada forecast to lead the nation in both payroll and population growth over the next two years, there is a good chance that traditional homebuyers will be able to make up for softening investor demand.

As the housing market continues to recover, we expect the Mountain states will see strong growth in retail sales this year and into 2015. In the longer run, however, the projected population expansion will increase the demand for local government services and place an additional burden on public infrastructure. State and local credit quality will depend on entities’ ability to manage the tension between fiscal health on one hand and growth-related spending and debt pressure on the other.

Pacific (Alaska, California, Hawaii, Oregon, Washington)

We’ve said elsewhere that the Pacific states, and California in particular, will take longer than most to reach pre-recession employment levels. The pace of job growth slowed slightly in late 2013 and early this year, and we expect that in 2014 payrolls will increase by 1.7%, led by construction, leisure and hospitality, technology, and professional services. Meanwhile, manufacturing has grown only modestly, while the public sector continues to contract as local governments remain reluctant to restore positions cut in the downturn. Even at a slightly cooler rate, Pacific regional output is forecast to grow 2.7% this year, outpacing the nation as a whole and gaining momentum into 2015.

Like the Mountain states, the Pacific region saw the pace of home starts surge in 2012 and 2013 along with median sales prices, and we expect home prices to continue to increase in 2014 at a somewhat diminished pace. A good deal of this growth stemmed from the depth of the housing decline here, and from the initial flood of investor capital that caused prices to skyrocket early last year. Now that much of the standing inventory has been cleared away, the question remains: Will individual homebuyers sustain the same pace of growth?. The answer depends in part on the job market recovery and future wage growth, and has implications for local government revenues.

At the local level, the western states’ recovery has been uneven, with coastal areas proving more resilient than inland places and those with less diversified economic bases. We see bright spots on the horizon in places like Seattle, where Amazon’s new headquarters will spur new construction-related revenues and other development beginning in 2015, and Portland, where manufacturing, technology, and tourism will generate additional local revenues. In California, strong growth in the high-tech, entertainment, life sciences, and tourism sectors has fueled the recovery in the coastal cities.

Although we expect the housing recovery to strengthen credit conditions, local governments that aggressively forecast revenue growth run the risk of overreaching, especially if home sales (and associated retail and construction activity) slow appreciably. So far, pressure to restore spending at the local level does not appear to have led to a significant increase in local government payrolls, but we will continue to pay attention to budget assumptions that could hurt financial performance.

Table 2  |  Download Table

Regional Baseline Credit Driver Forecasts
(Baseline scenario as of March 2014)
Percent change unless otherwise indicated
2014 2015
New England
Real regional GDP 2.32 2.75
Federal spending (0.76) (0.69)
Unemployment rate (%) 6.43 5.63
Employment, total nonfarm 1.19 1.52
Employment, government (0.31) 0.18
Real retail sales 1.44 2.15
Housing starts, total private 10.59 31.32
Home price, existing median 6.85 1.30
Mid-Atlantic
Real regional GDP 1.91 2.60
Federal spending 1.32 1.00
Employment, total nonfarm 0.90 1.48
Employment, government (0.44) 0.09
Real retail sales 1.41 2.19
Real personal income 2.18 3.42
Housing starts, total private 14.00 21.40
Home price, existing median 5.65 1.13
South Atlantic
Real regional GDP 2.82 3.44
Federal spending (0.67) (0.25)
Employment, total nonfarm 1.85 2.45
Employment, financial activities 1.39 1.56
Employment, federal government (2.16) (1.11)
Real retail sales 1.85 3.02
Housing starts, total private 16.37 38.45
Home price, existing median 7.97 1.91
East South Central
Real regional GDP 2.31 3.08
Federal spending (1.86) (0.51)
Unemployment rate (%) 7.23 6.59
Employment, total nonfarm 1.14 2.07
Employment, manufacturing 1.76 1.98
Employment, education and health services 0.90 1.72
Employment, federal government (1.08) (1.47)
Employment, military 0.65 1.01
Real retail sales 1.23 2.45
Housing starts, total private 18.48 39.19
Home price, existing median 5.89 2.46
East North Central
Real regional GDP 2.16 2.55
Federal spending (1.71) (1.49)
Regional CPI§ 224.87 228.33
Real retail sales 1.06 1.90
Unemployment rate (%) 7.36 6.72
Employment (NAICS), manufacturing 1.57 1.98
Net migration (18.66) 9.07
Housing starts, total private 1.63 42.15
Home price, existing median 7.42 1.99
West North Central
Real regional GDP 2.55 3.11
Federal spending 0.26 0.23
GSP, agriculture, forestry, and fishing 5.33 4.14
GSP, Mining 12.75 13.14
Unemployment rate (%) 4.72 4.46
Net migration (7.20) 8.41
Real retail sales 1.23 2.46
Housing starts, total private 12.43 31.70
Home price, existing median 7.29 2.11
West South Central
Real regional GDP 2.88 3.66
Federal spending (0.97) (0.53)
Unemployment rate (%) 5.60 5.10
Employment (NAICS), total nonfarm 2.09 2.63
Housing starts, total private 14.94 27.30
Home price, existing median 6.42 2.02
Real per capita personal income 2.10 3.29
Real retail sales 2.21 3.32
GSP, Mining 1.55 2.04
Mountain
Real regional GDP 2.86 3.83
Federal spending 1.27 0.50
Regional CPI§ 234.52 238.20
Unemployment rate (%) 6.33 5.78
Employment (NAICS), total nonfarm 1.88 2.87
Employment (NAICS), natural resources and mining 4.41 2.64
Employment (NAICS), leisure and hospitality 1.80 2.63
Housing starts, total private 34.17 35.70
Home price, existing median 10.37 3.57
Pacific
Real regional GDP 2.68 3.50
Federal spending (2.14) (1.06)
Regional CPI§ 242.32 245.93
Unemployment rate (%) 7.40 6.94
Employment (NAICS), total nonfarm 1.70 2.26
Employment (NAICS), professional and business services 3.30 5.28
Employment (NAICS), professional, scientific, and technical services 1.86 3.08
Housing starts, total private 30.59 37.19
Home price, existing median 12.02 1.57
*Forecasts are constructed using the Global Insight Model of regional U.S. economies. §1982 to 1984 equals 100. GDP–Gross domestic product. GSP–Gross state product. NAICS–North American Industry Classification System.
Primary Credit Analyst: Gabriel J Petek, CFA, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5042;
gabriel.petek@standardandpoors.com
Secondary Contacts: Jennifer K Garza (Mann), Dallas (1) 214-871-1422;
jennifer.garza@standardandpoors.com
Carol A Hendrickson, Chicago (1) 312-233-7062;
carol.hendrickson@standardandpoors.com
Emmanuelle Lawrence, Dallas (1) 214-871-1473;
emmanuelle.lawrence@standardandpoors.com
Apple Lo, Boston (1) 617-530-8316;
apple.lo@standardandpoors.com
Victor M Medeiros, Boston (1) 617-530-8305;
victor.medeiros@standardandpoors.com
Sarah Sullivant, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5051;
sarah.sullivant@standardandpoors.com
Lindsay Wilhelm, New York (1) 212-438-2301;
lindsay.wilhelm@standardandpoors.com



IRS Releases Draft Form 1023-EZ.

The IRS has released draft Form 1023-EZ, “Streamlined Application for Recognition of Exemption Under Section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code.”

FEBRUARY 19, 2014




Sign Up Now for the 2014 IRS Nationwide Tax Forums and Save Money.

WASHINGTON — The IRS invites enrolled agents, certified public accountants, certified financial planners and other tax professionals to register for the 2014 IRS Nationwide Tax Forums. Those who sign up by the pre-registration date will save $130 per attendee off the on-site price.

The IRS Nationwide Tax Forums are three-day events that provide tax professionals with the most up-to-date information on federal and state tax issues presented by experts from the IRS and its partner organizations through a variety of training seminars and workshops. 2014 Registration Fees, Dates and Locations: The cost of enrollment for those who pre-register is $225 per person, a savings of $130 off the late or on-site registration price of $355. Pre-registration ends two weeks prior to the start of each forum.

                                              Pre-Registration Deadline
 Location                Forum Dates          for $225 rate
 _____________________________________________________________________________

 Chicago                July 1 - 3                  June 17

 San Diego              July 15 - 17                July 1

 New Orleans            July 22 - 24                July 8

 National Harbor, Md.   Aug. 19 - 21                Aug. 5
 (Washington, DC)

 Orlando, Fla.          Aug. 26 - 28                Aug. 12

More than 40 separate seminars and workshops are being offered, and enrolled agents and certified public accountants may earn up to 18 Continuing Professional Education Credits in each location. Additionally, these seminars may qualify for continuing education credit for certified financial planners, pending review and acceptance by the Certified Financial Planner Board.

A few days before the start of each forum, attendees will be able to download, print or to load onto their mobile devices slide presentations of seminars that they are interested in.

National Participating Association Members

Members of the participating associations below qualify for discounted enrollment costs if they meet the pre-registration deadlines above. Members who meet the early registration deadline would pay $215 and should contact their association directly for more information:

  • American Bar Association (ABA)
  • American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA)
  • National Association of Enrolled Agents (NAEA)
  • National Association of Tax Professionals (NATP)
  • National Society of Accountants (NSA)
  • National Society of Tax Professionals (NSTP)

Exhibit HallIn addition to the seminars, the forums also feature a two-day expo with representatives from tax, financial, and business communities offering their products, services, and expertise designed with the tax professional in mind.

In a survey of 2013 attendees, the forums received an overall 94% percent satisfaction rate. 2014 marks the 24th year that the IRS has hosted these forums to help educate and interact with the tax professional community.

Registration Information

For more information, or to register online, visit www.irstaxforum.com.

April 18, 2014

 




Streamlined Exemption Application Could Pose Compliance Problems.

The IRS has released a draft of a simplified exemption application for charities in an apparent effort to reduce burdens on smaller organizations, but some attorneys worry it could make it more difficult to get charities to comply with the tax laws.

The draft Form 1023-EZ, “Streamlined Application for Recognition of Exemption Under Section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code,” accompanied by draft instructions, was announced in the Federal Register March 31.The notice described the draft as a shorter and less burdensome version of the 25-page Form 1023 and estimated it would take 14 hours to complete as opposed to 101 hours for the standard form.

The IRS provided a statement to Tax Analysts April 18 saying the Form 1023-EZ is intended to make applying for tax-exempt status easier and quicker for smaller organizations and that the Service has submitted the latest draft of the form to the Office of Management and Budget.

But attorneys who spoke with Tax Analysts said the brevity of the draft could raise compliance issues. Charles M. Watkins of Webster, Chamberlain & Bean LLP, who recently discovered the draft’s existence and brought it to the attention of other exempt organization practitioners, said it might not give the IRS all the information it needs to determine whether an applicant qualifies for section 501(c)(3) status, adding that it appears an applicant would not even have to show the agency its organizing documents.

“I would be concerned that they’re not getting enough information and some people are going to be recognized as exempt when in fact what they’re actually doing is not an exempt function,” Watkins said.

Benjamin Takis of Tax-Exempt Solutions PLLC said the standard Form 1023 provides applicants with a useful educational tool that a streamlined application may not offer.

“As I work with the organizations and we go through all the parts of the 1023, that’s an opportunity for them to learn about all their compliance responsibilities,” Takis said. He listed the exempt purpose test, the commerciality doctrine, and private benefit and private inurement rules as examples, adding, “In the absence of the Form 1023 and the rigor of that process, I think a lot of new organizations are not going to get that education.”

Watkins also noted that the Form 1023-EZ would be available only to organizations whose gross receipts do not exceed $200,000 and that churches, hospitals, colleges and universities, supporting organizations, organizations with donor-advised funds, and other entities could not use it.

Watkins was puzzled about why the IRS so far appears to have made no mention of the draft. “Nobody [at the IRS] has said a word about it,” he said. “If it’s something you’re doing that actually might help the situation, why wouldn’t you talk about it, especially in the context of a situation where you really do need to rebuild trust with the exempt organizations community?”

Treasury has asked for comments on the draft by April 30.

by Fred Stokeld

APRIL 21, 2014




2 Philly Firms Vie for Top U.S. Bankruptcy Deal.

Reports the Bond Buyer: “Detroit bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes’ decision to hire a municipal finance expert to review the city’s bankruptcy plan attracted responses from five professionals,” two of whom work for Philadelphia-area firms that have grown by advising this region’s much-indebted public agencies over the years.

“The applicants are: Dean Kaplan, a managing director at Public Financial Management Inc., who would lead a team of PFM colleagues; Richard Ravitch, a former New York lieutenant governor who was part of New York City’s high-profile restructuring in the late 1970s; Peter Hammer, a Wayne State University law professor; William Brandt, a Chicago-based turnaround consultant and chairman of the Illinois Finance Authority; and Martha Kopacz, from turnaround and investment banking advisory firm Phoenix Management Services LLC, whose team would include Bob Childree, the longtime controller of the state of Alabama.” PFM and Phoenix are local firms:

PFM,  the largest muni advisory firm in the US with 500 staff, was founded by Ed DeSeve, the late Mayor Frank Rizzo’s finance director, and partners including Jim White and Sam Katz; it has acquired other muni advisors around the U.S. Kaplan, an ex-Philadelphia city budget director who heads PFM’s “turnaround” team, “worked on the restructuring of cities (including) Pittsburgh, Washington, Cleveland, Miami and Baltimore,” and Detroit’s schools, and would head the Detroit municipal review team, the Buyer reports. He’s asking for $550 an hour, with lower rates to team members.

Phoenix, based in Chadds Ford, includes ex-Philadelphia Gas Works CFO Albert Mink (PGW was a Phoenix turnaround client) and ex-Alabama state treasurer Bob Childree on its team. Phoenix counts Wilmington, SEPTA and Nassau County (Long Island), NY, as past clients. Phoenix is asking $200/hour for analysts up to $595/hour for top team members.

Read more at http://www.philly.com/philly/blogs/inq-phillydeals/Philly-firms-vie-for-Detroit-bankruptcy-deals.html#upeJ8vpK62T718hY.99




About That TIAA-CREF Deal.

Why buy Nuveen?

Dazed and Confused

Monday morning a Morningstar analyst informed me that TIAA-CREF had purchased Nuveen Investments. My response: “Huh? Maybe this will make sense to me at a later date.” It’s currently Wednesday morning and, as of yet, no such luck.

I don’t know why an investment-management firm would wish to buy Nuveen. There was a time when Nuveen had a compact, comprehensible business. It was a municipal-bond underwriter and investment manager, based in Chicago, and a market leader and innovator in two niche business, unit investment trusts and closed-end funds. (Nuveen pioneered the leveraged closed-end muni fund.) Buying Nuveen meant instantly becoming a leader with municipal bonds, UITs, and closed-end funds.

Doing a deal with that version of Nuveen would have been similar to Franklin’s purchase of Templeton in 1992. Franklin was a bond manager that joined forces with an international-stock firm, which made integration a snap. Franklin had one large bond management group, another large international-stock management group located elsewhere, and the two units continued to do their own things. Franklin finished its three-legged stool four years later when it added U.S. equities manager Mutual Series.Things are not so simple with Nuveen. Over the past 15 years, Nuveen has conducted several of its own, smaller acquisitions. As a result, it no longer is solely a muni-bond specialist. Nor does it continue to run all of its assets from its Chicago office. Rather, its investment-management operations are spread across the country, in what Nuveen calls a “multiboutique” system.

This leads to the question of how TIAA-CREF–or any other asset-management company for that matter–can benefit from Nuveen. Nuveen’s operations are pleasantly profitable, as are those of every other mutual fund company of a certain size. However, Nuveen would also be pleasantly profitable if it were owned by Microsoft, or (as was recently the case) by a private equity firm. What makes Nuveen more useful for TIAA-CREF than for other owners? Where is the strategic value?

No doubt that TIAA-CREF believes that it has the answers. The trouble is, I’ve heard such stories before and they rarely seem to pan out. Although mutual fund firms have collectively spent hundreds of billions of dollars on acquisitions, most of the industry’s leaders grew organically. By my calculation, nine of the 15 largest U.S. fund companies (counting exchange-traded funds, but excluding money market funds and funds of funds) built essentially their entire businesses without acquisitions. Among those 15 are the three largest fund companies, Vanguard, Fidelity, and American Funds, which have more assets than the remaining 12 combined.


(At $800 billion in total fund assets, the new TIAA-CREF/Nuveen combination would seem to belong high on this chart. However, the new company does not have many of its assets in mutual funds and ETFs, as TIAA-CREF’s biggest business is annuities to educational and hospital 403(b) plans. For its part, Nuveen runs money in a wide variety of ways, including separate accounts in addition to the aforementioned closed-end funds and UITs.)

Of the six companies on the list that have grown partially though acquisitions, and thus are labeled as Acquisition, the biggest two, BlackRock and Franklin Templeton, would appear to be somewhat different from the TIAA-CREF/Nuveen deal. Franklin Templeton, as previously mentioned, is a tripartite construction, whereas Nuveen alone has seven investment-management divisions. BlackRock, too, is made up of three major parts: the iShares operations in San Francisco, its New York-based bond management, and the former Merrill Lynch investment-management group in Princeton, NJ.

As shown by J.P. Morgan, Invesco, OppenheimerFunds, and Columbia, it is possible to become a large mutual fund/ETF organization through acquisitions. Each of those cases is a bit different–Columbia and especially J.P. Morgan coming from bank mergers, OppenheimerFunds doing most of its deals 15 years ago and now growing organically, and Invesco biting off a single big chunk with its purchase of AIM. However, they do offer some general support for TIAA-CREF’s thesis.

This discussion, of course, is from the perspective of the shareholder of the mutual fund company, as opposed to the fund owner. What about the latter? Should fund investors be pleased if their fund companies make acquisitions? Are acquired? Do neither?

I asked Vanguard founder Jack Bogle a variation of those questions. His response: “Whatever happened to, ‘Don’t do something, just stand there?'” He also wondered whether companies with a mutual ownership structure should “use their capital to buy other firms,” and mentioned the “ego-building need of successor CEOs to outdo their predecessors.”

So you know where he stands: against. Next column, I’ll weigh in as to what this means for TIAA-CREF and Nuveen fund owners.

John Rekenthaler has been researching the fund industry since 1988. He is now a columnist for Morningstar.com and a member of Morningstar’s investment research department. John is quick to point out that while Morningstar typically agrees with the views of the Rekenthaler Report, his views are his own.




L.A. Spends 30% More on Wall Street Fees than Streets, and That's Just Half the Story.

The city of Los Angeles spent at least $204 million on Wall Street fees—not counting principal or interest on loans—last year, $41 million more than the budget for its Bureau of Street Services, according to a report (pdf) from a coalition of community, civil rights and labor groups. 

“No Small Fees: LA Spends More on Wall Street than Our Streets,” from the Fix L.A. Coalition, does not make any claims of nefarious actions by bankers or municipal officials; instead, it documents how business as usual costs the city millions of dollars it can ill afford to spend and suggests ways to avoid it.

The $204-million-dollar figure is actually the report’s conservative estimate on how much the city pays annually on a plethora of fees. The authors had to root around in city documents for the unpublicized information it cobbled together but suspect there is much more to be learned. “Alarmingly, we have concluded that the fees we were not able to document may exceed those we could document,” they wrote.

While the city readily provides a budget figure for what it spends on municipal functions like street maintenance and improvement, it is not so forthcoming on Wall Street fees. That is no surprise. “Municipal markets are characterized by poor information and illiquidity,” according to a study (pdf) published by the Hamilton Project at the Brookings Institution.

What the Fix L.A. folks say is known is that the city paid $133.1 million on investment management fees, $23.1 million on natural gas swaps, $17.9 million on letters of credit and $12.9 million on bond issuance costs. What they do not know is what was spent on fees involving private equity investments because they are not subject to public disclosure laws.

Wall Street has an advantage when arranging financing for municipal bonds because, unlike stocks and options, they are traded primarily on over-the-counter networks rather than open exchanges. That impedes competitive market pressures, according to the Brookings report. Its authors propose establishment of a “CommonMuni,” a privately-financed national institution that would give independent, low-cost advice to municipal issuers. It would be modeled after a fund that manages $25 billion in investments by more than 1,500 universities, hospitals and other nonprofit organizations.

Failing that, Fix L.A. suggests that the city could better leverage the $106 billion in assets, payments and debt issuance controlled by its seaport, airport, utilities and pension funds that course through the Wall Street’s veins. “The city would have far more negotiating strength if it consolidated its dealings with Wall Street, instead of dispersing them among nearly a dozen departments,” the report says.

That leverage could be used to renegotiate some of the risky deals, such as interest rate swaps the city obtained years ago as a market hedge against inflation, that tanked during the Great Recession. The suppression of any hint of inflation by the U.S. Department of the Treasury in ensuing years has generated a huge windfall for Wall Street to the detriment of governments and taxpayers.

“No Small Fees” highlights one “toxic deal” with New York Mellon Bank that could cost the city $65.8 million through 2028. The bank wants $24.7 million in penalties from the city to terminate the swap.

As the city prepares to head into the next fiscal year starting July 1, it is probably ending the year with a $21 million deficit. It faces a budget shortfall of $242 million for next year that newly-elected Mayor Eric Garcetti vows to eliminate. The solution probably won’t include recapturing money from Wall Street.

–Ken Broder

Tuesday, April 15, 2014

 

 



TIAA-CREF to Buy Nuveen Investments for $6.25 Bln.

(Reuters) – TIAA-CREF, an insurer and asset manager focusing on workers at non-profit organizations, said it would acquire fund manager Nuveen Investments for $6.25 billion, seeking to expand its mutual fund and municipal bond offerings.

The deal will add more than $221 billion in assets to TIAA-CREF’s roughly $569 billion in assets under management, broadening its portfolio with closed-end municipal bond funds that offer regular, annuity-type payouts.

Robert Leary, president of TIAA-CREF Asset Management, said his company is looking to sell more of its asset management products through Nuveen’s distributors.

It also offers relief to Nuveen’s current owner, private equity firm Madison Dearborn Partners LLC. Madison Dearborn will break even on the deal, according to a person close to the firm, having taken Nuveen private in 2007 for $5.8 billion and saddled it with debt that weighed on its earnings.

The transaction comes at a difficult time for the municipal bond market that many Nuveen funds invest in. Tax-free muni bonds have been hit over the last year by the bankruptcy of Detroit, fears of rising rates, and longer-term concerns about a looming pension crisis among city and state issuers.

The deal is expected to close by the end of the year, pending approval from existing Nuveen clients and antitrust regulators.

Lazard Ltd and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC advised TIAA-CREF. Bank of America Merrill Lynch, Wells Fargo Securities LLC and Citigroup Global Markets acted as financial advisers to Nuveen Investments. UBS Investment Bank, Goldman Sachs & Co and Moelis & Co acted as financial advisers to the Nuveen management team. (Reporting by Greg Roumeliotis and Mike Stone in New York; Editing by Tom Brown)

By Greg Roumeliotis and Mike Stone

Mon Apr 14, 2014 4:36pm EDT




Municipal Bond Mark-Ups: Measuring 'Reasonable'

 Summary
  • Despite marginal improvements, the municipal bond market remains inscrutable to many.
  • At the top of most gripe lists is investment cost; just what are reasonable mark-ups?
  • This article offers an expert’s insight.

The difference between what a muni dealer pays for a bond in the open market and the price at which it might sell that bond to a customer is known as a mark-up. There’s been a lot of talk about muni mark-ups of late, notably in a Wall Street Journal article from March 10.

Dealers say that they are entitled to mark-ups that fairly compensate them for the risks and costs they assume in furnishing liquidity for investors. Some academics say that dealers are overcharging, while retail investors have very little idea about what’s going on, but are feeling somehow exploited. The reality is that they all have a point, but some simple calculations show a high probability that current market practice does need to shift toward more favorable treatment of investors.

Historically, retail muni spreads have ranged from about $5 per bond ($1,000 par value) for shorter-term bonds (up to about 10 years to maturity) to as much as $30 per $1,000 for long term bonds (20 years or more.) The current average is estimated to be about $17 per bond. But what goes into that average?

It is commonly held that some larger brokerage firms charge more than many smaller firms. This is in part because the larger firms have more significant cost components to their trading and distribution operations, as follows:

1. Market Risk — Since 2008, most fixed-income markets have experienced diminished liquidity, while some firms have altogether left the market as principals. Other large firms have combined, leaving fewer large firms to furnish liquidity — i.e., a willingness to buy bonds from customers without an offsetting purchase order from another buyer. Given the recent negative credit trend among municipalities, this means increased loss exposure over time.

2. Research — The muni market has always been more obtuse than other U.S. credit markets for the simple reason that municipalities are not forced to file the kind of information and disclosures that are incumbent upon corporate issuers of debt. While corporate credit analysts can readily draw from available public data and borrow liberally from equity analytical work, muni analysts don’t have these luxuries and must spend a lot of time extracting data from infrequent filings and from thinly staffed local government finance departments. Additionally, muni bond structures are now often more complex than in the past, so for these reasons it’s simply more labor intensive to compile useful credit research for municipal bonds.

3. Scavenger Hunting — Finding suitable municipal bonds that fit a specific individual criteria set for an investor is time-consuming. Sourcing a muni bond with the right rating quality, maturity, credit risk profile, and state tax exemption can be a bit of an Easter egg hunt and often smaller firms must rely on larger firms to carry those special finds in their inventories, as their own firms do not even maintain inventory (see Figure 2 below).

4. Economies of Scale: Measured by trading volume, the muni market is but a fraction of the corporate debt market, implying fewer trades at the same basic unit cost for dealers (e.g., trade processing, clearing, reporting, etc.; see Figure 1). Moreover, nominal demand volume for taxable corporate debt is far greater than for munis, as there are many more and larger buyers of taxable debt, like pensions, banks, central governments, insurance companies, etc. Most of the demand for munis comes from individual investors, and that buyer group relies on the dealer community for research and other market information to a much greater extent than do more sophisticated buyers. In addition to this, turnover is lower for munis as tax-exempt bond investors tend to hold them longer than buyer classes of corporate debt.

5. Smaller muni dealers are today commonly forced to rely on the muni bond inventories of larger firms when filling orders for their own customers, more so than prior to 2008. This implies a much greater frequency of added mark-ups between the supplier dealer and the smaller firm serving its customer, but the middle-man dealer must take a small mark-up if it is to even have a chance competing for business against larger shops. These inter-dealer trades are tracked by the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board, and because of the growing dependence of some dealers on larger dealers’ inventory, interdealer trades have grown as a percentage of all customer trades. In 2004, interdealer trades were 12.7% of all customer buys and sells of munis. In 2012, that ratio was 24.3% (source: MSRB Fact Books, 2008 through 2012).

6. Oligopoly: Today, a larger proportion of trading volume is handled by fewer and larger firms. In 2012, the top 10 firms handled 72.4% of all customer trades in municipal bonds, and that’s out of a total of 1,645 registered dealers. This is due to firm consolidation. Morgan Stanley is comprised of former bulge-bracket muni firm Smith Barney, long a muni market behemoth; Bank of America is now comprised of Merrill Lynch; and Wells Fargo is made up of former muni shops Wachovia, Wheat First, and Butcher & Singer. That has resulted in a heavy concentration of secondary muni market trading in fewer organizations, all of whom would likely claim to have higher-than-the-industry-average overhead associated with muni business.

All that said, is an average spread of $17 a bond fair to retail investors? Let’s look at the math, or at least some of the math.

The Wall Street Journal article referenced above said that retail investors traded $951 billion in munis from 2009 to 2014 (based on trades of $100 thousand or less.) If dealers earned a spread of $17 on each trade that averaged $100 thousand par value, that means they made $1,700 on each trade. That strikes me as a per-trade number that would rather wildly exceed an average ticket cost, even if you factor in research, trade finance, market risk, processing, clearing, salaries, etc. Charles Schwab does not have most of the overhead costs that a large muni dealer does, but that notwithstanding, they only charge $125 for a broker-assisted muni trade of $100 thousand, or less than 8% of what appears to be the average mark-up. I would very conservatively estimate that a large muni shop has per-trade costs somewhere between $300 and $500, so is a margin of 240% to 466% fair to investors? Doesn’t sound like it, but it might be more equitable to look at things from the dealer’s market risk perspective.

Assume a dealer holds a 15-year muni bond paying 5% interest in inventory in hopes of selling it to a customer, after having bought it from another customer, and has as its cushion against market loss the $1,700 described above. Now, to be fair, some portion of that spread for the “house” will be paid to the client-facing broker in the form of a commission, so the spread as a cushion against market risk is actually somewhat lower. Assuming the dealer was including, say, $15 per bond out of the $17 spread as commission, it would appear that the dealer only has a $200 loss cushion — but we’re not done. The $15 commission is not all paid to the broker, as he or she actually receives what is known as a net commission based on what is called a “pay-out rate.” The industry norm for this is 30%, so, in fact, the dealer only gives away $4.50 of the $17 dollar spread, leaving a real cushion of $1,250.

Usually bonds move out of inventory within a few days or maybe a couple of weeks, but let’s assume this dealer doesn’t find a buyer for 30 days. During that period, market rates for the bond in position can rise by as much as 24 basis points before the dealer loses money. How likely is this to happen? Well, not highly likely, but it’s not a rare occurrence either. Using the 10-year Treasury note as proxy, from 2009 to 2014, this occurred 20% of the time.

Of course, there is also the chance that rates could fall, allowing the dealer to raise their offering price and make even more money. In our proxy case, prices rose in 30 day periods about 32% of the time from 2009 to 2014 enough to offset the bid/ask spread ($17 per bond), so it would appear that the odds were 3-to-2 against losing money to market risk over the last five years. While not a perfect benchmark for our hypothetical 15-year muni bond, yield movements on the 10-year T-note fairly well paralleled yield movement on munis, when compared to the Bond Buyer U.S. Municipal Bond Index, as shown in Figure 3. Interestingly, during the last 30 years, the above scenario would have experienced a net loss 22% of the time and a gain 21% of the time (source: U.S. Federal Reserve Bank, Bloomberg).

One of the challenges investors face in discerning mark-ups in muni-land is reinforced by the fact that nearly all trades take place with dealers acting in a principal capacity. This means that they take title to municipal bonds before they resell them to customers, rather than simply brokering the trade on behalf of the customer, much like a real estate broker does. The difference in prices paid and received by a principal constitutes the mark-up and because the dealers have first bought the bonds with their money, they may choose to characterize their position in the transaction flow as principal. But these circumstances can vary and one variance belies the principal characterization.

When a dealer has an order in hand from a customer and then buys bonds from another dealer in instant fulfillment of that customer order, it is called a “riskless trade.” This is much more like the real estate broker in that the buyer is known and ready to pay for and acquire the property. Trades like this are effected by the thousands every day and, in fact, are even more common today because more dealer firms rely on the bond inventory of other firms. And this reality gives rise to a scenario in which investors can begin to crack the force-field of mark-up opacity.

When a customer approaches a brokerage firm to buy munis, they should specify that any fulfillment of their investment inquiry that results in the dealer entering into a riskless trade should be done as an “agency” trade. It is the customer’s right to do so and if the dealer agrees to the request, they must disclose the commission amount on the transaction confirmation. While this won’t throw open mark-up practices to the full light of day, it will give investors a chance to gauge just how much a broker is taking as compensation and may even cause the broker to lessen that compensation.

Mark ConnerCorporate Treasury Investment Consulting




Mintz Levin: SEC Steps Up Scrutiny of Municipal Bonds: Recently Filed Enforcement Actions.

As discussed last week, the SEC has been stepping up its scrutiny of municipal bond offerings. Indeed, in the last year the SEC has filed a number of enforcement actions against municipal bond issuers and underwriters.  The alleged violations have involved misstatements or omissions concerning such topics as: compliance with tax exemption requirements or reporting requirements; limitations on debt capacity; property valuations; and municipal accounts.

In particular, in announcing its Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative, which encourages municipal issuers and underwriters to self-report possible disclosure violations (as discussed in more detail in Bret’s post), the SEC specifically noted that it may file enforcement actions against issuers for inaccurately stating in final official statements that they have substantially complied with their prior continuing disclosure obligations.  Underwriters may also be charged with securities violations if they have failed to exercise adequate due diligence in determining whether issuers have complied with such obligations.  The SEC cited the West Clark Community Schoolscase discussed below as an example of such an enforcement action.

Notably, in many of these recent enforcement actions the SEC has asserted claims for merely negligent violations of Sections 17(a)(2) and (3) of the Securities Act, instead of, or in addition to, claims for violations of Section 10(b) of the Securities Exchange Act and SEC Rule 10b-5, which require proof of knowing or reckless misconduct.  In some court cases the SEC has also successfully argued that the alleged knowledge of an employee or agent may be attributed to the bond issuer for purposes of pleading that the issuer acted with the requisite ”scienter” to support a 10b-5 charge.  Thus these cases raise a concern that even relatively “innocent” mistakes may lead to SEC charges.

While the issuer was actually fined in only one of these cases, the SEC has also required issuers to provide training for personnel or to hire consultants to review disclosure practices and procedures as a condition of settlement.  Meanwhile, underwriters have often faced more substantial financial penalties. Some particular examples are discussed further below.  More than ever, these cases illustrate how important it is for government entities and underwriters to obtain careful counsel about potential pitfalls in bond offerings.

  • In re the Greater Wenatchee Regional Events Center Public Facilities District. As we discussed in an earlier post, last November the SEC announced that, for the first time in its history, it had fined a municipal bond issuer for making misleading statements in an offering statement. The case involved a municipal corporation formed to fund development of a regional multi-use arena and hockey rink in the city of Wenatchee, Washington. The SEC found that the official statement for bond anticipation notes issued to fund the project failed to inform investors about debt capacity limitations and an adverse feasibility study. The SEC brought administrative claims against the issuer and others for negligent violations of Sections 17(a)(2) and (3). The SEC assessed fines of $20,000 against the issuer and $10,000 each against the project developer and its CEO, as well as $300,000 against the underwriter and $25,000 against the lead investment banker.
  • SEC v. City of Victorville.  To finance redevelopment of a former Air Force base, the City of Victorville, California, created a development authority that issued tax increment municipal bonds. The SEC alleged that the tax increment figures and debt service ratio in the offering statement for one of these bond offerings were based on a false assessment of the value of redeveloped airplane hangars at the base. The SEC filed suit in federal district court against the city, the authority, the authority executive director, the city’s director of economic development, the bond underwriter, and its principals, asserting claims for violations of Rule 10b-5 and Section 17(a) and aiding and abetting. The court denied the defendants’ motion to dismiss last November, and the case is currently in discovery.  Notably, in denying the authority’s motion to dismiss, the court accepted the SEC’s argument that the alleged knowledge of the city’s economic development director that the value of the hangars was overstated should also be attributed to the authority, because he was the authority’s agent for the content of the bond offering statement.  See SEC v. City of Victorville, No. ED CV13-00776 JAK (DTBx), 2013 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 164530 (C.D. Cal. Nov. 14, 2013).
  • In re West Clark Community Schools.  In July 2013 the SEC charged an Indiana school district and its municipal bond underwriter with falsely representing to bond investors that the school district was in compliance with its obligations under previous bond offerings, even though it had failed to file required annual financial information and notices. In settling these charges, the SEC required the school district to adopt enhanced disclosure and compliance policies and procedures and to provide annual training for personnel involved in the bond offering and disclosure process. The SEC also required the underwriter to pay approximately $580,000 in disgorgement and penalties for its failure to conduct adequate due diligence and providing improper gifts and gratuities to municipal issuers.  As noted above, the SEC has cited this case as an example of its readiness to bring enforcement actions concerning inaccurate statements about compliance with disclosure obligations.
  • SEC v. City of Miami.  In this well-publicized case, the SEC charged the City of Miami and its former budget director with securities fraud and negligence, alleging that they had misled the investing public about certain interfund transfers from the city’s capital improvement fund to its general fund in connection with municipal bonds issued in 2009. The SEC alleged that the transfers were undertaken to conceal deficits in the city’s general fund, without disclosing that the transfers involved restricted funds that were dedicated to specific capital projects.  The SEC’s complaint also charged the city with violating a 2003 SEC Cease-and-Desist Order based on earlier misconduct. A federal district court in Miami denied the defendants’ motions to dismiss the SEC suit in December.  As in the Victorville case, the court held that the alleged knowledge of the city’s budget director (whom the city characterized as a “low-level employee”) should be attributed to the city itself.  See SEC v. City of Miami, No. 13-22600-CIV-ALTONAGA, 2013 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 180704, 2013 WL 6842072 (S.D. Fla. Dec. 27, 2013).
  • In re the City of South Miami, Florida. In addition to its action against Miami, the SEC also instituted proceedings in an entirely separate matter against the neighboring city of South Miami.  South Miami obtained tax-exempt conduit bond financing through the Florida Municipal Loan Council (FMLC) for a mixed-use retail and parking structure in its downtown commercial district. However, according to the SEC, the city failed to disclose that it had jeopardized the tax-exempt status of the bonds by loaning proceeds from an earlier bond offering to the developer and restructuring a related lease agreement. The SEC also found that the city misrepresented that it was in compliance with the tax-exemption requirements of its loan agreement with the FMLC. After the city settled related tax issues with the IRS, the SEC instituted administrative proceedings against the city.  To settle the SEC proceeding, the city agreed to retain an independent consultant for three years to review its policies and procedures regarding its municipal securities disclosures, and to implement the consultant’s recommendations.

Mintz, Levin, Cohn, Ferris, Glovsky and Popeo, P.C.
Wednesday, April 9, 2014

©1994-2014 Mintz, Levin, Cohn, Ferris, Glovsky and Popeo, P.C. All Rights Reserved.




BondView Releases Free Historical Municipal Bond Pricing Data.

NEW YORK, April 8, 2014 /PRNewswire/ – BondView (www.bondview.com), the leading investor resource for municipal bond information, has made available free historical pricing information for all 1.8 million municipal bonds.  This information is being released just in time for tax season, so that retail investors, accountants and financial advisors can more easily obtain historical muni bond prices.

BondView has quickly become the world’s leading free website for accurate municipal bond information and is used daily by thousands of individual retail investors and their advisors. Leading users include Morgan Stanley, Wells Fargo, Fidelity, MetLife, Price Waterhouse, Harvard University, the Securities & Exchange Commission and the US Department of Treasury.

Why Are Free Historical Bond Prices Hard To Find?

While the average investor can easily find historical stock prices, investors often become frustrated when searching for historical muni bond prices.

The difficulty in finding historical pricing information http://bondview.com/pricecheck/historical_estimated_price/79854SAS8 is because most bonds trade infrequently. Typically less than 1.5% of all municipal bonds trade on a given day making it nearly impossible for an investor to find a timely historical trade as a reference point to then determine an accurate price.

Robert Kane, CEO of BondView, said “Accountants, estate planners and trust departments need accurate historical bond prices going back many years  for tax purposes.”

Steve McLaughlin, Portfolio Manager, at Granite Springs Asset Management (http://www.granite-springs.com/who-we-are.html#stevemclaughlin) said, “BondView addresses a major obstacle in our market which is fair pricing and liquidity measurement. There are over 50,000 issuers of municipal bonds, 1.8 million outstanding cusips and on most days no more than 1.5 percent of the outstanding bonds trade.”

For those bonds that don’t trade frequently, BondView’s algorithmic model provides estimated prices by reviewing the trading of similar bonds by features including coupon, maturity, sector, rating, state and tax treatment.

BondView’s pricing algorithms are calculated based on Financial Accounting Standards Board guidelines (Topic 820 formerly known as FAS 157) and have been back tested across an extensive repository of municipal bond data. The result is dependable pricing.

“Up until a few years ago, you just had the traditional well established companies that supplied pricing matrixes to the industry. A new independent unbiased firm that provides a new set of eyes using different methodology is a welcomed addition,” said McLaughlin.

BondView will also soon release its new real-time early warning system to monitor investors’ bond portfolios. This new service tracks bonds and alerts users to significant changes in estimated price, yield, spread, defaults and bond maturity. The early warning system helps investors and their advisors make more informed decisions. BondView offers free professional level features to all investors including Stress Testing, Gain/Loss Harvesting, Portfolio Report Cards and Portfolio Analysis tools.

About Us – BondView (www.bondview.com) is a leading advocate for market transparency and our mission is to promote smart, informed decision making by municipal bond investors and their advisors.

CONTACT:
Lisa Hendrickson
BondView, LLC
866.261.9533
Email




California Preparing for Self-Driving Cars by 2015.

Self-driving cars sound like fantasy to many, but regulators are laying the groundwork for the technology to hit the roads next year. 

Autonomous vehicles are headed for the commercial market, and they may find their way onto our roadways as early as 2015.

But that reality would require a huge rework of today’s operational regulations for personal vehicles — and the California Department of Motor Vehicles (CA DMV) is moving fast to see that it does in fact become reality. Accounting for the multitude of issues and conflicts with existing regulations is a big job, so the CA DMV is looking to the public for help. On March 11, the department workshopped its regulations at its headquarters in Sacramento, where representatives of industry, advocacy groups and the public met and discussed what the future of autonomous vehicles will look like.

The workshop, a recording of which is available on Google+, was attended by Google; automakers like Volkswagen Group, Mercedes and Chrysler; and third-party manufacturers like Garmin and TomTom. IT Security and privacy advocacy groups were also represented, along with some members of the public, both through a Google Plus webcast and in person.

“They [the automakers] want to come to California because there are 38 million people in California and they see the market,” he said. “They see the different terrains. There are mountains, beaches, deserts, forests — there are all of the different climates, and all of the different roadways. There are rural roads, and congested city streets.”

Getting autonomous vehicles launched commercially is a huge job because of all the factors at work, which include privacy, security, safety, liability, proper usage and standardization, but Soriano said the DMV will reveal a draft of the regulations in June or July in a hearing where the public will have a chance to see what the rules are going to look like, and then weigh in on them. The public will have a chance to formally address the regulations and influence them, Soriano said, noting that the public already hasinfluenced the DMV’s work through participation in online communities on Reddit, Twitter, Google Plus and LinkedIn.

“They’ve heavily influenced what we brought up and what we discussed at the workshop,” Soriano said. “The things that are brought up online, we monitor this; people come up with ideas that we are actively discussing.”

One discussion on Reddit received more than 700 comments from users who had questions, suggestions and concerns about the upcoming regulations. As with all things technology, the issue of privacy is one of the prominent concerns with autonomous vehicles. In this vein, Consumer Watchdog, a nonprofit advocacy group, told the DMV on March 11 that new driverless car regulations must protect privacy.

“The DMV regulations must give the user control over what data is gathered and how the information will be used,” said Privacy Project Director John M. Simpson. “The DMV’s autonomous vehicle regulations must provide that driverless cars gather only the data necessary to operate the vehicle and retain that data only as long as necessary for the vehicle’s operation.”

And Soriano is well aware that privacy is a main concern. “What information is being collected by these automobiles and who has access to that information?” Soriano explained rhetorically. “Who owns that information? How is that information going to be used other than the operation of the vehicle?”

People are talking about the good and bad uses of such data, Soriano said. A good use might be insurance companies taking a vehicle’s driving habit data and applying it to the owner’s rates in some yet-to-be-determined way, while a bad use could be if a user’s Google habits somehow influenced his navigation software’s decision-making, Soriano said. Hypothetically, a person who frequently Googles hamburger restaurants might find her car’s navigation system taking her on detours through her town’s hamburger district — if advertisers greased the right palms (with money, not hamburgers).

“It’s not like you can go across the street to Joe Bob’s Garage and say, ‘Hey, can you certify that this thing is safe?’ There’s no industry for that,” Soriano said.

Cybersecurity as it pertains to personal vehicles faces a similar problem. There simply aren’t many practical studies of the challenges facing cybersecurity in autonomous vehicles, and how could there be? The vehicles don’t yet exist in the numbers that they presumably someday will. “it’s going to be difficult at best to try to regulate some of these things,” Soriano said.

There is also the task of deconflicting existing regulations with the use autonomous vehicles. As this technology rolls out, vehicle code will need to adapt, but right now there are a lot of question marks, Soriano said.

“Potentially these things could roll out, and if the vehicle code doesn’t change, it still will be illegal for you to text and talk on the phone while you’re in these vehicles” he said. “But that doesn’t make sense, so we’re thinking of all these things that need to be changed.”

Another big issue, which was raised by at least one Reddit user, is whether it will be permissible to drink and ride in an autonomous vehicle. Some vehicles are semi-autonomous, allowing for user operation on demand, while others are completely autonomous. Some support the idea of only embracing fully autonomous vehicles with an eye on what are estimated as large benefits.

“One of the primary functions of self-driving cars will be to transport people who cannot drive, whether they be too elderly, too young, visually impaired, and most importantly, inebriated,” one Reddit user wrote. “We have the potential with SDCs to wipe out drunk driving in a generation.”

One of the biggest hurdles when it comes to issues such as these, Soriano said, pertains to public perception and acceptance of new technologies and the cultural shifts they often bring about. Some people might not like the idea of people getting drunk in their cars, even if it were found to be safe. But that’s something that will change over time, he noted, and their regulations will continue to change as well.

“What we produce at the end of this year,” Soriano said, “is not going to be the end all to be all.”

Colin Wood  |  Staff Writer


Colin has been writing for Government Technology since 2010. He lives in Seattle with his wife and their dog. He can be reached at cwood@govtech.com.




EO Update: e-News for Charities & Nonprofits - April 17, 2014

  1.  Register for the Form 990 Filing Tips webcast presentationThursday, May 8, 2 pm, ETTopics include:

  • Preparing the Form 990-series return
  • Managing legal risks more effectively
  • Avoiding penalties
  • Explaining Unrelated Business Income
  • Highlighting online resources
  • Promoting EO resources

To receive CE credit (and a certificate of completion) you must view the presentation for a minimum of 50 minutes.

Register here.


  2.  IRS Commissioner speaks at National Press Club


Read the April 2 speech by John A. Koskinen.


  3.  IRS issues guidance on treatment of unrelated business income of state chartered credit


This memo provides directions to examiners in the processing of unrelated business income tax issues of organizations described in section 501(c)(14)(A) of the Internal Revenue Code.


  4.  Don’t include Social Security numbers on publicly disclosed forms


Because the IRS is required to disclose approved exemption applications and information returns, tax-exempt organizations should not include personal information, such as Social Security numbers, on these forms.


  5.  IRS phone forum Q&As/presentations posted


See responses to inquiries from attendees of these recent phone forums:

  • Good Governance Makes Sense for Charitable Organizations
  • ABCs of Charitable Contributions for 501(c)(3) Organizations

Review recently posted phone forum presentations posted on the
IRS Stay Exempt Resource Library page:

  • Charities and Their Volunteers
  • 501(c)(7) Social Clubs: What they need to know to qualify for and maintain tax-exempt status
  • Exempt Organizations and Employment Issues

  6.  Register for EO workshop


Register for our upcoming workshop for small and medium-sized
501(c)(3) organizations on:

  • April 30 – Provo, UT
    Hosted by Brigham Young University – Marriott School

If you have a technical or procedural question relating to Exempt Organizations, visit theCharities and Nonprofits homepage on the IRS.gov Web site.

If you have a specific question about exempt organizations, call EO Customer Account Services at 1-877-829-5500.




Dane County, Wis. Hopes Pre-Alerts Will Cut 911 Response Times.

The 911 center board unanimously approved a 90-day pilot program that would add pre-alerting for additional types of emergencies.

Amid continuing concerns about dispatch times, the Dane County 911 center will soon start having dispatchers alert responders more quickly for more types of serious emergencies.

The 911 center board on Wednesday unanimously approved a 90-day pilot program for so-called “pre-alerting” that would begin May 5.

Currently, the 911 center sends fire, EMS or police personnel quickly after obtaining location, name, phone number and nature of a problem for only a handful of emergencies. After that rapid dispatch, call takers continue to get further information. For other calls, 911 center staff ask more questions before dispatching personnel so the right resources are sent.

The current rapid-dispatch emergencies are a person on fire, trapped in a sinking vehicle, choking or not breathing; a vehicle in flood water or with accelerator stuck and unable to stop; or an active assailant. With the new pre-alerting, a rapid-fire dispatch would also be made for structure, outdoor or vehicle fires, and “significant” rescues.

The move comes six weeks after County Executive Joe Parisi announced pre-alerting should begin for Madison and other interested jurisdictions on March 31. The board, however, on March 19, indefinitely delayed Parisi’s bid over concerns by Madison fire and police officials and others about the method of pre-alerting Parisi sought and his failure to consult with responders before announcing the move.

Amid the delay, a subcommittee that had already been studying pre-alerting made recommendations that were then approved by the broader Operating Practices Committee and forwarded to the full, Madison-dominated board for a decision, which was unanimous and without discussion.

“The practice of pre-alerting had the chance to be vetted by the right committees,” Madison Fire Chief Steven Davis said later.

Madison police support the move for the same reason, and will monitor the pilot to see if more types of calls, such as a robbery in progress, would be appropriate for pre-alerting, Lt. Carl Strasburg said.

John Dejung, 911 center director, said that pre-alerting makes sense for the new fire emergencies included and that the system isn’t much different than the one Parisi promoted in early March. The main difference is that vehicle accidents with apparent injuries were not included, he said.

Maple Bluff Fire Chief Josh Ripp, who led the meeting because Chairman Paul Skidmore was absent, said he expects scrutiny of the pilot to detect unintended consequences.

Parisi is glad to see the board, the only governing body that currently has authority to make changes to the 911 center, is moving forward on pre-alert, spokeswoman Casey Becker said later. The county executive believes it’s important to continue to take a look at the board’s governance structure and determine which model best serves an agency, which works for 85 departments every day.

The board’s decision Wednesday is the latest development in a recent spat between Madison, the county and others over dispatch times. The dispute has been over technology and protocols, not the work of call takers or dispatchers.

Also at the meeting, recently retired dispatcher Debra Julian read a prepared statement voicing a lack of confidence in Dejung on staffing, training and other matters, and urged the board to recommend replacing him when his contract expires in June. The board did not ask Gillian any questions, and Dejung later declined comment on her statement.

The board also heard more concerns about a new computer-aided dispatch, CAD, system launched a year ago and continuing problems and fixes.

“It’s better than it was,” Dejung said. “We still have a long way to go.”

BY DEAN MOSIMAN, MCCLATCHY NEWS SERVICE / APRIL 17, 20140

© 2014 The Wisconsin State Journal (Madison, Wis.)




Bloomberg: Detroit Seeks Creditor Votes With ‘Divide and Conquer.’

Detroit’s “divide-and-conquer” campaign to build support for its plan to shrink $18 billion in debt with a recent series of creditor accords may put pressure on holdouts to settle before a bankruptcy judge decides to push it through, lawyers following the case said.

“‘Divide and conquer’ does seem to be the strategy that the city is pursuing, which is often a fear of creditors,” said George South, an attorney with DLA Piper LLP in New York, alluding to how the city has methodically reached agreements with individual creditor groups in its quest to resolve the biggest municipal bankruptcy in U.S. history by year’s end.

Under a proposal announced April 15, Detroit’s emergency manager, Kevyn Orr, agreed to pay retired city police officers and firefighters their full monthly pensions. Hours later, the pension system for general employees, such as city hall clerks and street workers, said it, too, had settled with Orr.

Those accords followed an agreement last week that would pay investors who hold unlimited general obligation bonds 74 percent of what they are owed. Holders of limited GO bonds would get only 15 percent under Orr’s debt-adjustment plan.

Today, Orr will ask U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes to approve a disclosure statement explaining the debt-adjustment plan to creditors and to send the plan out for a vote. Should Rhodes approve the requests, creditors would have May and June to vote. Rhodes would hear arguments on the plan in July.

‘Freight Train’

Trying to pick off creditors one deal at a time is an often-used strategy in bankruptcy, said Dale Ginter, a lawyer who represented creditors in Vallejo, California’s bankruptcy case. The strategy works by pushing creditors to compromise before a company or city can build up enough support to convince a judge that any remaining holdouts should be overruled, he said.

“We use the phrase, ‘The confirmation freight train coming down the track,’” Ginter said. “The judge has a natural inclination, if there is any way possible, to confirm a plan supported by creditors. The remaining objectors can get run over, even if they feel they have strong legal arguments on their side.”

The strategy does carry some risks, though.

“With every deal you make, it becomes more difficult to settle with the remaining creditors because they want at least as much,” said Ginter, with Downey Brand LLP in Sacramento, California. “And if they don’t get it, you end up giving them an argument for unfair discrimination,” when the plan goes before a judge for approval.

‘Unfair Discrimination’

The “unfair discrimination” standard in federal bankruptcy law typically requires similar creditors to be paid the same. In response to divide and conquer, creditors often “try to form alliances, when possible,” South said.

South and Ginter aren’t involved in Detroit’s bankruptcy.

Under the tentative agreements announced April 15, police and firefighters would get their full monthly pensions instead of being asked to accept a 6 percent cut, while pensions for general workers would fall by 4.5 percent instead of 26 percent, according to a person familiar with the talks.

The city confirmed the general employees’ offer in the latest version of its disclosure statement, filed last night.

Detroit entered bankruptcy in July, saying it couldn’t meet financial obligations and provide essential services. Since then, the city and creditors including bond insurers, public pension systems and unions have negotiated over cuts.

Art Shield

State political leaders and a group of foundations have promised to give the city $816 million to bolster its two underfunded pensions, but only if it can win support from employees and shield the city-owned artwork housed at the Detroit Institute of Arts from being sold to pay creditors.

About 30,000 retired city workers and current employees will be asked to vote on the deal. To lock in the money, a majority of those voting in each employee group must approve the city’s plan, and that majority must hold two-thirds of the claims of those voting.

Should enough retirees reject the plan, general workers would see their pension cut by about one-third and police and firefighters by 14 percent.

No matter how many deals Detroit makes to trim debt, it will still need to get creditors, especially police officers and firefighters, to support a longer-term plan if the city is to recover, said Jim Spiotto, a bankruptcy attorney with Chapman Strategic Advisors LLC.

“The debt adjustment is not curing the problem,” Spiotto said. Boosting investment in the city, to improve services and attract businesses, “is the real solution,” he said. “The adjustment just gives you more breathing room.”

By Steven Church  Apr 17, 2014 5:37 AM PT

The case is In re City of Detroit, 13-bk-53846, U.S. Bankruptcy Court, Eastern District of Michigan(Detroit).

To contact the reporter on this story: Steven Church in Wilmington, Delaware atschurch3@bloomberg.net

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Andrew Dunn at adunn8@bloomberg.net Stephen Farr, Fred Strasser




Housing Finance At A Glance: A Monthly Chartbook.

 




Local Governments Expand Incentive Programs for Technology Companies.

Incentives are taxpayer backed programs used to influence business decisions and spur company investment or job creation in specific locations. Incentive use has expanded tremendously over the past several years, though the exact amount of money devoted to incentives is unknown.

We do know that incentives are no longer reserved for special, targeted projects, but are offered to entities of all types and sizes. They include bonds, grants, investments, loans, and tax breaks. They might be used to provide capital, reduce taxes, prepare or purchase a facility or site, build or extend infrastructure, or recruit and train a workforce.

Over the past few weeks several communities in the Greater Washington region have either proposed or implemented changes to their incentives policies in the hopes of attracting more technology companies. Here is a quick rundown of some of their actions:

Arlington, VA: Proposed expanding the definition of eligible businesses that can take advantage of Technology Zone incentives that reduce the Business Professional and Occupational License tax on gross receipts. If implemented, smaller business (<100 workers) and expanding firms (not just new businesses) in a broader set of technology fields will be eligible for a 50% rate reduction ($0.18 instead of $0.36) in all 4 of the County’s Technology Zones.

Digital DC: The District of Columbia has committed $1 million to a venture fund that would provide $25k-$250k grants to early stage tech entrepreneurs locating in a designated corridor in the city. These businesses would also be eligible for funding for building rehabilitation or office construction. Digital DC adds to existing DC Tech Incentives and incubator/accelerator programs supported by the city.

Prince George’s County, MD: Approved creation of a science and technology business districtin order to create jobs by providing tax incentives, streamlining permitting and approvals, and fostering collaboration among academia, government and industry. The district in the northwestern portion of the County includes College Park (University of Maryland), Greenbelt (NASA Goddard Space Flight Center) and Beltsville (USDA).

Alexandria, VA: A Business Tax Reform Task Force has as one of its objectives to “identify revenue or other incentives that the City can deploy to attract businesses and encourage beneficial development aligning with the City’s Strategic Plan.”

Incentives have become more important to business investment decisions and the day-to-day work of economic development. We founded Smart Incentives because we believe it is vital for state and local leaders to have access to high-quality business intelligence, data and analytical tools to make the best decisions for their community.

Smart Incentives helps communities make sound decisions throughout the economic development incentives process. We serve cities and economic development organizations by providing in-depth business research on companies seeking incentives and business case analyses for incentive projects. Smart Incentives is also at the forefront of efforts to develop better processes for monitoring compliance and evaluating the effectiveness of incentive programs.

Ellen Harpel is President of Business Development Advisors (BDA) and Founder of Smart Incentives. She has over 17 years of experience in the economic development field, working with leaders at the local, state and national levels to increase business investment and job growth in their communities. 

Contact: eharpel@businessdevelopmentadvisors.com orellen@smartincentives.org. Follow Ellen on Twitter @SmartIncentives.

APRIL 14, 2014




WSJ: Judge Orders Detroit Into Mediation Over Regional Water Authority.

Bankrupt City Ordered to Reach Agreement with Surrounding Suburbs

DETROIT—A federal judge Thursday ordered this bankrupt city into mediation with its suburbs to reach an agreement on a new regional water authority to oversee water and sewer services currently provided by the city.Months of direct talks between the city of Detroit and the surrounding Wayne, Oakland and Macomb counties has failed to produce an agreement on a new authority. But U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes said a regional authority could still be in the best interest of the city and its suburbs.

“I also have a sense that this bankruptcy offers a unique opportunity for the creation of that regional authority,” Judge Rhodes said. “If we do not take advantage of that unique opportunity, the opportunity in all likelihood will be lost forever.”

Direct talks broke down last month and the city started seeking proposals from private companies to run and potentially buy the regional water and sewer system. It is unclear whether the city will continue the privatization process as the closed-door mediations begin.

The move to regionalize one of the nation’s largest water systems comes as Detroit considers unloading assets to complete its debt-cutting plan, which creditors are expected to vote on later this spring.

After a year in office, Detroit Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr had said an outright sale of Detroit’s water department, which serves nearly 40% of Michigan’s population, is unlikely. He prefers a plan that calls for leasing the water system to a new regional authority, which he estimates would bring the city $47 million a year for 40 years. The money could help boost financial recovery for the city’s creditors and plans by the city for reinvestment in municipal services.

But suburban leaders so far have balked at their potential share of costs for system improvements and unpaid water bills. It is still possible the city-owned system could continue to be run as a municipal department from Detroit.

The Detroit Water and Sewerage Department provides about 600 million gallons of water a day to Detroit and 127 suburban communities in seven counties. It has nearly $1 billion in annual revenue.

By

MATTHEW DOLAN

April 17, 2014 10:29 a.m. ET

Write to Matthew Dolan at matthew.dolan@wsj.com




GASB Issues Concepts Statement on Measurement of Assets and Liabilities.

Norwalk, CT, April 14, 2014—The Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB) today issued Concepts Statement No. 6, Measurement of Elements of Financial Statements, which will guide the GASB in establishing accounting and financial reporting standards for U.S. state and local governments regarding the measurement of assets and liabilities.

Concepts Statement 6 augments the framework the Board employs in order to promote consistency in setting accounting and financial reporting standards and is primarily intended for the Board’s use. The new concepts also may benefit preparers and auditors of financial statements when evaluating transactions for which there are no existing standards.

“Measurement is an integral component of a fully developed GASB conceptual framework,” said GASB Chairman David A. Vaudt. “Our stakeholders should be able to count on the GASB’s standards consistently addressing financial transactions and other events in a similar manner. The conceptual framework helps to promote that consistency.”

Measurement Approaches

Concepts Statement 6 establishes concepts that will inform the GASB’s decisions when setting future standards for how state and local governments determine the dollar amount at which to report assets and liabilities.

It establishes two approaches to measuring assets and liabilities—initial amounts and remeasured amounts. Initial amounts are determined at the time an asset is acquired or a liability is incurred. Remeasured amounts are determined as of the date of each year’s financial statements.

Measurement Attributes

Concepts Statement 6 also establishes four measurement attributes—the characteristics of an asset or liability that is being measured:

The full text of Concepts Statement 6 is available on the GASB website.

About the Governmental Accounting Standards Board 

The GASB is the independent, not-for-profit organization formed in 1984 that establishes and improves financial accounting and reporting standards for state and local governments. Its seven members are drawn from the Board’s diverse constituency, including preparers and auditors of government financial statements, users of those statements, and members of the academic community. More information about the GASB can be found at its website, www.gasb.org.




SIFMA US Municipal Credit Report, First Quarter 2014.

About the Report

The municipal bond credit report is a quarterly report on the trends and statistics of U.S. municipal bond market, both taxable and tax-exempt. Issuance volumes, outstanding, credit spreads, highlights and commentary are included.

Summary

According to Thomson Reuters, long-term public municipal issuance volume totaled $60.4 billion in the first quarter of 2014, a decline of 17.7 percent and 25.7 percent, respectively, from the prior quarter ($73.4 billion) and year-over-year (y-o-y) ($81.3 billion). Year to date, first quarter issuance figures are well below the 10-year average of $83.7 billion. Including private placements ($2.2 billion), long-term municipal issuance for 1Q’14 was $62.6 billion.

Tax-exempt issuance totaled $53.6 billion in 1Q’14, a decline of 16.1 percent and 21.3 percent q-o-q and y-o-y, respectively. Taxable issuance totaled $5.5 billion in 1Q’14, a decline of 16.0 percent and 48.7 percent q-o-q and y o y, respectively. AMT issuance was $1.3 billion, a decline of 55.2 percent and 47.6 percent, q-o-q and y-o-y.

By use of proceeds, general purpose led issuance totals in 1Q’13 ($19.6 billion), followed by primary & secondary education ($10.5 billion), and water & sewer facilities ($5.6 billion).

Refunding volumes as a percentage of issuance remained largely the same as the prior quarter, with 30.1 percent of issuance compared to 30.2 percent in 4Q’13 used to refund debt.

 US Municipal Bond Credit Report, First Quarter 2014 (PDF)



MSRB Proposes Professional Qualification Requirements for Municipal Advisors.

Alexandria, VA – The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (MSRB) today requested public comment on a proposal to establish qualification requirements for municipal advisor professionals. The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act charged the MSRB with developing professional standards for municipal advisors to enhance protections for state and local governments.

“The creation of a professional qualifications program for municipal advisors is a key step toward safeguarding the interests of state and local governments that engage the services of municipal advisors,” said MSRB Executive Director Lynnette Kelly. “Individuals entrusted with providing financial advice to state and local governments will be required to demonstrate both an understanding of the business and regulatory requirements.”

The MSRB’s proposal would amend its existing rule on qualification requirements for personnel of municipal securities dealers to incorporate requirements for municipal advisor professionals. The draft amendments to MSRB Rule G-3 add registration classifications for municipal advisors to distinguish between those who engage in municipal advisory activities—municipal advisor representatives—and those who engage in their management, direction or supervision—municipal advisor principals.

Under the draft amendments to Rule G-3, municipal advisor representatives would be required to take and pass a professional qualification test to demonstrate a minimum level of competency before providing or continuing to provide financial advisory services to state and local governments. The MSRB is proposing a one-year grace period for all individuals currently engaged in municipal advisory activities to take and pass the test.

“Given the significant changes that accompany a new regulatory regime, the MSRB believes it is important for all municipal advisor representatives, regardless of their years of experience or other certifications, to take the exam,” Kelly said.

Next steps in the development of the test include a survey of municipal advisors on their core activities to further inform the MSRB on the areas to be tested and the preparation of a study outline, which will be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). The MSRB anticipates implementing a pilot exam in 2015.

The MSRB earlier this year requested comment on a proposal to establish core standards of conduct for municipal advisors and supervisory and compliance obligations. Future MSRB rule proposals for municipal advisors will include measures to address the potential for pay-to-play activities by municipal advisors; limitations on gifts and gratuities to employees of municipal securities issuers and other market participants; and duties of municipal advisors acting as solicitors. The MSRB also plans to implement a per-professional fee of $300 for municipal advisors to begin to fairly distribute assessments across all regulated entities.

While the majority of the draft amendments to MSRB Rule G-3 are targeted toward municipal advisors, the MSRB also proposes to eliminate the practice of apprenticeship, which required municipal securities representatives to shadow an experienced professional for 90 days before conducting business with the public. This change aligns with trends in other regulatory regimes toward allowing firms to identify appropriate training and supervision for new employees.

Comments on the draft amendments should be submitted to the MSRB no later than May 16, 2014. The MSRB is hosting an educational webinar on the main aspects of the municipal advisor professional qualification requirements on April 3, 2014 at 3:00 p.m. ET. Register for the webinar.




MSRB to Implement New MSRB Rule A-11 Establishing Fees for Municipal Advisor Professionals.

The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (MSRB) today filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) a new rule to implement an annual fee of $300 per municipal advisor professional.Under the new MSRB Rule A-11, registered municipal advisors will be assessed this per-professional fee to help defray the costs and expenses of operating and administering the MSRB, particularly the increased costs associated with the regulation of municipal advisors.While the new rule is effective immediately, the first fees do not become due until the second half of 2014 in parallel with the SEC’s phased-in compliance period for the permanent registration of municipal advisors.

View the rule filing or read the regulatory notice.




NYT: Pensioners in Detroit Rejoice, Though Deal Is Far From Done.

DETROIT — The relief was palpable.

“My pension is my life,” Thomas Berry, a retired police detective, said on Wednesday, reacting to tentative deals that were struck between Detroit, the city’s pension funds and a retirees’ group that would mean no cuts to his current pension checks, though a reduction in annual cost of living increases. “I’m O.K. with that,” Mr. Berry said, “because a month ago, we were going to lose everything.”

A day after Detroit scaled back from the large pension benefit cuts it had once been proposing, the bankrupt city fended off charges from some that it had simply caved in to retirees in ways that could come back to haunt it. But it also felt the elation of many of its current and former employees who for months had feared a more dire outcome.

How it happened is the story of an effort to protect as much as possible the workers and retirees who have been the backbone of the city’s working and middle class. The deal was eased by a decision to project better pension fund returns because of the stock market’s performance last year, and fears by the workers’ negotiators that if they did not accept the agreement the terms would get worse.

“This is not so much a settlement as a reinstatement; it’s a complete and total capitulation to retired pensioners to secure their plan support,” said Stephen Spencer, a financial adviser to the Financial Guaranty Insurance Company, one of Detroit’s more than 100,000 creditors.

The city’s public shift in its posture on pensions this week seemed sudden and puzzling to some who wondered how a city could suddenly afford so much more than before.

As recently as two weeks ago, Detroit officials, who say the city’s unfunded pension liabilities amount to $3.5 billion of the city’s $18 billion in debts, had revised their estimates of how pensions might be cut, and at that point the cuts threatened to go even deeper than in their earlier proposals.

Because of differences in funding levels in the city’s two pension funds, retired firefighters and police officers had been expected to see cuts between 6 and 14 percent, while other retirees were told to prepare for cuts between 26 percent and 34 percent.

“Ultimately, in any bankruptcy, it’s about negotiating and positioning,” said Craig A. Barbarosh, a bankruptcy lawyer from Katten Muchin Rosenman who is based in Costa Mesa, Calif. “All along discussions were going on.”

Mr. Barbarosh represents a few creditors in the case but is not involved in talks over pensions.

The city gained flexibility, in part, by agreeing to assume a higher rate of investment return by the funds themselves. Projecting a rate of return is an essential part of fiscal policy, but experts often debate what is both realistic and sustainable for public pensions, and the federal bankruptcy judge in the case will be the ultimate arbiter. The city initially factored in rates of 6.25 percent and 6.5 percent for the two funds, but eventually agreed that the funds could be presumed to do better — 6.75 percent — because of an improved outlook based on the funds’ 2013 performance as compared with 2012.

In addition, the city has factored into the new agreement a separate, unusual deal that would save the collection of the Detroit Institute of Artsand would add more than $800 million to the pensions with money from charitable foundations and the state, which has yet to approve the funds.

“This is a dynamic process that changes day by day,” said Bill Nowling, a spokesman for Kevyn D. Orr, the emergency manager who is leading Detroit through its bankruptcy and who filed a revised plan with the court on Wednesday for Detroit’s exit from bankruptcy. “As we get more information — good or bad — we adjust.”

On the other side, for the retirees and their negotiators, there was pressure to accept a deal for fear that a better one might not come along, and that this one might soon be pulled from the table.

The offer certainly had its downsides for retirees. Some would see cuts to their pension checks as high as 4.5 percent, would probably lose cost of living increases entirely, and say they expect vastly diminished health care benefits.

Steven W. Rhodes, the federal bankruptcy judge in the case, has urged all parties to negotiate in recent days. Judge Rhodes ruled last December against the pension funds, which had argued that the state’s Constitution protected them from cuts. But he was also solicitous in allowing groups of ordinary retirees and workers to come before the court to argue that their benefits should be retained.

Some of the city’s financial creditors have been asked to accept 15 cents on the dollar for debts owed them, and the arrangement with retirees was seen by some as yet another sign that Detroit leaders were leaning in favor of Main Street over Wall Street as they searched for a way to resolve their $18 billion in debt and remake the city.

Not all retirees here were pleased with the tentative arrangement. Some say any pension cuts are unacceptable and object to seeing retired firefighters and police officers receive better deals than other workers.

“I did my part,” said Connie Lewis, who retired after 28 years as a 911 operator and supervisor and could expect to see a 4.5 percent cut to her payments. “Now not only do they want to take back what I’ve already earned, but they want to make it appear like it’s my fault.”

Uncertain, so far, is what a court-appointed committee of retirees and city union leaders, who were still negotiating with the city, think of the deal. But many seemed mainly surprised — and relieved.

“It’s a big burden lifted off your shoulders that now, after working all these years, you don’t have to fight for your pension, that you already worked for, that was promised to you,” said Roslyn Banks, a retired Detroit police sergeant, who was sitting with other police retirees when she heard the news. “There was clapping and shouting,” she said.

Jon Bozich, a Detroit firefighter who retired after 35 years with the department, said the possibility of pension cuts had been stressful, and had left him wondering how the burden could be shifted to retirees who had managed with relatively low pay, difficult conditions and Detroit’s abundance of arsons.

Of the new plan, Mr. Bozich said: “I think it will be approved overwhelmingly. Everybody was anticipating a lot worse. Everyone knew we’d have to take some cuts. The arguments were over how severe.”

In the end, though, Judge Rhodes must decide whether the city’s plans go forward. Not only will he consider whether the plan is fair to all parties, bankruptcy experts said, but he will look at whether it will truly leave Detroit leaders with a city and pensions they can afford.

By STEVEN YACCINO and 




SIFMA Supports Shorter Settlement Cycle for U.S. Equities.

The U.S. securities industry says that it supports a move to reduce systemic risk and enhance efficiency by shortening the settlement cycle to T+2 from T+3.

The U.S. industry trade association, the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association (SIFMA), announced today that it supports shortening the settlement cycle for U.S. equities, corporate bonds and municipal bonds to T+2 (trade date plus two days) from the current T+3 cycle. SIFMA says that it will work with the Depository Trust & Clearing Corporation (DTCC), which is advocating a reduced cycle, to determine the best timing for reducing the settlement cycle.

“SIFMA is committed to helping the financial industry identify new ways to improve market practices, enhance risk management, and promote efficiency. Shortening the settlement cycle could lead to important reductions in operational risk, more efficient allocation of industry capital, and streamline the clearing and settlement process,” said Kenneth Bentsen, Jr., SIFMA’s president and CEO.

While there are many potential benefits to be had, SIFMA also notes that shortening the cycle is a fundamental change that must be implemented with “great care to avoid any operational disruptions that could negatively impact investors.” It recommends that the industry, DTCC and regulators continue to work together to ensure a smooth transition to T+2.

“We are delighted that SIFMA has decided to endorse a move to T+2,” said Michael Bodson, DTCC’s president and CEO. “Our own analysis, based on comprehensive discussions with the industry and robust cost-benefit studies, indicate that a shortening of the settlement cycle for U.S. equities, municipal and corporate bonds and unit investment trusts will drive down industry risk exposures and lead to greater efficiency. We look forward to working with the industry on this initiative.”




WSJ: Treasury Turns Its Gaze to Municipal-Bond Market.

WASHINGTON—U.S. policy makers, concerned about strained public finances in places like Detroit and Puerto Rico, are moving to keep closer tabs on the ability of states and cities to raise money in the $3.7 trillion municipal-bond market.

The Treasury Department is forming a new unit to broadly monitor the market, with a focus on troubled borrowers, according to a Treasury official. The unit, which will be headed by a veteran public-finance banker at J.P. Morgan Chase & Co., also will track state and local pensions as well as the financing of bridges, roads and other infrastructure projects. Public-pension funding levels have been a problem area for many states and municipalities.

By boosting the department’s monitoring of municipal finance, the Treasury hopes in part to better understand the ramifications of municipal-market stresses, the official said. The unit wouldn’t have authority to write and enforce rules for the market like the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Efforts to boost oversight of the municipal-bond market have taken on new urgency in the wake of financial problems in places like Puerto Rico, which is beset by challenges including 15% unemployment and roughly $70 billion of outstanding debt.

Puerto Rico’s troubles could reverberate well beyond its borders because roughly three-quarters of municipal-bond mutual funds own some debt issued by the commonwealth. It is among the biggest issuers in the municipal-bond market due to its tax benefits and often higher yields. The Federal Reserve’s interest-rate-setting committee, meeting in January, said the commonwealth’s financing situation “needed to be watched carefully,” according to minutes of the meeting.

The SEC, which is the municipal-bond market’s primary regulator, also has ramped up its scrutiny of the sector and is conducting a review of past disclosures by financially stressed states and municipalities to determine if they may have misled investors about their financial condition, according to SEC officials.

The Treasury’s effort to gain greater insight into the municipal-bond market will be led by Kent Hiteshew, who will join the department in mid-May. Mr. Hiteshew has overseen J.P. Morgan’s relationship with its housing-sector clients and municipal borrowers in the Northeast region. A J.P. Morgan spokeswoman declined to comment on Mr. Hiteshew’s behalf.

“This office will centralize a lot of the work that is already happening across the building,” said Matthew Rutherford, the Treasury’s assistant secretary for financial markets. “It can look at various issues that arise in the municipal marketplace and make sure we understand what’s driving them.”

The municipal-bond market long has been seen by many mom-and-pop investors as a reliable source of tax-exempt income and as a vehicle for retirement savings. But that view has been rattled in recent years by episodes including the largest-ever municipal bankruptcy filing last July by Detroit and Puerto Rico’s problems.

Last month, Puerto Rico sold $3.5 billion in new bonds to help pay down existing debt, a move that bought officials time to eliminate persistent budget deficits and jump-start the economy. The bonds have fallen in price in recent days amid reports that the island hired consultants that specialize in restructuring, though island officials haven’t said they are working on a debt-restructuring plan. Credit-rating firms downgraded Puerto Rico to junk status this year.The commonwealth has said it plans to honor its obligations.

While the U.S. government has had talks with island officials about how Puerto Rico can improve its financial condition, Treasury officials have said they aren’t contemplating a federal bailout. The Treasury official said the department doesn’t have the authority to grant federal financial assistance.

Federal officials have sought to boost their oversight of the municipal-bond market in the wake of the financial crisis, when a contraction in state and local income-tax receipts squeezed municipalities andthreatened the ability of some governments to fulfill their financial obligations.

The SEC, which sets disclosure rules for state and local governments that issue bonds, is pushing for additional authority from Congress to crack down on municipalities that don’t keep the public apprised of their financial health.

By

ANDREW ACKERMAN
April 16, 2014 6:39 p.m. ET

—Mike Cherney contributed to this article.

Write to Andrew Ackerman at andrew.ackerman@wsj.com




D.C. Council to Sue Mayor over How the City Spends Its Money.

The D.C. Council will sue Mayor Vincent C. Gray and the city’s chief financial officer, the council chairman said Wednesday, setting up the first such legal showdown between the city’s two branches of government in a decade.

Council Chairman Phil Mendelson (D) said the council will ask a D.C. Superior Court judge to determine whether Gray (D) and CFO Jeffrey S. DeWitt are violating a voter-approved law that allows the city to spend billions of dollars of its own money without strict congressional approval.

Under the measure approved last year — which was signed by Gray and passed a congressional review period — the District no longer needs to submit its budget to the president and Congress for approval. The process left the city vulnerable to national politics and often complicated its financial planning.

Now, the budget would pass the council, just as any other city legislation, and it would take effect unless Congress voted to reject it and the president agreed.

But last week, DeWitt joined Gray, Attorney General Irvin B. Nathan and the Government Accountability Office in saying the measure had no legal effect because it violates the city’s charter, set by Congress.

Mendelson and a team of pro bono lawyers disagree. In a suit they intend to file Thursday, the council argues that Gray and others have been relying on a flawed legal analysis in rejecting the measure.

The section of law that the measure amended, they say, was one Congress did not set in stone but left subject to ­changes.

View Full Story from The Washington Post

APRIL 17, 2014




Is the Era of Unfunded Federal Mandates Over?

The current Congress has imposed few of these costly requirements. But it may be premature for state, local and tribal governments to stop worrying.

 A Congressional Budget Office report issued in late March includes a rather surprising revelation: With the exception of the Affordable Care Act and another law affecting child nutrition passed in 2010, Congress has not passed any significant bill imposing unfunded mandates on state, local or tribal governments since 2008.

When the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act (UMRA) was passed in 1995, the problem was considered so important that the bill that became this law was the first to be introduced in the new Republican-controlled House after that party took over Congress for the first time in 40 years. The reason? Republicans desperately wanted to amend the Constitution to require a balanced federal budget, but states and localities raised concerns that the federal budget might be balanced simply by passing responsibilities — and costs — down to state and local governments.

UMRA requires the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) to disclose the cost of any mandate as defined by the law, including intergovernmental and private-sector mandates that exceed statutory thresholds, before a bill can be considered on the floor of the House or the Senate. For 2013, that threshold was $75 million for intergovernmental mandates and $150 million for private-sector mandates. The notion was that highlighting the cost would have a chilling effect on mandates.

The most striking figure in the new CBO report (which carries the not-so-catchy title of “A Review of CBO’s Activities in 2013 Under the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act”) is the small number of laws enacted in 2013 that contained intergovernmental mandates. In fact, there were only four mandates in the 72 bills that became law in 2013; none of these had costs above the threshold. One other bill — immigration legislation involving verification of employment eligibility — would have had costs exceeding the threshold, but it did not become law.

This 2013 experience compares to an average of 45 intergovernmental mandates per year in the prior four years, with only seven (in two bills, both in 2010) with costs above the statutory threshold. So, judging from the activity reported by the CBO, Congress has, for all intents and purposes, virtually stopped imposing costly mandates on state, local and tribal governments.

Further, CBO reports that only 13 laws containing 18 intergovernmental mandates above the threshold have been enacted in the 18 years since UMRA took effect. There is no record of the pace of intergovernmental mandates prior to the imposition of UMRA, but if the problem of unfunded mandates prompted the enactment of UMRA, the problem seems to have all but gone away.

There are several possible reasons for why this has occurred. First, the 1995 law simply may have worked as intended. With more information about the cost of mandates available to federal lawmakers, Congress has refrained from enacting mandates, or at least has taken action to lower the costs of the ones it does enact.

The other possible explanations suggest that more caution is in order. For one thing, it seems likely that the narrow definition of a mandate is partly at issue here. UMRA, for example, does not cover most “conditions of assistance” even if meeting those conditions might cost state and local governments a lot of money. This means that the requirements in the No Child Left Behind Act do not meet the UMRA definition of a mandate because states could (theoretically) choose to forego the federal funding. Similarly, changes to Medicaid have not been identified as mandates because large portions of the program are optional expansions that states have the authority to change. UMRA also does not cover legislation that supports the guarantee of a federal constitutional right; if UMRA had been around when the Americans with Disabilities Act was passed, for example, the requirements in that law would not have been identified as mandates.

In addition, as has been well documented, the current Congress not only has failed to pass unfunded mandates — it has failed to do lots of things. The 113th Congress passed 72 bills last year, 40 percent fewer than the number passed in 2009 and less than half of the number passed in 2005. This is a rare positive attribute of a so-called “do nothing” (or, to be fair, “do little”) Congress: no laws, no mandates.

In the future, if we return to government controlled by a single party (or even a unified Congress), state and local governments worried about unfunded mandates imposed by Washington will have to return to a vigilant stance. For the time being, however, the highly partisan and dysfunctional nature of lawmaking in Congress appears to have at least one silver lining.

BY  | APRIL 16, 2014




Good-Faith Defense Waives Attorney-Client Privilege.

Taxpayers forfeit the protection of attorney-client privilege on tax opinion letters from a law firm if they seek to avoid accuracy-related penalties by asserting affirmative defenses of good faith and state of mind, the Tax Court held April 16.

In AD Investment 2000 Fund LLC v. Commissioner, 142 T.C. No. 13 (2014), Judge James S. Halpern said that “by placing the partnerships’ legal knowledge and understanding into issue in an attempt to establish the partnerships’ reasonable legal beliefs in good faith arrived at (a good-faith and state-of-mind defense), [the taxpayers] forfeit the partnerships’ privilege protecting attorney-client communications relevant to the content and the formation of their legal knowledge, understanding, and beliefs.”

“Read broadly, the opinion suggests that asserting the reasonable belief defense to the substantial understatement penalty or the general reasonable cause and good-faith defense impliedly waives the attorney-client privilege, regardless of whether the taxpayer intends to rely on an opinion or advice of counsel for penalty protection,” said Andrew R. Roberson of McDermott Will & Emery.

“I don’t think the Tax Court had ever articulated [this position] like this before,” said Mark D. Allison of Caplin & Drysdale. “Taxpayers need to appreciate that when they are putting their belief [and] knowledge into play in litigation, it isn’t merely the specific advice or analysis they’re relying on that’s going to be relevant to the court’s analysis.” Any advice or analysis the taxpayers received or prepared, whether or not it supports their position, will come into play, he said.

“Most people probably thought that if you are not relying on particular advice that you would never have to produce it or put it in play,” Allison said. “It was always a risk in the past even if it was never stated quite this clearly.”

In consolidated cases in AD Investment 2000 Fund, the IRS sought to impose penalties on son-of-BOSS partnership tax shelters. The IRS had adjusted partnership items of two partnerships and determined that section 6662 accuracy-related penalties should apply on the underpayments of tax. The IRS sought to compel production of six opinion letters from Brown & Wood LLP telling the taxpayers it was more likely than not that the anticipated tax benefits from the transactions would be upheld for federal income tax purposes.

The taxpayers argued that they were not required to produce the opinions under the attorney-client privilege. The IRS in turn asserted that that privilege was waived by the taxpayers’ affirmative defenses against the penalty that their underpayment was due to their reasonable belief that the tax treatment was proper and their assertion that any underpayment was due to reasonable cause on which they acted in good faith.

Reg. section 1.6662-4(g)(4)(i) provides that the reasonable belief requirement is satisfied if either the taxpayer analyzes the pertinent facts and authorities and relied on the analysis to conclude that there is a greater than 50 percent likelihood that the tax treatment of the item would be upheld if challenged by the IRS (self-determination), or if the taxpayer reasonably relies in good faith on the opinion of a professional tax adviser (reliance on professional advice).

The taxpayers in AD Investment 2000 Fund asserted only self-determination in their defense against the penalty. But the IRS argued that the opinions provided by the law firm were still relevant to that defense, because if the opinions contradict the claimed self-determination, they could show it to be unreasonable, and if they are consistent with the self-determination, they could show that no self-determination was made.

The Tax Court agreed with the IRS and emphasized fairness in compelling disclosure of the opinion letters. If the petitioners are to rely on professional legal knowledge to establish that the partnerships reasonably and in good faith believed that their claimed tax treatment of the items in question was more likely than not the proper treatment, “it is only fair that respondent be allowed to inquire into the bases of that person’s knowledge, understanding, and beliefs including the opinions (if considered),” Halpern said in the opinion for the court.

“Taxpayers and their advisers will need to carefully consider the Tax Court’s analysis when responding to the assertion of penalties, both at the administrative level and in Tax Court filings,” Roberson said.

Allison said it would have been interesting to see what the Tax Court would have decided if the taxpayer asserted that the opinion letters were attorney work product. The differentiation between the attorney work product and attorney-client privileges is important in other cases, he said, noting that the work product privilege allows the court to make selective decisions about producing privileged information.

by Andrew Velarde and Matthew R. Madara




Rhode Island's Pension Battle Heads to Court.

The battle over pension changes that state lawmakers made in 2011 will be resolved not through mediation but in court, the two sides said Friday.

Ordered to resume their talks after one public employee group rejected a proposed settlement, the two sides announced on Friday afternoon that they had reached an impasse.

Each seemed to blame the other for the breakdown.

“Due to a small group of union members the settlement agreement has failed and the mediation process has ended,” Governor Chafee and General Treasurer Gina Raimondo said in a joint statement. “We find this disappointing and frustrating.”

Ray Sullivan, spokesman for the employee and retiree groups that challenged the pension overhaul, said the plaintiffs “abided by the judge’s order to explore a path to a new settlement agreement, but the state decided it would rather pursue costly and drawn out litigation.”

“We are now prepared to take the necessary steps in proceeding to trial,” Sullivan said.

Superior Court Judge Sarah Taft-Carter ordered the two sides to mediation last year, and in February, after a year of closed-door talks, the two sides announced a proposed settlement — one Raimondo said would preserve 95 percent of the savings expected from the lawmaker-approved pension overhaul.

Five of the six public employee groups involved, including teachers, state employees and firefighters, voted to approve the deal. But the smallest group, local police officers, rejected it, with more than 250 of 417 officers who were eligible to vote saying no.

On Monday, that led Taft-Carter to order the two sides to resume talks, with the understanding that they would report back to her next Monday.

Then came Friday’s announcement.

Asked why the talks ended, Chafee’s office would not comment beyond the official statement issued with Raimondo, while Raimondo’s office said only that the two sides could not “reach consensus on a way forward.”

“Both sides mediated in good faith and no reasonable solution was available,” said Raimondo spokeswoman Joy Fox.

Sullivan, meanwhile, said the state made the decision, informing “the plaintiffs” on Friday “that mediation would not continue.”

It was not clear Friday whether Taft-Carter’s gag order, which bars the parties from talking about the mediation process, was still in place. Fox and Sullivan said it is their understanding that the order remains in place, and courts spokesman Craig Berke said “there is no plan for a formal retraction of the order.” But Berke also noted that the final paragraph of the order says it remains “in effect until such time as the mediation is suspended or terminated.”

“I will not interpret what it means,” he said.

The Raimondo-led 2011 overhaul raised retirement ages, cut benefits and suspended the annual payment of “cost of living adjustments,” or COLAs, to save a projected $4 billion over two decades and more than $274 million alone during the budget year it took effect.

Labor unions sued, saying they had a contractual right to promised benefits that were substantially reduced.

The proposed settlement, announced Feb. 14, tweaked the retirement age for newer employees, increased the defined-benefit pensions available to longtime employees and provided the opportunity for more frequent pension increases, as well as an immediate bump worth up to $500.

There were also concessions that applied to local police officers. Before the 2011 overhaul, they could retire at any age after 20 or 25 years, with the number varying by community. After the 2011 overhaul, the minimum retirement age was 55, after a minimum of 25 years.

Under the proposed settlement, officers employed as of June 30, 2012, would have been allowed to retire with a full benefit at age 50, after 25 years of work, if they contributed an additional 2 percent of their pay, raising their overall contribution to 9 percent or 10 percent, depending on whether they work in a community that provides COLAs. Alternatively, they could retire at age 57, after 30 years of work, and receive a slightly larger benefit.

Both sides expressed confidence that they will prevail in court.

Sullivan said “the plaintiffs continue to believe in the fundamental strength of our legal arguments,” while Fox said the state “has strong legal arguments to support its positions and will begin to prepare for litigation.”

A trial date is set for Sept. 15.

By Randal Edgar

BY  | APRIL 15, 2014

(c)2014 The Providence Journal




S. 2203 Would Permanently Extend Build America Bonds.

S. 2203, the Bolstering Our Nation’s Deficient Structures (BONDS) Act of 2014, introduced by Sen. Edward J. Markey, D-Mass., would modify and permanently extend the tax treatment for some Build America Bonds.

 

113TH CONGRESS
2D SESSIONS. 2203To amend the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 to permanently extend
the tax treatment for certain build America bonds,
and for other purposes.

IN THE SENATE OF THE UNITED STATES

APRIL 3, 2014

Mr. MARKEY introduced the following bill; which was read twice and
referred to the Committee on Finance

A BILL

To amend the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 to permanently extend the tax treatment for certain build America bonds, and for other purposes.Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled,

SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE.

This Act may be cited as the “Bolstering Our Nation’s Deficient Structures Act of 2014” or the “BONDS Act”.

SEC. 2. BUILD AMERICA BONDS MADE PERMANENT.

(a) IN GENERAL. — Subparagraph (B) of section 54AA(d)(1) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 is amended by inserting “or during a period beginning on or after the date of the enactment of the Bolstering Our Nation’s Deficient Structures Act of 2014,” after “January 1, 2011,”.

(b) REDUCTION IN CREDIT PERCENTAGE TO BONDHOLDERS. — Subsection (b) of section 54AA of such Code is amended to read as follows:

“(b) AMOUNT OF CREDIT. —

“(1) IN GENERAL. — The amount of the credit determined under this subsection with respect to any interest payment date for a build America bond is the applicable percentage of the amount of interest payable by the issuer with respect to such date.

“(2) APPLICABLE PERCENTAGE. — For purposes of paragraph (1), the applicable percentage shall be determined under the following table:

 "In the case of a bond issued           The applicable
 during calendar year:                   percentage is:
 _____________________________________________________________________

 2009 or 2010                            35
 2014                                    31
 2015                                    30
 2016                                    29
 2017 and thereafter                     28.".

(c) SPECIAL RULES. — Subsection (f) of section 54AA of such Code is amended by adding at the end the following new paragraph:

“(3) APPLICATION OF OTHER RULES. —

“(A) IN GENERAL. — Notwithstanding any other provision of law, a build America bond shall be considered a recovery zone economic development bond (as defined in section 1400U-2) for purposes of application of section 1601 of title I of division B of Public Law 111-5 (26 U.S.C. 54C note).

“(B) PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION PROJECTS. — Recipients of any financial assistance authorized under this section that funds public transportation projects, as defined in Title 49, United States Code, must comply with the grant requirements described under section 5309 of such title.”.

(d) EXTENSION OF PAYMENTS TO ISSUERS. —

(1) IN GENERAL. — Section 6431 of such Code is amended —

(A) by inserting “or during a period beginning on or after the date of the enactment of the Bolstering Our Nation’s Deficient Structures Act of 2014,” after “January 1, 2011,” in subsection (a), and

(B) by striking “before January 1, 2011” in subsection (f)(1)(B) and inserting “during a particular period”.

(2) CONFORMING AMENDMENTS. — Subsection (g) of section 54AA of such Code is amended —

(A) by inserting “or during a period beginning on or after the date of the enactment of the Bolstering Our Nation’s Deficient Structures Act of 2014,” after “January 1, 2011,”, and

(B) by striking “QUALIFIED BONDS ISSUED BEFORE 2011” in the heading and inserting “CERTAIN QUALIFIED BONDS”.

(e) REDUCTION IN PERCENTAGE OF PAYMENTS TO ISSUERS. — Subsection (b) of section 6431 of such Code is amended —

(1) by striking “The Secretary” and inserting the following:

“(1) IN GENERAL. — The Secretary”,

(2) by striking “35 percent” and inserting “the applicable percentage”, and

(3) by adding at the end the following new paragraph:

“(2) APPLICABLE PERCENTAGE. — For purposes of this subsection, the term ‘applicable percentage’ means the percentage determined in accordance with the following table:

 "In the case of a qualified bond        The applicable
 issued during calendar year:            percentage is:
 _____________________________________________________________________

 2009 or 2010                            35
 2014                                    31
 2015                                    30
 2016                                    29
 2017 and thereafter                     28.".

(f) CURRENT REFUNDINGS PERMITTED. — Subsection (g) of section 54AA of such Code is amended by adding at the end the following new paragraph:

“(3) TREATMENT OF CURRENT REFUNDING BONDS. —

“(A) IN GENERAL. — For purposes of this subsection, the term ‘qualified bond’ includes any bond (or series of bonds) issued to refund a qualified bond if —

“(i) the average maturity date of the issue of which the refunding bond is a part is not later than the average maturity date of the bonds to be refunded by such issue,

“(ii) the amount of the refunding bond does not exceed the outstanding amount of the refunded bond, and

“(iii) the refunded bond is redeemed not later than 90 days after the date of the issuance of the refunding bond.

“(B) APPLICABLE PERCENTAGE. — In the case of a refunding bond referred to in subparagraph (A), the applicable percentage with respect to such bond under section 6431(b) shall be the lowest percentage specified in paragraph (2) of such section.

“(C) DETERMINATION OF AVERAGE MATURITY. — For purposes of subparagraph (A)(i), average maturity shall be determined in accordance with section 147(b)(2)(A).

“(D) ISSUANCE RESTRICTION NOT APPLICABLE. — Subsection (d)(1)(B) shall not apply to a refunding bond referred to in subparagraph (A).”.

(g) CLARIFICATION RELATED TO LEVEES AND FLOOD CONTROL PROJECTS. — Subparagraph (A) of section 54AA(g)(2) of such Code is amended by inserting “(including capital expenditures for levees and other flood control projects)” after “capital expenditures”.

(h) GROSS-UP OF PAYMENT TO ISSUERS IN CASE OF SEQUESTRATION. — In the case of any payment under section 6431(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 made after the date of the enactment of this Act to which sequestration applies, the amount of such payment shall be increased to an amount equal to —

(1) such payment (determined before such sequestration), multiplied by

(2) the quotient obtained by dividing 1 by the amount by which 1 exceeds the percentage reduction in such payment pursuant to such sequestration.

For purposes of this subsection, the term ‘sequestration’ means any reduction in direct spending ordered in accordance with a sequestration report prepared by the Director of the Office and Management and Budget pursuant to the Balanced Budget and Emergency Deficit Control Act of 1985 or the Statutory Pay-As-You-Go Act of 2010.

(i) EFFECTIVE DATE. — The amendments made by this section shall apply to obligations issued on or after the date of the enactment of this Act.




Detroit Pension Deal Inches City Closer to Bankruptcy Exit.

Negotiators for Detroit pension boards agreed late Tuesday to retiree benefit cuts that were dramatically lower than initially proposed, marking a watershed moment that could help resolve Detroit’s historic Chapter 9 bankruptcy and position the city to start reinvesting in services, sources familiar with the deal said.

The deal would require civilian retirees to accept 4.5% cuts to their monthly pension checks and the elimination of cost-of-living adjustment (COLA) increases, while police and fire retirees get no cuts to monthly checks but absorb a reduction in COLA increases, sources said.

“I do think with time we’re going to be pleased,” one pension official close to the talks said.

With the city’s two pension funds, two global banks and major bondholders on board with Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr’s plan, Detroit’s massive financial restructuring could now move quickly through court if Judge Steven Rhodes agrees that the roadmap is legal and feasible.

Pension board trustees must still sign off on the deal, and a U.S. government-appointed committee officially appointed to represent Detroit retirees is still weighing whether to support the city’s proposal.

But the pension deal – which comes after about 10 months of intense negotiations that included a bitter fight over the city’s eligibility for bankruptcy – leaves only a few major opponents of Detroit’s bankruptcy restructuring.

The city has about 32,000 retirees, beneficiaries and active employees entitled to pension checks.

The deal – which is not as good for general city retirees because their pension fund was not managed as well as the police and fire fund for years – could expedite Detroit’s trip through bankruptcy.

The accord would require pension board trustees and retirees to back a “grand bargain” in which the Detroit Institute of Arts would be allowed to spin off as an independent institution in exchange for $816 million over 20 years from the state of Michigan, nonprofit foundations and the DIA itself.

Bill Nowling, a spokesman for Orr, declined to comment on the pension fund deal.

It comes hours after Detroit bankruptcy mediator Gerald Rosen revealed that the Retired Detroit Police and Fire Fighters Association had agreed to support Orr’s new plan.

In his previous offer, Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr had proposed monthly pension cuts of 6% for police and fire retirees and 26% for general retirees with no COLA benefits for either side. If the retirees rejected the grand bargain, those cuts were set to rise to 14% and 34%, respectively.

But that offer is history.

Detroit police retiree Mustafa Abdur-Rahman, 52, of Macomb Township, said he’s ready to vote for the new deal.

“I’d say I’m thrilled about it,” said Abdur-Rahman, who receives a monthly check of about $3,500. “If I know what I’m working with up front, I can adjust what I’m doing. It’s like a Social Security check: I’ve never heard them cutting a Social Security check, but if they’re going to cut the cost of living, I can take that.”

Preventing monthly pension cuts for the uniformed retirees “is a favorable result, to put it mildly,” said Ryan Plecha, a lawyer for the city’s retiree associations.

Rhodes, who last week admonished the city and creditors to quickly reach deals, must still approve the city’s restructuring plan, which is expected to face stiff opposition from bond insurers that want the city to sell DIA artwork to pay off creditors.

But Rosen has aggressively pursued the grand bargain, soliciting donations from foundations that have been heralded by the city and pension leaders for their effort to help retirees and save the DIA.

“This settlement agreement was reached after intensive negotiating sessions over the past several months in which the parties’ interests were fully and vigorously represented by counsel and all issues robustly negotiated,” Rosen said of the police and fire deal.

By agreeing to support Orr’s deal, Detroit’s pension boards are expected to recommend a “yes” vote to retirees, drop their legal battle with the city and give up the right to sue the state over pension cuts.

Still, the state of Michigan must agree to contribute $350 million over 20 years to the settlement – a proposal that has drawn the support of Republican Gov. Rick Snyder and some Legislative leaders but skepticism from others.

Chesterfield Township resident Frank Rossi, 76, a former fire engine operator, is reserving judgment on the deal.

“I’ll believe it when I find out that’s the truth,” said Rossi, who retired in 1992 after 29 years in the Fire Department and receives a $1,850-per-month check. “I’ve got to wait and see what’s going on. I just keep my fingers crossed, that’s all.”

The deal comes after the City of Detroit agreed to a concession with retirees: raising the expected rate of annual investment returns for pension funds to 6.75%, which correspondingly improves their funding outlook. The city also agreed to allow the pension cuts to be reduced over time if the pension funds outperform their expected rate of return.

One source familiar with the deal said the proposed pension cuts are lower than Orr’s initial offer in part because the stock market’s surge in the last 18 months improved the financial health of the pension funds, while the higher investment rate of return also lowered the unfunded liability.

In his initial proposal, Orr estimated that the city’s unfunded pension liabilities totaled $3.5 billion. But that figure is expected to drop drastically when he delivers his final restructuring documents.

Plecha called the new investment return rate “a big moment in negotiations,” while the improvement in the pension funds’ market performance has also helped reduce pension cuts.

The police and fire retirees are expected to keep 1% annual COLA increases, down from 2.25%. Civilian retirees would lose COLA, a particularly sore spot for labor supporters.

The two pension fund boards would stay in tact under the deal struck today, but an independent investment advisory committee would be established to vet all the investments the boards would make.

The police and fire retiree association also agreed to support the establishment of a Voluntary Employee Beneficiary Association (VEBA) to manage retiree health care, which is expected to deliver significantly reduced benefits to retirees. A separate VEBA will be set up for general retirees.

The retiree association’s board unanimously agreed to back the deal, including a structure under which a separate entity called a Voluntary Employee Beneficiary Association (VEBA) would manage significantly reduced retiree health care benefits.

“This is another significant step forward as we work towards securing Detroit’s long-term financial viability,” Orr said in a statement earlier Tuesday.

To win approval for the cuts, a majority of retirees representing two-thirds of the city’s unfunded pension liabilities must approve the plan, according to bankruptcy law.

Despite the progress toward a resolution of pension cuts — the most contentious issue in Detroit’s bankruptcy — the city’s restructuring plan is still expected to draw fierce oppositions from bond insurers Syncora and Financial Guaranty Insurance Co.

Last week, FGIC, Syncora and employee union AFSCME Council 25 said in court documents that four outside investors had offered up to $2 billion for the DIA’s assets, or portions of the museum’s collection.

Rhodes has signaled that he won’t allow a one-time infusion of cash to help resolve Detroit’s bankruptcy.

Still, the bond insurers, which would incur steep losses under Orr’s plan, are expected to argue that the grand bargain unfairly benefits pensioners.

Wayne State University law professor Laura Beth Bartell said Rhodes is likely to allow better treatment for pensioners than bondholders.

“In fact, Judge Rhodes indicated way back at the beginning of the case that he has a soft place in his heart for pensioners and was not going to allow significant cuts in their pensions in a plan of adjustment, so he knows that the plan would discriminate in favor (of) the pensioners,” she said. “That’s not an unfair discrimination.”

By Nathan Bomey, Matt Helms, Alisa Priddle and Susan Tompor 

BY  | APRIL 16, 2014

(c)2014 Detroit Free Press




Are Michigan's Municipal Finance Problems Spreading?

Gov. Rick Snyder on Monday declared a financial emergency in Lincoln Park, the latest Michigan city that could come under the control of a state-appointed emergency manager.

On April 4, a review team reached the same conclusion in a report to Snyder.

The governor cited the city’s negative fund balance, “a trend of over-spending from the general fund,” and city projections that the general fund deficit will likely increase by at least another $1 million this year.

Under state law, the city has seven days to request a hearing if it wants to appeal the finding.

If the finding is confirmed, city leaders can opt for one of four options: an emergency manager, a consent agreement under which it promises to take certain steps within certain time frames, evaluation by a neutral party, or a Chapter 9 bankruptcy.

Lincoln Park City Manager Joseph Merucci said the seven-member City Council will hold a special meeting Tuesday to discuss the finding. Based on his conversations with council members, he said an appeal is unlikely and the city is most likely to opt for a consent agreement.

The city has been cutting back services for several years, and starting last year the City Hall is closed on Fridays, Merucci said. Public works employees have been reduced to 13 from 30-35 four or five years ago, he said.

City employee contracts expired last June and the city has been seeking concessions, he said. Agreements have still not been reached with police command officers and patrol officers.

Four cities — Detroit, Allen Park, Flint and Hamtramck — are under emergency managers.

Three others — Benton Harbor, Ecorse and Pontiac — are under transition back to self-government after being under the control of emergency managers.

Inkster and River Rouge are under consent agreements. Royal Oak Township and Highland Park are under review.

By Paul Egan

BY  | APRIL 15, 2014

(c)2014 Detroit Free Press




Oklahoma Bans Cities from Setting Local Minimum Wages.

Oklahoma’s cities and counties are banned from setting their own minimum wage standards under a bill signed into law Monday by Gov. Mary Fallin.

“Senate Bill 1023 protects our economy from bad public policy that would destroy Oklahoma jobs,” Fallin said in a prepared statement. “Mandating a minimum wage increase at the local level would drive businesses to other communities and states, and would raise prices for consumers.”

Fallin’s action appears to thwart efforts by an Oklahoma City group that had been circulating a petition calling for a local vote on whether to increase the city’s minimum wage from the national standard of $7.25 an hour up to $10.10 an hour.

View Full Story from News OK

APRIL 16, 2014




Milwaukee’s Push to Turn Vacant Land into Urban Farms.

After one of the longer winters in recent memory, the city of Milwaukee is planning to engage in a new kind of rebirth. As the ice melts away, a number of parcels of city-owned land that have long lain vacant and unused will be coming back to life, set to become urban farms and orchards yielding healthy food along with new opportunities for employment and business entrepreneurship.

It’s all part of Mayor Tom Barrett’s HOME GR/OWN program, a Bloomberg Mayors Challenge finalist whose mission, beyond increasing access to fruits and vegetables, is to turn the city’s growing liability of vacant, foreclosed land into an asset: space for new economic activity that helps to stabilize distressed neighborhoods. We recently had a chance to talk with HOME GR/OWN’s program manager, Tim McCollow, about the program’s launch now that spring appears to finally be on its way.

When vacant properties in Milwaukee are tax-foreclosed, ending up under city ownership, they become substantial liabilities, costing the city $250 to $1,000 annually in direct costs of upkeep. And there are serious indirect impacts: attracting crime, stymying neighborhood cohesion and development, eating away at civic morale, and keeping property values, wealth creation and supportive tax revenues low.

The city is working in a smart way to shift these property liabilities out of the municipal budget and convert them to assets. HOME GR/OWN, a 2013 startup, is related to another effort Barrett launched this year: the Strong Neighborhoods Investment Plan. With $11.8 million in city funding, it aims to intensify the marketing of salvageable homes, raze 300 that are beyond repair and fund vacant-lot rehabilitation. HOME GR/OWN will help neighborhood associations, nonprofits and social entrepreneurs turn those vacant properties into the pieces of a new distributed food system.

Milwaukee is taking the steps needed to remove barriers to this revitalization. The city is reviewing internal processes, permitting and ordinances, and even designing “templates” of potential reuses, including costing and contracting models to help guide interested parties. In part due to the elimination of uncertainty and clarification of the process, many nonprofits and neighborhood associations already have signed on.

That aspect of hyper-local participation was no accident: HOME GR/OWN is designed to leverage existing resources and social capital already present in the neighborhoods targeted for revitalization. The launch of the program consists largely of parcels within the Lindsay Heights neighborhood, both because the area is troubled and in need of revitalization but also because of the rich network of funders and nonprofits already involved there.

While Milwaukee is building HOME GR/OWN through partnerships with nonprofits and social entrepreneurs, ultimately the goal is that program participation will be commercial as well, and McCollow sees Milwaukee as a perfect “national lab” to test the long-term commercial viability of urban agriculture. Ultimately, it’s the city’s hope that the market can drive this effort, needing only be helped along the way by municipal efforts.

Certainly the potential benefits of urban agriculture are multifaceted. One of the first well-developed urban-agriculture programs was Philadelphia’s Greensgrow Project, which was founded in 1998 through the Reinvestment Fund (an initiative of the federal Community Development Financial Institutions Fund) and has continued to expand its community-supported agricultural effort. Greensgrow’s vision is for people and communities nationwide to see urban agriculture as a useful tool in creating and sustaining regional food economies. Philadelphia has developed a robust set of partnerships that produce better use of the land and healthier food as well.

Many other cities have been developing complete urban agriculture programs to turn former costs into benefits. For example, San Francisco’s Department of Public Works saves about $4,000 annually when urban agriculture replaces a vacant lot formerly festering with dumping, vandalism and degradation. In New York City, a study of community gardens showed that they can bring about a 10 percent increase in surrounding property values, translating into community wealth accumulation as well as higher tax revenues to support city services.

To Milwaukee’s Tim McCollow, there are literal as well as figurative “healing aspects of food production.” Taking each vacant property off the city’s ledgers eliminates another small drain on its budget, but more importantly HOME GR/OWN aims to rebuild the city through the growth of a new local industry that adds to Milwaukee’s health, well-being and vibrancy.

Ben Weinryb Grohsgal contributed to the research and writing for this column. He is a research assistant at the Ash Center for Democratic Governance and Innovation and a student in the master’s in public policy program at the Harvard Kennedy School.

BY  | APRIL 16, 2014



Public Pensions and the Lessons of Success.

Do we learn more from success or failure? When it comes to state- and local-government pensions, we tend to focus on the plans that are struggling. But there are valuable lessons to learn from public-sector retirement plans that have remained well funded and from governments that have successfully negotiated changes to put their pension systems on a path to full funding.

Well funded in Illinois: Given all the headlines about Illinois’ seemingly endless struggle to reform its pensions, some might be surprised to learn that that the Illinois Municipal Retirement Fund (IMRF), the state’s second-largest public pension, is a model of fiscal responsibility.

What distinguishes the IMRF from Illinois’ other three statewide plans, which are struggling, is that all 2,969 governments that participate in it are required to pay 100 percent of their annual required contribution. As a result, the IMRF has remained more than 80 percent funded, even after the investment losses that public and private plans suffered from the 2008 recession.

It is also noteworthy that the IMRF is separate from the Illinois state government and its assets are not included in the state’s financial statements. (State law does, however, determine employee benefits, including retirement age, employee contributions, vesting period and cost-of-living increases.)

The IMRF maintains fully funded reserves for employees and retirees, has a highly diversified portfolio and assumes a conservative 7.5 percent return on investments, even during periods of stock-market growth. This long-term approach helps the fund ride out market swings.

Navigating change in Georgia: Some governments focus all their attention on costs when they look at pension-plan changes. Because pensions are part of a broader human-resources strategy, it’s important to involve employees in the discussions and to consider recruitment and retention issues.

In 2007, Gwinnett County, Ga., decided to take control of its defined-benefit plan, which had been managed by the Association County Commissioners of Georgia. Key drivers of the county’s desire for change were to gain control over the county’s pension assets and control cost increases.

The county sought to put new employees into a defined-contribution plan. Before making the change, county staff conducted benefit comparison studies, carried out market research to learn what benefits were important to young professionals, and analyzed the short- and long-term costs of closing the defined-benefit plan to new employees. (When a pension plan is closed, the unfunded liabilities are amortized over a shorter period in keeping with sound actuarial principles, and with a fixed group of employees to serve, demographic assumptions must be revised.)

While county staff calculated that closing the defined-benefit plan would be more costly in the short run, the analysis showed long-term cost savings. County commissioners voted to move forward.

Although the costs to service the closed plan were higher than expected due to asset losses from the 2008 economic downturn, the county has continued to make its full annual required contribution. The closed plan was 70.2 percent funded in 2010 and reached the 76.8 percent level in 2012. So far, the county has not experienced any measurable changes in its ability to recruit or retain workers.

Legislating stability in Iowa: Sometimes, as in the case of the Iowa Public Employees’ Retirement System (IPERS), state legislation is needed so it is possible to make the full annual required contribution (ARC). While the IPERS’ funded ratio had remained relatively good, it was trending downward.

One problem IPERS had was a statutory required contribution rate that was well below the ARC. It had not been adjusted since 1979. The Iowa General Assembly authorized changes in 2006, 2010 and 2012 to increase the combined employer-employee contribution. Now IPERS has the authority to adjust the contribution rate to an annually adjusted cap and the funded ratio is over 80 percent again. For fiscal year 2014, the required contribution rate is at 100 percent of the ARC.

As these stories illustrate, there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to strengthening state and local pension plans. Each has a unique legal framework, and a solution that works for one government may be totally off the mark elsewhere. But while solutions for retirement plans can vary from place to place, there’s no debate about the importance of an adequate retirement income for government workers.




 




ZONING - ALABAMA

Brown v. Jefferson

Court of Civil Appeals of Alabama - April 4, 2014 - So.3d - 2014 WL 1328337

 Adjoining neighbor appealed from decision of municipal board of adjustment granting dance studio operator a variance that allowed a reduction in number of required parking spaces for studio’s business. The Circuit Court granted the variance, subject to conditions. Studio owner appealed.

The Court of Civil Appeals held that:

  • Neighbor had standing as “party aggrieved” to challenge board of adjustment’s decision;
  • Trial court was not without authority to attach conditions to granting variance;
  • Stated condition that studio use a shuttle bus for transporting students did not constitute an impermissible injunction; and
  • The condition was not unreasonable, arbitrary, or oppressive means to address traffic congestion.

 




EMINENT DOMAIN - ARKANSAS

GSS, LLC v. CenterPoint Energy Gas Transmission Co.

Supreme Court of Arkansas - April 3, 2014 - S.W.3d - 2014 Ark. 144

Gas pipeline company petitioned to acquire property by eminent domain to allow construction of pipeline, and property owner counterclaimed for unlawful taking, violation of the Arkansas Civil Rights Act, trespass, and outrage.  The Circuit Court entered judgment for property owner in the amount of $64,000 as just compensation. Property owner appealed.

The Supreme Court of Arkansas held that:

  • Circuit Court did not abuse its discretion in excluding evidence of an appraisal of a nearby tract of land for purposes of showing comparable sales;
  • The ‘quick take’ state statutory procedures used by gas pipeline company to enter upon property owner’s land and proceed with pipeline construction were not preempted by the Natural Gas Act;
  • Summary judgment evidence was sufficient to demonstrate that pipeline company negotiated with property owner in good faith as required by the Natural Gas Act; and
  • Pipeline company did not violate property owner’s due process rights and its rights under the Arkansas Civil Rights Act.

The “quick take” state statutory procedures used by gas pipeline company to enter upon property owner’s land and proceed with pipeline construction were not preempted by the Natural Gas Act.  The Natural Gas Act contained no language to indicate Congress’s intention to preempt the state statute, but instead specifically contemplated the use of state condemnation procedure in proceedings under the federal statute, and pipeline company’s petition for condemnation and a declaration of taking had already been granted after the estimated amount of just compensation had been deposited into the registry of the court.

 




MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - CALIFORNIA

1300 N. Curson Investors, LLC v. Drumea

Court of Appeal, Second District, Division 8, California - April 4, 2014 - Cal.Rptr.3d - 2014 WL 1338659

Landlord brought action against tenants for declaratory relief, ejectment, and damages. The Superior Court denied summary judgment for landlord and entered stipulated judgment for tenants. Landlord appealed.

The Court of Appeal held that landlord properly imposed cumulative rent increases on tenant for years when tenant was resident manager.

Under rent stabilization ordinance providing that if a “resident manager was already a tenant in the unit before being appointed resident manager, the rent charged to the resident manager upon termination of managerial services shall not exceed the rent the tenant had already been paying plus annual adjustments,” a landlord was authorized to charge a former manager tenant with all of the annual adjustments authorized under the ordinance for the years when tenant lived in her apartment rent-free in exchange for acting as resident manager, even though the building’s former landlords did not serve tenant with annual registration statements and notices of rent increases during the time that tenant did not pay rent, and notwithstanding ordinance providing that a landlord may not “demand or accept rent” without first giving each tenant a copy of the annual registration statements and notices of rent increases.

Under rent stabilization ordinance providing that when a resident manager pays partial rent “only the partial rent payments shall be subject to the annual adjustments authorized,” it logically follows from the requirement that the landlord must give notice of increases in partial rent payments that the landlord has no obligation to give notice of what the increase would have been if the manager were paying the full rental value of the unit.

 




TAX - CALIFORNIA

Sipple v. City of Hayward

Court of Appeal, Second District, Division 2, California - April 8, 2014 - Cal.Rptr.3d - 2014 WL 1371796

For a number of years, individuals throughout California were improperly charged taxes for internet access by their internet service provider, New Cingular Wireless PCS LLC (New Cingular), prompting various customers to file putative class action lawsuits.  The lawsuits eventually settled, with New Cingular agreeing to seek refunds of the taxes from the cities and counties to which the taxes were remitted. After refund claims were denied, New Cingular brought this action against the cities and counties. The Superior Court sustained demurrer without leave to amend. Provider appealed.

The Court of Appeal held that:

  • Local “refund first” ordinances were preempted by Government Claims Act;
  • Provider had standing to present claims to cities and counties for tax refunds on behalf of provider’s customers; and
  • Provider had standing to file suit for tax refunds on behalf of provider’s customers.

To the extent that local “refund first” ordinances prohibiting service suppliers from filing tax refund claims on behalf of their customers without first refunding disputed taxes from their own funds to the customers established a precondition to filing a claim, the ordinances were preempted by the Government Claims Act.

 




ZONING - CONNECTICUT

Reardon v. Zoning Bd. of Appeals of Town of Darien

Supreme Court of Connecticut - April 8, 2014 - A.3d - 311 Conn. 356

Landowner sent letter to town zoning enforcement officer, challenging the legality of zoning and building permits previously issued to neighboring landowner, and, when officer failed to respond, landowner filed an application for appeal to the town zoning board of appeals. The board dismissed landowner’s application to appeal on grounds of untimeliness and for lack of a “decision” from which an appeal could lie. Landowner sought judicial review. The Superior Court dismissed appeal. Landowner appealed.

The Supreme Court of Connecticut held that:

  • Landowner’s letter to town zoning enforcement officer challenging the legality of zoning and building permits previously issued to neighboring landowner, and zoning enforcement officer’s lack of response to such letter, did not give rise to a “decision” from which landowner had a right of appeal to the town zoning board of appeals, and
  • Town zoning regulation prohibiting zoning agencies or officials from approving permits for construction or land use that would violate any law, and deeming any permits so issued to be null and void, did not impose a duty upon town zoning enforcement official to respond to landowner’s letter.

 




SCHOOLS - IDAHO

Sanders v. Board of Trustees of Mountain Home School Dist. No. 193

Supreme Court of Idaho, Boise, February 2014 Term - April 7, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1349418

Employee brought action against board of trustees of school district alleging that board breached its contract with employee by hiring a candidate less qualified than her for a teaching position. The District Court entered judgment on jury verdict in favor of board, but denied board’s request for award of attorney fees. Board appealed.

The Supreme Court of Idaho held that:

  • Statute governing attorney fee award in action concerning state agency or political subdivision was not exclusive, and
  • On issue of first impression, board was not entitled to award of statutory discretionary arbitration costs.

Statute governing award of attorney fees in certain instances in actions involving state agency or political subdivision was not the exclusive source of attorney fees when a prevailing party also requested fees pursuant to statute governing award of attorney fees in action to recover on contract.  Phrase in statute governing fees in action involving agency or political subdivision “unless otherwise provided by statute” meant that if another statute expressly provided for the awarding of attorney fees against a state agency or a political subdivision, attorney fees could be awarded under that statute also, and statute governing award in contract actions expressly applied to state agencies and political subdivisions.

Arbitration was non-binding, prior to civil suit, and costs of arbitration were limited to pre-litigation under the contract at issue, and therefore board of trustees of school district was not entitled to statutory discretionary award of arbitration costs in breach of contract action by employee related to employment contract.  Statute governing award of costs gave courts authority to award costs “in a civil trial or procedure.”

 




ANNEXATION - IDAHO

In re Old Cutters, Inc.

United States District Court, D. Idaho - March 31, 2014 - Not Reported in F.Supp.2d - 2014 WL 1319854

The City of Hailey appealed the Memorandum Decision, Order and Judgment entered by the United States Bankruptcy Court for the District of Idaho.  Hailey argued that the Bankruptcy Court erred when it invalidated the annexation fees and community housing provisions imposed by Hailey in connection with the annexation of property owned by the chapter 11 debtor, Old Cutters.

Mountain West Bank, Old Cutters’ principal creditor, agreed with the Bankruptcy Court’s ruling with respect to the annexation fees and community housing provisions, but appealed the Court’s finding that the description of the real property in the relevant annexation agreement satisfied the requirements of the Idaho statute of frauds.

The Court concluded that the description of “Market Rate Lots” was sufficient in the Annexation Agreement and exhibits referenced in the agreement to satisfy the statute of frauds. The Court accordingly affirms the Bankruptcy Court’s finding that Hailey’s lien on the Property was valid under the Idaho statutes.  However, because the Court also affirmed the Bankruptcy Court’s holding that Hailey does not hold an enforceable claim to collect any further amounts from Old Cutters under the Annexation Agreement, Hailey’s lien is ultimately unenforceable.

 




LIABILITY - KENTUCKY

Jessie v. Dixon

United States District Court, W.D. Kentucky, at Bowling Green - March 31, 2014 - 2014 WL 1320002

Plaintiff was a convicted prisoner incarcerated at the Hart County Detention Center (HCDC). He sued HCDC Officers Shelby Dixon and James Gossett in their individual and official capacities. Plaintiff alleged that on several occasions Defendants Dixon and Gossett had threatened him with mace and taser guns if he did not stop asking to go to church. He also alleged that he had been denied the right to go to church or have a Bible, although other prisoners are allowed. He stated that Defendant Dixon had called him a “honky and cracker and spit into my food.”

The court held that, as nothing in the complaint demonstrated any purported wrongdoing occurring as a result of a policy or custom implemented or endorsed by Hart County, the complaint failed to establish a basis of liability against the municipality, thus it failed to state a cognizable § 1983 official-capacity claim.

However, the First Amendment retaliation and free-exercise claims and the Eighth Amendment safety/protection claims were allowed to proceed against Defendants Dixon and Gossett in their individual capacities for damages and injunctive relief.

 




LIABILITY - KENTUCKY

Derksen v. Causey

United States District Court, W.D. Kentucky, at Bowling Green - April 2, 2014 - 2014 WL 1330193

William M. Derksen, a prisoner, brought an action against Melissa Causey, Chief Deputy, Warren County Regional Jail in both her individual and official capacities.

“Plaintiff represents that on or about November 16, 2013, Defendant housed him in a ‘one men cell segregation due to [his] sexual orientation.’ Plaintiff states that he informed Defendant that his ‘Constitutional Rights [had] been violated due to discrimination.’ In response, according to Plaintiff, Defendant stated, ‘I HATE FAGGOTS I HOPE YALL ROT IN HELL I HAVE SOMETHING FOR YOUR A* *.’ Plaintiff states that 30 minutes later, Defendant opened his cell door, stated ‘Good Lucky,’ and housed a registered sex offender in the cell with him. According to Plaintiff, soon after Defendant secured the cell door, Plaintiff’s new cellmate covered Plaintiff’s mouth with a pillowcase to keep him ‘from getting unwanted attention’ and proceeded to sexually assault Plaintiff.

The court held that, as nothing in the complaint demonstrated any purported wrongdoing occurring as a result of a policy or custom implemented or endorsed by Warren County, the complaint failed to establish a basis of liability against the municipality, thus it failed to state a cognizable § 1983 official-capacity claim.

However, the court did allow the failure-to-protect claim against Ms. Causey in her individual capacity to proceed.

 




PUBLIC UTILITIES - MAINE

Central Maine Power Co. v. Public Utilities Com'n

Supreme Judicial Court of Maine - April 8, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 ME 56

Power company appealed from decision of Public Utilities Commission (PUC) that company had misapplied nearly $2.6 million in customer deposits to account balances for transmission-and-distribution (T&C) services that should have been applied to account balances for standard-offer service.

The Supreme Judicial Court of Maine held that:

  • PUC reasonably interpreted applicable statutes and regulations referring to “a deposit” by an electricity customer as containing two components, one for T&C service and one for standard-offer service, which must be allocated to oldest debt first;
  • Prospective financial impact on power company did not alone render the ordered accounting adjustment penal so as to merit application of the fair notice doctrine; and
  • PUC’s decision did not run afoul of prohibition against retroactive rulemaking.

 




EMPLOYMENT - MASSACHUSETTS

Plourde v. Police Dept. of Lawrence

Appeals Court of Massachusetts, Essex - April 9, 2014 - N.E.3d - 85 Mass.App.Ct. 178

Retired city police officer brought action against city police department, alleging that department had violated Wage Act by failing to pay him for compensatory time that he had earned and accrued prior to being injured on duty. The Superior Court Department entered summary judgment in favor of department, and officer appealed.

The Appeals Court held that Lawrence Act, establishing financial conditions to ensure the fiscal stability of city, did not allow city to avoid its obligations under Wage Act.

Lawrence Act, a special act that established financial conditions to ensure the fiscal stability of city of Lawrence, and which provided that no personnel expenses earned or accrued within any department shall be charged to or paid from any allotment of a subsequent period without the written approval of the mayor, did not allow city to avoid its obligations under Wage Act, and thus city was required to pay retired police officer for compensatory time that he had earned and accrued prior to being injured on duty.  Lawrence Act did not contain any provisions expressing a legislative intent to override Wage Act, and interpreting Lawrence Act to shield city from its obligations would lead to absurd and inconsistent results.




PUBLIC CONTRACTS - MINNESOTA

Rochester City Lines, Co. v. City of Rochester

Court of Appeals of Minnesota - April 7, 2014 - N.W.2d - 2014 WL 1344320

Rochester City Lines (RCL) operated a fixed-route transit service in respondent City of Rochester since 1966.  In 1975, RCL began receiving subsidies from the city.  In 1977, the city began receiving federal transit financial assistance.  In 2010, however, the Federal Transit Administration (FTA) determined that the contract between RCL and the city needed to be competitively bid to comply with federal transit aid requirements.

The city received responsive bids from four companies, including RCL.  After reviewing the proposals, the city determined that First Transit’s proposal represented the “best-value” for the city and awarded it the contract.

The Court of Appeals held that:

 




JURISDICTION - MISSOURI

Cromeans v. Morgan Keegan & Co., Inc.

United States District Court, W.D. Missouri, Central Division - April 8, 2014 - Slip Copy - 2014 WL 1375038

The City of Moberly, Missouri approved the issuance of $39 million in municipal bonds by its Industrial Development Authority for a manufacturing facility (“Mamtek”).

The facility failed and the bondholders sued the underwriter, Morgan Keegan, alleging that the offering statement contained material misrepresentations and omissions.  Underwriter subsequently filed a third–party complaint for contribution and indemnity against Perkins Coie, Mamtek’s intellectual property counsel during the relevant period.

Perkins Coie moved to dismiss, arguing that the Court lacked personal jurisdiction.  Morgan Keegan maintained that Perkins Coie was subject to both specific and general personal jurisdiction.

The District Court held that:

“In sum, the type of attenuated and passive involvement in a client’s business dealings evidenced here cannot suffice to subject a law firm to personal jurisdiction in whichever state the client, at some point, chooses to conduct business. Although Mamtek apparently elected to use the bond proceeds to pay for some or all of Perkins Coie’s services, there is no evidence that Perkins Coie contracted to be paid, or was even aware that it was paid, from the bond proceeds. Accordingly, Mamtek’s unilateral decision to use the bond proceeds to make repayments on prior debt of Mamtek International, which included payments to Perkins Coie for services rendered before the Moberly project had even become a concept, does not show that Perkins Coie transacted business in Missouri.”

With regard to general jurisdiction, the court noted that Perkins Coie did not have an office in Missouri, had two partners with active Missouri bar licenses, and derived seven-tenths of one percent of its annual gross revenue from Missouri clients.




MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - NEW JERSEY

State v. Frye

Superior Court of New Jersey, Appellate Division - April 9, 2014 - Not Reported in A.3d - 2014 WL 1375587

Defendant challenged the establishment of the factual basis upon which he entered a conditional guilty plea for violating Municipal Ordinance 230–92(a)(3) for continuing “the use of [a] temporary trailer without [an] issued construction permit,” after the revocation of the Certificate of Occupancy (CO) by the Zoning officer.

The appeals court agreed, finding that the record clearly demonstrated that defendant did not understand how he could be guilty of having a trailer in the property “after revocation of a certificate of occupancy.” In order to have established a factual basis, defendant must have admitted to guilt of all the essential elements of the offense. “In our view, defendant did not do so here.”

 




ZONING - NORTH CAROLINA

PBK Holdings, LLC v. County of Rockingham

Court of Appeals of North Carolina - April 1, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1366198
County adopted an ordinance defining and regulating “high impact uses.”
PBK Holdings, LLC, filed a complaint against the county challenging the ordinance.  RBK alleged that it had a special use permit application pending in the county to develop a landfill.  RBK stated that the proposed landfill would fall within the “Regional Solid Waste Management Facilities/Landfills–Privately Owned” category. Therefore, RBK argued that it had a “specific and legal personal legal interest in the Rockingham County zoning ordinances that impact its plans to develop a landfill.”
The Court of Appeals concluded that the ordinance did not violate the Equal Protection and Commerce Clauses of the North Carolina and United States Constitutions and also rejected PBK’s arguments that certain provisions of the ordinance were preempted by state and federal law.



ZONING - NORTH CAROLINA

Patmore v. Town of Chapel Hill North Carolina

Court of Appeals of North Carolina - April 1, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1365987

Where defendant enforced a zoning amendment by citing the owners of rental properties rather than their tenants because it was a more effective method of enforcement, their enforcement against property owners was rationally related to the purpose of the zoning restriction and did not violate plaintiffs’ right to substantive due process.

N.C. Gen.Stat. § 160A–301 governs a municipality’s authority to regulate parking in public vehicular areas, while the zoning amendment was a land use restriction intended to curb over-occupancy of rental properties by limiting the number of cars parked on a rental property. Because the zoning amendment and N.C. Gen.Stat. § 160A–301 did not address the same subject, the principle of expressio unius est exclusio alterius did not apply. 




PUBLIC UTILITIES - OREGON

Rogue Valley Sewer Services v. City of Phoenix

Court of Appeals of Oregon - April 9, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1387318

At issue in this case was the validity of a City of Phoenix ordinance that imposed on Rogue Valley Sewer Services (RVS) a five percent fee on gross receipts that RVS collects from residents of the city for sewer services.

RVS contended that the city was not authorized to charge the fee and seeks to enjoin the city from enforcing the ordinance. The trial court decided the issue on summary judgment and concluded that the city’s ordinance was a valid exercise of the city’s authority.  RVS appealed and the Court of Appeals affirmed.

 




EMPLOYMENT - OREGON

Bova v. City of Medford

Court of Appeals of Oregon - April 2, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1316267

Retired city employee brought action against city, seeking declaratory and injunctive relief to require city to make health insurance coverage available to him, and alleging that city’s failure to provide coverage was age discrimination. The Circuit Court entered summary judgment in favor of employee on his claims for declaratory and injunctive relief, and, following a bench trial, entered judgment in favor of employee on the age discrimination claim. City appealed.

The Court of Appeals held that:

  • Fact issue precluded summary judgment, and
  • Disparate impact theory on discrimination claim was different from pleaded theory and thus could not be tried in absence of consent of parties.

Fact issue, as to whether the costs of providing retired employees with health insurance coverage made it unduly burdensome for city to provide that coverage, precluded summary judgment on retired city employee who sought declaratory and injunctive relief that city was required to provide him with health care coverage, under statute requiring a local government “insofar as and to the extent possible,” make health insurance coverage available for retired employees to the same extent as coverage was available to non-retired employees.

Disparate impact theory for retired city employee’s age discrimination claim, on which theory claim was tried, was different from employee’s pleaded theory of disparate treatment, and thus trial court could not allow employee to try claim on disparate impact theory in absence of express or implied consent of parties.  A disparate impact case required a showing that a facially neutral policy or criterion had a disproportionately negative impact on a protected class, while disparate treatment required a showing of intentional discrimination.




LIABILITY - PENNSYLVANIA

Nagle v. Trueblue, Inc.

Commonwealth Court of Pennsylvania - April 2, 2014 - Not Reported in A.3d - 2014 WL 1327611

After dude falls off the back of a garbage truck and dies (awkward eulogy alert), executor brought negligence action in Dauphin County against the Township and the Employment Agency.

The complaint also alleged that venue was proper in Dauphin County because the cause of action against the Employment Agency arose in Dauphin County and because transactions or occurrences took place in Dauphin County, out of which the cause of action against the Township arose.

The Township argued that the only viable cause of action that Executor may raise against it in this case could arise from the purported negligent operation of the Township-owned truck pursuant to the vehicle exception to governmental immunity under Section 8542(b)(1) of the Judicial Code42 Pa.C.S. § 8542(b)(1). Because the purportedly negligent operation of the truck only occurred in Perry County, the Township claimed that venue is only proper in that county under Pa. R.C.P. No. 2103(b) and Section 333 of the JARA Continuation Act, and that the trial court erred in overruling its preliminary objection to venue. The appeals court agreed, reverse/remanding.

 




IMMUNITY - TEXAS

City of Houston v. Downstream Environmental, L.L.C.

Court of Appeals of Texas, Houston (1st Dist.) - April 3, 2014 - S.W.3d - 2014 WL 1327936

Downstream Environmental, L.L.C. sued the City of Houston for damages that allegedly arose when the discharge line between Downstream’s liquid waste disposal facility and the City’s sewer system was temporarily closed. The lawsuit also implicated rate increases and a billing dispute that occurred after the temporary closure of the discharge valve. In addition to seeking damages, Downstream sought equitable and injunctive relief pursuant to its claims under the Texas Bill of Rights.

The City filed a plea to the jurisdiction based on governmental immunity. Downstream challenged the City’s assertion of immunity primarily on the basis that the City was engaged in a proprietary—not governmental—function. Downstream also alleged that the City had waived governmental immunity by its actions in several respects. The trial court denied the jurisdictional plea in its entirety, and the City timely appealed.

The appeals court reversed the trial court’s order in part, holding that the City was immune from Downstream’s claims for money damages arising from breach of contract, negligence, and alleged constitutional violations.  The court also found no applicable waiver of the City’s immunity as to Downstream’s contract and negligence claims for monetary damages.  It remanded the case to the trial court to allow the remaining requests for injunctive relief based on constitutional claims to proceed.

The court concluded that the City’s action in closing Downstream’s discharge sewer line was necessary to protect the sewer system from non-conforming waste and to allow the system to reach proper operational status. This leaves little room for doubt that the services the City provided to Downstream were sanitary sewer services – which is statutorily defined as a governmental function – to the extent that all the wastewater went through the same sanitary sewer lines to the City’s publicly owned treatment works.

 

 

 

 




MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - WEST VIRGINIA

Barber v. City of Charleston

Supreme Court of Appeals of West Virginia - April 4, 2014 - Not Reported in S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1345491

Lawyer pulled into a no-parking zone, activated his blinkers, left the car idling and left the vehicle to drop off a prescription to another attorney.  Dude got a parking ticket.  Lawyer argued that he was not “parking.”

The Circuit Court held, after bench trial, that defendant was guilty of parking in a no parking zone in violation of the municipal code.  Of course he appealed.

The Supreme Court of Appeals held that circuit court did not abuse its discretion in finding defendant guilty of parking in a no parking zone in violation of the city’s municipal code and fining him $25.

Pursuant to municipal code, the term “park,” when prohibited, included the standing of a vehicle, municipal code provided that a person could park temporarily for the purpose of and while actually engaged in loading or unloading.  Defendant left the vehicle’s motor running, activated the blinkers, and exited it briefly to deliver a prescription to another attorney, and defendant was not “loading or unloading” merely because he was bringing a prescription to a colleague.




TE/GE Memo Limits Types of Cases Transferred for E/O Processing.

The IRS Tax-Exempt and Government Entities Division has issued administrative guidance (TEGE-07-0414-0009) limiting the types of cases and issues that are transferred to the Exempt Organizations Technical Unit for processing, including cases involving optional expedited processing for section 501(c)(4) applications.Generally, some cases, including cases without established precedent, cases with significant regional or national impact, technical advice cases, and technical assistance requests, have been transferred to the technical unit for processing. Also transferred have been cases involving the interpretation of a treaty or international agreement, Canadian Treaty Organization determinations that involve unprecedented or novel issues, and specific cases with potential terrorist connections.

As of April 8, 2014, the guidance limits the transferred case types to applications under section 501(c)(3) from hospitals subject to requirements under section 501(r); some applications under section 501(c)(4) on optional expedited processes; and some technical assistance requests.

April 8, 2014Affected IRM: IRM 7.20.1 & 7.20.4

Expiration Date: April 8, 2015

MEMORANDUM FOR
ALL MANAGERS AND EMPLOYEES IN THE EXEMPT ORGANIZATIONS DETERMINATIONS
UNIT AND EXEMPT ORGANIZATIONS TECHNICAL UNIT

FROM:
Stephen A. Martin
Acting Director, EO Rulings and Agreements

SUBJECT:
Identification of Cases Transferred to EO Technical

The purpose of this memorandum is to provide administrative guidance to the Exempt Organizations Determinations Unit and the Exempt Organizations Technical Unit regarding issues and cases currently transferred to EO Technical as described in IRM sections 7.20.1 and 7.20.4.Pursuant to IRM section 7.20.1, certain cases, including cases without established precedent (set forth in IRM 7.20.1.4.1), cases with significant regional or national impact, technical advice cases, and technical assistance requests, were transferred to EO Technical for processing. In addition, IRM section 7.20.4 requires the transfer of cases involving the interpretation of a treaty or international agreement, Canadian Treaty Organization determinations that involve unprecedented or novel issues, and certain cases with potential terrorist connections (as described in 7.20.4.7.1). However, in the interest of efficient tax administration, effective upon issuance of this memorandum, the types of cases and issues transferred to EO Technical for processing shall be limited to the following:

      (1) Applications under Internal Revenue Code section 501(c)(3) from hospitals subject to requirements under section 501(r). The transfer of these cases will continue until training is completed for EO Determinations personnel on this technical matter. The training is scheduled for summer 2014;

(2) Certain applications under IRC section 501(c)(4), pursuant to the Memorandum issued on December 23, 2013, by the Acting Director, EO, Control No. TEGE-07-1213-24, Expansion of Optional Expedited Process for Certain Exemption Applications under Section 501(c)(4); and

(3) Technical assistance requests, pursuant to the procedures set forth in the Memorandum issued on July 15, 2013, by the Acting Director, EO R&A, Control No: TEGE-07-0713-11, Interim Guidance on Requests for Technical Assistance.
The content of this memorandum will be incorporated in IRM sections 7.20.1 and 7.20.4.Please contact the Senior Manager, Rulings and Agreements, Technical with any questions regarding the application of this memorandum.

cc:
www.irs.gov

Citations: TEGE-07-0414-0009




Pension Obligation Bonds - Beware of Quick Fixes.

Speaking of pensions, Municipal Market Advisors’ Matt Posner predicts that 2014 could mark an increase in governments issuing Pension Obligation Bonds to cover shortfalls in pension funding. These bonds are taxable debt that governments sell in order to dump the proceeds into pension funds to help fill funding gaps. They make the fund appear healthier, but also put more debt on the government’s books that must be paid out to bondholders. As such, “POBs are almost always a drag on credit quality,” Posner, a municipal analyst, writes in his Municipal Issuer Brief.

Posner lists four reasons for why POBs may become more attractive this year:

Posner warns that any government that issues POBs is sending up a red flag to investors. “Governments that have used POBs are likely to be viewed with some suspicion by investors [because this is] reflective of a gimmick,” he writes.




National Federation of Municipal Analysts 31st Annual Conference.

The meeting will take place on May 6-9 at Disney’s Grand Floridian Resort & Spa, Lake Buena Vista, FL.

Click here for the program link: NFMA Annual Conference Program. 

To register, click here: Annual Conference 2014.  

Details about hotel reservations, ground transportation and park tickets are provided in the program and in registration materials.




Government Finance Officers Association 108th Annual Conference 2014: The Future of Government Finance

MAY 18 TO MAY 21

Register today!

  • For this year’s session details, go to GFOA’s annual conference page
  • Apply for GFOA’s first-time annual conference attendee scholarships

Technical sessions (including in-depth preconference seminars) that offer comprehensive coverage of all the latest developments, trends, and best practices in each major facet of public finance. Events that create a unique opportunity to build relationships and network with peers from across the country and around the world. General Sessions featuring nationally recognized speakers on topics of interest to public finance professionals. An unparalleled opportunity to earn continuing professional education (CPE) credit. An exhibit hall offering a wealth of practical solutions to a broad range of professional challenges.




Upcoming Webinar: Clean Energy Finance through the Bond Market.

 Date: Tuesday, April 22, 2014 

Time: 1-2pm EDT

In this webinar, the Brookings Institution, Clean Energy Group (CEG) and the Council of Development Finance Agencies (CDFA) will discuss their upcoming paper, “Clean Energy Finance through the Bond Market: A New Option for Progress.”

State and local bond finance represents a powerful but underutilized tool for future clean energy investment. For 100 years, the nation’s state and local infrastructure finance agencies have issued trillions of dollars’ worth of public finance bonds to fund the construction of the nation’s roads, bridges, hospitals, and other infrastructure—and literally built America. Now, as clean energy subsidies from Washington dwindle, these agencies are increasingly willing to finance those projects, if only the clean energy community embraces them.

Guest speakers from the New York State Energy Research and Development Authority (NYSERDA) and the Toledo-Lucas County Port Authority of Ohio will present updates from their own innovative clean energy bond financing programs. An audience Q&A will follow these presentations.

This webcast is free and open to the public, but registration is required.

Register here:

 

 




Survey Ranks Where Residents Are Most Satisfied with Their Communities.

In a handful of communities throughout the country, it seems as if nearly everyone is happy with where they live.

Gallup-Healthways survey published this morning examines attitudes of Americans over a two-year period, finding 85 percent were satisfied with the city or area where they lived.

In 30 metro areas surveyed, at least nine out of every 10 residents reported being satisfied. The Fort Collins-Loveland, Colo., area ranked first nationally, with a satisfaction ranking of nearly 95 percent. Other localities high on the list tended to be out West or in parts of the Midwest. Residents also gave high marks to San Luis Obispo-Paso Robles, Calif. (94.1 percent), Holland-Grand Haven, Mich. (93.4 percent) and Billings, Mont. (See complete list below)

It’s reasonable to assume that, to a degree, the strength of local economies influenced perceptions of survey respondents. Of areas earning top ratings, only the Barnstable, Mass., area is saddled with high unemployment (its jobless rate was 9.1 percent in February).

The Rockford, Ill., area received the lowest satisfaction rating from its residents – 72.8 percent. The area’s unemployment rate is 12.1 percent, one of the highest rates nationally. Just behind Rockford was Stockton, Calif., which faces numerous hurdles after filing for bankruptcy in 2012. Its unemployment rate stands at a similarly bleak 13.1 percent.

Gallup notes that ratings for the survey, conducted from January 2012 through last December, may vary based on overall quality of life factors and job opportunities.

If the satisfaction ratings seem a little high, it could be because of the wording on the survey question. Telephone interviewees weren’t surveyed specifically about government services, but were asked, “Are you satisfied with the city or area where you live?” Many jurisdictions conduct their own citizen satisfaction surveys, which ask different questions to assess the quality of public services.

Gallup reports that the national satisfaction rating of 85 percent has remained consistent since it began tracking the measure in 2008. Some of the lower-rated communities fared better in recent years, though.

Gallup also published data gauging residents’ optimism, asking whether the area they lived was “getting better.” By this measure, the top metro area was Sioux Falls, S.D., at 77.7 percent.

For the most part, residents in areas with higher satisfaction ratings also tended to be more optimistic.

Satisfaction Ratings Data

The following table lists satisfaction ratings for the Gallup-Healthways Well-Being Index, conducted in 2012 and 2013. At least 300 adults age 18 and over in each metro area were asked, “Are you satisfied with the city or area where you live?”

Rank
Metro Area
% Satisfied
1 Fort Collins-Loveland, CO 94.9
2 San Luis Obispo-Paso Robles, CA 94.1
3 Holland-Grand Haven, MI 93.4
4 Billings, MT 93.1
5 Boulder, CO 92.8
6 Provo-Orem, UT 92.3
7 Barnstable Town, MA 92.3
8 Des Moines-West Des Moines, IA 92.2
9 Madison, WI 91.9
10 Honolulu, HI 91.7
11 Omaha-Council Bluffs, NE-IA 91.6
12 Lincoln, NE 91.5
13 Kennewick-Pasco-Richland, WA 91.4
14 Raleigh-Cary, NC 91.4
15 Asheville, NC 91.4
16 Ogden-Clearfield, UT 91.1
17 Minneapolis-St. Paul-Bloomington, MN-WI 91
18 Olympia, WA 91
19 Kalamazoo-Portage, MI 90.6
20 Winston-Salem, NC 90.6
21 Lancaster, PA 90.6
22 Portland-South Portland-Biddeford, ME 90.5
23 Bradenton-Sarasota-Venice, FL 90.5
24 Denver-Aurora, CO 90.4
25 Charlottesville, VA 90.3
26 Bellingham, WA 90.3
27 Naples-Marco Island, FL 90.2
28 Fayetteville, Springdale-Rogers, AR-MO 90.1
29 Oxnard-Thousand Oaks-Ventura, CA 90.1
30 Huntsville, AL 90
31 Salt Lake City, UT 89.9
32 Lexington-Fayette, KY 89.8
33 Knoxville, TN 89.8
34 Greenville-Mauldin-Easley, SC 89.7
35 Ann Arbor, MI 89.6
36 Sioux Falls,SD 89.4
37 Boise City-Nampa, ID 89.4
38 Santa Rosa-Petaluma, CA 89.4
39 McAllen-Edinburg-Mission, TX 89.2
40 Austin-Round Rock, TX 89.2
41 Charlotte-Gastonia-Concord, NC-SC 89.1
42 Myrtle Beach-North Myrtle Beach-Conway, SC 88.8
43 Manchester-Nashua, NH 88.8
44 Savannah, GA 88.6
45 Grand Rapids-Wyoming, MI 88.6
46 Nashville-Davidson-Murfreesboro-Franklin, TN 88.4
47 Burlington-South Burlington, VT 88.4
48 San Antonio, TX 88.3
49 San Diego-Carlsbad-San Marcos, CA 88.3
50 Salem, OR 88.3
51 Santa Barbara-Santa Maria-Goleta, CA 88.2
52 Indianapolis-Carmel, IN 88
53 Boston-Cambridge-Quincy, MA-NH 88
54 Bremerton-Silverdale, WA 87.9
55 Oklahoma City, OK 87.8
56 Springfield, MO 87.8
57 Greensboro-High Point, NC 87.8
58 Portland-Vancouver-Beaverton, OR-WA 87.8
59 Anchorage, AK 87.7
60 York-Hanover, PA 87.7
61 Medford, OR 87.6
62 Spokane, WA 87.6
63 Colorado Springs, CO 87.5
64 Kingsport-Bristol-Bristol, TN-VA 87.4
65 San Jose-Sunnyvale-Santa Clara, CA 87.4
66 Lafayette, LA 87.3
67 Dallas-Fort Worth-Arlington, TX 87
68 Houston-Sugar Land-Baytown, TX 87
69 Seattle-Tacoma-Bellevue, WA 87
70 Charleston-N Charleston-Summerville, SC 86.8
71 Richmond, VA 86.8
72 Washington-Arlington-Alexandria, DC-VA-MD-WV 86.8
73 Spartanburg, SC 86.6
74 Columbus, OH 86.6
75 Davenport-Moline-Rock Island, IA-IL 86.6
76 Deltona-Daytona Beach-Ormond Beach, FL 86.6
77 Wilmington, NC 86.5
78 Wichita, KS 86.4
79 Green Bay, WI 86.4
80 Roanoke, VA 86.3
81 San Francisco-Oakland-Fremont, CA 86.2
82 Fort Smith, AR-OK 86.1
83 Orlando-Kissimmee, FL 86.1
84 Milwaukee-Waukesha-West Allis, WI 86.1
85 Pittsburgh, PA 86.1
86 Reno-Sparks, NV 86.1
87 Eugene-Springfield, OR 86
88 Duluth, MN-WI 86
89 Durham, NC 85.9
90 Kansas City, MO-KS 85.9
91 Phoenix-Mesa-Scottsdale, AZ 85.8
92 Fort Wayne, IN 85.7
93 Lynchburg, VA 85.6
94 Evansville, IN-KY 85.6
95 Chattanooga, TN-GA 85.5
96 Rochester, NY 85.5
97 Louisville-Jefferson County, KY-IN 85.4
98 Harrisburg-Carlisle, PA 85.3
99 Atlanta-Sandy Springs-Marietta, GA 85.2
100 Bridgeport-Stamford-Norwalk, CT 85.1
101 Gainesville, FL 85
102 Los Angeles-Long Beach-Santa Ana, CA 84.9
103 Peoria, IL 84.9
104 Hickory-Lenoir-Morganton, NC 84.9
105 Little Rock-N Little Rock-Conway, AR 84.8
106 Hagerstown-Martinsburg, MD-WV 84.8
107 Cincinnati-Middletown, OH-KY-IN 84.7
108 Tampa-St. Petersburg-Clearwater, FL 84.7
109 Albuquerque, NM 84.6
110 Palm Bay-Melbourne-Titusville, FL 84.6
111 Cedar Rapids, IA 84.4
112 Greeley, CO 84.4
113 Columbia, SC 84.3
114 Sacramento–Arden-Arcade–Roseville, CA 84.3
115 Syracuse, NY 84.1
116 Miami-Fort Lauderdale-Pompano Beach, FL 84
117 Hartford-West Hartford-East Hartford, CT 84
118 Jacksonville, FL 83.9
119 Akron,OH 83.9
120 Pensacola-Ferry Pass-Brent, FL 83.9
121 Topeka, KS 83.9
122 Allentown-Bethlehem-Easton, PA-NJ 83.9
123 Lakeland-Winter Haven, FL 83.8
124 Canton-Massillon, OH 83.8
125 Tulsa, OK 83.7
126 Dayton, OH 83.6
127 St. Louis, MO-IL 83.6
128 El Paso, TX 83.5
129 Cape Coral-Fort Myers, FL 83.5
130 Springfield, MA 83.5
131 Redding, CA 83.5
132 Lansing-East Lansing, MI 83.4
133 Erie, PA 83.3
134 Birmingham-Hoover, AL 83.1
135 Chicago-Naperville-Joliet, IL-IN-WI 83.1
136 Salinas, CA 83.1
137 South Bend-Mishawaka, IN-MI 83
138 Worcester, MA 83
139 Killeen-Temple-Fort Hood, TX 82.8
140 Montgomery, AL 82.8
141 Virginia Beach-Norfolk-Newport News, VA-NC 82.8
142 Port St. Lucie, FL 82.7
143 Yakima, WA 82.7
144 Ocala, FL 82.4
145 New York-North New Jersey-Long Island, NY-NJ-PA 82.3
146 Visalia-Porterville, CA 82.3
147 Philadephia-Camden-Wilmington, PA-NJ-DE-MD 82.3
148 Prescott, AZ 82.1
149 Albany-Schenectady-Troy,NY 82.1
150 Cleveland-Elyria-Mentor, OH 82.1
151 Clarksville, TN-KY 82
152 Las Vegas-Paradise, NV 81.9
153 Augusta-Richmond County, GA-SC 81.8
154 Corpus Christi, TX 81.6
155 Tucson, AZ 81.5
156 New Orleans-Metairie-Kenner, LA 81.3
157 Fresno, CA 81.2
158 Charleston, WV 81.1
159 Baltimore-Towson, MD 81
160 Riverside-San Bernardino-Ontario, CA 80.9
161 Reading, PA 80.6
162 Baton Rouge, LA 80.4
163 Providence-New Bedford-Fall River, RI-MA 80.1
164 Tallahassee, FL 79.9
165 Shreveport-Bossier City, LA 79.8
166 New Haven-Milford, CT 79.8
167 Memphis, TN-MS-AR 79.7
168 Norwich-New London, CT 79.7
169 Vallejo-Fairfield, CA 79.6
170 Poughkeepsie-Newburgh-Middletown, NY 79.3
171 Modesto, CA 79.3
172 Buffalo-Niagara Falls, NY 79.2
173 Utica-Rome, NY 79.2
174 Mobile, AL 78.9
175 Youngstown-Warren-Boardman, OH-PA 78.7
176 Detroit-Warren-Livonia, MI 78.5
177 Toledo, OH 78.4
178 Beaumont-Port Arthur, TX 78
179 Huntington-Ashland, WV-KY-OH 77.7
180 Fayetteville, NC 77.1
181 Trenton-Ewing, NJ 76.9
182 Columbus, GA-AL 76.6
183 Scranton–Wilkes-Barre, PA 74.9
184 Binghamton, NY 74.6
185 Jackson, MS 74.4
186 Flint, MI 74.2
187 Bakersfield, CA 74
188 Stockton, CA 73.3
189 Rockford, IL 72.8
Source: Gallup-Healthways Well-Being Index



Government Appeals Decision on Clergy Housing Allowance Exclusion.

The government filed a brief in the Seventh Circuit arguing that a district court erred when it held that section 107(2), which excludes the rental allowance paid to a minister from income, was an unconstitutional violation of the establishment clause, maintaining that the plaintiffs lacked standing and the law is constitutional.

FREEDOM FROM RELIGION FOUNDATION, INCORPORATED,
ANNIE LAURIE GAYLOR AND DAN BARKER,
Plaintiffs-Appellees
v.
JACOB J. LEW, IN HIS OFFICIAL CAPACITY AS SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY,
AND JOHN A. KOSKINEN, IN HIS OFFICIAL CAPACITY AS
COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE,
Defendants-Appellants

IN THE UNITED STATES COURT OF APPEALS
FOR THE SEVENTH CIRCUITON APPEAL FROM THE JUDGMENT AND ORDER OF
THE UNITED STATES DISTRICT COURT
FOR THE WESTERN DISTRICT OF WISCONSIN
(No. 11-cv-0626; Honorable Barbara B. Crabb)

BRIEF FOR THE APPELLANTS

KATHRYN KENEALLY
Assistant Attorney General

TAMARA W. ASHFORD
Principal Deputy Assistant Attorney General

GILBERT S. ROTHENBERG (202) 514-3361
TERESA E. MCLAUGHLIN (202) 514-4342
JUDITH A. HAGLEY (202) 514-8126
Attorneys
Tax Division
Department of Justice
Post Office Box 502
Washington, D.C. 20044

Of Counsel:
JOHN W. VAUDREUIL
United States Attorney

                               TABLE OF CONTENTS

 Table of contents

 Table of authorities

 Glossary

 Statement regarding oral argument

 Statement of jurisdiction

 Statement of the issues

 Statement of the case

         A. Procedural overview

         B. Background: § 107

         C. FFRF

         D. The proceedings below

 Summary of argument

 Argument

      I. Plaintiffs lack standing to sue

         Standard of review

         A. Introduction

         B. Plaintiffs lack standing under Article III

         C. Plaintiffs' lawsuit also runs afoul of other limitations on
            standing

         D. The District Court's standing analysis cannot withstand scrutiny

     II. Section 107(2) does not violate the Establishment Clause

         Standard of review

         A. Introduction

         B. Section 107 is a permissible accommodation of religion

              1. Section 107(2) has a secular legislative purpose

                   a. The history and context of § 107

                   b. The statute's history and context disclose the secular
                      purpose of eliminating discrimination against, and among,
                      ministers and of minimizing interference with a church's
                      internal affairs

                   c. The District Court ignored the statute's history and
                      context

              2. Section 107(2) does not have the primary effect of advancing
                 or inhibiting religion

                   a. Section 107 does not endorse religion, but merely
                      minimizes governmental influence on, and entanglement
                      with, a church's internal affairs

                   b. Section 107(2) does not subsidize religion, as the
                      District Court erroneously concluded

              3. Section 107(2) does not produce excessive entanglement

              4. Texas Monthly is not controlling because it is
                 distinguishable in crucial respects

 Conclusion

 Certificate of compliance

 Certificate of service

 Statutory addendum

 Circuit Rule 30(d) certification

 Appendix table of contents

                              TABLE OF AUTHORITIES

 Cases:

 ACLU v. Alvarez, 679 F.3d 583 (7th Cir. 2012)

 Allen v. Wright, 468 U.S. 737 (1984)

 Am. Fed'n of Gov't Employees v. Cohen, 171 F.3d 460 (7th Cir. 1999)

 Apache Bend Apartments, Ltd. v. United States, 987 F.2d 1174
 (5th Cir. 1993)

 Ariz. Christian School Tuition Org. v. Winn, 131 S. Ct. 1436 (2011)

 Arizonans for Official English v. Arizona, 520 U.S. 43 (1997)

 Bartley v. United States, 123 F.3d 466 (7th Cir. 1997)

 Books v. Elkhart County, Ind., 401 F.3d 857 (7th Cir. 2005)

 Camps Newfound/Owatonna v. Town of Harrison, 520 U.S. 564 (1997)

 City of Milwaukee v. Block, 823 F.2d 1158 (7th Cir. 1987)

 Commissioner v. Kowalski, 434 U.S. 77 (1977)

 Conning v. Busey, 127 F. Supp. 958 (S.D. Ohio 1954)

 Corp. of the Presiding Bishop of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day
 Saints v. Amos, 483 U.S. 327 (1987)

 Cutter v. Wilkinson, 544 U.S. 709 (2005)

 Doe v. Elmbrook Sch. Dist., 687 F.3d 840 (7th Cir. 2012), petition
 for cert. filed, No. 12-755 (Sup. Ct. Dec. 20, 2012)

 Droz v. Commissioner, 48 F.3d 1120 (9th Cir. 1995)

 FFRF v. Geithner, 715 F. Supp. 2d 1051 (E.D. Cal. 2010)

 FFRF v. Obama, 641 F.3d 803 (7th Cir. 2011)

 FFRF v. Zielke, 845 F.2d 1463 (7th Cir. 1988)

 Finlator v. Powers, 902 F.2d 1158 (4th Cir. 1990)

 Flast v. Cohen, 392 U.S. 83 (1968)

 Flight Attendants Against UAL Offset v. Commissioner, 165 F.3d 572
 (7th Cir. 1999)

 Fulani v. Brady, 935 F.2d 1324 (D.C. Cir. 1991)

 Gillette v. United States, 401 U.S. 437 (1971)

 Heckler v. Mathews, 465 U.S. 728 (1984)

 Hein v. FFRF, 551 U.S. 587 (2007)

 Hernandez v. Commissioner, 490 U.S. 680 (1989)

 Hibbs v. Winn, 542 U.S. 88 (2004)

 Hosanna-Tabor Evangelical Lutheran Church & Sch. v. EEOC,
 132 S. Ct. 694 (2012)

 Immanuel Baptist Church v. Glass, 497 P.2d 757 (Okla. 1972)

 Kaufman v. McCaughtry, 419 F.3d 678 (7th Cir. 2005)

 Larson v. Valente, 456 U.S. 228 (1982)

 Lemon v. Kurtzman, 403 U.S. 602 (1971)

 Lexmark Int'l, Inc. v. Static Control Components, Inc.,
 __ S. Ct. __, 2014 WL 1168967 (Mar. 25, 2014)

 Louisiana v. McAdoo, 234 U.S. 627 (1914)

 Love Church v. Evanston, 896 F.2d 1082 (7th Cir. 1990)

 Lujan v. Defenders of Wildlife, 504 U.S. 555 (1992)

 MacColl v. United States, 91 F. Supp. 721 (N.D. Ill. 1950)

 Marks v. United States, 430 U.S. 188 (1977)

 McCreary County v. ACLU, 545 U.S. 844 (2005)

 McDaniel v. Paty, 435 U.S. 618 (1978)

 Moose Lodge No. 107 v. Irvis, 407 U.S. 163 (1972)

 Moritz v. Commissioner, 469 F.2d 466 (10th Cir. 1972)

 Mueller v. Allen, 463 U.S. 388 (1983)

 Nat'l Taxpayers Union, Inc. v. United States, 68 F.3d 1428
 (D.C. Cir. 1995)

 Raines v. Byrd, 521 U.S. 811 (1997)

 Salazar v. Buono, 130 S. Ct. 1803 (2010)

 Salkov v. Commissioner, 46 T.C. 190 (1966)

 Schleicher v. Salvation Army, 518 F.3d 472 (7th Cir. 2008)

 Sherman v. Koch, 623 F.3d 501 (7th Cir. 2010)

 Templeton v. Commissioner, 719 F.2d 1408 (7th Cir. 1983)

 Texas Monthly, Inc. v. Bullock, 489 U.S. 1 (1989)

 U.S. Catholic Conference, In re, 885 F.2d 1020 (2d Cir. 1989)

 United States v. Felt & Tarrant Mfg. Co., 283 U.S. 269 (1931)

 United States v. Williams, 514 U.S. 527 (1995)

 Valley Forge Christian Coll. v. Ams. United for Separation of Church &
 State, Inc., 454 U.S. 464 (1982)

 Vision Church v. Village of Long Grove, 468 F.3d 975 (7th Cir. 2006)

 Walz v. Tax Commission, 397 U.S. 664 (1970)

 Warnke v. United States, 641 F. Supp. 1083 (E.D. Ky. 1986)

 Warth v. Seldin, 422 U.S. 490 (1975)

 Williamson v. Commissioner, 224 F.2d 377 (8th Cir. 1955)

 Constitution, Statutes, and Regulations:

 U.S. Constitution:

      Amend. I, cl.1

      Amend. V

      Art. III

 Administrative Procedure Act, 5 U.S.C.:

      § 701(a)(1)

      § 702

      § 702(1), (2)

      § 703

      § 704

 Clergy Housing Allowance Clarification Act, Pub. L. No. 107-181,
 116 Stat. 583

 Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C.):

      § 107

      § 107(1)

      § 107(2)

      § 119

      § 134

      § 162

      § 280A

      § 280A(c)(1)

      § 912

      § 6211

      § 6212

      § 6213(a)

      § 6511

      § 6532(a)(1)

      § 6662(a)

      § 6664(c)(1)

      § 6702

      § 7421(a)

      § 7422

 Revenue Act of 1921, Public L. No. 98, sec. 213(b)(11), 42 Stat. 227

 Revenue Act of 1921, Public L. No. 98, sec. 214(a)(1), 42 Stat. 227

 Section 22(b)(6) of the 1939 Internal Revenue Code, 53 Stat. 10 28 U.S.C.:

      § 1291

      § 1331

      § 1341

      § 1346(a)(1)

      § 1491

      § 2107(b)

      § 2201(a)

 Treas. Reg. § 1.1402(c)-5(c)(2)

 Miscellaneous:

 1 Mertens Law of Fed. Income Taxation § 7:196 (2013)

 148 Cong. Rec. 4670-4671 (Apr. 16, 2002)

 Bittker, Churches, Taxes & the Constitution, 78 Yale L. J. 1285 (1969)

 Brunner, Taxation: Exemption of Parsonage or Residence of Minister,
 Priest, Rabbi or Other Church Personnel, 55 A.L.R.3d 356 (1974)

 Clergy Housing Allowance Clarification Act, H.R. 4156, 107th Cong.
 (as introduced April 10, 2002)

 Fed. R. App. P. 4(a)(1)(B)

 Hearings on Forty Topics Pertaining to the General Revision of the Internal
 Revenue Code (Aug. 1953)

 H.R. Rep. No. 1337 (1954)

 Internal Revenue Manual § 7.25.3.6.5(2) (Feb. 23, 1999)

 Legg, Excluding Parsonages from Taxation: Declaring a Victor in the Duel
 between Caesar & the First Amendment, 10 Georgetown J. of Law & Public
 Policy 269 (2012)

 I.T. 1694, C.B. II-1, at 79 (1923)

 Note, The Parsonage Exclusion under the Endorsement Test,
 13 Va. Tax Rev. 397 (1993)

 O.D. 862, 4 C.B. 85 (1921)

 Savidge, The Parsonage in England (1964)

 S. Rep. No. 1622 (1954)

 Zelinsky, The First Amendment & the Parsonage Allowance, Tax Notes 5
 (Dec. 2013)

                                GLOSSARY
 _____________________________________________________________________

      APA                   Administrative Procedure Act
      The Code              Internal Revenue Code
      Commissioner          Commissioner of Internal Revenue
      FFRF                  Freedom from Religion Foundation, Inc.
      IRS                   Internal Revenue Service
      Plaintiffs            FFRF, Annie Gaylor, and Dan Barker
      Secretary             Secretary of the Treasury

STATEMENT REGARDING ORAL ARGUMENT

In this case, the District Court struck down the longstanding exclusion for a parsonage allowance under § 107(2) of the Internal Revenue Code as a violation of the Establishment Clause, at the behest of plaintiffs, an atheist advocacy organization and two of its members. Issues of great administrative importance regarding the constitutionality of the exclusion and plaintiffs’ standing to sue are presented. Counsel for the appellants respectfully inform the Court that they believe that oral argument is essential to the disposition of this appeal.

STATEMENT OF JURISDICTION

Freedom from Religion Foundation, Inc. (FFRF) and its co-presidents Annie Gaylor and Dan Barker (together, plaintiffs) brought this suit for declaratory and injunctive relief against the Secretary of the Treasury and the Commissioner of Internal Revenue. (Doc1,13.)1 FFRF, a Wisconsin corporation, has its principal place of business in Madison, Wisconsin. (Id.) The gravamen of the complaint was that § 107 of the Internal Revenue Code, which excludes from federal income taxation certain housing benefits provided to ministers, violates the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment to the United States Constitution and the Equal Protection component of the Constitution’s Due Process Clause. Plaintiffs sought (i) a declaration that § 107 is unconstitutional and (ii) an injunction against the continued allowance of the exclusion. Although plaintiffs invoked the District Court’s jurisdiction under 28 U.S.C. § 1331, the Government maintains that the court lacked subject matter jurisdiction. Because they failed to seek the exclusion provided by § 107, plaintiffs lack standing to challenge it. See Argument I, below.The District Court rendered a final judgment on November 26, 2013, disposing of all claims of all parties. (App44-45.) The Government filed its notice of appeal on January 24, 2014, within the 60 days allowed by Fed. R. App. P. 4(a)(1)(B). (Doc58.) See 28 U.S.C. § 2107(b). This Court’s jurisdiction over the appeal rests upon 28 U.S.C. § 1291.

STATEMENT OF THE ISSUES

1. Whether plaintiffs have standing to challenge the constitutionality of the exclusion for a parsonage allowance under § 107(2), when they have neither sought nor been denied the exclusion.2. If plaintiffs have standing, whether § 107(2) violates the Establishment Clause.

STATEMENT OF THE CASE

A. Procedural overviewPlaintiffs brought this suit against the Secretary and the Commissioner, seeking (i) a declaration that § 107 violates the Establishment Clause and (ii) an injunction barring the allowance of the exclusion. Because plaintiffs did not themselves seek the benefits of § 107, the Government moved to dismiss the case, contending that plaintiffs lacked standing. The District Court denied the motion. (A1-20.) The Government later moved for summary judgment, renewing its argument that plaintiffs lacked standing and contending that § 107 does not violate the Establishment Clause. Plaintiffs did not contest the motion insofar as it concerned their standing to challenge the exclusion under § 107(1) for housing furnished in kind. But they opposed the motion insofar as the exclusion under § 107(2) for a cash parsonage allowance was concerned. The court granted the Government summary judgment regarding § 107(1). After concluding that plaintiffs had standing to challenge the latter exclusion (App1-15), the court granted plaintiffs summary judgment sua sponte regarding § 107(2), striking down the statute as unconstitutional (App15-42). The Government now appeals.

B. Background: § 107

Section 107 is one of several statutory exclusions from gross income for employment-connected housing benefits. Taxpayers who are furnished housing by their employers may exclude the value of that housing from their gross income where (among other things) the housing is furnished for the “convenience of the employer.” § 119. Taxpayers who furnish their own housing, but use it for business purposes for the “convenience of [the] employer,” may deduct from income expenses related to that housing. § 280A(c)(1). In addition, certain federal employees may exclude from gross income cash provided to them for housing purposes. § 134 (military housing allowance); § 912 (foreign housing allowance for Foreign Service, the CIA, etc.).

Section 107 provides an analogous exclusion for housing or its cash equivalent provided to a “minister of the gospel” by his employing church.2 Specifically, when furnished or paid to him “as part of his compensation,” a minister’s gross income does not include “(1) the rental value of a home” or “(2) the rental allowance paid to him . . . to the extent used by him to rent or provide a home and to the extent such allowance does not exceed the fair rental value of the home,” plus utilities. § 107.

Section 107 has its origins in the Revenue Act of 1921, which created an exclusion for “[t]he rental value of a dwelling house and appurtenances thereof furnished to a minister of the gospel as part of his compensation.” Pub. L. No. 98, sec. 213(b)(11), 42 Stat. 227, 239. This exclusion was carried forward in successive revenue acts and was incorporated into the Internal Revenue Code of 1939 without substantive change. See Section 22(b)(6) of the 1939 Code, 53 Stat. 10. When the exclusion was reenacted as § 107(1) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, the addition of § 107(2) allowed ministers to exclude “rental allowance[s].”

Although the legislative history of the 1921 Revenue Act does not explain why the in-kind exclusion was introduced, the treatment of clergy housing under prior law sheds light on Section 213(b)(11)’s purpose. Immediately before its enactment, the Treasury Department had allowed some employees — but not clergy — to exclude the value of employer-provided housing from income pursuant to the “convenience of the employer” doctrine. See Commissioner v. Kowalski, 434 U.S. 77, 84-90 (1977) (describing history of exclusion for such employer-provided housing). Those benefiting included seamen living aboard ships, workers living in “camps,” cannery workers, and hospital employees. Id. In 1921, the Treasury announced that ministers would be taxed on the fair rental value of parsonages provided as living quarters, O.D. 862, 4 C.B. 85 (1921), even though ministers traditionally resided in parsonages for the church’s convenience (A37-51). Shortly thereafter, Congress changed that treatment by enacting Section 213(b)(11), thereby placing ministers on an equal footing with other employees who already enjoyed an exclusion for housing provided for the employer’s convenience.

When the parsonage exclusion was enacted, churches had differing traditions and practices that influenced how they provided parsonages to their ministers. (A37-65,68-73.) Older or more hierarchical churches tended to furnish church-owned parsonages to ministers; newer churches favored providing ministers cash housing allowances. (Id.) But either way, the minister’s housing was generally used for the church’s religious purposes. (A37-39,41-42,50-51,70-71,73.)

When churches that did not own parsonages provided ministers with cash housing allowances in lieu of in-kind housing, the Treasury ruled that the statutory exclusion was limited to in-kind housing and that housing allowances were includable in gross income. I.T. 1694, C.B. II-1, at 79 (1923). The Treasury noted, however, that the allowance would be deductible by the minister as a business expense, to the extent it was used for “expenses attributable to the portion of the parsonage which is devoted to professional use.” Id. Several courts disagreed. They held that, in order to treat similarly situated ministers equally, cash allowances must also be considered excludable under the statutory parsonage exclusion. E.g., Williamson v. Commissioner, 224 F.2d 377, 380 (8th Cir. 1955); Conning v. Busey, 127 F. Supp. 958 (S.D. Ohio 1954); MacColl v. United States, 91 F. Supp. 721 (N.D. Ill. 1950). Whether paid in cash or in kind, the benefits were considered provided for the church’s “convenience” and therefore excludable.Williamson, 224 F.2d at 380.

In 1954, Congress resolved the dispute by codifying the prevailing judicial view in § 107, which excludes compensatory housing furnished to ministers in cash as well as in kind. In doing so, Congress sought to remove “discrimination” against ministers who were paid cash allowances, as the House and Senate Reports explained. H.R. Rep. No. 1337, at 15 (1954); S. Rep. No. 1622, at 16 (1954).

In 2002, Congress amended § 107(2) to clarify that the exclusion was limited to the fair rental value of the parsonage. Pub. L. No. 107-181, 116 Stat. 583. The bill that introduced the proposed amendment reiterated that one of the purposes of § 107 was to “accommodate the differing governance structures, practices, traditions, and other characteristics of churches through tax policies that strive to be neutral with respect to such differences.” Clergy Housing Allowance Clarification Act, H.R. 4156, 107th Cong. § 2(a)(4) (as introduced April 10, 2002). In addition to preventing discrimination, § 107 was also designed, according to this legislative history, to avoid “intrusive inquiries by the government into the relationship between clergy and their respective churches” entailed by the generally available convenience-of-the-employer doctrine codified elsewhere in the Code. Id. at § 2(a)(5). Section 107 avoids such potential church-state entanglement by eliminating any need for the minister to demonstrate that the parsonage or allowance therefor is being used for the church’s convenience under § 119 or § 280A(c)(1), respectively.

C. FFRF

FFRF is a nonprofit membership corporation that promotes the separation of church and state and educates on matters of “non-theism.” (A3.) Gaylor and Barker, FFRF’s co-presidents, are “nonbeliever[s]” who are “opposed to government preferences and favoritism towards religion.”3 (Doc13 at 3.) FFRF provides Gaylor and Barker (formerly an ordained minister) with housing allowances not exceeding housing-related expenses. Plaintiffs complained that the § 107 exclusion, being limited to “ministers of the gospel,” subsidizes, promotes, and endorses religion in violation of the Establishment Clause. (Doc13 at 5.) Although they complained of unequal treatment, neither Gaylor nor Barker had personally sought or been denied the exclusion before filing suit, either by claiming it on their income tax returns or by filing claims for refund with the IRS challenging the statute as unconstitutional unless it applied to them. (A22-23,30.)

D. The proceedings below

The Government moved to dismiss for lack of subject matter jurisdiction. (Doc12,16-17.) It contended that plaintiffs lacked standing to sue under Article III of the Constitution. The Government contended that there was no injury-in-fact because neither Gaylor nor Barker had personally sought or been denied the exclusion, and it was insufficient merely to allege that it is illegal for third parties to enjoy it. (Doc12 at 17-22.) The Government further contended that entertaining plaintiffs’ claims, and recognizing a waiver of sovereign immunity under the Administrative Procedure Act, 5 U.S.C. § 702, would also be at odds with the highly articulated structure of tax litigation, which generally precludes the issuance of declaratory and injunctive relief and confines disputes regarding tax treatment to deficiency actions and suits for refund brought by the affected taxpayers. (Doc27 at 4-7.)

In response, plaintiffs contended that they had standing to challenge § 107(2). They argued that, having received housing allowances, they were similarly situated to clergy enjoying the exclusion. (Doc20.)

The District Court denied the Government’s motion. (A1-20.) The court considered it “clear” that plaintiffs are not entitled to the exclusion and that there was no reason to require them to undergo the “futile” exercise of seeking the exclusion. (A2.)

The Government moved for summary judgment. (Doc44,54.) Besides renewing its jurisdictional arguments (Doc44 at 5-25), the Government defended the constitutionality of § 107 (Id. at 25-52). It contended that § 107 does not violate the Establishment Clause because it has the secular purpose and effect of eliminating discrimination against, and among, ministers, and of limiting government entanglement with religion. (Doc44 at 3.)

Plaintiffs opposed the motion, but only as it related to § 107(2). They argued that the District Court had jurisdiction and that § 107(2) violates the Establishment Clause. (Doc52.)

The District Court granted the Government summary judgment regarding § 107(1). Respecting § 107(2), however, the court granted summary judgment to plaintiffs sua sponte. (App1-3.) The court reaffirmed its conclusion that plaintiffs had standing to challenge § 107(2), finding it “clear from the face of the statute that plaintiffs are excluded from an exemption granted to others.” (App2.) The court further held that § 107(2) violates the Establishment Clause because it “provides a benefit to religious persons and no one else, even though doing so is not necessary to alleviate a special burden on religious exercise.” (App2.) The court held that the case was controlled by the plurality opinion in Texas Monthly, Inc. v. Bullock, 489 U.S. 1 (1989), striking down a sales tax exemption for religious periodicals. (App2.) The court rejected the Government’s argument that § 107(2) was enacted for the secular purpose of avoiding discrimination among ministers. Although the court observed that other Code provisions provide tax benefits for employer-provided housing, it did not consider whether § 107(2) avoids the potential church-state entanglement posed by ministers being forced to rely upon generally available tax benefits for housing used for an employer’s convenience. (App29-37.)

SUMMARY OF ARGUMENT

Plaintiffs — an advocacy organization promoting atheism and the separation of church and state, and its co-presidents — challenge the constitutionality of § 107(2), a longstanding exclusion for a cash parsonage allowance paid by a church to its minister. Plaintiffs do not themselves seek the exclusion, but only to nullify its enjoyment by ministers who are not parties to this action. The District Court held that plaintiffs had standing to challenge § 107(2) and that the statute violates the Establishment Clause. Both rulings are flawed.1. Under Article III, a plaintiff lacks standing to sue unless he alleges a personal injury fairly traceable to the defendant’s alleged unlawful conduct. A mere interest in a problem or a grievance shared in common with the public does not suffice. Where, as here, a plaintiff alleges an injury from unequal treatment, he lacks standing unless and until he personally seeks and is denied the benefit at issue. Without the personal denial of equal treatment, the plaintiff raises only a generalized grievance, not a case or controversy. Plaintiffs here have not personally asked for the § 107(2) exclusion, nor are they litigating their own tax liabilities. Because they seek only to deprive others of the exclusion, they have suffered no actual personal injury at the hands of the Government.

Prudential concerns and statutory limitations under the APA also counsel dismissal. Congress has erected a highly articulated structure that confines tax litigation to suits by taxpayers contesting their own tax liabilities in Tax Court deficiency actions or suits for refund in the district courts and Court of Federal Claims. Injunctive and declaratory relief is generally precluded where federal taxes are concerned. To recognize a plaintiff’s standing to challenge the tax liability of third parties not before the court would disturb this carefully crafted statutory scheme.

2. If the Court were to reach the merits, it should uphold § 107(2) as constitutional. Section 107(2) has a secular purpose and effect and avoids excessive church-state entanglement. The clergy have long been provided with homes at or near their places of worship and use them in connection with their ministries. Just as it has done for lay employees furnished housing for the employer’s convenience under § 119, Congress has merely exercised the discretion that accompanies its taxing power to exempt the value of such professionally used parsonages from taxation. Extension of this “refusal to tax” to the cash equivalent of in-kind housing under § 107(2) merely “eliminates the discrimination,” in the words of the drafters, that would otherwise exist against ministers, and between churches that have historically provided parsonages in kind and those that do not. Permitting ministers to exclude parsonage allowances under § 107(2), rather than forcing them to rely on the generally available deduction for the business use of the home under § 280A(c)(1), may also prevent more intrusive Government inquiries into the church-minister relationship, and avoid the need to evaluate whether activities in a minister’s home are secular or religious. These statutory purposes comport fully with the restraints of the Establishment Clause.

In striking down the law, the District Court erred. It failed to come to grips with the reasons Congress enacted § 107 in the first place. It also disregarded the fact that the housing exclusions provided to ministers are merely part of a larger Congressional design providing exclusions or deductions for certain employer-provided housing benefits for all taxpayers. Given the unique history and context of § 107(2), the plurality opinion in Texas Monthly by no means “controls” this case, as the District Court erroneously assumed (App19). That case concerned a distinctly different tax exemption that lacks the redeeming features present here.

ARGUMENTI

Plaintiffs lack standing to sue

Standard of review

A plaintiff’s standing to sue presents a question of law reviewable de novoLove Church v. Evanston, 896 F.2d 1082, 1085 (7th Cir. 1990).A. Introduction

The standing doctrine has both constitutional and prudential aspects. The “core component” of standing, derived directly from the “cases” or “controversies” requirement of Article III of the Constitution, is grounded on the separation of powers. Allen v. Wright, 468 U.S. 737, 750-752 (1984). It requires the plaintiff to “allege personal injury fairly traceable to the defendant’s allegedly unlawful conduct and likely to be redressed by the requested relief.” Id.at 751. The injury, moreover, must be “concrete, particularized, and actual or imminent (instead of conjectural or hypothetical).” Am. Fed’n of Gov’t Employees v. Cohen, 171 F.3d 460, 466 (7th Cir. 1999). “[G]eneralized grievances” “do not present constitutional ‘cases’ or ‘controversies.'” Lexmark Int’l, Inc. v. Static Control Components, Inc., __ S. Ct. __, 2014 WL 1168967, at *6n.3 (Mar. 25, 2014).

In addition to these constitutional requirements, there are also certain prudential limitations on the exercise of federal jurisdiction. This inquiry includes “whether the constitutional or statutory provision” in question “properly can be understood as granting persons in the plaintiff’s position a right to judicial relief.” Warth v. Seldin, 422 U.S. 490, 500 (1975).

In this case, the District Court struck down § 107(2), which has been on the statute books for some 60 years, at the behest of plaintiffs who have not been injured by the statute, though they object to § 107(2) as a matter of principle. There is no dispute that the individual plaintiffs, Gaylor and Barker, have never sought the very tax benefit about which they complain. Nor do they seek to litigate their own tax liabilities.4

The Supreme Court has “always insisted on strict compliance with [the] jurisdictional standing requirement,” because the “‘law of Art. III standing is built on a single basic idea — the idea of separation of powers.'” Raines v. Byrd, 521 U.S. 811, 819-820 (1997) (citation omitted). The Court also has repeatedly “[w]arn[ed] against premature adjudication of constitutional questions.” Arizonans for Official English v. Arizona, 520 U.S. 43, 79 (1997). In our tripartite system of government, a court does not act as a “constitutional check” on a Congressional enactment unless a bona fide dispute involving an actually injured litigant requires the court to pass on the validity of a statute.

As demonstrated below, the District Court’s ruling is at odds with settled law regarding constitutional standing. In contravention of prudential standing limitations, moreover, the ruling also bypasses the proper channels for tax litigation enacted by Congress that confine tax litigation to suits by taxpayers contesting their own tax liabilities, after the taxpayer first seeks the tax benefit in question from the Internal Revenue Service. These restrictions are by no means “arbitrary” rules (A15) that “waste” time (A8). They are critical components of a constitutional design that ensures that courts are the “‘last'” — not the first — “‘resort.'” Allen, 468 U.S. at 752 (citation omitted).

B. Plaintiffs lack standing under Article III

Here, although they contend that they are similarly situated to the ministers who enjoy it, plaintiffs do not seek to enjoy the parsonage exclusion themselves. Instead, they seek to deprive the ministers of the benefit, even though the clergy are not before the court. Because plaintiffs do not seek to improve their own economic situation, the apparent gravamen of their claim is that they have been stigmatized by the Government’s failure to provide them with equal treatment on account of their atheism. The Supreme Court has held, however, that an injury of this type “accords a basis for standing only to ‘those persons who are personally denied equal treatment’ by the challenged discriminatory conduct.” Allen, 468 U.S. at 755 (emphasis added) (quoting Heckler v. Mathews, 465 U.S. 728, 739-740 (1984)). Without the personal denial of equal treatment, the plaintiff raises only a “generally available grievance about government,” which “does not state an Article III case or controversy.” Lujan v. Defenders of Wildlife, 504 U.S. 555, 573-574 (1992). Insisting on a personalized injury, the Supreme Court “has repeatedly held that an asserted right to have the Government act in accordance with law is not sufficient, standing alone, to confer jurisdiction in federal court.” Allen, 468 U.S. at 754.

In Allen, the Supreme Court held that the parents of African-American children lacked standing to sue Treasury officials to challenge the tax-exempt status of racially discriminatory schools, because they had not been “personally denied equal treatment” by the Government, but were merely seeking to litigate another person’s tax liability. 468 U.S. at 754-756. Similarly, in Moose Lodge No. 107 v. Irvis, 407 U.S. 163, 166-167 (1972), the Court held that an African-American plaintiff lacked standing to challenge a racially discriminatory membership policy because he “never sought to become a member.”

In Heckler, by contrast, a widower was found to have standing to challenge a law requiring his spousal Social Security benefits to be offset against his Civil Service pension unless he demonstrated that he had been his late wife’s dependent, where no such showing was required for a widow to escape the offset. The Court stressed, however, that the plaintiff “personally has been denied benefits that similarly situated women receive.” 465 U.S. at 740 & n.9. Given that personal denial, the Court explained, “there can be no doubt about the direct causal relationship between the Government’s alleged deprivation of appellee’s right to equal protection and the personal injury appellee has suffered — denial of Social Security benefits solely on the basis of his gender.” Id.

Applying these principles, the Fifth Circuit, sitting en banc, held that plaintiffs lacked standing to pursue an “injury of unequal treatment,” based on their ineligibility for special transition rules extended to other taxpayers that temporarily preserved certain repealed tax benefits. Apache Bend Apartments, Ltd. v. United States, 987 F.2d 1174, 1177-1178 (5th Cir. 1993). The court held that “plaintiffs have not suffered any direct injury in the sense that they personally asked for and were denied a benefit granted to others.”5 Id. In so ruling, the court distinguished the injury in Heckler, emphasizing that the plaintiff there had constitutional standing because he “specifically sought benefits for himself,” was “personally” denied those benefits, and raised “his equal protection argument in the context of litigating his right to receive Social Security benefits.” Id. at 1178 n.3. Unlike the plaintiff in Heckler, the plaintiffs in Apache Bend“were not personally denied benefits” under the tax provision at issue, and “never even sought such benefits.” Id.Consequently, the asserted harm was no more than a “generalized grievance” that could not support standing. Id. at 1178.

These principles apply no less in the Establishment Clause context. The “Establishment Clause does not exempt clergy or lay persons from Article III’s standing requirements.” In re U.S. Catholic Conference, 885 F.2d 1020, 1024 (2d Cir. 1989). In Winn, for example, the Supreme Court held that the plaintiffs lacked standing to challenge a tax benefit under the Establishment Clause because they had not personally “been denied a benefit on account of their religion,” but were merely complaining in their capacity as taxpayers that the challenged provision unlawfully benefited religious groups. 131 S. Ct. at 1440, 1449. Similarly, in Catholic Conference, certain clergy plaintiffs alleged that the Government’s failure to revoke the tax exemption of the Catholic Church for electioneering against abortion violated the Establishment Clause. The Second Circuit held that the plaintiffs lacked standing because they “do not complain about their own tax status” and had “neither been personally denied equal treatment under the law nor in any way prosecuted by the IRS.” Id. at 1022, 1024-1026. As the court emphasized, it is “not enough to point to an assertedly illegal benefit flowing to a third party that happened to be a religious entity.” Id. at 1025.

As these decisions make clear, a plaintiff alleging unequal treatment lacks the requisite personal injury unless and until the person seeks — and is denied — equal treatment. Until that point, he complains only of a generalized grievance. Put another way, a person does not have standing to ask that another person’s tax benefit be taken away without first seeking and being denied the benefit himself. Any injury would otherwise be too abstract and diffuse.

Although a would-be litigant lacks standing to deprive others of a tax benefit he eschews, he indubitably would have standing, by contrast, to challenge the exaction of an unconstitutional tax from himself, which results in a direct and personal “economic injury.” Hein v. FFRF, 551 U.S. 587, 599 (2007). But in order to have standing to challenge a tax benefit as unconstitutional, the taxpayer must actually seek the tax benefit himself, placing his own liability in suit. E.g., Texas Monthly, 489 U.S. at 8 (recognizing the standing of a general-interest magazine to raise an Establishment Clause challenge to a tax exemption limited to religious periodicals, where it “paid” the tax and sought a “refund”); Droz v. Commissioner, 48 F.3d 1120, 1122 & n. 1 (9th Cir. 1995) (recognizing that taxpayer had standing to raise Establishment Clause challenge to a religious exemption from the self-employment tax under § 1402(g) for sects opposed to certain insurance, where he claimed, and was denied, the exemption); Moritz v. Commissioner, 469 F.2d 466, 467 (10th Cir. 1972) (addressing Equal Protection challenge brought by a single male who claimed a dependent-care expense deduction that the statute limited to married or widowed men, but allowed to women regardless of marital status); Warnke v. United States, 641 F. Supp. 1083 (E.D. Ky. 1986) (addressing Establishment Clause challenge to regulations under § 107 by taxpayer who claimed, and was denied, the § 107(2) exclusion). In these cases, the taxpayers actually sought the tax benefit from the taxing authority and then litigated their own tax liability, either by way of a deficiency proceeding in Tax Court (as in Droz and Moritz) or by filing a refund suit (as in Texas Monthly and Warnke).

So, too, here, Gaylor and Barker could have sought the § 107(2) exclusion by claiming it on their returns and then petitioning the Tax Court if the IRS were to disallow the exclusion. § 6213(a). Alternatively, they could have paid the resulting taxes due, claimed refunds from the IRS, and then sued for refund if their claims were rejected or not acted upon for six months. §§ 6511, 6532(a)(1), 7422; 28 U.S.C. §§ 1346(a)(1), 1491. Either way, plaintiffs would have standing to litigate their entitlement to the exclusion and to raise an Establishment Clause challenge in that regard. But perhaps preferring to wreak a greater impact — wresting the benefit from ministers nationwide — Gaylor and Barker did neither. (A22-23,30.)

Although plaintiffs “identify their injury as the alleged unequal treatment they have received from” the IRS and Treasury (A6), they, in fact, have received no treatment from those agency-defendants. As plaintiffs concede, they have not contacted the IRS or Treasury about their housing allowances. They have neither personally sought nor been denied equal treatment. (A24,27,31.) Without that critical step, plaintiffs’ claim is reduced to the allegation that § 107(2) violates the Establishment Clause. But as the Supreme Court has emphasized — and the District Court ignored — plaintiffs have “no standing to complain simply that their Government is violating the law.” Allen, 468 U.S. at 755.

Plaintiffs’ suit suffers from the same flaw that precluded standing in AllenWinnApache Bend, and Catholic Conference. Plaintiffs contend that the Government violates the Establishment Clause by permitting ministers to claim the § 107(2) exclusion. But just as in those cases, plaintiffs here are not litigating their own tax liabilities. They are merely suing to have the Government act in accordance with their view of the law. Because plaintiffs have not sought, and been denied, the § 107(2) exclusion, they have not suffered an actual, concrete, and particularized injury. Without such an injury, plaintiffs lack Article III standing.

This Court recently made a like point when FFRF sought to challenge the constitutionality of a federal statute creating the National Day of Prayer as violating the Establishment Clause. FFRF v. Obama, 641 F.3d 803 (7th Cir. 2011). The Court held that FFRF lacked standing because — even if the statute violated the Establishment Clause — FFRF was not personally “injure[d]” by the statute, explaining that FFRF’s “offense at the behavior of the government, and a desire to have public officials comply with (plaintiff’s view of) the Constitution, differs from a legal injury.” Id. at 805, 807. A legal injury, the Court emphasized, requires “an invasion of one’s own rights to create standing.” Id. at 806. Similarly, in FFRF v. Zielke, 845 F.2d 1463 (7th Cir. 1988), the Court held that FFRF lacked standing to challenge a Ten Commandments display because FFRF failed to allege an actual, concrete injury. As the Court explained, FFRF’s commitment “to the principle of separation of church and state . . . alone does not satisfy the standing doctrine.” Id. at 1468 n.3. The same is true here.

C. Plaintiffs’ lawsuit also runs afoul of other limitations on standing

Plaintiffs’ complaint also runs afoul of other limitations on standing. To surmount the prudential principles that limit standing in a suit brought (as here) under the APA, plaintiffs must show not only that they fall within the zone of protected interests, but that there is no “evidence that Congress intended to preclude the plaintiff from suing,” such as “‘the structure of the statutory scheme.'” City of Milwaukee v. Block, 823 F.2d 1158, 1166 (7th Cir. 1987) (citation omitted). These limitations counsel against the exercise of jurisdiction and disclose that the APA does not waive sovereign immunity here.

To begin with, although a person who actually claims a tax benefit might arguably fall within the zone of interests protected by the statute conferring it, plaintiffs here fall short. Eschewing any claim to the § 107(2) exclusion they seek to nullify, they likewise cede any claim to being within the statute’s penumbra. To say, moreover, that they fall within the zone of interests protected by the Establishment Clause, merely because of their interest in the separation of church and state, would not meaningfully set them apart from masses of other citizens who also wish the Government to abide by the law.

In any event, the intent of Congress not to allow plaintiffs to contest the tax liability of third parties is manifest. As we explain below, “Congress has created a highly articulated and exclusive structure of federal tax litigation that limits judicial review of tax matters to precisely defined channels.” (Doc27 at 5.) Plaintiffs are attempting to litigate outside of those established channels.

Congress has authorized taxpayers to bring deficiency actions in the Tax Court to obtain review of asserted deficiencies in income, gift, estate and certain excise taxes without first having to pay the amount in dispute. §§ 6211, 6212, 6213(a). Alternatively, Congress has permitted taxpayers to sue for a refund in a federal district court or in the Court of Federal Claims after the taxpayer has duly filed an administrative refund claim and the claim either has been denied or not acted upon for six months. §§ 6511, 6532(a)(1), 7422(a). These remedies are adequate and specific remedies under 5 U.S.C. §§ 703 and 704 that foreclose review under the APA.

Congress has otherwise generally precluded “any person, whether or not such person is the person against whom such tax was assessed,” from maintaining a suit “for the purpose of restraining the assessment or collection of any tax” (§ 7421(a)), and has likewise generally barred declaratory relief in all actions “with respect to Federal taxes” (28 U.S.C. § 2201(a)). To be sure, the Anti-Injunction Act may not apply of its own terms here, because the effect of plaintiffs’ suit would be to increase tax collections. Cf. Hibbs v. Winn, 542 U.S. 88, 104 (2004) (construing Tax Injunction Act, 28 U.S.C. § 1341). Nevertheless, taken as a whole, this concerted structure generally confines tax disputes to challenges by taxpayers in deficiency actions and refund suits. It expressly — or at least impliedly — forecloses review. 5 U.S.C. §§ 701(a)(1), 702(1), (2).

Against this backdrop, “[i]t is well-recognized that the standing inquiry in tax cases is more restrictive than in other cases.” Nat’l Taxpayers Union, Inc. v. United States, 68 F.3d 1428, 1434 (D.C. Cir. 1995). The standing inquiry becomes particularly “restrictive” (id.) where a plaintiff seeks to litigate the tax liability of third parties who are not before the court. In that context, the courts have recognized “the principle that a party may not challenge the tax liability of another.” United States v. Williams, 514 U.S. 527, 539 (1995). As this Court has observed, “[o]rdinarily a person does not have standing to complain about someone else’s receipt of a tax benefit.” Flight Attendants Against UAL Offset v. Commissioner, 165 F.3d 572, 574 (7th Cir. 1999).

These principles apply with special force where, as here, a plaintiff seeks to increase the tax liabilities of third parties who are not before the court. It would be passing strange to allow plaintiffs, who have not sought the exclusion for themselves, to harness the injunctive power of the court to require the IRS to deny the exclusion to other persons. The better view is that Congress intended no such thing. See Louisiana v. McAdoo, 234 U.S. 627, 632 (1914) (declining to adjudicate third-party challenge to favorable tax treatment for another taxpayer, because the maintenance of such actions “would operate to disturb the whole revenue system of the government”).

Tellingly, the Fifth Circuit, sitting en banc, denied standing in a similar situation in Apache Bend. There, as noted above, the plaintiffs challenged preferential transition relief granted to other taxpayers not before the court. But they did not “seek transition relief for themselves” or “to litigate their own tax liability.” 987 F.2d at 1177. Instead, they “asked only that transition relief be denied to the favored taxpayers.” Id. The Fifth Circuit held that prudential concerns counseled dismissal, explaining that “Congress has erected a complex structure to govern the administration and enforcement of tax laws, and has established precise standards and procedures for judicial review of tax matters.” Id.

Those same concerns counsel dismissal here. As the Fifth Circuit pointed out in Apache Bend, the highly articulated structure of federal tax litigation painstakingly designed by Congress counsels dismissal of a case of this ilk. It is unquestionably “evidence that Congress intended to preclude the plaintiff[s] from suing” outside of that structure.Block, 823 F.2d at 1166. By respecting Congress’s structure, the Fifth Circuit declined to expand its judicial power. The District Court should have exercised the same restraint here.

D. The District Court’s standing analysis cannot withstand scrutiny

The District Court relaxed the standing requirements described above because — in its view — those requirements were “arbitrary” (A15) and a “waste” of “time” (A8). The court considered it “clear” that plaintiffs could not qualify for the exclusion and saw “no reason” to put them through the “futile” exercise of seeking the benefits themselves. (A2.) This approach is flawed for several reasons.

1. As we have already explained, a plaintiff making an unequal-treatment claim has not been injured for standing purposes unless he has sought, and been denied, the benefit at issue. The District Court’s contrary ruling is at odds with this established principle. In Heckler, the Supreme Court held that the plaintiff had standing precisely because he “personally has been denied benefits that similarly situated women receive,” and therefore was not merely asserting a generalized grievance. 465 U.S. at 740 n.9. In Allen, by contrast, the Court held that a plaintiff did not have standing to challenge another’s tax liability. It distinguished Heckler on the basis that the plaintiff there was “‘personally denied equal treatment.'” 468 U.S. at 755 (citation omitted). Where, as here, a plaintiff makes an unequal-treatment claim without contesting his own tax liability, the plaintiff, by definition, is attempting to contest the tax liability of another taxpayer. As the courts held in AllenWinnCatholic Conference, and Apache Bend, he lacks standing to do so. Far from being an “arbitrary” step, presenting a “formal claim” to the IRS regarding one’s own tax liability (A2,15), and then having that personal claim denied, provides the concrete and personal injury that Article III requires.

There is no basis for the District Court’s attempt to excuse plaintiffs from seeking and being denied the exclusion by the IRS on the theory that it would be “futile.” (A2.) To begin with, the court was speculating in concluding that the IRS would deny such a claim. But in any event, Article III’s standing requirements must be “strict[ly] compli[ed] with,” Raines, 521 U.S. at 819-820. Moreover, there is no “futility” exception in federal tax litigation, as it was long ago established in the analogous situation regarding the requirement of filing an administrative refund claim under § 6511 before suit. United States v. Felt & Tarrant Mfg. Co., 283 U.S. 269, 273 (1931). Applying this fundamental principle, this Court has held that it lacks the “authority to excuse [the taxpayer’s] failure to make a claim as required by section 7422(a), notwithstanding our certainty that the IRS ultimately will reject her claim.” Bartley v. United States, 123 F.3d 466, 469 (7th Cir. 1997). Similarly, here, the court lacked the authority to excuse plaintiffs from personally seeking, and being denied, the § 107(2) exclusion, and to have allowed the plaintiffs to litigate their claims outside the structure that Congress has designed for tax litigation, on grounds of futility.

Other taxpayers whose challenges to the constitutionality of the tax laws have been heard have first sought the tax benefit at issue, even where doing so was arguably futile. For example, in Texas Monthly, a nonreligious magazine sought the exemption provided for “religious” periodicals by paying the tax “under protest” and then suing “to recover those payments in state court.” 489 U.S. at 6. Similarly, in Moritz, the taxpayer claimed the dependent-care expense deduction available to all women regardless of marital status, notwithstanding that he was ineligible for it as an unmarried man, and then brought suit in Tax Court to contest the resulting deficiency determined against him. 469 F.2d at 467. In both cases, seeking the tax benefit may have been futile. But once the benefit was denied, the taxpayer had sustained the requisite injury concerning his own tax liability that gave rise to his standing to sue.

The District Court’s reliance (App7) on Finlator v. Powers, 902 F.2d 1158 (4th Cir. 1990), is misplaced. That decision is both incorrect and distinguishable. There, the court concluded that taxpayers had standing to challenge a state tax exemption, notwithstanding that they had not taken any “minimal steps” to allow the State to “preclude or redress their injuries ab initio,” such as contesting the liability, refusing to pay, paying under protest or suing for refund. Id. at 1161. The court “decline[d] to read such an implicit requirement into” Texas Monthly, “absent a clear statement by the Supreme Court to that effect.” Id. at 1162. This ruling was misconceived. As the court explained inFulani v. Brady, 935 F.2d 1324, 1328 (D.C. Cir. 1991), standing was recognized in Texas Monthly because the plaintiff there “petitioned for a refund of its own taxes,” and therefore “sought to litigate . . . its own liability.” As we have already explained, the Supreme Court has made it clear, in cases such as Heckler and Allen, that the plaintiff must seek from the defendant (and personally be denied) the benefit at issue in order to have standing to litigate an unequal-treatment claim. Moreover, the court in Finlator concluded that there were no “prudential concerns” that militated against finding standing in that state tax case. 902 F.2d at 1162. By contrast, there are prudential concerns that counsel against recognizing standing in this federal tax case. above.

2. The District Court’s conclusion that following the formal rules of standing would be a “waste” of “time” (A8) fails to appreciate the importance of those rules. Article III is “not merely a troublesome hurdle to be overcome if possible so as to reach the ‘merits’ of a lawsuit which a party desires to have adjudicated; it is a part of the basic charter promulgated by the Framers.” Valley Forge Christian Coll. v. Ams. United for Separation of Church & State, Inc., 454 U.S. 464, 476(1982). “In an era of frequent litigation, class actions, sweeping injunctions with prospective effect, and continuing jurisdiction to enforce judicial remedies, courts must be more careful to insist on the formal rules of standing, not less so.” Winn, 131 S. Ct. at 1449 (emphasis added). In its eagerness to entertain the suit, the District Court disregarded these important constitutional principles and erroneously engaged in “premature adjudication of constitutional questions.” Arizonans for Official English, 520 U.S. at 79.

The District Court’s exercise of jurisdiction in this federal tax case, where the plaintiffs did not first present the issue to the IRS, is particularly troubling. Whether the § 107 exclusion extends to atheists presents a question of statutory interpretation of apparent first impression. Notably, this Court has held that “atheism” is a “religion” for “Establishment Clause” purposes. Kaufman v. McCaughtry, 419 F.3d 678, 684 (7th Cir. 2005). Although the District Court had its own views regarding the matter (App8-14), it is the Secretary and the Commissioner, not the courts, who are charged with the responsibility for enforcing the tax laws in the first instance. The court should have allowed them the opportunity to determine whether an atheist could qualify. The court’s arrogation of this Executive Branch prerogative raises serious constitutional concerns.

3. The District Court’s rationales for relaxing the standing requirements are unfounded. The court’s reliance (A7-9) on cases permitting preenforcement challenges is misplaced. “To satisfy the injury-in-fact requirement in a preenforcement action, the plaintiff must show ‘an intention to engage in a course of conduct arguably affected with a constitutional interest, but proscribed by a statute, and [that] there exists a credible threat of prosecution thereunder.'” ACLU v. Alvarez, 679 F.3d 583, 590-591 (7th Cir. 2012) (citation omitted). Plaintiffs cannot satisfy that standard.

To begin with, unlike the situations presented in the cases cited by the District Court (A7-9), no conduct is proscribed by § 107(2), nor do plaintiffs face a “credible threat of prosecution” under it. And the court’s concern that plaintiffs might be “vulnerable to civil sanctions” (A9) for seeking the exclusion does not excuse a taxpayer from seeking a tax benefit from the IRS first.6 A taxpayer whose position has colorable merit need not fear that a penalty will be imposed against him. Moreover, the District Court’s reservations in this regard are fundamentally at odds with its ultimate conclusion that plaintiffs are similarly situated to the ministers reaping the benefit, but for an invidious and unconstitutional restriction (according to the court) that the compensation so excluded be earned in a religious endeavor.

Similarly lacking in merit is the District Court’s suggestion that the plaintiffs would lack “standing to challenge § 107(2) in the context of a proceeding to claim the exemption.” (App6 (citing Templeton v. Commissioner, 719 F.2d 1408 (7th Cir. 1983), among others).) That aspect of Templeton has since been overruled. In Templeton, this Court held that a taxpayer lacked standing to challenge the underinclusiveness of a tax exemption under the Establishment Clause because the injury was not redressable: if the taxpayer did not qualify, the most he could achieve was to deprive the favored class of the benefit, rather than improve his own situation. Id. at 1412. That rationale, however, was later “rejected” by the Supreme Court in Texas Monthly, because it would “‘effectively insulate underinclusive statutes from constitutional challenge.'” 489 U.S. at 8 (citation omitted). But the plaintiff inTexas Monthly had standing to challenge the underinclusive tax exemption at issue there precisely because it had paid the tax and sought a “refund,” thereby presenting a “live controversy” for the Court to adjudicate. Id. The District Court erred in allowing plaintiffs here to bypass that route.

IISection 107(2) does not violate the Establishment Clause

Standard of review

The District Court’s grant of summary judgment to plaintiffs on their Establishment Clause claim is reviewed de novoBooks v. Elkhart County, Ind., 401 F.3d 857, 863 (7th Cir. 2005).A. Introduction

1. The First Amendment states that “Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof.” U.S. Const. amend. I, cl. 1. Generally speaking, the First Amendment’s Free Exercise Clause prohibits Congress from interfering with religious practices and institutions, while the Establishment Clause prohibits Congress from inappropriately advancing religion. Between the “two Religion Clauses,” there is a middle ground — “room for play in the joints” — within which Congress may accommodate religion “without sponsorship and without interference.” Walz v. Tax Commission, 397 U.S. 664, 668-669 (1970).

The Supreme Court has “‘long recognized that the government may (and sometimes must) accommodate religious practices and that it may do so without violating the Establishment Clause.'” Corp. of the Presiding Bishop of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints v. Amos, 483 U.S. 327, 334 (1987) (citation omitted); see Cutter v. Wilkinson, 544 U.S. 709, 719-720 (2005) (upholding Religious Land Use& Institutionalized Persons Act as a “permissible legislative accommodation of religion,” even though it was not “compelled by the Free Exercise Clause”); Gillette v. United States, 401 U.S. 437, 450 (1971) (upholding religion-specific exemption from military draft).

2. To determine whether the Government’s accommodation of religion is permissible under the Establishment Clause, courts generally apply the three-pronged test set forth by the Supreme Court in Lemon v. Kurtzman, 403 U.S. 602 (1971), which “‘remains the prevailing analytical tool for the analysis of Establishment Clause claims.'” Doe v. Elmbrook Sch. Dist., 687 F.3d 840, 849 (7th Cir. 2012) (en banc) (citation omitted), petition for cert. filed, No. 12-755 (Sup. Ct. Dec. 20, 2012). In order to comport with the Establishment Clause, (i) “the statute must have a secular legislative purpose,” (ii) “its principal or primary effect must be one that neither advances nor inhibits religion,” and (iii) it “must not foster ‘an excessive government entanglement with religion.'” Lemon, 403 U.S. at 612-613 (citation omitted).

A comparison of Amos and Walz (upholding religious exemptions) to Texas Monthly (invalidating such an exemption) illustrates the contours of permissible accommodation of religion. In Amos, the Supreme Court addressed whether the exemption for religious organizations from the prohibition against religious discrimination under Title VII violates the Establishment Clause. The Court upheld the exemption as a permissible accommodation, even though it was not required by the Free Exercise Clause. 483 U.S. at 336. The Court concluded that the exemption satisfied the Lemon test. First, it served the secular purpose of minimizing governmental interference “with the decision-making process in religions.” Id. Second, it did not advance religion but merely removed a regulatory burden imposed thereon. Id. at 338. Third, it avoided excessive entanglement by “effectuat[ing] a more complete separation” of church and state. Id. at 339. The Court expressly rejected the complaint “that [the exemption] singles out religious entities for a benefit.” Id. at 338. As the Court explained, “[w]here, as here, government acts with the proper purpose of lifting a regulation that burdens the exercise of religion, we see no reason to require that the exemption comes packaged with benefits to secular entities.” Id.

In Walz, the Supreme Court held that exempting religious organizations from a generally applicable property tax did not violate the Establishment Clause. The Court emphasized that the tax exemption served the permissible purpose of “sparing the exercise of religion from the burden of property taxation.” 397 U.S. at 673-674. The exemption, moreover, by no means sponsored religion, but “simply abstains from demanding that the church support the state.”Id. at 675. And it “create[d] only a minimal and remote involvement between church and state and far less than taxation of churches.” Id. at 676. Although the Court observed that the property tax exemption was also available to other nonprofit organizations, its conclusion that the exemption was a “permissible state accommodation to religion” did not depend on that fact. Id. at 673. As the Court explained, the Establishment Clause prohibits government “sponsorship” of “religious activity,” and a property-tax exemption — unlike a “direct money subsidy” — does not run afoul of that prohibition because the “government does not transfer part of its revenue to churches.” Id. at 675.

Finally, in Texas Monthly, the Supreme Court addressed a state sales-tax exemption for periodicals distributed by a “religious faith” that promoted the “teachings of the faith.” 489 U.S. at 5-6. A divided majority of the Court held that this differentiation of literature based upon religious content violated either the Establishment Clause (all but White, J.) or the Press Clause of the First Amendment (White, J.). Id. at 17-25 (Brennan, J., joined by Marshall and Stevens, JJ.); Id. at 25-26 (White, J., concurring in the judgment); Id. at 26-29 (Blackmun, J., joined by O’Connor, J., concurring in the judgment). Justice Blackmun’s concurrence provides the rationale for the Court because it provides the narrowest grounds on which the decision is based. See Marks v. United States, 430 U.S. 188, 193 (1977) (observing that”[w]hen a fragmented Court decides a case and no single rationale explaining the result enjoys the assent of five Justices, ‘the holding of the Court may be viewed as that position taken by those Members who concurred in the judgment on the narrowest grounds'”) (citation omitted). Justice Blackmun believed that, although “some forms of accommodating religion are constitutionally permissible” (citing Amos as an example), the Texas sales-tax exemption was not, because it entailed “preferential support for the communication of religious messages” without any secular justification for doing so. 489 U.S. at 28.

3. As demonstrated below, § 107 is a permissible accommodation of religion under Lemon. Like the exemptions inAmos and Walz, § 107 lifts a burden on religious practice by eliminating governmental discrimination against (§ 107(1)) — and between (§ 107(2)) — religions, and by minimizing governmental interference with a church’s internal affairs, without burdening third parties. Unlike the exemption in Texas Monthly, § 107 does not endorse a religious message. It merely adapts the Code’s general exemptions for certain types of employer-provided housing to the unique context of a church and its minister. See Legg, Excluding Parsonages from Taxation: Declaring a Victor in the Duel between Caesar & the First Amendment, 10 Georgetown J. of Law &Public Policy 269, 271 (2012) (concluding that “the parsonage exclusions are constitutional when (necessarily) viewed as one element of a larger congressional plan to extend tax relief to recipients of employer-provided housing as a principal feature of their employment”).

4. Before turning to those arguments, however, we first highlight three aspects of § 107(2) that are crucial to an understanding of its constitutional soundness. First, § 107(2) involves an exemption from tax, rather than the grant of a direct subsidy. As a general rule, the “grant of a tax exemption is not sponsorship” prohibited by the Establishment Clause, despite the “indirect economic benefit” that goes with it. Walz, 397 U.S. at 674-675. Unlike a “direct money subsidy,” the “government does not transfer part of its revenue to churches but simply abstains from demanding that the church support the state.” Id. at 675. Moreover, the Government’s refusal to “impose a tax” on religion does not impose a burden on third parties. Winn, 131 S. Ct. at 1447.

Second, § 107(2) provides an exclusion from gross income for employment benefits provided by a church to its minister. The courts have been particularly solicitous of governmental accommodation regarding the “employment relationship between a religious institution and its ministers.” Hosanna-Tabor Evangelical Lutheran Church & Sch. v. EEOC, 132 S. Ct. 694, 705 (2012). In Hosanna-Tabor, the Supreme Court held that “there is a ministerial exception grounded in the Religion Clauses of the First Amendment” that precludes the government from applying generally applicable anti-discrimination laws to a church’s minister, even though such laws may be applied to the church’s other employees. Id. at 707. As the Court explained, the church-minister relationship concerns “the internal governance of the church,” given that the minister “personif[ies] its beliefs,” and a church’s decisions regarding its ministers “affects the faith and mission of the church itself.” Id. at 706-707. Indeed, this Court refers to the “ministerial exception” as the “internal affairs” doctrine because the exception is designed to prohibit governmental interference “in the internal management of churches.” Schleicher v. Salvation Army, 518 F.3d 472, 474-475 (7th Cir. 2008) (applying doctrine to reject ministers’ claim that church violated minimum-wage laws).

Third, § 107(2) is but a single provision in a larger Congressional scheme that exempts qualifying employer-provided housing from taxation. As noted above (at pp. 3-4), and described more fully below, the Code contains several tax benefits for housing used by a taxpayer in the business or for the convenience of his employer, including §§ 119 and 280A(c)(1). Section 107 merely adapts those provisions to the unique church-minister context, so as to avoid the entanglement problems that could arise if ministers had to rely on those provisions to exclude or deduct the value of church-provided housing. “When viewed in the context of other employer-provided housing provisions — both historic and currently-existing — [ § 107(2)] hardly singles out religion for an exclusive benefit in violation of the Constitution.” Legg, above, at 297.

B. Section 107 is a permissible accommodation of religion

As demonstrated below, § 107(2) does not violate the Establishment Clause because it satisfies each part of theLemon test.
1. Section 107(2) has a secular legislative purpose
In reviewing an Establishment Clause challenge, it is critical to consider the historical context of the statute and the specific sequence of events leading to its passage. See Salazar v. Buono, 130 S. Ct. 1803, 1816 (2010) (reversing determination that law violated Establishment Clause where the “District Court took insufficient account of the context in which the statute was enacted and the reasons for its passage”). The legislative history and context of § 107(2) demonstrates that the manifest purpose of the statute is to achieve parity among clergy and denominations, irrespective of a minister’s housing arrangements, and to avoid interference in a church’s internal affairs.a. The history and context of § 107Church-provided housing is a tradition that dates back at least to the 13th century. Savidge, The Parsonage in England 7-9 (1964). The patterns of housing members of the clergy in America have deep histories in the churches of Western Europe. The most common feature of this long-held tradition is that clergy lived in housing (called a parsonage) on the church grounds or nearby on church-owned property. (A68-69.) The parsonage system provided a critical means for churches to ensure that the spiritual needs of their congregations were met by housing the clergy in a place available to the congregation that could accommodate the church business conducted there. (A73.)In 1921, when Congress first enacted the parsonage exclusion, most religious denominations in the United States furnished parsonages to ministers in kind. (A72.) The denominations that did not do so were generally very small or were newer sects. (A72,76.) The latter denominations found it more convenient or feasible to furnish parsonages for their ministers by providing them with cash in lieu of the use of a church-owned building. (A72,76.)

Whether provided by means of cash or in kind, parsonages are furnished to ministers for the church’s “convenience.” Williamson, 224 F.2d at 380. Since a minister “will personify” his church, Hosanna-Tabor, 132 S. Ct. at 706, his residence is traditionally more than mere housing (A70). It is an extension of the church itself and is typically used for “religious purposes such as a meeting place for various church groups and as a place for providing religious services such as marriage ceremonies and individual counseling.” Immanuel Baptist Church v. Glass, 497 P.2d 757, 760 (Okla. 1972); see Brunner, Taxation: Exemption of Parsonage or Residence of Minister, Priest, Rabbi or Other Church Personnel, 55 A.L.R.3d 356, 404 (1974) (observing that “[m]ost ministerial residences can be expected to be incidentally used to some considerable extent as an office, a study, a place of counseling, a place of small meetings, such as boards or committees, and a place in which to entertain and lodge church visitors and guests”).

Against this historical backdrop, Congress enacted an exclusion from gross income for parsonages in 1921, just eight years after the modern federal income tax was authorized by the 16th Amendment to the Constitution. SeeRevenue Act of 1921, Section 213(b)(11). Section 213(b)(11) — the precursor to § 107(1) — excluded from income “[t]he rental value of a dwelling house and appurtenances thereof furnished to a minister of the gospel as part of his compensation.” 42 Stat. 227, 239. Immediately before the enactment of Section 213(b)(11), the Treasury Department had allowed some employees — but not clergy — to exclude the value of employer-provided housing from income under the “convenience of the employer” doctrine.7 See, above, pp. 5-6. In response, Congress enacted Section 213(b)(11). Ministers were thereby placed on an equal footing with other types of employees who were already enjoying the Treasury’s recognition of an exclusion for housing provided for the employer’s convenience. It also spared them the prospect of undergoing an intrusive inquiry regarding the church’s convenience.

Ministers whose churches chose to furnish them with parsonages by way of providing cash allowances for that purpose sought to exclude the parsonage allowance under Section 213(b)(11). The Treasury determined that Section 213(b)(11) “applies only to cases where a parsonage is furnished to a minister and not to cases where an allowance is made to cover the cost of a parsonage.” I.T. 1694. The Treasury advised, however, that such ministers could deduct their payments for the parsonage to the extent that the parsonage was used for “professional” rather than personal reasons.8 Id.

Several courts, however, rejected the Treasury’s determination and permitted ministers to exclude from income the value of parsonages furnished to them in cash as well as in kind. See, above, p. 7. As the Eighth Circuit explained, when a church provides a minister a parsonage allowance in lieu of a parsonage, it was “manifestly for the convenience of the employer,” and such housing should be excluded from income, whether furnished in cash or in kind. Williamson, 224 F.2d at 380.

In 1954, Congress codified those decisions by enacting § 107(2) as an additional exclusion to the existing one, which was redesignated as § 107(1). The statute as a whole leaves it to churches to determine how to provide parsonages — in cash or in kind — free from any influence from the tax laws. As the House and Senate Reports explained (using identical language), the rationale for the new provision was as follows:

      Under present law, the rental value of a home furnished a minister of the gospel as a part of his salary is not included in his gross income. This is unfair to those ministers who are not furnished a parsonage, but who receive large salaries (which are taxable) to compensate them for expenses they incur in supplying their own home.

Your committee has removed the discrimination in existing law by providing that the present exclusion is to apply to rental allowances paid to ministers to the extent used by them to rent or provide a home.
H.R. Rep. No. 1337, at 15 (emphasis added); S. Rep. No. 1622, at 16 (emphasis added). Congress had been alerted to the discrimination in existing law by officials from various religious denominations who complained that the existing “discriminatory” tax provision benefited some clergy and churches but not others. Hearings on Forty Topics Pertaining to the General Revision of the Internal Revenue Code at 1574-1575 (Aug. 1953) (Statement of Hon. Peter Mack). Section 107(2) was enacted “to equalize the disparate treatment among religious denominations.” Legg, above, at 275.Those purposes of preventing discrimination and preserving neutrality were confirmed in 2002, when Congress amended § 107(2) to clarify that the exclusion is limited to the fair rental value of the parsonage. 116 Stat. 583. The bill introducing the proposed amendment explained that § 107 was designed to “accommodate the differing governance structures, practices, traditions, and other characteristics of churches through tax policies that strive to be neutral with respect to such differences.” H.R. 4156, 107th Cong. § 2(a)(4). The bill further confirmed that § 107 was also intended to minimize “intrusive inquiries by the government” into a church’s internal affairs by obviating the convenience-of-the-employer inquiry required by §§ 119 and 280A(c)(1). Id. at § 2(a)(3), (5).

b. The statute’s history and context disclose the secular purpose of eliminating discrimination against, and among, ministers and of minimizing interference with a church’s internal affairsFar from seeking to provide religion a special benefit, Congress enacted § 107(1) and its statutory predecessors to ensure that ministers received the same tax benefit that similarly situated secular employees had received pursuant to the convenience-of-the-employer doctrine (now codified in § 119). All employees — religious or lay — are entitled to exclude from gross income the value of “lodging furnished to him” by his “employer for the convenience of the employer.” § 119. When the convenience-of-the-employer doctrine was initially developed, the Treasury applied it to many secular employees, but not to ministers. By allowing secular employees, but not ministers, to exclude employer-provided housing from income, the Treasury’s 1921 ruling raised serious constitutional concerns. E.g., McDaniel v. Paty, 435 U.S. 618, 629 (1978) (determining that law permitting all persons, except for “ministers,” to participate in political conventions violated the First Amendment). Congress quickly reacted to that ruling by enacting Section 213(b)(11) of the Revenue Act of 1921, the predecessor of § 107(1). Consequently, § 107(1) simply levels the playing field between ministers and other types of employees. It is manifestly constitutional.9After eliminating discrimination against ministers who were furnished housing in kind by their churches, Congress next eliminated discrimination among ministers. It addressed the problem that some churches furnished parsonages by providing parsonages in kind, while others did so by providing cash for that purpose. Congress enacted § 107(2) to ensure that all ministers who were similarly situated were treated equally by the Government, tax-wise. Because § 107(2) has the permissible secular purpose of avoiding governmental discrimination among religions, it furthers one of the core purposes of the Establishment Clause. See Larson v. Valente, 456 U.S. 228, 246 (1982) (determining that law that applied to some, but not all, religions violated the Establishment Clause by running afoul of the “principle of denominational neutrality”).

Moreover, by enacting § 107(2), Congress removed tax-related impediments to a church’s decision whether to furnish a parsonage to its minister in cash or in kind, thereby avoiding interference in the church’s internal affairs.See H.R. 4156, 107th Cong. § 2(a)(3) (observing that one purpose of § 107 is to “minimize government intrusion into internal church operations and the relationship between a church and its clergy”). “Under the Lemon analysis, it is a permissible legislative purpose to alleviate significant governmental interference with the ability of religious organizations to define and carry out their religious missions.” Amos, 483 U.S. at 335. Section 107(2) allows each church to decide whether and how best to furnish a parsonage to its ministers.

Finally, § 107 also serves the secular purpose of avoiding problems of entanglement between church and state that could result from administering the convenience-of-the-employer doctrine where ministers are concerned. As Congress and the courts have recognized, the minister’s home is used for the “convenience of the employer,” whether the home is owned by the church or its minister. Williamson, 224 F.2d at 380; 148 Cong. Rec. 4671 (Apr. 16, 2002) (observing that § 107 recognizes “that a clergy person’s home is not just shelter, but an essential meeting place for members of the congregation”). By providing an exclusion for housing provided by churches to ministers, regardless of the form in which it is furnished, § 107 avoids the intrusive convenience-of-the-employer inquiry required by § 119 (when taxpayers seek to exclude employer-provided housing) or § 280A(c)(1) (when taxpayers seek to deduct the cost of housing used in the employer’s business). See H.R. 4156, 107th Cong. § 2(a)(5) (observing that one purpose of § 107 is to accommodate the fact that “clergy frequently are required to use their homes for purposes that would otherwise qualify for favorable tax treatment, but which may require more intrusive inquiries by the government into the relationship between clergy and their respective churches with respect to activities that are inherently religious”). Avoiding entanglement is a secular purpose. See Amos, 483 U.S. at 336.

c. The District Court ignored the statute’s history and contextIn concluding that § 107(2) lacked a “secular purpose” (App31), the District Court ignored the statute’s history and context, including Congress’s articulation of its anti-discrimination purpose in the 1954 House and Senate reports quoted above. That primary purpose has been recognized by the courts and commentators. E.g., Warnke, 641 F. Supp. at 1087 (observing that § 107(2) was enacted “to eliminate discrimination”); 1 Mertens Law of Fed. Income Taxation § 7:196 n.71 (2013) (same). For purposes of the first prong of the Lemon test, the District Court should have deferred to Congress’s articulation of its secular purpose, unless it determined that purpose to be a “sham.”McCreary County v. ACLU, 545 U.S. 844, 865 (2005). The District Court did not — and could not — find that Congress’s articulated purpose here was a “sham.”The District Court’s error in disregarding the secular purpose asserted by Congress is magnified by the fact that the law in question is a tax statute. The Supreme Court has emphasized that, even in Establishment Clause cases, “‘[l]egislatures have especially broad latitude in creating classifications and distinctions in tax statutes,'” and that courts must give “substantial deference” to a legislative “judgment” regarding a “tax” provision that is challenged under the Establishment Clause. Mueller v. Allen, 463 U.S. 388, 396 (1983) (citation omitted).

The District Court nevertheless opined that § 107(2) was intended “to assist disadvantaged churches and ministers” and held that doing so could not be considered a secular purpose when like benefits were withheld from secular organizations and employees. (App34.) In so holding, the court lost sight of the fact (i) that Congress created the exclusion for cash parsonage allowances to “remove[ ] the discrimination in existing law” among ministers, H.R. Rep. No. 1337, at 15; S. Rep. No. 1622, at 16, and (ii) that the original parsonage exclusion was intended to alleviate discrimination against ministers, who had not been accorded the favorable treatment extended to other, secular employees who had also been furnished lodging for the employer’s convenience.10

There is no merit to the District Court’s further suggestion (App32) that any concern about discrimination was unfounded because § 119 treats “secular” employees who purchase their own housing differently than secular employees who receive employer-provided housing. Treating secular employees differently does not raise First Amendment concerns, while treating churches and their ministers differently does. The “principle of denominational neutrality,” which applies to legislation that may “effectively” distinguish between “well-established churches” that own parsonages and “churches which are new” that do not, Larson, 456 U.S. at 246 & n.23, has no parallel with regard to secular organizations and their employees.

By enacting § 107(2), Congress intended to lift the burden of discriminatory tax treatment that had been imposed on churches and ministers by allowing all ministers to exclude the value of the parsonage from income, no matter how each church chooses to provide that housing. In providing that equal treatment, the statute by no means “discriminates against those religions that do not have ministers,” as the District Court protested. (App33.) If a religion has no ministers, then, a fortiori, there is no taxation of a minister’s housing that needs to be accommodated.See Legg, above, at 292 (observing that “religions without clergy have no leaders needing the benefit of the exclusion”). Nor does § 107(2) create an “imbalance” between ministers who receive housing in kind and those who receive a housing allowance, as the court posited. (App33.) The fact that a minister who uses his housing allowance to buy a home may also benefit from the Code’s deductions available to homeowners is not a consequence of § 107(2), but flows from the minister’s independent decision to use the housing allowance to purchase, rather than rent, a home.
2. Section 107(2) does not have the primary effect of advancing or inhibiting religion
To determine whether a law has the primary effect of advancing or inhibiting religion, this Court considers whether “‘irrespective of government’s actual purpose,'” the “‘practice under review in fact conveys a message of endorsement or disapproval.'” Sherman, 623 F.3d at 517 (citation omitted). A “reasonable observer” would not “view § 107(2) as an endorsement of religion,” as the District Court assumed. (App37.) To the contrary, a reasonable observer, i.e., one who is familiar with “‘the text, legislative history, and implementation of the statute,'” McCreary, 545 U.S. at 862 (citation omitted), would understand that § 107(2) is a tax exemption, not a subsidy, and that it was designed not only to eliminate discrimination among religions, but also to further separate church and state.a. Section 107 does not endorse religion, but merely minimizes governmental influence on, and entanglement with, a church’s internal affairsIn ruling that § 107(2) lacked a secular effect, the District Court failed to appreciate that § 107(2) minimizes governmental interference with a church’s internal affairs. The limited nature of the exclusion in § 107 — which applies only to ministers and not to all religious employees — confirms that its primary effect is not to advance religion, but to preserve the autonomy of churches. Section 107 preserves the “autonomy” of churches by permitting them to determine how best to furnish parsonages to their ministers (whether with cash or in kind) “under the ecclesiastical doctrine of each church,” free of discriminatory tax laws and without any adverse tax consequences hinging on that determination. Legg, above, at 291. In this regard, the § 107 exclusion is similar to the “ministerial exception,” or “internal-affairs doctrine,” that the courts have applied to generally applicable employment laws. Like that doctrine, which minimizes governmental interference “in the internal management of churches,” Schleicher, 518 F.3d at 475, § 107 minimizes both governmental influence on a church’s decision regarding how to furnish a parsonage, and governmental evaluation of church activities that take place in the parsonage.The effect of the § 107 exclusion must also be judged in the context of other housing-related exclusions and deductions provided in the Code. See Zelinsky, The First Amendment & the Parsonage Allowance, Tax Notes 5-8 (Dec. 2013) (critiquing District Court’s opinion for analyzing “section 107 in isolation from other code provisions,” and explaining how applying § 119 to religious employers creates church-state entanglement problems). Section 107 is “similar to other housing provisions in the Tax Code offered to workers who locate in a particular area for the convenience of their employers, and military personnel who receive a tax exclusion for their housing.” 148 Cong. Rec. 4670 (Apr. 16, 2002). All taxpayers may exclude certain employer-provided housing from income. § 119. Likewise, all taxpayers may deduct the cost of their housing to the extent that it is used for their employer’s business and convenience. § 280A(c)(1); I.T.1694. In addition, certain employees of the federal government are entitled to exclude their housing allowance without first demonstrating that the housing was being used for the employer’s convenience. See § 134 (military members); § 912 (civil servants on foreign postings). Section 107 provides similar tax benefits to ministers, but does so in a way that avoids the intrusive inquiries implicit in the employer’s convenience and business exigency requirements inherent in §§ 119, 162, and 280A(c)(1).

Ministers who are furnished parsonages in kind could rely on the Code’s exclusion for housing furnished “for the convenience of the employer” that “the employee is required to accept . . . on the business premises of his employer as a condition of his employment.” § 119. Similarly, ministers who receive parsonage allowances could rely on the Code’s deduction for housing used for the employer’s business and convenience. §§ 162, 280A(c)(1); I.T. 1694. Ministers’ claims of the exclusion or deduction, as the case may be, would raise questions regarding the church’s “convenience,” the scope of the church’s “business premises,” and the terms of the minister’s employment. It has been argued that the “blanket exclusion” under § 107 “does not ‘prefer’ religion but merely reduces the administrative burden of applying § 119 to clergymen.” Bittker, Churches, Taxes & the Constitution, 78 Yale L. J. 1285, 1292 n.18 (1969);11 see Legg, above, at 292 (explaining that § 107 prevents “entanglement” problems under § 280A(c)(1) by “avoid[ing] the need to have the IRS make case-by-case determinations of whether the parsonage was truly granted ‘for the convenience of the employer’ based on the church’s ecclesiastical doctrine or instead granted as a form of compensation not directly for the benefit of the church”); Note, The Parsonage Exclusion under the Endorsement Test, 13 Va. Tax Rev. 397, 418-419 (1993) (comparing§ 107(2) to § 119). If it were necessary for such questions to be answered, it might “require[e] the Government to distinguish between ‘secular’ and ‘religious’ benefits or services, which may be ‘fraught with the sort of entanglement that the Constitution forbids.'” Hernandez v. Commissioner, 490 U.S. 680, 697 (1989) (citation omitted). By obviating the resolution of such questions, § 107 has a salutary effect. Each prong of § 107 removes the potential for entanglement by eliminating the intrusive inquiries that could arise if ministers were forced to rely upon § 119 or § 280A(c)(1). The statute therefore has an indisputably secular effect.

b. Section 107(2) does not subsidize religion, as the District Court erroneously concludedBesides having a secular effect, § 107(2) does not provide government funding for any religious activity, but only a tax exemption for housing. The Supreme Court has made it clear that the “grant of a tax exemption is not sponsorship since the government does not transfer part of its revenue to churches but simply abstains from demanding that the church support the state.” Walz, 397 U.S. at 675. Indeed, observing the long history in the United States of exempting church property from taxation, the Court concluded that “[n]othing” in the “two centuries of uninterrupted freedom from taxation has given the remotest sign of leading to an established church or religion and on the contrary it has operated affirmatively to help guarantee the free exercise of all forms of religious belief.”Id. at 678.Ignoring the analysis of tax exemptions in Walz, the District Court instead based its decision on the proposition that “‘[e]very tax exemption constitutes a subsidy.'” (App18 (quoting Texas Monthly, 489 U.S. at 14-15).) The court’s reliance on this statement from Texas Monthly is misplaced. The quoted language, endorsed only by Justices Brennan, Marshall, and Stevens, did not overrule the majority opinion in Walz, where the Court held that a “tax exemption” is not a “subsidy,” and does not advance religion because there “is no genuine nexus between tax exemption and establishment of religion.” 397 U.S. at 675. The Supreme Court continues to recognize the ruling inWalz that, for “Establishment Clause” purposes, “there is a constitutionally significant difference between subsidies and tax exemptions.” Camps Newfound/Owatonna v. Town of Harrison, 520 U.S. 564, 590 (1997). In disregarding that critical difference, the District Court erred.
3. Section 107(2) does not produce excessive entanglement
Section 107 does not produce excessive entanglement with religion. Indeed, the District Court did not find otherwise. (App41.) To “constitute excessive entanglement, the government action must involve ‘intrusive government participation in, supervision of, or inquiry into religious affairs.'” Vision Church v. Village of Long Grove, 468 F.3d 975, 995 (7th Cir. 2006) (citation omitted). As a tax exemption, § 107(2) does not raise this concern. As the Court noted in Walz, a tax “exemption creates only a minimal and remote involvement between church and state and far less than taxation of churches.” 397 U.S. at 676.Moreover, by adapting the tax benefits generally available to taxpayers in §§ 119 and 280A(c)(1) to the unique circumstances of ministers, § 107 prevents the entanglement that would ensue if the tax benefit were contingent on whether the minister acts for the “convenience of the employer” in using his home. By making such scrutiny unnecessary, the exclusion provided in § 107(2) avoids entanglement and promotes the statute’s secular purposes.

Because § 107(2) satisfies each part of the Lemon test, it does not violate the Establishment Clause. For the same reasons, § 107(2) does not violate the Equal Protection component of the Fifth Amendment’s Due Process Clause, an issue raised by plaintiffs but not reached by the District Court (App2). See Amos, 483 U.S. at 338-339 & n.16 (rejecting equal-protection claim for the same reasons that the Court rejected Establishment Clause claim).
4. Texas Monthly is not controlling because it is distinguishable in crucial respects
In concluding that § 107(2) violates the Establishment Clause, the District Court relied almost solely on the Texas Monthly plurality opinion. (App19.) Far from being “control[ling]” (id.), Texas Monthly is readily distinguishable.First, in contrast to the situation in Texas Monthly, where only religious publications could avoid the tax on periodical sales, here, all taxpayers are permitted to exclude, or deduct, the costs of housing provided by the employer for its convenience (§ 119) or by the employee for the employer’s convenience (§ 280A(c)(1)). Section 107 provides tax benefits similar to those provided in §§ 119 and 280A(c)(1), but tailors the benefit to avoid entanglement with the church-minister relationship. Section 107’s “exclusions are similar to the property tax exemption at issue in Walzbecause the exclusions flow to ministers as a part of a larger congressional policy of not taxing qualifying employer-provided housing.” Legg, above, at 288. And “[u]nlike Texas Monthly‘s narrowly tailored religious publication exemption, the parsonage exclusions in § 107 are part of a larger scheme that more closely aligns with the employer discrimination exception at issue in Amos.” Id. at 290. When § 107(2) is examined as merely one component of a larger, integrated tax code, Congress has by no means provided a tax benefit to religious organizations and “no one else” (App2), as occurred in Texas Monthly.

Second, unlike § 107(2), which has a long history and effect of eliminating discrimination and minimizing entanglement between church and state, the religion-specific exemption in Texas Monthly lacked any secular purpose or effect. An objective observer could only conclude that the government was endorsing the subject of the tax exemption — the promotion of a religious message. Here, in sharp contrast, by eliminating discrimination and entanglement problems, § 107(2) would be understood by an objective observer to “alleviate a special burden on religious exercise.” (App2.)

Finally, § 107(2) does not require the Government to determine whether “some message or activity is consistent with ‘the teaching of the faith,'” as was true in Texas Monthly, 489 U.S. at 20. To the contrary, it precludes such questions from arising by eliminating inquiries into the extent to which the minister’s home is used for religious rather than secular purposes.

CONCLUSION

The judgment of the District Court, as it relates to § 107(2), should be vacated, and the case remanded with instructions to dismiss for lack of jurisdiction. Alternatively, that aspect of the judgment should be reversed.

                  Respectfully submitted,
                  Kathryn Keneally
                  Assistant Attorney General
                  Tamara W. Ashford
                  Principal Deputy Assistant
                  Attorney General
                  Gilbert S. Rothenberg
                  (202) 514-3361
                  Teresa E. Mclaughlin
                  (202) 514-4342
                  Judith A. Hagley
                  (202) 514-8126
                  Attorneys
                  Tax Division
                  Department of Justice
                  Post Office Box 502
                  Washington, D.C. 20044
                  Judith.a.hagley@usdoj.gov
                  Appellate.taxcivil@usdoj.gov

Of Counsel:
John W. Vaudreuil
United States Attorney

APRIL 2014

FOOTNOTES

1 “Doc” references are the documents in the original record, as numbered by the Clerk of the District Court. “A” and “App” references are to appellants’ separately bound record appendix and the appendix bound with this brief, respectively. Unless otherwise indicated, all ” § ” references are to the Internal Revenue Code, as currently in effect. Pertinent statutes are set forth in the Statutory Addendum.2 Although § 107 “is phrased in Christian terms” to apply to a “minister of the gospel,” “Congress did not intend to exclude those persons who are the equivalent of ‘ministers’ in other religions.” Salkov v. Commissioner, 46 T.C. 190, 194 apply to a “minister of the (1966) (holding that a Jewish cantor was a “minister of the gospel”). The Commissioner interprets “religion” to include “beliefs (for example, Taoism, Buddhism, and Secular Humanism) that do not posit the existence of a Supreme Being.” Internal Revenue Manual § 7.25.3.6.5(2) (Feb. 23, 1999). Moreover, the employer need not be a church or religious organization, as long as the minister is compensated for ministerial services. Treas. Reg. § 1.1402(c)-5(c)(2) (26 C.F.R.).

3 Although Gaylor and Barker also alleged that they were “federal taxpayers,” they did not attempt to maintain suit as taxpayers under Flast v. Cohen, 392 U.S. 83 (1968). (A5.) In a previous attempt to invalidate § 107 brought by FFRF and others, the district court held that the plaintiffs had standing as taxpayers to sue under the Establishment Clause. FFRF v. Geithner, 715 F. Supp. 2d 1051, 1059-1061 (E.D. Cal. 2010). But after the Supreme Court held that taxpayers lacked standing to challenge tax benefits under the Establishment Clause unless they personally have “been denied a benefit on account of their religion,” Ariz. Christian School Tuition Org. v. Winn, 131 S. Ct. 1436, 1440 (2011), the parties stipulated to dismissal without prejudice. (A29-30.)

4 Because FFRF alleges no injury to itself, its standing depends on that of its members, the individual plaintiffs. The District Court recognized as much. (A4.)

5 The Fifth Circuit framed its decision in terms of prudential standing. It nevertheless observed that its prudential concerns about allowing the plaintiffs to litigate “generalized grievances” outside the normal channels of litigating their own tax liabilities were “closely related to the constitutional requirement of personal ‘injury in fact,’ and the policies underlying both are similar.” 987 F.2d at 1176. Decisions such as Allen and Heckler confirm that the matter likewise affects constitutional standing in the first instance. As the Supreme Court recently opined, “generalized grievances” do not pass muster under Article III. Lexmark, 2014 WL 1168967, at *6 n.3.

6 To be sure, a taxpayer may be liable for a penalty for making a “frivolous” submission to the IRS. § 6702. The accuracy-related penalty under § 6662 with which the court was apparently concerned (A9), however, applies only to underpayments, § 6662(a), not to refund claims, and even then only to positions taken without reasonable cause and good faith, § 6664(c)(1).

7 The convenience-of-the-employer rationale for excluding housing furnished in kind was at first recognized only in Treasury rulings and regulations, but was ultimately codified by Congress in 1954 as § 119. See Kowalski, 434 U.S. 77.

8 Prior to 1976, the costs associated with the business use of the taxpayer’s residence were deductible on the same terms as any other “ordinary and necessary” business expense. E.g., Revenue Act of 1921, § 214(a)(1); § 162. In 1976, however, Congress enacted § 280A, which must be satisfied, in addition to § 162, in order to deduct such expenses. Section 280A(c)(1) requires the residence to be used “for the convenience of [the] employer,” just as the employer-furnished housing must be so used in order to qualify for the coordinate exclusion under § 119.

9 Due to plaintiffs’ uncontested lack of standing, § 107(1) is not even challenged here.

10 Moreover, whether any particular legislator might actually have wished to grant a particular advantage to churches would not have undermined Congress’s legitimate anti-discrimination purpose. See Sherman v. Koch, 623 F.3d 501, 510 (7th Cir. 2010) (observing that “‘what is relevant is the legislative purpose of the statute, not the possibly religious motives of the legislators who enacted the law'”) (citation omitted).

11 Although Professor Bittker adverted only to § 119 at this point, the same logic would also apply to claims of deductions for the minister’s use of the home for church business under § 280A(c)(1), which is likewise infused with the convenience-of-the-employer doctrine.

END OF FOOTNOTES
Citations: Freedom From Religion Foundation Inc. et al. v. Jacob J. Lew et al.; No. 14-1152



IRS LTR: VEBA's Exempt Status Not Affected by Expansion of Its Membership.

The IRS ruled that the tax-exempt status of a voluntary employees’ beneficiary association that provides insurance and other benefits to employees covered under collective bargaining agreements will not be affected when it expands its membership to include employees not subject to the terms of a collective bargaining agreement.

Contact Person: * * *
Identification Number: * * *
Telephone Number: * * *

Uniform Issue List: 501.00-00, 501.09-00, 501.09-02, 501.09-04
Release Date: 4/11/2014

Date: January 17, 2014Employer Identification Number: * * *

LEGEND:Date 1 = * * *
League = * * *
Industry = * * *
Members = * * *
Tri-state Area = * * *
Union = * * *
Workers = * * *

Dear * * *:

We have considered your ruling request dated Date 1 and subsequent amendments, requesting a ruling that the inclusion of certain employees will not adversely affect your status as a tax-exempt Trust under Internal Revenue Code (“I.R.C”) § 501(c)(9).

FACTS

You are a trust, tax-exempt under § 501(c)(9). You fund a voluntary employees’ beneficiary association plan (“VEBA”).You state that you currently provide health coverage to participants, who are covered under collective bargaining agreements (“CBA”), and employed in the Industry.

You propose to add as new participants (“Proposed Participants”) to VEBA. Proposed Participants consist of employees of MembersMembers are members of League. You state that Proposed Participants “all share an employment-related common bond with respect to the individuals otherwise covered by the Fund”.

You state that Proposed Participants “consist solely of common law employees who: (1) are not subject to the terms of a collective bargaining agreement (“CBA”) entered into with the [Union]; (2) are employed by organizations whose principals are full or lifetime members of the [ League] who are otherwise bound to a CBA with [ Union] when employing [ Workers]; (3) who work for [League] located only in the [ Tri-state Area].” You state that in other words, the Proposed Participants “will be all non-union common law employees of eligible League organization. They will not include self-employed individuals, sole proprietors, partners, LLC members or any other individuals who are not common law employees of eligible [League] members.”

As a result, Proposed Participants, consist of employees of Members who are not covered under a collective bargaining agreement (Members already has some employees covered under the CBA who are present participants of the VEBA).

Last, you represent that the Proposed Participants will consist only of employees of Members who work in the Tri-state Area. You will monitor closely the non-union participants of VEBA to ensure that, at all times at least 90% of the VEBA’s participants are covered by a CBA with Union in accordance with § 1.419A-2T, Q&A-2.

RULING REQUESTED

You requested the following ruling:That the inclusion of the Proposed Participants located in the Tri-state Area will not adversely impact your exempt status as a VEBA under § 501(c)(9).

LAW

I.R.C. § 501(a) provides that an organization described in subsection (c) or (d) or section 401(a) shall be exempt from taxation under this subtitle (IRC Sections 1 et seq.) unless such exemption is denied under §§ 502 or 503.I.R.C. § 501(c)(9) provides that organizations exempt from income tax under section 501(a) include a VEBA providing for the payment of life, sick, accident, or other benefits to the members of such association or their dependents or designated beneficiaries, if no part of the net earnings of such association inures (other than through such payments) to the benefit of any private shareholder or individual.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-1 provides that for an organization to be described in § 501(c)(9), it must be an employees’ association; membership in the association must be voluntary; the organization must provide for the payment of life, sick, accident, or other benefits to its members or their dependents, and substantially all of its operations must be in furtherance of providing such benefits; and no part of the net earnings of the organization can inure (other than by payment of permitted benefits) to the benefit of any private shareholder or individual.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), provides that the membership of an organization described in § 501(c)(9) must consist of individuals who become entitled to participate by reason of their being employees and whose eligibility for membership is defined by reference to objective standards that constitute an employment-related common bond among such individuals. Typically, those eligible for membership in an organization described in section 501(c)(9) are defined by reference to a common employer (or affiliated employers), to coverage under one or more collective bargaining agreements (with respect to benefits provided by reason of such agreement(s)), to membership in a labor union, or to membership in one or more locals of a national or international labor union. For example, membership in an association might be open to all employees of a particular employer, or to employees in specified job classifications working for certain employers at specified locations and who are entitled to benefits by reason of one or more collective bargaining agreements. In addition, employees of one or more employers engaged in the same line of business in the same geographic locale will be considered to share an employment-related bond for purposes of an organization through which their employers provide benefits. Employees of a labor union also will be considered to share an employment-related common bond with members of the union, and employees of an association will be considered to share an employment-related common bond with members of the association. Whether a group of individuals is defined by reference to a permissible standard or standards is a question to be determined with regard to all the facts and circumstances, taking into account the guidelines set forth in this paragraph. Exemption will not be denied merely because the membership of an association includes some individuals who are not employees (within the meaning of paragraph (b) of this section), provided that such individuals share an employment-related bond with the employee-members. Such individuals may include, for example, the proprietor of a business whose employees are members of the association. For purposes of the preceding two sentences, an association will be considered to be composed of employees if 90 percent of the total membership of the association on one day of each quarter of the association’s taxable year consists of employees (within the meaning of paragraph (b) of this section).

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(c)(1) provides, generally, that to be described in section 501(c)(9), there must be an entity, such as a corporation or trust established under applicable local law, having an existence independent of the member-employees or their employer.

Treas. Reg. § 1.509(c)(9)-2(c)(2) provides that generally, membership in an association is voluntary if an affirmative act is required on the part of an employee to become a member rather than the designation as a member due to employee status. However, an association shall be considered voluntary although membership is required of all employees, provided that the employees do not incur a detriment as a result of membership in the association.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(c)(3) provides that a VEBA must be controlled by its membership; by independent trustee(s); or by trustees or other fiduciaries at least some of whom are designated by, or on behalf of, the membership.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-3(a) provides that the life, sick, accident, or other benefits provided by a VEBA must be payable to its members, their dependents, or their designated beneficiaries.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-3(b) through (g) detail the types of benefits that a tax-exempt VEBA may provide and who is eligible to receive the benefits.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-3(c) provides that the term “sick and accident benefits” means amounts furnished to or on behalf of a member or a member’s dependents in the event of illness or personal injury to a member or dependent.

Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-4(a) provides that no part of the net earnings of an employees’ association may inure to the benefit of any private shareholder or individual other than through the payment of benefits permitted by § 1.501(c)(9)-3.

Treas. Reg. § 1-419A, Q&A-2(1) provides that for purposes of Q&A-1, a collectively bargained welfare benefit fund is a welfare benefit fund that is maintained pursuant to an agreement which the Secretary of Labor determines to be a collective bargaining agreement and which meets the requirements of the Secretary of the Treasury as set forth in paragraph 2 below.

Treas. Reg. § 1-419A, Q&A-2(2) provides that notwithstanding a determination by the Secretary of Labor that an agreement is a collective bargaining agreement, a welfare benefit fund is considered to be maintained pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement only if the benefits provided through the fund were the subject of arms-length negotiations between employee representatives and one or more employers, and if such agreement between employee representatives and one or more employers satisfies section 7701(a)(46) of the Code. Moreover, the circumstances surrounding a collective bargaining agreement must evidence good faith bargaining between adverse parties over the welfare benefits to be provided through the fund. Finally, a welfare benefit fund is not considered to be maintained pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement unless at least 50 percent of the employees eligible to receive benefits under the fund are covered by the collective bargaining agreement.

Treas. Reg. § 1-419A, Q&A-2(4) provides that notwithstanding the preceding paragraphs and pending the issuance of regulations setting account limits for collectively bargained welfare benefit funds, a welfare benefit fund will not be treated as a collectively bargained welfare benefit fund for purposes of Q&A-1 if and when, after July 1, 1985, the number of employees who are not covered by a collective bargaining agreement and are eligible to receive benefits under the fund increases by reason of an amendment, merger, or other action of the employer or the fund. In addition, pending the issuance of such regulations, for purposes of applying the 50 percent test of paragraph (2) to a welfare benefit fund that is not in existence on July 1, 1985, “90 percent” shall be substituted for “50 percent”.

ANALYSIS

You seek to add to VEBA’s membership Proposed Participants who work only in the Tri-state Area. Section 501(a) exempts from taxation, in pertinent part, organizations described in § 501(c). Section 501(c)(9) describes VEBAs as providing payment of life, sick, accident or other benefits to their members.Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), provides that the membership of an organization described in § 501(c)(9) must consist of individuals who become entitled to participate by reason of their being employees and whose eligibility for membership is defined by reference to objective standards that constitute an employment-related common bond among such individuals. Typically, those eligible for membership in an organization described in section 501(c)(9) includes among others to coverage under one or more collective bargaining agreements (with respect to benefits provided by reason of such agreement(s)).

You were established pursuant to a CBA between the League and Union for the purpose of providing health coverage to participants employed in Industry. Under Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), employees covered under a collective bargaining agreement share an employment-related common bond and are deemed as employees.

Further, exemption will not be denied merely because the membership of an association includes some individuals who are not employees (within the meaning of paragraph (b) of this section), provided that such individuals share an employment-related bond with the employee-members. See Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), Thus, although Proposed Participants are not deemed as employee because they are not covered under a CBA for the purpose of Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), they still share an employment-related common bond with present participants of VEBA (CBA covered employees) because both are employees of Members.

Further, an association will be considered to be composed of employees if 90 percent of the total membership of the association on one day of each quarter of the association’s taxable year consists of employees (within the meaning of paragraph (b) of this section). See Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), Therefore, because 90% of total membership of VEBA on one day of each quarter of VEBA’s taxable year must compose of participants who qualify as employees within the meaning of Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), the addition of Proposed Participants who are not covered under the CBA and who work only in the Tri-state Area to participate in VEBA will not jeopardize your tax-exempt status as an organization described under § 501(c)(9).

You represent that at all times at least 90% of the individuals covered by VEBA are covered by a CBA in accordance with § 1.419A-2T, Q&A-2. Under Treas. Reg. § 1-419A, Q&A-2(4), a welfare benefit fund will not be treated as a collectively bargained welfare benefit fund for purposes of Q&A-1 if and when, after July 1, 1985, the number of employees who are not covered by a collective bargaining agreement and are eligible to receive benefits under the fund increases by reason of an amendment, merger, or other action of the employer or the fund. In addition, pending the issuance of such regulations, for purposes of applying the 50 percent test of paragraph (2) to a welfare benefit fund that is not in existence on July 1, 1985, “90 percent” shall be substituted for “50 percent”. Thus, to continue to meet the employment-related common bond requirement based as a collective bargaining agreement veba as provided under Treas. Reg. § 1.501(c)(9)-2(a)(1), 90% of your participants must consist of employees covered under the Union CBA.

RULING

Based on the information submitted, representations made, and the authorities cited above, we conclude that the inclusion of employees of Members of the League located in the Tri-state Area not covered in the CBA with Unionwill not adversely impact your exempt status as a VEBA under § 501(c)(9).This ruling will be made available for public inspection under § 6110 after certain deletions of identifying information are made. For details, see enclosed Notice 437, Notice of Intention to Disclose. A copy of this ruling with deletions that we intend to make available for public inspection is attached to Notice 437. If you disagree with our proposed deletions, you should follow the instructions in Notice 437.

This ruling is directed only to the organization that requested it. I.R.C. § 6110(k)(3) provides that it may not be used or cited by others as precedent.

This ruling is based on the facts as they were presented and on the understanding that there will be no material changes in these facts. This ruling does not address the applicability of any section of the Code or regulations to the facts submitted other than with respect to the sections described. Because it could help resolve questions concerning your federal income tax status, this ruling should be kept in your permanent records.

If you have any questions about this ruling, please contact the person whose name and telephone number are shown in the heading of this letter.

In accordance with the Power of Attorney currently on file with the Internal Revenue Service, we are sending a copy of this letter to your authorized representative.

                  Sincerely,
                  Ronald Shoemaker
                  Manager, Exempt Organizations
                  Technical Group 2

Enclosure
Notice 437

Citations: LTR 201415008




NYT: Bankruptcy Beyond the Potholes.

Congress is lurching toward its standard emergency, edge-of-the-cliff deal for the federal Highway Trust Fund, which could run short of money as early as August. The fund pays for the nation’s vitally needed road and transit projects and has operated on an 18.4-cents-per-gallon federal gasoline tax that hasn’t been raised since 1993. Now it is running on fumes, raising about $39 billion a year but facing shortfalls of close to $20 billion annually as more efficient cars pay less into the fund while infrastructure repair costs rise.

Worried lawmakers and administration officials are warning that road and transit projects could be halted in a matter of months and hundreds of thousands of construction workers left without paychecks unless Congress comes up with a viable solution soon. Without a long-term solution, planning, building and repairing infrastructure on state and local levels must inevitably suffer, transportation officials are warning.

Uncertainty over the faltering pace of federal funding prompted Arkansas officials to postpone the awarding of 10 planned highway and bridge projects last month. Officials in Colorado and California are talking of similarly slowing or delaying projects because of an anticipated summer slowdown in federal support as trust fund receipts fall short.

Increasingly, states have debated raising their own taxes to assure at least some continuity in transportation projects as Congress dawdles.

The obvious and equitable answer is to raise the gas tax, particularly in an era in which the neglect of infrastructure important to the economy gets palpably worse every year. But even a reasonable increase in the gas tax is considered a nonstarter for timorous lawmakers in an election year. The Obama administration has proposed a four-year, $302 billion transportation bill that would bolster the trust fund with the help of corporate tax reforms, not a higher gas tax. But this approach is already being rejected by congressional leaders as unlikely to pass this year.

Representative Dave Camp, the Michigan Republican who oversees the Ways and Means Committee, has talked about a tax code change to tax profits repatriated from abroad as a revenue source for the highway fund. While this idea has good bipartisan potential, it seems unlikely to happen given Congress’s default mode of gamesmanship and procrastination.

“We’re running out of time,” said Senator Barbara Boxer, the California Democrat who leads the public works committee, of the need to find a multiyear solution. A more stable, six-year plan sought by some lawmakers would require an additional $100 billion to cover trust fund shortfalls, according to congressional budget officials.

Two years ago, lawmakers raided general budget revenues to plaster a patch on the highway trust fund until Sept. 30 of this year. Congress has very little time left to come up with something better than last-minute fiscal sleight of hand.

By  




National Conference On Public Employee Retirement Systems.

When it comes to education, no other conference compares to the NCPERS Annual Conference and Exhibition. That”s why more than 1,000 trustees, administrators, state and local officials, investment, financial and union officers, pension staff and regulators attend each year.

Attendees benefit from the comprehensive educational programming, dynamic speakers, and networking opportunities with money managers, investment service providers and public fund colleagues from across the nation.

The 2014 Annual Conference & Exhibition will be held at the Sheraton Chicago Hotel & Towers in Chicago, IL. Join us this year as we focus on“Navigating the River of Pension Success.” 

2014 Annual Conference & Exhibiton
April 27 – May 1
Sheraton Chicago Hotel & Towers
Chicago, IL

Promo Videos

Registration Material


Click here
 to go to the Trustee Educational Seminar (TEDS) page.




Fitch: Detroit Plan Shows ULT Pledge Has Adequate Protection.

The settlement allowing Detroit’s unlimited tax general obligation (ULTGO) bondholders to keep 74% of their principal payments is closer to Fitch Ratings’ expectation for how such securities would fare in bankruptcy, absent an express statutory lien. Yesterday’s agreement was preceded by an offer of just $0.15 on the $1.00 and a legal effort to designate these bonds as unsecured. In our view, this underscores the unpredictable nature of the negotiations for bondholders and issuers. Bond insurers Assured Guaranty, Ltd, Ambac Assurance Corp. and National Public Finance Guarantee Corporation agreed to allow the city to send the remaining 26% of tax revenues levied for ULTGOs to a fund for Detroit’s “most vulnerable” retirees, according to U.S. District Chief Judge Gerald Rosen. Whether or not this convinces pensioners to accept the settlement remains to be seen.

The prospects for other bonds in the proceeding also remain uncertain. A separate settlement with limited-tax general obligation bondholders seems likely. The city’s current proposal could reduce recovery on certificates of participation (COP) to zero if the COPs are invalidated and the pension system (which benefited from the sale of the COPs) is not required to return the borrowed assets.

Fitch will continue to monitor these actions and their potential implications for settlements in other distressed municipalities.
Contact:
Amy Laskey
Managing Director
U.S. Public Finance
+1 212 908-0568
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159
1 State Street Plaza
New York, NY

 

Media Relations: Elizabeth Fogerty, New York, Tel: +1 (212) 908 0526, Email: elizabeth.fogerty@fitchratings.com.

Additional information is available on www.fitchratings.com.

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article, which may include hyperlinks to companies and current ratings, can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com. All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.

ALL FITCH CREDIT RATINGS ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS. PLEASE READ THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS BY FOLLOWING THIS LINK: HTTP://FITCHRATINGS.COM/UNDERSTANDINGCREDITRATINGS. IN ADDITION, RATING DEFINITIONS AND THE TERMS OF USE OF SUCH RATINGS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE AGENCY’S PUBLIC WEBSITE ‘WWW.FITCHRATINGS.COM’. PUBLISHED RATINGS, CRITERIA AND METHODOLOGIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THIS SITE AT ALL TIMES. FITCH’S CODE OF CONDUCT, CONFIDENTIALITY, CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, AFFILIATE FIREWALL, COMPLIANCE AND OTHER RELEVANT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE FROM THE ‘CODE OF CONDUCT’ SECTION OF THIS SITE. FITCH MAY HAVE PROVIDED ANOTHER PERMISSIBLE SERVICE TO THE RATED ENTITY OR ITS RELATED THIRD PARTIES. DETAILS OF THIS SERVICE FOR RATINGS FOR WHICH THE LEAD ANALYST IS BASED IN AN EU-REGISTERED ENTITY CAN BE FOUND ON THE ENTITY SUMMARY PAGE FOR THIS ISSUER ON THE FITCH WEBSITE.




Fitch: Chicago's Plan Slow to Improve Pensions.

Fitch Ratings-New York-09 April 2014: The Chicago pension reform plan, approved by the Illinois State Legislature Tuesday, would eliminate the threat of pension insolvency facing two of the city’s four plans. However, long-term pension fund sustainability is many years away, according to Fitch Ratings. Illinois affords particularly strong legal protection to pension benefits and Fitch expects these changes will face protracted litigation.

Chicago’s (‘A-‘/Outlook Negative) combined unfunded liability for all four plans totals $19 billion, yielding a funded ratio of 35%. Fitch considers pension funding levels below 70% to be weak. The proposal seeks to improve two pension systems by trimming future growth of the liability with changes to the cost of living adjustments (COLA), while providing increased contributions from both employer and employees. The plan redefines the city’s annual required contribution (ARC) to an amount that would be sufficient to produce 90% funding in 40 years, similar to the weak funding standard used by the state’s plans prior to its recent pension reform.

The closed amortization period is a positive, but given the four- to six-year ramp up before reaching the weaker ARC level, combined with the long amortization period, Fitch believes it will be many years before meaningful reduction in the unfunded liability is evident.

Officials expect a property tax increase will cover half of the increased costs with budget savings, such as the elimination of most retiree healthcare benefits to make up the balance.

Increasing pension costs are a recurring theme among Chicago area governments and funding these increases will likely place a considerable stacked burden on the area’s resource base. The city plans to gradually increase its property tax levy by $50 million (approximately 6%) annually for five years before reaching the target increment of $250 million in the fifth year.

These increases will occur in the context of other steeply rising costs, including a statutorily required $600 million increase in contributions for the city’s other two pension systems (police and fire) in 2016. The city has not said how the $600 million increase for police and fire will be accommodated, but media reports indicate that future legislation may allow for a ramping up of the funding obligation.

Contact:

Arlene Bohner
Senior Director
U.S. Public Finance
+1 212-908-0554
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159
1 State Street Plaza
New York, NY

Media Relations: Elizabeth Fogerty, New York, Tel: +1 (212) 908 0526, Email: elizabeth.fogerty@fitchratings.com.

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com. All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.

ALL FITCH CREDIT RATINGS ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS. PLEASE READ THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS BY FOLLOWING THIS LINK: HTTP://FITCHRATINGS.COM/UNDERSTANDINGCREDITRATINGS. IN ADDITION, RATING DEFINITIONS AND THE TERMS OF USE OF SUCH RATINGS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE AGENCY’S PUBLIC WEBSITE ‘WWW.FITCHRATINGS.COM’. PUBLISHED RATINGS, CRITERIA AND METHODOLOGIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THIS SITE AT ALL TIMES. FITCH’S CODE OF CONDUCT, CONFIDENTIALITY, CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, AFFILIATE FIREWALL, COMPLIANCE AND OTHER RELEVANT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE FROM THE ‘CODE OF CONDUCT’ SECTION OF THIS SITE. FITCH MAY HAVE PROVIDED ANOTHER PERMISSIBLE SERVICE TO THE RATED ENTITY OR ITS RELATED THIRD PARTIES. DETAILS OF THIS SERVICE FOR RATINGS FOR WHICH THE LEAD ANALYST IS BASED IN AN EU-REGISTERED ENTITY CAN BE FOUND ON THE ENTITY SUMMARY PAGE FOR THIS ISSUER ON THE FITCH WEBSITE.




Municipal Market Seminar on Regulation, Compliance and Enforcement – Featuring FINRA and MSRB.

Municipal Market Seminar on Regulation, Compliance and Enforcement – Featuring FINRA and MSRB

May 14, 2014
The Four Seasons, St. Louis, MO

REGISTER HERE!>




WSJ: Finra Scrutinizes Banks' Role in Bond Market.

Regulators have stepped up their scrutiny of the booming bond markets, launching an inquiry into Wall Street banks’ trading profits and expanding a probe into how new offerings are doled out to investors, according to officials.

The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, a Wall Street self-regulator, is taking a broad look at the trading profits of banks and other middlemen in some bond transactions. Finra is crunching through reams of trading data, looking for instances in which the middlemen have earned unusually large profits on bond deals, officials said. The inquiry could lead to a regulatory instruction to the banks to reduce the spreads between buying and selling prices they charge on certain trades, or even to enforcement action.”There might be enforcement action with respect to the outliers,” Richard Ketchum, Finra’s chairman and chief executive, said in an interview with The Wall Street Journal. “We’re certainly looking.”Finra also is investigating how banks apportion hot bond offerings among investors, Mr. Ketchum said, alongside a previously reported Securities and Exchange Commission probe.

The Federal Reserve also has been asking large money-management firms about inefficiencies in the bond markets, said people familiar with the matter, which hasn’t previously been reported. Among other things, the inquiry focuses on investors’ troubles buying and selling bonds when credit markets tumbled in May of last year after the Fed signaled intentions to wind down its bond buying. A spokeswoman for the Fed declined to comment.

The spotlight on bond markets comes as regulators have launched several inquiries into potential inequities in the stock and commodities markets, where access to trading information can give certain investors advantages. Some market participants suspect dealers sometimes favor certain clients over others. Bond investors have complained for decades that their markets have been slow to adopt new technologies and that pricing and trading information should be more openly distributed.

The U.S. bond markets total about $40 trillion, twice the size of the approximately $19 trillion U.S. stock market. They provide ways for companies, the U.S. government and homeowners to obtain credit. Last year, companies borrowed a record $1.47 trillion in the U.S. corporate-bond market, including Verizon Communications Inc., VZ -0.44% which raised $49 billion in the biggest corporate-bond deal ever. Thus far, this year’s new issuance is running apace, according to Dealogic.

The SEC has sought information on new bond sales from a number of big banks, including Goldman Sachs Group Inc., GS -1.97% Citigroup Inc., C -1.28% Deutsche Bank AG DB -1.41% and Morgan StanleyMS -3.11% people familiar with the matter said. The Wall Street Journal reported in February that the SEC’s inquiries of banksincluded Goldman Sachs and Citigroup. The banks haven’t been accused of wrongdoing in relation to bond deals.

The SEC and Finra are together looking at whether banks are favoring the biggest money managers and giving them unfair influence over the pricing of new corporate bonds, which would disadvantage smaller investors.

“There aren’t allocation rules in the U.S. at the present time,” Mr. Ketchum said. “But there are issues about quid pro quos and other questions that can be raised.”

One particular aspect of new bond issues the regulator is looking at, he said, is “flipping opportunities,” or the chance for big investors to quickly sell newly acquired bonds—at a significant profit—to investors shut out of the deal initially.

Traders at investment firms sometimes call it a “kiss,” said one large money manager, referencing the term often used to describe a range of favors investors can get from bankers working on selling and trading new bonds.

When a bond issue comes to market, bankers often give the largest portions of the deals to their biggest customers, who also may frequently trade with the bank or use its other services, said several investors and people familiar with dealer trading desks.

Bond deals, like stocks sold in initial public offerings, often rise in value just after they are issued. About 87% of the bonds issued in 2013 rose in price within five days of the initial sale, said Peter Tchir, a strategist at Brean Capital LLC, a registered broker-dealer.

In trading after Verizon’s record $49 billion bond sale last September, investors made about $3 billion on three portions of the deal within the first week, according to an analysis by Mr. Tchir.

The Verizon deal is one of the offerings the SEC has asked banks about, the Journal previously reported

A Verizon spokesman didn’t respond to requests for comment.

In its new inquiry into bond trading, Finra is scrutinizing the profits banks and other dealers make, known as markups and markdowns—the difference between selling and buying prices. Dealers typically keep a small profit on each trade facilitated. But bond prices aren’t always publicly quoted, so it is difficult to know what competitors may be paying for the same bonds.

The regulator is zooming in on what Mr. Ketchum called “matched trades,” where dealers are matching a seller with buyers, often very quickly. It estimates these now make up 60% to 70% of trades in corporate and municipal bonds.

Securities dealers are trying to reap profits from selling and trading debt as other aspects of their businesses have become more challenged. Interest rates remain at some of the lowest levels in history, and trading desks have been crimped by postcrisis regulation that limits assets they can hold and trade for their own books.

Regulators don’t set a fixed limit on what markups banks can charge, instead judging what is excessive based on industry best practice.

Mr. Ketchum said that, for these matched trades, where the risk is “relatively limited,” markups of more than 1.5% to 2% would be “questionable.”

Christopher Sullivan, chief investment officer at the United Nations Federal Credit Union, which oversees about $2.25 billion in assets, said that even worse than getting a smaller-than-wanted chunk of a new bond deal is then being offered the bonds from a trader right after the deal is priced “at some unjustifiably higher price.”

By

JEAN EAGLESHAM,

KATY BURNE and

JUSTIN BAER

April 10, 2014 7:13 p.m. ET

—Kirsten Grind contributed to this article.

Write to Jean Eaglesham at jean.eaglesham@wsj.com, Katy Burne atkaty.burne@wsj.com and Justin Baer at justin.baer@wsj.com




WSJ: Big Hedge Funds Roll Dice on Puerto Rico Debt.

  • Several large hedge funds doubled down on Puerto Rico in last month’s giant bond sale despite the U.S. territory’s financial struggles, according to confidential documents reviewed by The Wall Street Journal.

    Och-Ziff Capital Management LLC, Fir Tree Partners, Perry Capital LLC and Brigade Capital Management each bought more than $100 million of the bonds, according to a list of buyers of the $3.5 billion deal. The list doesn’t show whether the firms continue to hold the bonds, which carried junk credit ratings, or whether they sold some or all of their purchases afterward.

    John Paulson’s Paulson & Co. also purchased more than $100 million of the deal. It isn’t clear whether Mr. Paulson owned Puerto Rico debt before. His firm invested in a Puerto Rico hotel earlier this year.

    Hedge funds and other nontraditional buyers of municipal bonds bought around 70% of the deal when it was offered, according to calculations based on the document—an atypically high level for municipal-bond offerings. Many investors said they were drawn by the high yields and discounted price, though market participants said another major draw for buyers was the prospect of boosting the value of their existing investments in the island.

    Junk-rated municipal debt is rare and most municipal debt is bought by mutual funds and individual investors. Many mutual funds can’t buy debt rated below investment grade.

    Puerto Rico officials and the banks leading the bond sale— Barclays PLC, RBC Capital Markets LLC and Morgan Stanley—pitched the March 11 offering as a critical step in improving the island’s finances. Since then, prices of Puerto Rico’s bonds have fallen amid concerns it may restructure some of its debt, hurting some investors who purchased bonds at the offering price.

    Some hedge funds are known for their short-term investment strategies. If the island’s debt investors sell in and out of their bonds, it could push up Puerto Rico’s borrowing costs.

    Several large hedge funds doubled down on Puerto Rico in last month’s giant bond sale despite the U.S. territory’s financial struggles. An electronic billboard on the Morgan Stanley building near New York’s Times Square congratulates the territory on its sale. Reuters

    The list, assembled by the banks that underwrote the March offering, offers a rare window into how Wall Street doles out securities in hot offerings to its customers.

    The identities of debt buyers typically aren’t known to market participants. Regulations require banks that coordinated the deal to distribute the list to other banks that helped distribute the bonds, but it wasn’t meant to reach investors. Information about who owns what securities and when is valuable to traders when making decisions about buying and selling their holdings.

    “This is troublesome to know that all those names in any…deal are circulating because it gives an insight into what people are doing,” especially for private funds that aren’t required to report holdings, said Peter Hayes, head of the municipal-bond group at BlackRock Inc., which bought some of the Puerto Rico deal.

    Some of the firms including Och-Ziff, which bought $110 million of the offering, subsequently sold part of their holdings on the day of the deal, said a person familiar with the matter. Others including Perry Capital, which bought $120 million, are sticking with their investment, another person said.

    Brigade, Fir Tree, Perry and mutual-fund manager OppenheimerFunds were adding to already large investments in Puerto Rico’s debt. Many of these firms bought Puerto Rico debt over the past year at steeply discounted prices and higher yields, said people familiar with the matter. Puerto Rico bonds that were trading at distressed prices early in the year rose in price when it appeared the new bond sale would succeed, replenishing the government’s coffers.

    Warning signs are cropping up. Puerto Rico’s finance arm hired restructuring lawyers from Cleary Gottlieb Steen & Hamilton LLP, sparking worries among analysts that officials are considering a debt restructuring that could lead to bondholder losses. Puerto Rico in recent weeks also hired restructuring advisers at FTI Consulting Inc. who are working on the operations of utility and highway units, people familiar with the matter said. Puerto Rico previously had said it was working with a unit of Millstein & Co., a financial adviser that specializes in restructuring.

    Puerto Rico officials have said publicly that they intend to honor their obligations, and they have worked to change the island’s pension system and raised new taxes to increase revenues.

    Bill Black, who helps oversee the $6.2 billion Invesco High Yield Municipal Fund, said investors are asking “what the commonwealth is really intending now that they seem to have a restructuring financial adviser and a restructuring attorney engaged.”

    Mr. Black said his fund bought some of Puerto Rico’s new bonds last month, but sold the debt within a week as prices rose. The fund still owns some other Puerto Rico debt. His firm bought $14.5 million of the March bond.

    Other buyers of the March 11 bond included the biggest municipal-bond mutual-fund holder of Puerto Rico debt, OppenheimerFunds, as well as Harvard University and the treasury unit of publisher Gannett Co. Several insurance companies, banks and retail investors also were allotted chunks, according to the document.

    The 21-year bonds sold on March 11 recently were trading at around 92 cents on the dollar, to yield 8.839%, after trading up to about 99 cents on the dollar in the first few days on the market. The bonds originally were sold at 93 cents on the dollar to yield 8.727%, according to MSRB data.

    Puerto Rico officials declined to comment.

    Investors have sold $1.7 billion of the bond since Puerto Rico issued it, according to data from the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board. It isn’t clear how much of that debt was sold by hedge funds, and some of those transactions reflect trades by investors who purchased the bonds from original buyers of the debt.

    MATT WIRZ
    Updated April 9, 2014 8:41 p.m. ET

    —Mike Cherney, Al Yoon and Katy Burne contributed to this article.

    Write to Matt Wirz at matthieu.wirz@wsj.com




    Judge Approves Pact to End Detroit Swap Deal.

    DETROIT — A federal judge on Friday approved this bankrupt city’s latest attempt to extricate itself from some long-term financial contracts that have been costing it tens of millions of dollars a year, holding up a settlement as an example of “the very spirit of negotiation and compromise” that he hoped other creditors would follow.

    Judge Steven W. Rhodes of United States Bankruptcy Court ruled that Detroit could proceed with a plan to pay $85 million to UBS and Bank of America to terminate the financial contracts, known as interest-rate swaps, that were used to help finance pensions.

    Under the terms of the settlement, the two banks agreed to back Detroit’s overall plan of adjustment, which is critical for the city’s push to resolve its bankruptcy by early fall. Municipal bankruptcy rules say that if one class of impaired creditors votes to approve the city’s plan of debt adjustment, the judge may be able to impose the terms forcibly on everybody else. The judge’s decision gives Detroit leverage for settlements with other creditors.

    Earlier this year, Judge Rhodes had rejected a previous attempt to end the swaps that called for Detroit to pay the banks $165 million. He called that proposal “just too much money” and noted that Detroit would have a reasonable chance of success if it sued the banks outright, calling the swaps invalid and refusing to make any termination payments at all.

    “They might have been discouraged and hardened their positions” by that assertion, Judge Rhodes said of the city and the two big banks. “They chose instead to re-engage.”

    “The message,” he added, “is that now is the time to negotiate.”

    Detroit’s emergency manager, Kevyn Orr, and other officials have been calling for creditors to negotiate settlements quickly out of fear that Detroit’s case will become a hopeless quagmire if creditors keep fighting the city’s proposals for resolving their debts. The state law that put Detroit under emergency management is scheduled to expire in September.

    “There’s a lot of pressure on the judge to wrap up this bankruptcy quickly,” said Abayomi Azikiwe, an observer who said he was a member of the Moratorium Now Coalition.

    Detroit entered into the swap contracts in 2005, when it tapped the municipal bond market for $1.4 billion to put into its workers’ pension funds. Much of the deal was structured with variable-rate debt, and the swaps were intended to work as a hedge, to protect Detroit if interest rates rose. But rates fell, and under those circumstances, the terms of the swaps called for Detroit to make regular payments to UBS and Bank of America. The swaps cost Detroit about $36 million a year.

    The 2005 borrowing also required an unusual structure to avoid violating the city’s legal debt limit. In 2009, the debt was downgraded to junk, putting the city out of compliance with the terms of the swaps. So Detroit restructured the swap obligations, offering the two banks the tax revenue that it received from local casinos as a backstop.

    When Detroit declared bankruptcy last summer, it estimated the cost of terminating its swaps at about $345 million. Days before filing its bankruptcy petition, Detroit said Bank of America and UBS had given it a break, so that it would have to pay only about $250 million to cancel the contracts. But other creditors, facing bigger relative losses, complained that the two banks were still getting way too much. They argued, among other things, that the interest-rate swaps were invalid from the beginning because the use of casino taxes for financial hedges is not allowed under state law.

    With complaints about the swap payment mounting last December, Judge Rhodes sent the parties back to renegotiate their deal with the help of another federal judge, Gerald E. Rosen, the chief justice for the Eastern District of Michigan. Judge Rosen is the lead mediator of the Detroit bankruptcy, trying to negotiate settlements among Detroit’s more than 100,000 creditors to keep the huge bankruptcy from being mired in endless lawsuits.

    Judge Rosen persuaded Bank of America and UBS to agree to a $165 million settlement just before Christmas, but Judge Rhodes rejected that deal, saying it was still too generous. He urged the two sides to try to negotiate a new settlement.

    By MARY WILLIAMS WALSH




    Citi Analysis Shows Bank Regulators That Most Munis Are Liquid.

    WASHINGTON — Citi bankers are urging bank regulators to treat most municipal securities as high quality liquid assets in a banking rule proposed to ensure banks are equipped to handle severe financial and economic stress.

    They made their plea in a three-page letter accompanied by 15 pages of analysis showing why most munis should be considered as eligible as HQLA. The letter, signed by Ward Marsh, Citi’s managing director for municipal securities, was sent to bank regulators on Wednesday. It follows several other dozen letters sent state and local officials and firms that have all warned the failure to categorize most munis as HQLA will hurt the muni market and governments.

    Alan Anders, the director for finance in New York City’s Office of Management and Budget, warned the regulators in a recent letter that the proposed rule “is overly restrictive” and would cause banks to make fewer investments in munis, decreasing demand and liquidity for munis, while increasing borrowing costs.

    It would also reduce the amount of bank capacity available to fund credit and liquidity support for muni variable-rate bond programs, Anders said.

    Marsh echoed Anders’ concerns in a brief interview and said also that categorizing munis as illiquid could actually cause them to be less liquid. But Citi’s letter did not contain concerns and focused instead on why munis should be considered eligible as HQLA.

    The controversy over the rulemaking comes at a time when banks have been playing a growing role in the municipal market. Banks held $416.4 billion of munis last year, almost double from 2009. Banks have been the marginal buyers of munis over the past year as tax-exempt mutual funds have had record outflows.

    The rule, proposed by the Federal Reserve Board and other bank regulators in October, could be finalized as soon as early summer and would take effect in January. It would create a standardized minimum liquidity requirement for large and systemically important banks and other financial institutions. These institutions would be required to maintain a minimum liquidity coverage ratio, defined as the ratio of HQLA to total net cash outflows over a 30-day period of stress.

    Assets would qualify as HQLA if they could be easily and immediately convertible to cash with little or no loss of value during a period of liquidity stress. The rule proposes three classes of HQLA: Level 1, which would include sovereign securities, including U.S. government securities and U.S. government-guaranteed securities; Level 2A, securities issued by U.S. government sponsored enterprises and certain sovereign entities; and Level 2B, investment grade corporate debt with certain characteristics and equities in the Standard & Poor’s 500 Index.

    The regulators said they did not include munis in any of these categories because “these assets are not liquid and readily marketable in the U.S. and thus do not exhibit liquidity characteristics necessary to be included in HQLA under this proposed rule.”

    They did not give specific reasons for these views. Citi bankers met with officials at the Federal Reserve, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corp. in recent weeks so they could understand the basis of their concerns.

    Citi’s letter analysis addresses each concern and urges the regulators to treat investment-grade munis as eligible for Level 2A HQLA, on a par with GSE securities. Banks would have to take a 15% haircut, meaning they could only take 85% of their muni holdings into account in determining their liquidity coverage ratio. Industrial development bonds issued for nonprofit or other corporate obligors should be eligible for Level 2B HQLA, on a par with investment-grade corporates, which would have a 50% haircut.

    To address concerns about concentration of assets, Citi recommended the rule limit to 25% the inclusion of eligible muni assets in a bank’s total amount of HQLA.

    Historically munis have been treated similarly to GSE securities in federal regulation and legislation, Citi said. Munis and GSE securities were given the same credit-risk weights under previous international Basel Accords on capital. They also have the same liquidity values at the Federal Reserve discount window.

    From the standpoint of a liquidity coverage ratio, investment-grade munis would provide a greater diversification benefit than either GSE securities or nonfinancial corporate bonds, Citi said.

    Munis, especially those that are investment-grade, generally have higher credit quality and lower historic default rates than corporate bonds, the bank said. “Despite the recent increase in media attention on U.S. public sector credit issues, cumulative realized credit losses on all municipal debt over the past 100 years has amounted to less than 1%,” Citi told the regulators.

    Citi also said muni defaults are less correlated with recessions than defaults of corporate bonds. In fact, the bank argued that when times get tough and munis become cheaper, the muni market becomes more liquid and deeper, with crossover buyers from the taxable market and more retail investors coming into the market.

    To address concerns about the decline in muni trading during the financial crisis, Citi said it was auction rate securities and variable rate demand notes, neither of which is expected to be eligible as HQLA. The ARS market collapsed and there was, among other things, a lack of reasonably priced credit support for VRDNs.

    “Rather than a precipitous drop-off in fixed-rate activity, we see that volumes have ebbed and flowed only marginally, with the highest trading volumes having occurred in 2008 and 2013,” Citi said in its analysis.

    The bank said there is a lot of price transparency in the muni market, particularly for investment-grade munis. The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board’s EMMA makes pricing and other trade data available for free on a near real-time basis. In addition, three major non-bank pricing services price munis for clients, the bank said.

    To address concerns that the muni market did not have a large repo or repurchase agreement market, which most liquid markets have, Citi said investment-grade munis have “deep, diverse and stable secured funding availability away from the taxable repo market” and that it, alone, has roughly $8 billion of collateralized deposits from the public sector entities, almost 75% of which is secured with muni assets.

    BY LYNN HUME

    APR 10, 2014 5:11pm ET




    Camp Tax Reform Proposal Affects Financial Services and Transactions.

    Richard Larkins, Alan Munro, and Marc Levy review recent tax reform proposals by House Ways and Means Committee Chair Dave Camp, R-Mich., that would affect the financial services industry and users of financial products.

    Richard Larkins and Alan Munro are partners in the capital markets tax practice of EY’s international tax services group, and Marc Levy is a partner and EY global banking and capital markets tax leader in the firm’s financial services office.

    In this article, the authors review recent tax reform proposals by House Ways and Means Committee Chair Dave Camp, R-Mich., that would affect the financial services industry and users of financial products.

    The views expressed in this article are those of the authors and do not necessarily reflect the views of EY or any other member of EY Global Ltd.

    A tax reform proposal (the 2014 proposal) released by House Ways and Means Committee Chair Dave Camp, R-Mich., contains several provisions of interest to financial product users, as well as the financial services industry.

    A. Marking to Market Derivatives: General Rule

    1. Proposal. Under the 2014 proposal, all taxpayers would generally account for all derivatives on a mark-to-market basis, with any resulting gain or loss treated as ordinary in character.

    2. Discussion. Under current tax law, derivatives generally need not be marked to market unless (1) the taxpayer is a dealer of those derivatives; (2) the taxpayer is a trader or dealer in commodities that has elected to mark them to market; or (3) the derivative is a so-called section 1256 contract (a regulated futures contract, foreign currency contract, non-equity option, dealer equity option, or dealer securities futures contract). The gains and losses resulting from that marking are generally ordinary, although they are 60 percent long-term capital and 40 percent short-term capital for some section 1256 contracts.

    Camp’s 2013 proposal would largely replace these rules with a requirement to generally account for derivatives annually on a mark-to-market basis, with gain or loss treated as ordinary. Under that proposal, if a taxpayer holds a derivative contract at the beginning of the tax year, proper adjustment is made to any gain or loss later realized on that contract to reflect any gain or loss taken into account by the taxpayer in a prior year. Under the proposal, these mark-to-market rules would apply to all derivatives held by a taxpayer, other than those properly treated as hedging transactions or as part of straddles (as discussed below), even though nonrecognition of gain or loss would have resulted from the application of any other code provision.

    The 2013 proposal defines a derivative broadly to include any evidence of an interest in, for example, options, futures, forwards, and swaps. There is no requirement for the underlying property to be publicly traded. The proposed definition of a derivative has a fairly narrow exception for options on real property.

    Under the proposal, a derivative generally includes any embedded derivative component of a debt instrument. However, the proposal would exclude most debt instruments with embedded derivatives, so as a practical matter, it would apply only to convertible debt instruments. The proposal is unclear on how the tax rules would apply to the debt instrument once the derivative component had been isolated and subject to mark-to-market accounting.

    Although generally similar to the 2013 proposal, the 2014 proposal contains some differences. Notably, a derivative is more narrowly defined as a contract “with respect to,” rather than just evidence of an interest in, specified underlying property. Carved out from the definition of a derivative are the following: the right to the return of the same or substantially identical securities transferred in a securities lending, sale-repurchase, or similar financing transaction; some options received in connection with the performance of services; insurance contracts, annuities, and endowments; derivatives regarding the stock of members of the same worldwide affiliated group; commodities used in the normal course of a trade or business; and American depository receipts for foreign stock.

    The 2014 proposal retains the rule that the term “derivative” includes a contract with an embedded derivative component, but it would expand the 2013 proposal’s exception for some debt instruments by excluding from mark-to-market treatment convertible debt instruments, contingent payment debt instruments, integrated debt instruments, variable rate debt instruments, investment units, debt with alternative payment schedules, and other debt instruments to which the section 1275(d) regulations apply. The 2014 proposal also instructs the Treasury secretary to modify regulations under section 1275(d) to provide that convertible debt instruments are treated in a manner similar to contingent payment debt instruments. Thus, unlike the 2013 proposal, the 2014 proposal would not treat convertible debt instruments as having an embedded derivative component and would tax those instruments as contingent payment debt instruments.

    3. Implications. While the proposal to mark to market derivatives would be a significant departure from current law, the 2014 proposal’s narrowing of the definition of a derivative is welcome, particularly as it relates to debt instruments. The proposal to tax convertible debt instruments under the contingent payment debt instrument rules would be a big change.

    Neither proposal contains a requirement for either the derivative itself or the underlying property to be publicly traded. There is no requirement for there to be underlying property, at least in some cases. This would greatly expand the range of transactions to which the mark-to-market requirements could apply. For example, agreements to buy or sell any stock in a corporation or an interest in a partnership would have to be marked to market. Finally, the mark-to-market rules might apply to many real estate transactions, including leases and sale transactions involving multiple properties.

    B. Marking to Market Derivatives: Straddle Rule

    1. Proposal. The 2014 proposal contains a special rule regarding a taxpayer’s entry into specified offsetting positions (straddles).

    2. Discussion. For purposes of this rule, the term “straddle” means offsetting positions regarding actively traded personal property, and the term “mixed straddle” means a straddle that contains a derivative and at least one offsetting position that would not be marked to market under general rules (for example, common stock).

    The 2013 proposal focused on mixed straddles. Thus, if a taxpayer entered into a mixed straddle and, when that occurred, a position had a built-in gain, the gain position would be treated as sold for its fair market value at the time of entering into the mixed straddle. If the position had a built-in loss, however, the position would not be treated as sold at the time of entering into the mixed straddle, and the amount of the built-in loss would not be taken into account in determining the amount that is marked to market during the period of the mixed straddle. Rather, the amount of the loss would be taken into account in determining the amount of gain or loss when the position is disposed of in a transaction in which gain or loss is otherwise recognized. In either case, the mark-to-market and ordinary rules would apply to future gains and losses on both the derivative and the nonderivative positions (except for any deferred built-in loss on the non-mark-to-market position in the mixed straddle).

    The 2014 proposal is the same as the 2013 proposal, except it excludes some positions regarding debt subject tosection 860G(a)(1)(B)(i) and straddles consisting of long stock and qualified covered call options.

    3. Implications. Both proposals go well beyond current law in triggering the recognition of gain on a financial asset when the taxpayer enters into a risk-reduction transaction for that asset. Under current law, gain recognition is not triggered unless the taxpayer eliminated substantially all its risk of loss and opportunity for gain on the asset. Under either proposal, any substantial diminution of the risk of loss or opportunity for gain would be sufficient to trigger the recognition of gain for tax purposes but would not result in the recognition of loss. Moreover, unlike the existing straddle rules, this one-sided rule would apply to entering into contracts to sell all the stock of a corporate subsidiary. Doing so would trigger the recognition of gain when the contract is executed, and additional gain or loss would need to be determined when the stock is delivered under the contract.

    C. Marking to Market Derivatives: Hedging

    1. Proposal. Both proposals’ mark-to-market treatment of derivatives (and offsetting positions with built-in gain) would not apply to any derivative that is part of a properly identified hedging transaction. Under the proposals, hedging transactions that are properly identified as such for financial accounting purposes (that is, under generally accepted accounting principles) would be treated as meeting the hedge identification requirement of section 1221.

    2. Discussion. Under current law, tax hedging treatment is available only if the risk of being hedged relates to ordinary property held (or to be held) or obligations incurred (or to be incurred) by the taxpayer. Further, for a hedging transaction to unambiguously qualify for ordinary gain or loss treatment, it must be timely identified for federal income tax purposes as a hedging transaction in the taxpayer’s books and records. To be timely, the identification statement must be completed by the end of the day on which the hedging transaction is entered into. Under current Treasury regulations, an identification of the transaction as a hedge for GAAP purposes does not satisfy the requirement to identify the transaction for federal income tax purposes.

    As a consequence, many taxpayers are treated as having failed to properly identify their hedging transactions for federal income tax purposes, even though they have completed extensive documentation identifying the transaction as such for GAAP purposes under circumstances in which the transaction is obviously functioning as a hedge. Many taxpayers erroneously rely on their GAAP documentation for federal income tax purposes. This requirement is therefore a trap for the unwary.

    Under the 2013 proposal, a hedging transaction would be treated as meeting the hedge identification requirement under section 1221 if the transaction were identified as a hedging transaction for tax purposes (as required under existing law) or if the transaction were treated as a hedging transaction within the meaning of GAAP for purposes of the taxpayer’s audited financial statement. The statement must be certified as being prepared in accordance with GAAP by an independent auditor and must be used for purposes of a statement or report to shareholders, partners, other proprietors, or beneficiaries, or for credit purposes.

    The 2014 proposal is the same as the 2013 proposal except that it makes tax hedging treatment more attainable to insurance companies by providing that any bond, debenture, note, certificate, or other evidence of indebtedness held by an insurance company shall be treated as ordinary property for purposes of the tax hedging rules (and thus, potentially eligible for tax hedging treatment). Further, the 2014 proposal broadens the exception from foreign personal holding company income treatment for income arising out of commodity hedging transactions.

    3. Implications. The proposals’ hedging exception to marking to market would remove most derivatives used by business taxpayers but would not eliminate the difficulties posed by the adoption of a general mark-to-market system. The proposal to trigger immediate gain (but not loss) recognition if a derivative creates a straddle is particularly troubling. First, many economic exposures involve capital assets, which cannot be the subject of a tax hedge, even if the taxpayer attempts to identify them as such. Second, many U.S. multinationals enter into hedging transactions in their controlled foreign corporations, and the rules under subpart F frequently require careful planning to properly match gain or loss on a hedge with loss or gain on the hedged item. The proposals provide only limited help in addressing these potential mismatches. In the subpart F context, the proposals may worsen the effect of inadvertent errors made by a taxpayer because, under a mark-to-market system, a taxpayer will be unable to control the timing of income. Timing and character mismatches will therefore be even more difficult to avoid.

    The extension of tax hedging treatment to debt instruments held by insurance companies to economically hedge their insurance policies is welcome.

    The automatic identification system would be a welcome change, but it would not eliminate the need for taxpayers to pay attention to required tax identifications. This is primarily because many exposures that can be hedged for tax purposes cannot be hedged for financial accounting purposes, and therefore will not have been identified as hedges by the taxpayer.

    D. Corporate Acquisition Indebtedness: Repeal

    1. Proposal. The 2014 proposal would repeal section 279 in its entirety.

    2. Discussion. Under current law, if specified conditions are met, a corporation’s interest deduction may be denied for debt issued as consideration for the acquisition of stock in another corporation or of assets of another corporation. The 2013 proposal did not address this.

    3. Implications. The repeal of section 279 is a welcome proposal because its many conditions means it rarely applies and is not a large revenue raiser. Thus, repealing this provision is unlikely to have much effect, while it would streamline the code.

    E. Inclusion in Income of Market Discount

    1. Proposal. The 2014 proposal would require purchasers of bonds at a discount on the secondary market to include the discount in ordinary income over the remaining life of the bond. The proposal would limit market discount inclusion to an amount that approximates increases in interest rates since the loan was originally made by using a maximum accrual rate equal to the greater of (1) the original yield on the bond plus 5 percentage points or (2) the applicable federal rate plus 10 percentage points.

    2. Discussion. Under current law, a taxpayer is not generally required to include market discount in income as it accrues but may elect to do so. Gain on the disposition of any market discount bond is treated as ordinary income to the extent of the accrued market discount, which generally accrues ratably unless the taxpayer elects to accrue it based on a constant interest rate. No exception exists for the accrual of market discount on distressed debt when there may be no reasonable expectation of full collection. Nor is there any rule limiting the rate at which market discount accrues to a reasonable market rate of interest.

    Under the 2014 proposal, the holder of a market discount bond would include market discount in gross income as it accrues. The amount of the inclusion for any tax year would be computed based on a constant interest rate. For bonds with both market discount and original issue discount, the constant interest rate accrual would be reduced by the OID accrual to avoid double counting.

    The 2014 proposal is largely the same as the 2013 proposal regarding market discount, with two exceptions. First, under the 2013 proposal, the capped yield would apply to a hypothetical purchase price, which would result in the bond having the capped yield rather than the actual purchase price. This appeared to be a drafting error. Under the 2014 proposal, the capped yield applies to the adjusted purchase price.

    The second difference is that under the 2014 proposal, a holder would treat any loss that results from the disposition of a market discount bond as ordinary (rather than capital) loss to the extent of previously accrued market discount.

    3. Implications. While the proposal is welcome in that it would limit the accrual of market discount on severely distressed debt (and thus conform the tax law more closely to the holder’s economic reality of doubtful collectability), taxpayers would be forced to currently include in income market discount as it accrued. That latter aspect of the proposal could significantly affect future years if interest rates rise significantly. Further, the proposal does not solve the overaccrual problem with severely distressed debt when the full recovery of principal is highly uncertain, and quite arguably, zero accrual is the correct answer. It is also unclear from the Camp proposal whether it is intended to supersede any common-law doctrines that permit zero accrual in severely distressed debt cases.

    The two changes from 2013 are improvements. The drafting error was fixed, which was expected. Treating loss as ordinary (to the extent of previously accrued market discount) could ease the problem of character whipsaw for a taxpayer that purchased distressed debt and was required to include market discount before selling the debt at a loss.

    F. Treatment of Exchanges of Debt Instruments

    1. Proposal. Under current law, an issuer can recognize cancellation of debt income (CODI) in a debt-for-debt exchange of publicly traded debt, even though the issuer remains liable for the full amount of the principal. The 2014 proposal would prevent this by generally providing that the issue price of a modified debt instrument cannot be less than that of the debt instrument before modification. This floor on the issue price of the modified debt instrument would be reduced by any amount of principal that is forgiven or by any imputed interest arising from a failure of the new debt to state interest at least at the applicable federal rate.

    The 2014 proposal also would generally prevent the holder of a debt instrument from recognizing gain or loss as a result of the modification of the debt.

    2. Discussion. If the terms of a debt instrument are altered in a manner that constitutes a significant modification of the instrument (which results in a deemed debt-for-debt exchange of the existing debt instrument for the modified instrument), the tax consequences for both the issuer and holder largely depend on the issue price of the modified debt instrument. In determining the issuer’s CODI, the issuer is treated as having satisfied the existing debt for an amount of money equal to the issue price of the new modified debt. Thus, to the extent the issue price of the modified debt is less than the adjusted issue price of the existing debt, the issuer will recognize CODI (without, of course, receiving any cash with which to pay the tax on that income, since the issuer already received the cash when it incurred the debt). Further, the issue price of the modified debt will also determine whether the issuer has OID and whether the applicable high-yield discount obligation (AHYDO) rules, which can operate to deny or defer interest expense deductions attributable to the OID, would apply. For the holder, the issue price of the modified debt determines its amount realized in the debt-for-debt exchange and thus its gain or loss (although that gain or loss may not be recognized currently under the corporate reorganization provisions). Under current law, the issuer may recognize CODI on restructurings of publicly traded debt when the issuer’s creditworthiness has declined or market rates have increased, even if the principal amount of the debt has not changed. The CODI would generally be offset over time with deductions for OID, but the AHYDO rules or other interest limitations may restrict this.

    The 2014 proposal seeks to rectify these results by providing that for an exchange (including by significant modification) by an issuer of a new debt instrument for an existing debt instrument from the same issuer, the issue price of the modified debt instrument shall be the lesser of (1) the adjusted issue price of the existing debt instrument; or (2) the issue price of the modified debt instrument — that is, the principal amount, if there is adequate stated interest or, otherwise, the imputed principal amount — which would be determined under section 1274 if the debt instrument were an instrument to which that section applied.

    The 2014 proposal would also change the taxation of holders of debt instruments in actual and deemed debt-for-debt exchanges. This would address the problem that arises if a holder has a low basis in the old debt, and the issue price equals its face amount, as would be the case under current law if the debt is not publicly traded and would often be the case under either proposal regardless of public trading. In that case, absent a special rule, the holder recognizes gain equal to the excess of the face amount over its basis, even though there may be no economic gain. The 2014 proposal would address this problem by providing that an actual or deemed debt exchange is to be treated from the holder’s perspective as a nontaxable transaction with carryover basis, regardless of whether the debt qualified as a corporate security under subchapter C. The 2014 proposal’s treatment of holders in this situation differs from the 2013 proposal, which did not address the problem from the holder’s perspective.

    3. Implications. The 2014 proposal would be welcome relief if enacted. From an issuer perspective, it would prevent issuers from realizing phantom CODI from restructurings of their public debt when the principal amount remains the same. Holders would also be prevented from realizing phantom gain from a deemed debt exchange when there was no economic gain.

    G. GAAP Income Acceleration

    1. Proposal. The 2014 proposal would modify section 451 generally in section 3303 of the 2014 proposal and further expand it for specified debt in section 3413, discussed below, by directing taxpayers to apply the revenue recognition rules under section 451 before the OID rules under section 1272.

    2. Discussion. The holder of a debt instrument with OID generally accrues and includes in income (as interest) the OID over the term of the instrument. Under current law, some fees earned by credit card issuers and other financial institutions have been treated as OID income, which allows these institutions to postpone the realization of this income to later years for tax purposes. Under the 2014 proposal, these fees and other amounts received by a taxpayer would not be treated as OID, which would require accrual method taxpayers to include an item of income no later than the tax year in which that item is included for financial statement purposes.

    The proper tax treatment of various fees paid by credit card users has been a long-standing issue. The question is whether those fees should be treated as interest, in which case credit card issuers can defer recognition of the fees as OID, or as income currently includable in the year the fees are assessed. For years, authorities addressing the matter were somewhat unclear and incomplete. For example, in Rev. Proc. 2004-33, 2004-1 C.B. 989, the IRS states that it would permit late fees imposed by credit card issuers to be treated as interest if specified conditions were met. The IRS held that over-limit fees were not interest in Rev. Rul. 2007-1, 2007-1 C.B. 265, but took a contrary position in TAM 200533023 under somewhat different facts.

    In 2009 the Tax Court held in Capital One Financial Corp. v. Commissioner1 that interchange fees are a form of OID on credit card loans and not a fee for services, meaning that credit card issuers could defer recognition of the fees. The Fourth Circuit affirmed the decision in 2011. After Capital One, the IRS announced that it will no longer challenge the position that interchange fees are OID.

    The 2014 proposal would prevent credit card issuers and other financial institutions from treating credit card fees as interest that may be deferred under the OID rules.

    3. Implications. The 2014 proposal would essentially overrule Capital One and any other authority supporting the position that credit card fees are OID. The proposal would require credit card issuers and other financial institutions to include fees in income no later than the year in which the fees are included for financial statement purposes, which generally means the year the fees are assessed.

    H. FIFO Basis Calculation: Sales of Securities

    1. Proposal. The 2014 proposal attempts to simplify tax compliance and administration by requiring the cost basis of a security to be determined on a first-in, first-out basis.

    2. Discussion. Under section 1001, the gain or loss recognized on the sale or exchange of property is the difference between the amount realized on the sale and the taxpayer’s adjusted basis, as defined under section 1011. To compute the adjusted basis, a taxpayer must determine the property’s original, unadjusted basis, generally its cost, under section 1012 and make required adjustments. Determining basis is complicated when a taxpayer has acquired stock in a corporation on different dates or at different prices and sells or transfers less than all of the shares of the stock. If a taxpayer does not adequately identify a lot from which the stock is sold or transferred, a FIFO rule applies. If, however, the taxpayer makes an adequate identification of the shares sold, the shares identified are treated as sold.

    Under the 2013 proposal, the cost of any specified security sold, exchanged, or otherwise disposed of would be determined using an average basis method. The 2014 proposal would abandon this method and instead proposes that the taxpayer determine basis (and the holding period) on a FIFO basis. As in the 2013 proposal, a specified security includes any share of stock of a corporation, evidence of indebtedness, a commodity, or a contract or derivative regarding that commodity.

    3. Implications. As with the 2013 proposal, the 2014 proposal would remove the taxpayers’ ability to identify sold securities with an eye toward reducing tax liability. The 2014 proposal should be seen as an improvement on the 2013 proposal, however, because it eliminates the uncertainty regarding the computation of the taxpayer’s holding period. Holding periods are important for individual taxpayers who can benefit from reduced long-term capital gain rates on securities held longer than 12 months.

    I. Wash Sale Rules Extended to Related Parties

    1. Proposal. Like the 2013 proposal, the 2014 proposal would expand the current wash sale rules, which prevent a taxpayer from claiming a benefit by selling at a loss and quickly repurchasing the same security.

    2. Discussion. Under current section 1091(a), a taxpayer realizing a loss upon the sale or other disposition of stock or securities may not deduct the loss if the wash sale rules apply. The wash sale rules apply if, within a period beginning 30 days before the date of the sale or disposition and ending 30 days after that date, the taxpayer has acquired, or has entered into a contract or option to acquire, substantially identical stock or securities. When a loss is disallowed because of the wash sale rules, the disallowed loss is added to the cost of the new stock or securities to arrive at a new basis for the new stock or securities (except for new stock or securities purchased through an IRA). The effect of this basis increase is that the taxpayer is placed in the same position as if he had never sold the stock or securities.

    As written, section 1091(a) only applies when the taxpayer, but not a related party, reacquires (or enters into a contract or option to reacquire) substantially identical stock or securities.

    As with the 2013 proposal, the 2014 proposal would modify section 1091 by treating a sale and subsequent repurchase as a wash sale when a related party reacquires the stock or securities sold. For this purpose, a related party is (1) the taxpayer’s spouse; (2) any dependent of the taxpayer or any person for whom the taxpayer is a dependent; (3) any individual, corporation, partnership, trust, or estate that controls or is controlled by the taxpayer or individuals described in (1) or (2); or (4) any IRA, qualified tuition program, employee benefit plan, or deferred compensation plan for individuals described in (1) or (2). The proposal also provides that the Treasury secretary shall issue regulations or other guidance to prevent the avoidance of the purposes of section 1091.

    3. Implications. The 2014 proposal would curb what would frequently be a transaction to harvest losses. However, it could also function as a trap for the unwary because it could potentially result in a permanent disallowance of the loss rather than mere deferral of it. Under the proposed modification, the disallowed loss would not increase the security basis of any related party, except for that of a spouse. Moreover, it is unclear how significant the change is, given existing common law doctrine that has attempted to curb several similar situations.

    J. Derivative Transactions: Corporation’s Stock

    1. Proposal. Under the 2014 proposal, a corporation generally would not recognize income, gains, losses, or deductions for derivatives that relate to the corporation’s own stock, except for some transactions involving the corporation acquiring its own stock and entering into a forward contract regarding that stock.

    2. Discussion. Under current section 1032(a), a corporation does not recognize gain or loss on the receipt of money or other property in exchange for its own stock. Further, a corporation does not recognize gain or loss on any lapse or acquisition of an option, or regarding a securities futures contract, to buy or sell its own stock.

    The 2014 proposal would modify section 1032(a) so that section 1032 derivative items of a corporation are generally not taken into account in determining the corporation’s tax liability. Section 1032 derivative items include any item of income, gain, loss, or deduction that arises (1) out of rights or obligations under any derivative, to the extent that derivative relates to the corporation’s stock; or (2) under any other contract or position to the extent the item reflects or is determined by reference to changes in the value of the stock or distributions thereon. The term “derivative” is defined by reference to proposed new section 486 and thus includes any option, forward contract, futures contract, short position, swap, or similar position. In conjunction with proposed new section 76, the proposal would require a corporation to recognize income to the extent that a receipt of a contribution of money or property exceeds the value of the stock issued in exchange therefor and to recognize income from the receipt of any premium received for an option on its own stock. Finally, the nonrecognition rule in section 1032(a) would not apply if a corporation acquires its own stock, and the acquisition is part of a plan under which the corporation enters into a forward contract for its stock. In that case, the corporation includes the excess of the amount to be received under the forward contract over the FMV of the stock when the forward is entered into as if the excess were OID on a debt instrument. There is a rebuttable presumption that the stock acquisition forward contract is part of a plan if the forward is entered into within 60 days, beginning 30 days before the corporation acquires the stock.

    3. Implications. The 2014 proposal would provide welcome clarity regarding the scope of transactions that qualify for nonrecognition under section 1032. However, the 2014 proposal may impose additional compliance burdens on some corporate taxpayers, depending on how the exception applies to complex financial instruments.

    K. Dealers in Tax-Exempt Debt

    1. Proposal. Section 3124 of the 2014 proposal would apply to all corporations the rule requiring pro rata allocation of interest expense, which today applies only to specified financial institutions.

    2. Discussion. This would repeal the provision currently in effect for dealers in tax-exempt obligations (when the dealer is not otherwise a specified financial institution), allowing for no interest expense disallowance if the debt is not directly traceable to the tax-exempt bonds; and if the average adjusted basis of the dealer’s tax-exempt bonds is 2 percent or less of the average adjusted basis of all assets held by the dealer in the active conduct of its trade or business.

    3. Implications. This proposal is likely to dramatically affect the after-tax economics for dealers in tax-exempt bonds.

    L. Proposed Excise Tax on Large SIFIs

    1. Proposal. Section 7004 of the 2014 proposal includes a groundbreaking excise tax estimated to raise more than $86 billion in revenue over 10 years from fewer than 10 companies.

    2. Discussion. The targets of the tax are corporations designated as systemically important financial institutions (SIFIs) under the Dodd-Frank Act (DFA) with greater than $500 billion in total consolidated assets. The term “consolidated assets” is defined by reference to section 165 of the DFA. Although not free from doubt, the regulations under section 165 of the DFA appear to count only the assets underneath the intermediate holding company. For the largest foreign banking organizations operating in the United States, only the U.S. assets would count toward the consolidated assets determination. This would result in none of the non-U.S.-headquartered global systemically important banks operating in the United States being subject to the new excise tax. The 2013 proposal did not include a similar section.

    3. Implications. Based on the most recent information published by the Federal Reserve, those intended to be covered would be JP Morgan Chase, Bank of America, Citigroup, Wells Fargo, Goldman Sachs, and Morgan Stanley. The large nonbanks designated by the Financial Stability Oversight Council as SIFIs (GE Capital, AIG, and Prudential) also appear to be covered. The tax, paid quarterly, equals 0.035 percent of the SIFI’s total consolidated assets (as reported to the Federal Reserve) exceeding $500 billion. Under the proposal, the tax would begin to apply in the first quarter of 2015. This new excise tax appears to be deductible for federal income tax purposes. According to the House Ways and Means Committee explanation, the stated rationale for the proposed new tax is to charge the large SIFIs for the “implicit subsidy” allowed to those organizations under the DFA. In a recent press report, however, Camp indicated that at least part of the rationale was based on his sense that most financial institutions will be better off under the overall provisions of the plan and that the excise tax is a way to equalize the effects.

    M. Limitation on Deduction for FDIC Premiums

    1. Proposal. A percentage of assessments for FDIC insurance would be nondeductible for institutions with total consolidated assets that exceed $10 billion. The percentage of nondeductible assessments would equal the ratio of the total consolidated assets exceeding $10 billion to $40 billion. An institution with total consolidated assets exceeding $50 billion would have total disallowance of the premium amount. The provision would be effective for tax years beginning after 2014.

    2. Discussion. Under current law, the premiums paid by banks for FDIC insurance are deductible. The provision is intended to correct for the fact that when the FDIC determines the amount of assessments that are necessary to maintain an adequate balance in the Deposit Insurance Fund, it does so on a pretax basis and does not take into account the deductibility of the premium payments. The tax deductions diminish the general Treasury fund and result in an effective transfer from the U.S. treasury to the Deposit Insurance Fund.

    3. Implications. Reputedly targeted at large banks, the threshold for this provision is low enough that it may even trap some of the larger community banks. In conjunction with the proposed excise tax on large financial institutions, this provision likely will be seen as unfair by banks.

    FOOTNOTE

    1 133 T.C. 136 (2009), aff’d, 659 F.3d 316 (4th Cir. 2011).

    by Richard LarkinsAlan Munro, and Marc Levy

    Copyright 2014 EY LLP.
    All rights reserved.* * * * *




    Citi Analyst: Two Options to Save Tender Option Bonds.

    WASHINGTON — Tender option bond market participants have two options available to keep those programs viable under the Volcker Rule, though neither is without risk or likely to please everybody with an interest in TOBs.

    Vikram Rai, Citigroup vice president of fixed income research, has written a report detailing the two possibilities which could allow TOBs to exist within the limits of the recently-completed final Volcker Rule. The $70-$80 billion market has a problem because the rule did not exempt TOBs from its requirements, though the rest of the municipal market generally received an exemption. TOB programs have traditionally provided a supply of short-term tax-exempt bonds to money market funds, and have generally accounted for approximately 25%-30% of the assets of muni MMFs, according to Fitch Ratings.

    In a typical TOB program, the sponsor will deposit a fixed-rate bond or note into a trust, which will issue two new certificates — a floating rate certificate sold to a MMF and a residual certificate which may be sold to a mutual or closed-end fund or held by a bank. The floating rate certificate will have a tender option, through a liquidity facility that is typically issued by the program’s sponsor or an affiliate, that shortens the maturity of the bond or note so it becomes eligible to be purchased by a tax-exempt money market fund.

    This sponsor has normally been a banking entity or an affiliate of a bank, but the Volcker rule prevents banks and their affiliates from sponsoring a TOB program, owning a residual certificate issued by a TOB trust, or providing credit enhancement, liquidity, or remarketing services to these programs.

    Rai’s research report, published by Citi on March 27, lays out the two approaches he has found that could potentially allow the TOB structure to live on once full compliance with the Volcker Rule becomes mandatory in July 2015.

    The first approach would involve restructuring TOB programs as “joint ventures,” a type of entity exempted from Volcker. Joint ventures exist between banks or their affiliates and unaffiliated parties, and are exempt from the rule as long as they have no more than 10 unaffiliated co-venturers and only engage in activities permitted of banking entities. They also cannot be in the business of investing in securities for resale or hold themselves out as conducting such business.

    The banking entity would be the sponsor in this scenario, while a co-venturing money fund would hold the floating note and a mutual fund would hold the residual note. This would allow the TOB structure to be redefined to comply with Volcker, “in theory,” Rai wrote. This structure has the advantage of preserving the TOB structure for banks, but would not allow for the practice of splitting either the residual or the holding note into as many smaller internal funds as is sometimes the case for larger fund complexes, Rai wrote.

    “By the definition of a [joint venture] under the Volcker Rule, each of the internal funds would be categorized as a co-venturer (which is capped at 10),” the report explains.

    The report adds that there is also a risk that “regulators might view this as a re-definition of an existing structure to skirt the rules.”

    The other option would be to swap the bank sponsor out for a non-banking entity such as a mutual fund or a dealer. This option would not carry the same regulatory risk as the first alternative but would not work for banks. Rai wrote that given the importance of TOBs to both banks and muni investors, it is likely that an alternative will allow businesses to go on “as usual, even if it is with lower profit margins.”

    Fitch said in February that it expects “a gradual unwinding or restructuring of tender option bond programs over the next few months,” because banks’ ability to provide liquidity for them will soon be at an end if a solution for TOBs is not available. Like Rai, Fitch said it expects market participants to look for an answer because of the crucial liquidity short-term paper provides to the muni market.

    David Cohen, managing director and associate general counsel at the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association, said his group is continuing to explore the options its members will have under the Volcker Rule.

    “SIFMA has a working group that is working diligently through this issue and hopes to come to a successful resolution in the near future,” he said.

    BY KYLE GLAZIER

    APR 9, 2014 3:02pm ET




    State and Local Tax Burdens Are Falling -- But Not Everywhere.

    The burden state and local taxes place on taxpayers has fallen after hitting a national high of more than 10 cents on every dollar earned.

    The national average for 2011, the most recent data available, was a tax burden equal to 9.8 percent of income, according to a new report by the Tax Foundation, which looked how much people pay in taxes in relation to how much they take in.

    The report estimated the tax burden by determining the amount of all state and local taxes paid per capita (including taxes paid in other states) and dividing that by per capita income in each state. The total burden from year to year is impacted by policy changes but also just by changes in income.The nonpartisan foundation, which supports a simpler tax policy and lower rates, used U.S. Census and other federal data on income per capita and taxes paid in-state and out-of-state.

    The decrease to 9.8 percent comes after steady increases in the 2000s. The national burden peaked at 10.2 percent of income as wages fell during the 2008 recession and taxes took a bigger share of incomes. The decrease in 2011 is largely because incomes rose that year for the first time since 2008.

    New York, New Jersey and Connecticut remained the top tax burden states, with residents paying 12.6 percent, 12.3 percent and 11.9 percent of their incomes, respectively. South Dakota (7.1 percent), Alaska (7.0 percent) and Wyoming (6.9 percent) are the lowest tax burden states, with Wyoming’s tax burden dropping more than a full percentage point and leaping to 50th from 46th place last year. (Wyoming also enjoyed a boost of nearly $3,000 in per capita income.) Many of the least-burdened states don’t have certain major taxes. For example, Alaska (49th), Nevada (43rd), South Dakota (48th), Texas (47th) and Wyoming all do not tax income.

    All states except Maryland and the District of Columbia had a decreases in local and state tax burdens. Maryland’s burden increased by one-tenth of a percent to 10.6 percent of per capita income for taxes. Taxpayers in D.C. have a 9.7 percent burden – a full half of a percent more in income to local taxes than in 2010.

    Economist Anirban Basu, CEO of Sage Policy Group in Baltimore, said the data used in the study did not reflect the tightened federal spending marked by sequestration, which began in 2013. In Maryland and D.C., the local economies were relatively strong through 2011 in large measure because federal outlays at that time were still flowing rapidly.

    “As opposed to many communities looking to shed tax burdens, there may have been less appetite to do so in Maryland and D.C. because at least those areas were tied to strong economies,” Basu said. “My sense is, when we get to the 2013 data, you’ll see different trends.”

    Overall, tax burdens across the country varied by a full 5.7 percentage points from the top of the list to the bottom. But it isn’t necessarily good or bad to have a relatively high or low burden, said Brookings Institution Economic Fellow Benjamin Harris. Rather, the range illustrates the choices citizens have in their level of government and the amount of services provided.

    “In a way this is a success of our federalist system,” Harris said. “Oftentimes advocates for lower taxes make the case that fewer taxes stimulates overall economic growth and that simply hasn’t been established. There are a lot of other things at play.”




    Examiners Given Guidance on State-Chartered Credit Unions and UBIT.

    The IRS’s Tax-Exempt and Government Entities Division, in light of two court decisions, has issued a memorandum (TEGE-04-0314-0005) on how examiners should process unrelated business income tax issues of state-chartered credit unions.The memorandum is limited to UBIT issues identified during the examinations of section 501(c)(14) credit unions and does not apply to section 501(c)(1) federal credit unions, nor any other organization exempt from tax.

    Generally, to determine whether an activity of a credit union is substantially related for purposes of UBIT, each activity and all the facts and circumstances surrounding that activity must be examined to determine the activity’s relation to the organization’s exempt purpose. According to the memorandum, two district court decisions have held that activities the IRS has previously regarded as subject to UBIT should not be subject to it.

    The government has not appealed these decisions. Consequently, the memorandum provides guidance to examiners working cases involving these, and similar, activities.

    March 24, 2014
    Affected IRM: IRM 4.76.22 and 7.25.14
    Expiration Date: March 24, 2015

    MEMORANDUM FOR ALL EXEMPT ORGANIZATIONS EMPLOYEES

    FROM:
    Tamera L Ripperda
    Director, Exempt Organizations

    SUBJECT:
    Applicability of Unrelated Business Income Tax (UBIT) to State
    Chartered Credit Unions Described in IRC § 501(c)(14)(A)

    This memorandum provides direction to Exempt Organization examiners in the processing of unrelated business income tax (UBIT) issues of organizations described in section 501(c)(14)(A) of the Internal Revenue Code (IRC).This directive is not an official pronouncement of law, and cannot be used, cited, or relied on as such. In addition, nothing in this directive should be construed as affecting the operation of any other provision of the IRC, regulations, or guidance thereunder.

    Background:

    There are two types of credit unions:

    • Federal credit unions, which are administered by the National Credit Union Administration and described in IRC § 501(c)(1) as federal instrumentalities.
    • State-chartered credit unions, which are described in IRC § 501(c)(14)(A) and are “without capital stock organized and operated for mutual purposes and without profit.”

    Tax-exempt state-chartered credit unions provide savings accounts and loans to their members who may not be served by banks, without profit and for the mutual benefit of their members. Mutuality refers to the fact that a credit union’s members are both borrowers and lenders of the credit union.Under IRC § 511(a)(2)(A), the two types of credit unions are treated differently for UBIT purposes:

    • Federal credit unions described in IRC § 501(c)(1) are not subject to UBIT.
    • State-chartered credit unions described in IRC § 501(c)(14)(A) are subject to UBIT.

    Under Treas. Reg. § 1.513-1(d)(2), for the conduct of a trade or business from which gross income is derived to be substantially related to the entity’s exempt purposes, the production or distribution of the goods or the performance of the services from which the gross income is derived must contribute importantly to the accomplishment of those exempt purposes. Whether activities that produce gross income contribute importantly to the accomplishment of any purpose for which an organization is granted exemption depends in each case upon the facts and circumstances involved. To determine whether an activity of a credit union is substantially related for purposes of UBIT, each activity and all the facts and circumstances surrounding that activity must be examined to determine the activity’s relation to the organization’s exempt purpose.Two district court decisions have held that activities the IRS has previously regarded as subject to UBIT should not be subject to UBIT. See Bellco Credit Union v. United States, 735 F.Supp. 2d 1286 (2010), and Community First Credit Union v. United States, No. 08-cv-0057 (E.D. Wis. May 15, 2009), ECF No. 84.

    Both Bellco and Community First found that the sale of credit life and credit disability insurance to members was not subject to UBIT. Additionally, Bellco found that the sale of accidental death and dismemberment insurance was not subject to UBIT (excluded from UBI as royalty income). Also, Community First found that the sale of Guaranteed Auto Protection (GAP) insurance was not subject to UBIT.

    The government has not appealed these decisions. Consequently, this directive provides guidance to examiners working cases involving these, and similar, activities.

    Planning and Examination Guidance:

    Examiners examining original or amended Forms 990-T or claims for refund by State-chartered credit unions described in IRC § 501(c)(14)(A) should:

        1. Treat income from the following income-producing activities as substantially related income not subject to UBIT:

        • Sale of checks/fees from a check printing company
        • Debit card program’s interchange fees
        • Credit card program’s interchange fees
        • Interest from credit card loans
        • Sale of collateral protection insurance
        2. Treat income from the marketing of the following insurance products as well as certain ATM fees as subject to UBIT:

        • Automobile warranties
        • Dental insurance
        • Cancer insurance
        • Accidental death and dismemberment insurance
        • Life insurance
        • Health insurance
        • ATM “per-transaction” fees from nonmembers
        3. Treat income from the following products if sold to members as not subject to UBIT:

        • Credit life and credit disability insurance
        • GAP auto insurance
        If these two insurance products are sold to non-members, treat the income from these products as subject to UBIT.

    4. Unless there is a royalty arrangement (rather than payments for a credit union’s services), treat all other insurance products including accidental death and dismemberment insurance as generally subject to UBIT.

    Scope of the Directive:

    This directive is limited to UBIT issues identified during the examinations of section 501(c)(14) credit unions. This directive does not apply to section 501(c)(1) Federal credit unions, nor any other organization exempt from tax.

    Internal Revenue Manual section 4.76.22 will be updated to reflect the content of this directive, and IRM section 7.25.14 will be updated to the extent that the information contained herein impacts rulings.

    Please contact the 501(c)(14) subject matter expert in EO Technical Group 3 with any questions regarding the application of this directive, or issues relating to income on a product other than those mentioned above.

    cc:
    www.irs.gov
    Victoria A. Judson, Division Counsel/Associate Chief Counsel TE/GE
    Kirsten B. Wielobob, Chief, Appeals




    Waste Incineration is Proving to be a Hard Sell for Cities.

    New incinerators appeal to cities looking to get rid of garbage and produce renewable power. But local leaders find it tough to weigh sparse evidence on health threats against public opposition.

    http://www.futurestructure.com/news/Waste-Incineration-Plants-a-Tough-Sell-for-Cities.html

     




    Innovative Transportation Funding.

    The Federal Highway Trust Fund is being depleted faster than tax receipts can replenish it. Having concluded that they no longer can count on a stable and growing stream of federal revenue, states and local jurisdictions are taking matters into their own hands. Here’s what some laboratories of democracy are doing.http://www.futurestructure.com/States-Get-Creative-to-Fund-Transportation-Infrastructure.html



    Chicago Mayor Changes Pension Plan.

    Mayor Rahm Emanuel still wants to raise Chicago property taxes as part of a plan to shore up city pension systems, but he no longer is asking state lawmakers to do the dirty work.

    Faced with blistering criticism from Gov. Pat Quinn and significant reluctance from state lawmakers, the mayor on Monday revised his pension proposal to ensure that the politically unpalatable task of a property tax hike instead would fall solely to the Chicago City Council.

    That change makes it easier for lawmakers to vote for the city pension bill and could help Emanuel score a big political victory this spring. But approval of the measure still would do nothing to solve the most immediate financial problem at City Hall — a $600 million increase next year for the pension funds of police and firefighters who would not be covered by the legislation in Springfield.

    The flurry of movement on the city pension situation started with Quinn, who last week declined to weigh in on the mayor’s plan. On Monday, however, the re-election seeking Democratic governor, who would have to sign the bill into law, announced that he didn’t like the property tax increase.

    View Full Story from the Chicago Tribune



    Bill Would Permanently Revive the BAB Program.

    WASHINGTON — The Build America Bond program would be permanently revived with lower subsidy rates and without issuers being hurt by sequestration cuts, under a bill recently introduced in the Senate.

    The subsidy rate would be 31% for BABs issued in calendar year 2014 and lowered by 1% each successive year, remaining at 28% for BABs issued in 2017 and thereafter.

    Sen. Edward Markey, a Massachusetts Democrat and member of the Senate Environment and Public Works Committee, introduced the “Bolstering Our Nation’s Deficient Structures Act of 2014” or “BONDS Act,” on Thursday. The bill, S. 2203, has been referred to the Senate Finance Committee.

    “The BONDS Act is a win-win-win for cities, states and the entire country,” Markey said in a release. “It encourages investment in Massachusetts’ infrastructure backbone, will put workers back on the job and empowers states and cities to plan for long-term economic growth.”

    The BAB program, originally authorized as part of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act, allowed state and local governments in 2009 and 2010 to issue taxable bonds and receive subsidy payments from the federal government equal to 35% of their interest costs.

    From April 2009 through the expiration of the program at the end of 2010, more than $181 billion of BABs were issued to provide financing for new public capital infrastructure projects.

    Massachusetts issued close to $5 billion of BABs, $3 billion of which benefited a program that repairs and rebuilds structurally deficient bridges in the commonwealth, according to a summary of the bill.

    The subsidy payments for BABs have been reduced as result of congressionally mandated spending cuts known as sequestration. However, under Markey’s bill, issuers would not be hurt by sequestration cuts for any federal subsidy payments made after the date of enactment.

    The legislation also would allow qualified BABs to be current refunded.

    “In addition to protecting and safeguarding traditional tax-exempt municipal bonds, which will always be the centerpiece of local government financing, Senator Markey is offering communities an attractive and innovative financing tool to build and invest in schools, police and fire stations, roads, bridges, parks and other critical public infrastructure,” said Geoffrey Beckwith, executive director of the Massachusetts Municipal Association.

    Markey’s bill is a companion bill to legislation introduced by Rep. Richard Neal, D-Mass., last year called the Build America Bonds Act of 2013. That bill, H.R. 789, has not made it out of committee.

    In January of this year, Neal introduced another bill, H.R. 3939, that includes the same BAB provisions as his earlier bill, but would also eliminate the alternative minimum tax for private-activity bonds, exempt water and sewer facility bonds from the annual state volume caps for PABs and create an infrastructure bank.

    BY NAOMI JAGODA

    APR 7, 2014 2:39pm ET




    Md. Lawmakers Pass Bill to Block Use of Eminent Domain for 2 Years.

    State lawmakers approved a bill Monday that bars the state from using eminent domain to seize mortgages or deeds of trust for a two-year period.

    The move, sponsored by State Senator Joan Carter Conway, pre-emptively blocks municipalities from enacting a program pioneered in Richmond, Calif. designed to spur refinancing of underwater mortgages, in which a home is worth less than the original loan.

    Baltimore City Councilman Bill Henry, who is campaigning for Conway’s seat, had asked the city last year to look at the idea, which would establish a municipal authority to offer to buy underwater loans from lenders and, if refused, seize them for refinancing using the home’s current value.

    The program targets mortgages sold as private label securitizations to multiple investors, which can be particularly difficult to refinance.

    Banks and others have staunchly opposed the plan.  Under eminent domain, property must be acquired for “fair market value” which means the city could force the mortgage-owner to take a loss on the face value of the loan.

    The General Assembly also voted to reduce the amount of time homeowners are liable for mortgage debt not expunged by a short sale or foreclosure auction.

    Lenders must file within three years to collect the remaining debt – the difference between the value of the sale and the value of the original loan.

    Previously, banks had up to 12 years to file a deficiency judgment. State law places a three-year statute of limitations on most civil suits.

    Advocates had originally pushed the assembly to cut the statute of limitations from 12 years to six months. They argued that the extended timeline made it difficult for families to resolve their financial troubles in one-go, exposing them to greater uncertainty and risk.

    Maryland Consumer Rights Coalition Executive Director Marceline White, who had lobbied for the change, praised the progress.

    “The new law gives families who’ve struggled through foreclosures a better chance to rebuild their lives – without having a huge debt hanging over their heads for years and years,” she said in a statement.

    The governor must sign the bills for them to become law.

    Read more: http://www.baltimoresun.com/business/real-estate/wonk/bal-housing-measures-pass-general-assembly-20140408,0,3895961.story#ixzz2yVWhyax3

    By Natalie Sherman 1:00 p.m. EDT, April 8, 2014




    Free Neighborhood Wi-Fi? Easier Said Than Done.

    On April 2 in Washington D.C., the North of Massachusetts Avenue neighborhood — branded NoMa — launched the city’s first outdoor neighborhood-wide free Wi-Fi network. And the project was much more challenging than officials expected.

    NoMa is the fastest growing neighborhood in the city, according to the NoMa Business Industrial District (BID), and it now offers this network as part of the district’s campaign to attract talented, tech-oriented people to live and work in the area — alongside existing organizations like NPR, the General Services Administration and the U.S. Department of Justice.

    And according to NoMa BID President Robin-Eve Jasper, this launch is what their residents expected from the neighborhood — and they’ve gotten only positive feedback so far.

    “You look around and see the world as changing; people are using their devices everywhere, and they’re integrated into all aspects of our lives,” Jasper said. “We thought, ‘We want to enable people in the neighborhood to have service inside and outside,’” Jasper said. “We have a lot of very tech-savvy people, so they’re very excited this is the first neighborhood in Washington to have it.”

    The launch on April 2 was the first phase of the rollout and provides access to roughly six streets — streets considered the neighborhood’s core. The current set up can easily support up to 1,000 concurrent users, with data speeds of 200 Mbps, according to the district. Users should be able to stream high definition video throughout the neighborhood while outside, unless they are in a fast-moving vehicle or the network is particularly congested, Jasper said.

    Though the official cost of the network has not yet been tabulated, Jasper said that it was expensive, despite a lot of local support from government agencies and community members. The network was more than one year in development, with one staff member who dedicated almost all her working hours for that year on the project. The rollout was funded entirely by district member dues, as well as supported by commodity contributions from the community.

    “All the land owners donated the use of their roofs, so we’re not paying any fees for that, which ordinarily they would charge,” she said. “And DDOT [the District Department of Transportation] donated the use of all the electric and all the light poles, so we’ve got a lot of good in-kind value.”

    The network features 17 enterprise access points that distribute the signal. So far, the only glitch has been that one area of the neighborhood is not getting as much bandwidth as officials had anticipated, Jasper added, so the district is now working on solving that.

    BID contracted with New York-based Skypackets to complete the technology rollout because the city did not have experience with this kind of project, she said, and officials didn’t want to delay the rollout while they went through a learning process. The main rollout costs consisted of the equipment, pulling cable to buildings that didn’t have it, and ongoing system management, she said.

    Further upgrades to the network are now underway, including coverage for the remainder of the neighborhood. One map of the neighborhood’s outdoor Wi-Fi coverage shows that eventually, almost every street will be included in the coverage area. But, Jasper said, the timeline for the continued rollout has not yet been established because the district realized during the first phase that this type of project is difficult to predict.

    “We initially thought the whole thing would take six months, and we were way off,” she said, adding that the rollout took 11 months — and even more than a year if counting from the time the concept was conceived. “So it’s just made us more cautious about estimating, and we found in terms of building the infrastructure that there were more challenges than we thought. We had to get cable into enough points to get what we think was sufficient bandwidth. We had to get equipment on roofs of private buildings, and every building has a different perspective on license agreements or data they needed about the equipment that we were putting up.”

    Despite some hiccups, support from the community has continued after the launch. Now that the network is operational, other buildings in the neighborhood have offered to contribute their infrastructure to be used in the network, offers the district is now considering alongside its future plans for the network.

    “This is an active project, and we are closely monitoring the system’s performance,” Jasper said. “We plan to address any issues that negatively impact users and make sure that it is a quality network.”

    The neighborhood is growing very quickly, she added, and it’s crucial that if BID is going to deploy a large, expensive project like this, that it provide the type of high-quality service that its residents expect.

    By Colin Wood

    BY  | APRIL 7, 2014




    Grassley Seeks Information on Oversight of Exempt Hospitals.

    WASHINGTON — Sen. Chuck Grassley of Iowa is asking the IRS to account for the status of several important oversight measures for nonprofit hospitals enacted in 2010. Grassley co-authored the provisions imposing standards for the tax exemption of nonprofit hospitals for the first time.”These reforms were the culmination of a review of nonprofit hospitals I began in 2005 that revealed that the practices of many nonprofit hospitals were virtually indistinguishable from their for-profit counterparts,” Grassley writes in a letter to IRS Commissioner John Koskinen. “While these new provisions were intended to provide more oversight of nonprofit hospitals, it appears that not all of the requirements have been implemented.”

    To date, key legal guidance needed to ensure compliance with the law does not appear to be finalized. The law also requires the IRS and the Department of Health and Human Services to collect information on nonprofit hospitals and report to Congress every year. An annual report should have been issued to Congress for Fiscal Year 2012, but Congress never received any report. Congress has also yet to receive the report for Fiscal Year 2013.

    “As a result, Congress still does not have access to the information that was required to be reported by law,” Grassley writes. “This raises serious concerns both about the oversight of nonprofit hospitals and the government’s ability to faithfully execute laws passed by Congress.”

    Grassley’s reforms came after oversight and investigative reviews of nonprofit hospitals revealed troubling practices among some nonprofit hospitals, including providing very little charitable patient care or other community benefits; failing to publicize charitable care to patients; charging indigent, uninsured patients more than insured patients; and using very aggressive collection practices. The Government Accountability Office and others, including the former IRS commissioner, have said for a long time that there is often no discernible difference between the operations of taxable and tax-exempt hospitals. Grassley modeled the new accountability measures after principles and polices that the Catholic Health Association has had in place for years.

    The text of Grassley’s April 4 letter to the IRS commissioner is available here.

    * * * * *April 4, 2014

    The Honorable John Koskinen
    Commissioner
    Internal Revenue Service
    U.S. Department of the Treasury
    1111 Constitution Avenue, NW
    Washington, DC 20224

    Dear Commissioner Koskinen:The Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (PPACA) included several reforms to nonprofit hospitals that were intended to hold them accountable for their tax-exempt status. These reforms were the culmination of a review of nonprofit hospitals I began in 2005 that revealed that the practices of many nonprofit hospitals were virtually indistinguishable from their for-profit counterparts. While these new provisions were intended to provide more oversight of nonprofit hospitals, it appears that not all of the requirements have been implemented.

    The reforms in PPACA created new requirements for nonprofit hospitals. These include requiring hospitals to regularly complete a community needs assessment, establish and make public a financial assistance policy, and restricting certain billing and collection procedures used for those who qualify for financial assistance.1 PPACA also created requirements for the Department of the Treasury, the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), and the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) to ensure nonprofit hospitals comply with the law and provide information to Congress on the effectiveness of the provisions and whether any further legislation may be necessary.2

    In June 2012, the Treasury Inspector General for Tax Administration (TIGTA) issued a report finding that much of the legal guidance required to be written by the federal government is still incomplete. While TIGTA found that the IRS had begun implementing the PPACA provisions, it noted that “until guidance is published, the public cannot be assured that the IRS has implemented all controls to ensure compliance with [PPACA] provisions designed to protect those served by tax-exempt hospitals.”3 To date, that guidance does not appear to be finalized.

    The PPACA also required the IRS and HHS to collect information on nonprofit hospitals and report to Congress every year. An annual report should have been issued to Congress for Fiscal Year 2012, but Congress never received any report. Congress has also yet to receive the report for Fiscal Year 2013. In TIGTA’s 2012 report, it recommended that the IRS enter into a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) with HHS in order to better coordinate the collection and sharing of information for the report. The IRS agreed with TIGTA’s recommendation, but the MOU has not been finalized. As a result, Congress still does not have access to the information that was required to be reported by law. This raises serious concerns both about the oversight of nonprofit hospitals and the government’s ability to faithfully execute laws passed by Congress.

    In order to review the status of the IRS’s work on nonprofit hospitals, I ask that you please provide the following information:

    1) What is the status of the MOU between IRS and HHS?

    2) When do you expect the MOU to be finalized?

    3) Why hasn’t there been an annual report to Congress regarding nonprofit hospitals, as required by law?

    4) What is the status of the annual report? When can Congress expect to receive the Fiscal Year 2013 report?

    5) What is the current status of regulations implementing the nonprofit hospital provisions of the PPACA? Please indicate what regulations, if any, are final, proposed, or have yet to be proposed. For any regulations that are not final also indicate where they are in the review process and expected timeline for completion.

    6) The PPACA requires the IRS to conduct a review of the community benefit activities of nonprofit hospitals at least once every three years. TIGTA indicated in its June 2012 report the IRS had begun conducting these reviews. How many of the approximately 1,700 nonprofit hospitals has the IRS reviewed to date?

    7) What were the results of the IRS’s reviews of nonprofit hospitals? In responding to this question, please provide aggregate data on hospitals found to be in compliance, those found to be out of compliance, and the nature of the noncompliance.
    Thank you for your cooperation and attention in this matter. I would appreciate a response by April 18, 2014. If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact Chris Conlin of my personal office staff at 202-224-3744 or Tegan Millspaw on my Judiciary Committee staff at 202-224-5225.

                    Sincerely,
                    Charles E. Grassley
                    U.S. Senator
    FOOTNOTES

    1 P.L. 111-148, § 9007.2 Id.

    3 Treasury Inspector General for Tax Administration, “Affordable Care Act: While Much Has Been Accomplished, the Extent of Additional Controls Needed to Implement Tax-Exempt Hospital Provision is Uncertain,” June 21, 2012.

    END OF FOOTNOTES



    Obama Signs Nonprofits Pension Bill.

    President Obama on April 7 signed into law legislation that would give nonprofits the option of a permanent exemption from pension funding requirements.

    The measure, the Cooperative and Small Employer Charity Pension Flexibility Act (H.R. 4275), would apply to about 30 pension plans held by more than 127,000 active nonprofit employees, according to a summary  provided by the bill’s sponsors, Rep. Susan W. Brooks, R-Ind., and House Ways and Means Committee member Ron Kind, D-Wis. Congress exempted charity and cooperative pension plans from the Pension Protection Act of 2006, but the exemption is set to expire, the summary says. Many nonprofits are able to provide defined benefit pension plans to their employees only because they can pool their resources with other associations in a multiemployer plan structure, the bill text notes.

    The House passed H.R. 4275 March 24. The Senate followed a day later, passing the measure by a voice vote. The measure would reduce revenue by $190 million over 10 years, according to a Joint Committee on Taxation estimate (JCX-24-14).

    by Meg Shreve

     




    A New Way for Schools to Pay for Technology.

    The federal e-rate program that provides money to schools and libraries for Internet connectivity is about to undergo a major overhaul that could mean the end of subsidies for pagers and mobile phones in favor of broadband wireless infrastructure.

    Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Chairman Tom Wheeler announced the change in March during a speech he delivered at a Council of Chief State School Officers conference. The e-rate program provides discounts of up to 90 percent to help eligible schools and libraries obtain telecommunications and information services.

    But in the years since the e-rate program was launched in 1996 as part of the Telecommunications Act, “Technology has changed; the needs of schools have changed; [and] the e-rate program must reflect this change,” Wheeler said. He recalled an incident in Michigan when elementary school students were midway through a 45-minute online math test when the system crashed as a result of inadequate bandwidth. The students had to retake the entire exam.

    The telecommunications portion of the program, which includes everything from pagers and mobile phones to 800 numbers and email, is out of date in a world where communications is increasingly Internet-based, mobile and expected to be fast — whether it involves a phone call, text or video clip.

    The e-rate program receives about $2.25 billion annually from the Universal Service Fund, an $8.5 billion program that uses a tax on various phone services to expand telecommunications in rural and high-cost areas of the country. The FCC created the fund during the 1930s to meet universal service goals of accessible phone service for rural areas and for low-income families. In less than 20 years, high-speed, mobile technology has passed by many of the original services subsidized by the fund.

    The FCC wants to overhaul funding to focus on broadband connectivity, especially wireless service inside schools. “Wi-Fi has transformed computing and education, creating the possibility of one-to-one learning in classrooms and libraries, and freeing desks from wired connections,” the FCC explained in a report issued in March. More than half the public schools in the country, though, don’t believe their existing wireless networks have the capacity to handle new, technology-based custom teaching.

    The wireless upgrade is part of a broad set of modernization goals set by the FCC that include: 1) giving schools and libraries affordable access to high-speed broadband to support digital learning; 2) maximizing the cost-effectiveness of e-rate funds; and 3) streamlining administration of the program.

    Wheeler said the e-rate program spends about $600 million on outdated services.  He acknowledged that moving some of the money away from programs that are no longer central to the needs of schools and libraries will antagonize certain groups in the education community, such as the producers and users of narrowband pagers, PBX switchboards and 800 number services. Dropping subsidies for outdated  technology is one part of a broader focus on funding that the agency believes can free up an additional $2 billion over the next two years to help support broadband networks. The FCC also wants the distribution formula for wireless services to be more equitable. Currently, 80 percent of funding for wireless technology goes to urban school districts. Schools in rural communities have not benefited as well from the program as it’s currently structured, according to Wheeler.

    What the FCC does not want to do (yet) is request more funds for the e-rate program. The FCC has said it will search for savings in the program before considering expansion. That may be prudent, given that Congress, especially the Republican-led House, has been cool to the idea of tacking on any more fees to cellphone subscriber phone bills. But advocates for increasing the funding point out that demand for e-rate funding has continuously exceeded the program’s cap of $2.25 billion.

    Last year, President Barack Obama got the ball rolling on the new e-rate program when he proposed expanding the amount of funding by up to $6 billion by increasing the monthly universal service fees to cellphone users. The proposal was part of the president’s ConnectED initiative, which is aimed at connecting 99 percent of public school students to broadband speeds of at least 100 megabits per second, with a target of 1 gigabit per second within five years.

    However, former Republican Congressman Tom Tauke told the Technology Policy Institute forum last year that proposing to tack on more fees on phone bills was likely to antagonize Republicans who want to limit government spending. Fred Upton, the Republican chairman of the House Energy and Commerce Committee, in speaking out against the president’s proposal, told The Washington Post, “Most consumers would balk at higher costs, higher phone bills.”

    Republicans might not want to raise fees to boost the e-rate program, but the plan to change funding has received widespread support from the major organizations that represent the education and library communities. The American Library Association (ALA) called for swift action on e-rate reforms, including an increase in funding. The ALA pointed out that the average public library has about the same connectivity as the average home. “High-capacity broadband drives innovation and underpins modern library services in public and school libraries,” said ALA President Barbara Stripling.

    The National Association of Elementary School Principals (NAESP) and the National Association of Secondary School Principals both pledged their support for modernization. While they support FCC Wheeler’s call to modernize the program, more funding is crucial, according to Gail Connelly, executive director of NAESP. “We hope the [FCC] chairman and commission members make a serious attempt to not only improve inefficiencies, but increase e-rate funding to meet current school and library needs, which is an estimated $5 billion,” she said.

    The U.S. Conference of Mayors has also weighed in on the issue, sending a letter to the FCC that called for swift action. Citing the fact that the other advanced countries have much better technology infrastructure in their schools, the mayors called broadband as important as chalkboards and textbooks.

    Can the FCC modernize the e-rate program without asking Congress for more money? The commission believes it can, though Chairman Wheeler has indicated he won’t hesitate to ask if more money is needed. Given the fierce drive to hold down the cost of government in Congress, it may be a while before more funds flow to schools and libraries to pay for technology.




    SIFMA Releases Model MA Documents.

    WASHINGTON — The Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association has released model documents designed to help its members comply with the municipal advisor registration rule, which takes effect on July 1.

    The seven draft documents, unveiled Friday, cover various types of communications between broker-dealers and issuers and aim to help prospective underwriters of muni bonds avoid having to register under the Securities and Exchange Commission rule.

    The rule, approved in September, requires a firm to register as an MA if it provides advice to state or local governments or conduit borrowers. The SEC has said firms will not be able to underwrite the bonds of issuers for whom they have become municipal advisors, so broker-dealer firms are going to need to use one of three exemptions from the rule created by the SEC.

    “Our firms want to know that if they are looking to take advantage of those exemptions and exclusions, that they have the language right,” said Leslie Norwood, managing director, associate general counsel, and co-head of municipal securities at SIFMA. “We just tried to get a base level of the documents we thought were most important.”

    The model documents include: an issuer’s certification that an investment account does not include the proceeds of municipal securities, underwriter engagement letters for both generic firms and remarketing agents; a form advising issuers that they can receive advice from an underwriter by soliciting it through a legitimate a request for proposals, and an underwriter’s letter advising an issuer that its information is of a purely informational nature and not is intended as “advice.” to the issuer. All of these documents aim to allow the flow of information between prospective underwriters and issuers, which some had worried would be severely limited by the MA rule.

    Two documents deal with the independent registered municipal advisor exemption, commonly called the “IRMA” exemption. That provision of the SEC’s regulatory regime allows an issuer to receive advice from underwriters and other market participants as long as they retain and certify that they will rely on the advice of the IRMA. The IRMA exemption is expected to be among the most broadly used of those available, since many larger and more frequent issuers have municipal advisors.

    The first such model document takes the form of an issuer certification that it has an IRMA. If this is posted to the issuer’s publicly-accessible website, SIFMA suggests it include language showing the issuer “intends that market participants receive and use it for purposes of the independent registered municipal advisor exemption to the SEC municipal advisor rule.”

    The second document is a confirmation letter from an underwriter firm to the issuer stating that the exemption applies and the firm assumes no advisory responsibilities.

    “Thank you for your representation concerning your independent registered municipal advisor,” that model document reads. “By obtaining such representation from you, [the firm] is not a municipal advisor and is not subject to the fiduciary duty established in Section 15B(c)(1) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.”

    SIFMA also released a collection of talking points for investment bankers speaking to issuers. That document includes an explanation and description of the exemptions available that will allow underwriters to provide advice to issuers, as well as some answers to common questions. Some issuer officials questioned whether they might be able to “opt out” of the registration regime, which is required by the Dodd Frank Act. SEC officials have been quick to dispel that notion in public appearances, and the SIFMA talking points do so as well.

    “There is no way for issuers to simply ‘opt out’ of the rules outside the narrowly tailored exemptions,” one talking point states.

    Norwood said additional documents may become available going forward, but emphasized that the newly-released documents are not final and are meant to generate feedback and provide a starting point for firms who will soon rely on similar documents to conduct their businesses within the limits of the rule.

    “We encourage firms to modify these documents to suit their needs,” Norwood said. She added that comment is welcome not only from SIFMA members and other broker-dealers, but from all market participants.

    “We’re looking for comment from all industry members,” she said.

    The SEC has said it is going to release additional technical guidance on its registration rule before the effective date. The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board is also in the process of creating rules governing MAs. The self-regulator has already proposed rules governing MA conduct as well as professional qualification and supervisory requirements.

    SIFMA is soliciting industry comment on these draft documents.  Please forward any comments, questions or concerns to Leslie Norwood at lnorwood@sifma.org.

    BY KYLE GLAZIER

    APR 4, 2014 3:37pm ET




    States Looking to Sell Some Roads to Cities and Towns.

    For years, the leaders of Beaufort, S.C., have promoted the charms and convenience of their coastal city, which has a historic downtown and cozy neighborhoods. Many of Beaufort’s 13,000 residents can walk or ride their bikes to work or to stores.

    To improve safety and boost pedestrian traffic, city officials would like Beaufort’s street grid, parts of which are more than 300 years old, to include narrow lanes and on-street parking, which would encourage drivers to slow down. But Beaufort cannot make changes to many of its own streets because the state, which prefers wider roads and faster speeds, owns virtually all of the roads in town.

    That may change soon, as South Carolina legislators try to save money by unloading part of the state’s vast road network onto localities like Beaufort.

    Road Network Ownership
    The percentage of state road networks owned by state governments varies widely. 

    States With Biggest Share of Road Network

     

     

    1. West Virginia* (89 percent)
    2. Delaware (84 percent)
    3. Virginia (78 percent)
    4. North Carolina (75 percent)
    5. South Carolina (63 percent)

     

    * The District of Columbia owns 92 percent of its roads

     

    States With Smallest Share of Road Network

     

     

    1. New Jersey (6 percent)
    2. Kansas (7 percent)
    3. Iowa (8 percent)
    4. Michigan (8 percent)
    5. Massachusetts (8 percent)
    Source: Federal Highway Administration, 2012.

    In recent years, North Carolina, Texas, West Virginia and other states that own large road networks (see sidebar) have tried similar tactics. The cost of maintaining roads varies widely by the type of road and the location, but it can add up quickly. For example, the Texas Department of Transportation in 2009 spent $1 billion on road maintenance in 2009, the most recent year for which numbers are available.

    State transportation departments once used their roads to wield power over politics and planning. South Carolina, for example, originally stepped in to build roads between county seats, connect to roads in neighboring states and funnel travelers to main routes. State legislators, who controlled the roads in their home counties, kept adding to the state’s network.

    “The road system as it currently exists still reflects the organizational and political realities of the 1930s and 1940s rather than the 21st century,” said Pete Poore, a spokesman for the South Carolina Department of Transportation.

    Now the roads are costly relics. But states have had limited success in giving them away, because cities such as Beaufort don’t want to pay for them either.

    “Our council feels there should be some quid pro quo. If we take the roads, we should be able to do what we want with them in a reasonable and responsible manner,” said Scott Dadson, Beaufort’s city manager. “Secondly, we should have funds that come with it.”

    Waning Appetite

    Nationally, state governments own about 19 percent of the roads within their borders. But West Virginia, Delaware, Virginia, North Carolina and South Carolina all own more than 60 percent, according to the Federal Highway Administration. The state with the next-highest share is Maine, at 37 percent.

    Each state amassed its huge network in a different way. But generally, state officials took over county roads and other farm-to-market routes because localities did not build enough of them or failed to maintain them adequately.

    Decades later, states that gobbled up local roads no longer have the appetite to keep them. In growing areas, highways that once linked distant towns are now major local arteries. In some cases, states own odd stretches of local roads because of political reasons that were forgotten long ago.

    States increasingly see their shorter, less-traveled roads as a drain on resources at a time when resources are increasingly scarce.

    Inflation and fuel efficiency are sapping revenues from state and federal gas taxes. The federal government, which provides a third of the money that states spend on transportation, expects to run short of road money as early as July. This year’s brutal winter, which added expenses for snow plowing and pothole repair, further strained state transportation budgets.

    Another key question in handing over roads is who keeps the federal money designated for their maintenance, said Leslie Wollack from the National League of Cities. The current federal transportation law channels more money through states, which then decide how much to turn over to their cities.

    “That creates a very large problem for the local governments, because they’re not getting the money. They may not have chosen to build these roads in the first place, yet they are suddenly being given the responsibility to spend a lot of money,” Wollack said.

    Promoting Local Control

    Some states are trying to convince cities to take on the added financial burden of maintaining the roads by touting the benefits of local control.

    That is the case in Texas, which owns 80,000 miles of road, more than any other state (although North Carolina is a close second). The Texas Department of Transportation launched a “turnback” program last summer to encourage medium-size and large cities to take back lesser-used roads.

    Mark Cross, an agency spokesman, said cities could better protect property values and respond to residents’ concerns if they took over the state streets. With a transfer, he said, “a local government would have total control of traffic flow, parking, driveway access, speed limits, road closures and maintenance schedules.”

    The 59 localities eligible for the program would not get any money to keep up their new roads, but the state would redirect the funds it saved to other road projects in the same city on an ongoing basis. The state now spends $165 million a year maintaining the eligible roads, but it said it would not spend more than $100 million on the new program.

    So far, only San Antonio and Lubbock have applied for the program, although other cities are in talks with TxDOT, Cross said.

    Growing Pains

    West Virginia state Sen. Bob Beach, a Democrat, is working on legislation to enable counties to raise money for transportation that the state would match. (There are no county roads in West Virginia; all of the famed country roads are owned by the state.)

    Business leaders in the Morgantown area, where Beach is from, developed the plan to cope with a population surge and increased traffic congestion in the area, the senator said. Monongalia County, which includes West Virginia University, saw a 20 percent jump in residents during the last decade, bringing the total to just more than 100,000 people.

    Legislators from the state’s northern panhandle, which is fast becoming a suburb of Washington, D.C., also are interested in the arrangement, Beach said.

    Local leaders told Beach they thought they could generate $50 million to $80 million with new taxing authority, which they want the state to match dollar for dollar. One of the projects they are considering is a $100 million bridge to ease traffic traveling from Morgantown’s hospitals and athletic facilities to the nearby interstate.

    But legislators do not want to take up new taxing authority in an election year, so lawmakers will study the idea this summer and consider making the changes next year, Beach said.

    In South Carolina, previous attempts to offload state roads onto cities fell flat, so lawmakers are considering adding some money to the mix.

    “While we’re willing to discuss taking over roads, we have to have a dependable revenue source for it,” said Scott Slatton, a legislative and public policy advocate for the Municipal Association of South Carolina.

    The state House of Representatives approved offering financial incentives for cities to take over state roads. The proposal would dedicate a quarter of state road funds for an area to help cities maintain state roads that they take over. If the state did not provide adequate funding, the road would revert back to state ownership.

    Even with the prospect of dedicated money, some cities are balking at the deal, Slatton said.

    The Other Foot

    Counties and municipalities in New Jersey have the opposite problem: They own virtually all the roads within the state’s borders. When repair costs mount, they often turn to the state and federal government for more money.

    Bill Dressel, the executive director of the New Jersey League of Municipalities, said he asked state and federal officials to find money to deal with the costs of this winter’s storms, with little luck.

    The amount of snow wasn’t enough to merit a federal disaster declaration, he was told, and the state did not have money for relief.

    Dressel met with Assembly Speaker Vincent Prieto, a Democrat, around St. Patrick’s Day to plead his case. But the speaker told Dressel in a light-hearted way that there was no extra money in New Jersey for any needs, a Prieto spokesman said.

    “Bill,” Dressel remembers the speaker saying, “you’re going to have to find the leprechaun’s pot of gold, because you’re not going to find it under the gold dome on West State Street.”

    By Daniel C. Vock

    BY  | APRIL 10, 2014




    Moody's: Public Pension Plans Lag Corporate Plans in Managing Credit Risk.

    Credit risks related to pension liabilities will be a bigger problem for governments than for corporations for at least another decade, according to a new report from Moody’s Investors Service.

     The report is Moody’s first look at the divergent pension risks of the public and private sectors, said Alfred Medioli, vice president and senior credit officer for public finance. “It’s very illustrative to see how different disclosure regulation and exposure can be,” he said in an interview.

    While corporations have federal agencies, accounting rules and shareholders monitoring how well they fund their pension plans and manage the related credit risk, state and local governments do not. “It becomes an issue of governance,” said Mr. Medioli, who added that more arcane accounting practices for government pension sponsors don’t help control underfunding. “The problem began to build and nobody was able to grab a hold of it. That’s why we began this study.”

    The report notes the 50 largest corporations have a median pension liability as a percentage of total debt (including pensions) of 24%, while the government median is 73% for states and 49% for large local governments. The state data are for fiscal year 2012 and the local government number is based on fiscal 2011 data.

    The report also notes strategies used by the private sector to manage pension risk, including switching to defined contribution plans from defined benefit and the use of liability-driven investment strategies. “The question is, will (governments) have to follow the corporate route to derisk, or will they come up with something different? We think that they will find a solution to this,” said Mr. Medioli.

    The two sectors also differ on the degree of taxpayer backstops in place. While corporate sponsors are likely to place less strain on government pension guarantees as their risk of needing help from the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corp. diminishes as they derisk, state and local governments are facing a growing need for taxpayer funding, Moody’s found.

    Hank Kim, executive director and counsel of the National Conference on Public Employee Retirement Systems, Washington, cautioned that mimicking the corporate switch to defined contribution plans is not the answer for government workers. “Thirty years down the road, we’re going to be a nation of seniors subsisting on social safety net programs paid for by middle-class taxpayers. In the larger scheme, (the switch to DC is) just deferring costs onto taxpayers,” Mr. Kim said.

    BY  |  | UPDATED 

    — Contact Hazel Bradford at hbradford@pionline.com | @Bradford_PI




    City Should Have Turned to TIFs Instead of Property Tax Hikes: Study.

    What the City of Chicago spent in each of the last several years on tax-increment financing funding exceeded what it owed in pension costs, so any proposal to raise property taxes to fund pensions should consider TIFs, wrote the authors of a study to be released Friday titled, “Putting Municipal Pension Costs in Context: Chicago.”

    For 2012 alone, the city owed $385.8 million to its pension funds while putting $457 million in property taxes into its TIFs, wrote Thomas Cafcas and Greg LeRoy, of Good Jobs First, a Washington, D.C.-based think tank that examines public subsidies. TIF revenue more than tripled since 2000, when it was about $129 million, they said, and once the money comes out of the city’s general fund, its uses are curtailed by law.

    Meanwhile, in a pension deal that must be approved in Springfield, Mayor Rahm Emanuel has proposed raising property taxes and pension reform for retired laborers and certain other city workers, including school clerks and classroom aides.

    “What we’re saying in the report is that any fair budgeting discussion that happens around the pensions certainly should include the enormous amount of revenues that are being diverted by TIFs,” Cafcas said. “A picture of the sky falling everywhere in Chicago is being painted. We think all of the city’s budget should be considered here.”

    Inside a TIF district, a portion of property tax revenue ordinarily destined for local governments is siphoned into a special fund to subsidize public or private projects at City Hall’s discretion. The district is supposed to meet legal standards for being “blighted,” but that definition has been stretched to include downtown Chicago and popular neighborhoods near it.

    The city earmarked $55 million for a proposed DePaul basketball arena/McCormick Place event center, which resulted in public uproar. It since has moved the money to a 1,200-room hotel project next to the arena site. But millions in TIF funds are paying for the resurfacing of parts of Lake Shore Drive and improvements to streetlights on the West Side.

    Of the $3.38 billion the city spent in TIF money between 2003 and 2012, $1.27 billion paid for private development projects, but $1.13 billion went toward debt service on past projects and $1.22 billion paid for public improvements, according to the mayor’s 2013 financial analysis.

    “We cannot stop the bleeding of the City’s pension crisis through the use of TIFs or TIF surplus, which would only serve as one-time revenue,” Kelley Quinn, a spokeswoman for the city budget office, said in an emailed statement. “The City’s pension crisis has been building for decades — much longer than the existence of TIFs, which are used for brick and mortar capital projects that improve our parks, schools, roads, and businesses — all of which enhance Chicago’s neighborhoods.”

    The Chicago Teachers Union has 10,000 active and retired members that would be affected by the mayor’s municipal pension proposal and has yet to reach a deal on teacher pensions. It has been calling for creative sources of revenue to solve pension and other budgetary problems.

    CTU staff coordinator Jackson Potter called the study’s findings “profound,” saying “it shows this was a manufactured crisis.”

    TIFs were intended to help truly poor neighborhoods that needed investments, he said, and the CTU members who are part of the city’s deal had low-paying jobs to begin with as lunch helpers, janitors and classroom aides.

    “The neighborhoods that receive the most TIF money need it the least,” Potter said. “The irony is the very people who live in those communities who were supposed to benefit from TIF dollars are the ones that are getting their pensions cut.”

     Study: “Putting Municipal Pension Costs in Context: Chicago”

    BY LAUREN FITZPATRICK Education Reporter April 3, 2014 8:34PM

    Email: lfitzpatrick@suntimes.com

    Twitter: @bylaurenfitz




    Local Governments’ Role in Energy Project Financing.

    Driven by a need to foster economic development, create jobs, and address environmental concerns, cities are increasingly recognizing the need to encourage investment in building performance with creative financing mechanisms. Making the largest impact possible with limited funds can be challenging. However, cities now have an abundance of governmental and private sector tools available to finance these investments.

    In every city, there are market leaders—institutions or property owners able to access conventional finance or “self-fund” to meet efficiency goals—as well as various other property owners with a more pressing need for financial assistance. This guide by IMT and MIT CoLab aims to help cities weigh various energy efficiency finance strategies and choose policies best tailored to the individual needs of each local market.

    Financing tools discussed include:

    Author: John Miller, Brendan McEwen

    DOWNLOAD PDF

     




    The Harris School of Public Policy/Governing Institute/Office of the CFO of the City of Chicago | The Semi-Annual Municipal CFO Forum: Regulations, Ratings, and Investments.

    The Spring 2014 Municipal CFO Forum




    Detroit’s Orr Explains Bondholders’ 74% Recovery: Five Questions.

    Detroit agreed this week to pay some bondholders about 74 percent of the $388 million they’re owed, up from proposals of as little as 15 percent, as part of an effort to resolve the city’s record $18 billion bankruptcy.

    The deal, negotiated with three bond insurers, covers only unlimited-tax general-obligation debt. Detroit’s initial treatment of the securities threatened a $900 billion segment of the $3.7 trillion muni market that investors previously thought was among the most secure.

    The following is condensed from an interview on April 9 with Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr at Bloomberg’s New York headquarters:

    Q: Why do unlimited-tax general-obligation bondholders now get 74 percent instead of the 15 percent offered weeks ago?

    A: The reason why they were at 15 percent in the plan was because we were treating them as general unsecured creditors. As you might imagine, we were already in discussions with them about their interests and how they would be treated.

    Their revenue stream is UTGO. That’s a dedicated revenue stream, a millage that was created solely for them, and there’s an argument to be made by some that if we aren’t paying on their bonds, we can’t collect the millage.

    It’s not so much that their percentage has changed from 15 to 74, it’s that they’ve agreed to give us the equivalent of 26 percent of what they’re owed from a dedicated revenue stream. That’s the equivalent of $100 million.

    Q: That language is much different than last year. What made you change your view of the bonds’ security?

    A: There are pros and cons to whether or not the UTGO bond millage can be used by the city if we’re not paying the UTGO bondholders. There’s an argument that because that millage is a special dedicated revenue, despite us treating them as unsecured all this time, if you’re not paying the bondholders, you don’t get to collect the revenue. So it could all go away.

    Instead, the parties sat down and negotiated. It’s better for us to reach an agreement as far as what they’re willing to give the city as a percentage of their revenue in a negotiated solution that allows us to continue collecting the millage. We’re paying them a portion, but the city also benefits.

    Q: This is just one deal with one group. How close are you to reaching agreements with other creditors?

    A: We’d like to get everything we can get, including settlements with some of the other actives and retirees, in by this week or early next week.

    In the normal course, our deadlines are aggressive, but given that nothing’s going to change, this is more than enough time to get done what needs to get done. I hope today’s announcement incentivizes everybody to realize we’re working very hard to get some deals in. We hope to have additional announcements in the weeks, perhaps days, to come.

    Q: Standard & Poor’s downgraded bonds from the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department to CCC from BB-, citing a distressed exchange that would equate to a default. Has your plan for them changed?

    A: Our plan continues to treat them as secured, as they are. They have a specific security interest.

    We understand the ratings because any time we do something beyond the status quo of the existing instrument, it may constitute a technical default — if you try to change the terms, if you ask for a change in terms of the coupon rate.

    In a bankruptcy, the principal amount is 100 percent return. We’re not dealing with the principal now. We can ask, but they may say no.

    Q: How would you characterize your relationship with your neighboring communities?

    A: Historically, the level of cooperation, everybody has recognized could be worked on. I was hopeful in this process, perhaps we could achieve that. Some of the counties balked at the DWSD deal for a number of reasons, which I find unfortunate.

    I’m more than happy to continue talks. There are communications going back and forth. I still think for DWSD, an authority is the best choice, but we’re running out of time.

    By Brian Chappatta  Apr 10, 2014 9:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Brian Chappatta in New York atbchappatta1@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netAlan Goldstein




    Atlanta Stadium for Falcons Prompts Bond Fight.

    Home Depot Inc. co-founder Arthur Blank, having bought the Atlanta Falcons, is getting help from the city to build a $1.2 billion football stadium to replace a venue that a skeptic noted is barely older than Miley Cyrus.

    The billionaire said his ambition to bring another Super Bowl to town rides on replacing the Georgia Dome, which opened in 1992, with funds including $200 million in taxpayer money. Neighborhood critics say a city-adopted plan unfairly burdens residents of two predominantly black neighborhoods. Vine City and English Avenue are areas steeped in the city’s civil rights history, and where the Reverend Martin Luther King Jr. brought his family to live in 1967.

    The project calls for demolishing the city’s first black Baptist church, and turning the street named after King into a dead-end for stadium VIP parking.

    A group of community leaders, including three activists and a retired Baptist minister, won a court ruling in February allowing them to intervene in the city’s bond process. Yesterday, in state court in Atlanta, they argued against the city’s financing plan.

    Superior Court Judge Ural Glanville limited the arguments to the bonds and barred testimony about the stadium’s potential impact on the neighborhoods. He didn’t issue an immediate ruling.

    “It’s not that these are not important issues,” Glanville said at the start of a six-hour hearing. “It’s just that what I can consider in a bond validation hearing is limited.”

    Economically Obsolete

    Georgia law requires court approval before government general-obligation revenue bonds can be issued. The judge will weigh whether the bonds, backed by hotel taxes, are valid.

    “It’s not too hard to be skeptical about this, when you have a stadium only two months older than Miley Cyrus being declared economically obsolete,” said Victor Matheson, a professor and sports economist with the College of the Holy Cross, in Worcester,Massachusetts, referring to the 21-year-old singer. “This is the youngest stadium to be abandoned that I can think of in recent memory.”

    The group taking the city to court says that under the right circumstances, it doesn’t oppose a new home for the National Football League team. It says pledges made before the Georgia Dome opened weren’t kept.

    “We were promised back then that we would be made whole, and not a dime was available for poor folk,” William Cottrell, ex-pastor of the 125-year-old Beulah Baptist Church in Vine City, said of the city’s vow to invest millions of dollars into the neighborhood when the Georgia Dome was being built about 22 years ago. “We’re not going to let them do that this time without some problem.”

    Hotel Tax

    The residents’ legal argument hinges on the claim that extending the city’s hotel tax to repay the bonds unconstitutionally turns a general law, applicable statewide, into one governing a single project. The city says in court filings that the bonds are authorized by state law and the plan’s use of 39 percent of the hotel tax is appropriate.

    A neighborhood-impact study requested by the objectors is unnecessary, the city’s lawyers said March 27 in court papers.

    No Witnesses

    Attorneys for the city called no witnesses during yesterday’s hearing, telling Glanville that he could decide the case on the evidence presented in court filings. Glanville refused to allow lawyers for the residents to call witnesses from the community.

    “We were disappointed our witnesses were not allowed to show the human side of this,” Thelma Wyatt Moore, a retired state court judge who represents the challengers, said after the hearing.

    Glanville’s decision to exclude impact testimony could be grounds for appeal if he validates the bonds, Moore said.

    Douglass Selby, an attorney for the city, countered that the neighborhood activists had other avenues to challenge the stadium’s impact, including administrative appeals.

    “The law is very clear on what the bond validation process is for,” Selby said.

    The new stadium is expected to create more than 1,400 jobs and bring in $155 million in annual revenue, according to the city.

    Blank’s pursuit of a new stadium has been at least eight years in the making. He proposed a revised financial arrangement with the state’s stadium operator in 2006, citing the need to compete with other teams.

    Remodeling Job

    The ex-Home Depot chairman told the New York Times in 2012 that the Dome, then 20 years old and the site of Super Bowls in 1994 and 2000, wasn’t right for a remodeling job.

    Blank, like some other team owners seeking public funding, suggested he would go elsewhere, as did the Atlanta Braves baseball team, which is leaving for the city’s northern suburbs.

    In January 2013, in discussions with the City Council, Blank said he had been courted by Los Angeles business leaders about moving there, the Atlanta Business Chronicle reported.

    Less than two months later, Atlanta approved a financing deal to replace the Georgia Dome about two miles west of downtown.

    Blank’s wealth is an estimated $1.8 billion, according to Forbes magazine’s list of the richest Americans. He bought the Falcons in February 2002 for $545 million and owns the Georgia Force, an Arena Football League team.

    Big Events

    He has said the city needs a new stadium to attract a Major League Soccer team as well as big events, including the National Football League’s Super Bowl and soccer’s World Cup.

    The stadium bonds would be issued by the Atlanta Development Authority and repaid through the hotel tax. The City Council also agreed to dedicate hotel tax revenue beyond the bond payments to operating the new publicly owned stadium.

    That might generate an additional $900 million over 30 years, the neighborhood challengers said in court documents citing the bond filing. Although the stadium will be state-owned through the Georgia World Congress Center Authority, the Falcons will operate it and keep stadium revenue under a licensing agreement that requires the team to pay an annual rent of $2.5 million.

    “We have full confidence that our partners at the city, Invest Atlanta and the GWCCA will appropriately handle these challenges,” Kim Shreckengost, a spokeswoman for AMB Group LLC, the Falcons’ parent company, said in an e-mail, referring to the Georgia World Congress Center Authority.

    $15 Million

    The Arthur M. Blank Family Foundation has committed to investing $15 million to improve the quality of life in neighborhoods around the stadium in addition to $15 million from the city, she said.

    “We also hope to leverage additional public and private funds in our efforts,” she said.

    City Council President Ceasar Mitchell said he supports re-examining the financing after community groups called for reversing of votes of approval. He said he’ll support “any necessary” changes in the agreement.

    U.S. cities are on the hook for at least $10 billion of sports stadium bonds, with at least one-fourth for the NFL, according to data compiled by Bloomberg.

    The numbers are forcing Atlanta and other cities, including Tampa, Florida, and Oakland, California, to weigh the cost of subsidies and community opposition against the political and economic win of retaining professional sports teams that explicitly or implicitly threaten to leave town.

    Fearing Loss

    “When the fear is really losing the team altogether, people tend to buckle,” Matheson said.

    The stadium-plan opponents think they can reverse the city’s decision or delay the project indefinitely, forcing renegotiations, said John Woodham, an attorney who represents the neighbors with Moore. They will appeal if they lose Glanville’s ruling, he said.

    The stadium is to be built next to the Georgia Dome and completed in 2017.

    The plans for Martin Luther King Drive essentially isolates English Avenue and Vine City from the rest of downtown, Moore said.

    “This project in its concept and configuration is shoving out the community and turning its back on the community,” she said. “The community should share in the bounties that are being conferred on the Falcons. We have no opposition to a stadium under the right circumstances.”

    Vine City

    Settled in the 19th century by large landowners, the neighborhoods on the western edge of downtown Atlanta began with segregated subdivisions, schools and churches.

    Herman Cain, who sought the Republican nomination for president in 2012, went to school on English Avenue, according to the Vine City Health and Housing Ministry. The civil rights leader Julian Bond, the first president of the Southern Poverty Law Center, who also served seven years in the Georgia Legislature, also lived in the neighborhood.

    Bond’s son, Michael Julian Bond, an Atlanta City Council member, voted for the stadium plan.

    “We didn’t have any leverage to force them to agree to anything,” Bond said in a phone interview, referring to the team. “We can ill afford to lose the team.”

    The city did nothing wrong in its financing deal, Bond said.

    Groundbreaking on the new stadium is to take place in May, said Jennifer LeMaster, a spokeswoman for the World Congress Center Authority.

    Retractable Roof

    The eight-sided stadium will have 71,000 seats, about the same as the Georgia Dome, with a transparent retractable roof and upper concourse windows that can be opened to create the feel of an outdoor facility, according to plans unveiled in October.

    The center is overseeing construction of the stadium and is establishing new personal seat licenses to be marketed by the Falcons with the revenue contributed to the public-financing portion of the stadium costs, according to bond documents.

    The legal challenge won’t affect construction plans, LeMaster said. “The project is on schedule and substantive construction work is already under way,” she said.

    More than two decades after the Georgia Dome’s birth, the neighborhoods still need low-income housing, a parish nurse and a community school, said Cottrell, the ex-Vine City pastor. Jobs for local residents at the stadium would be a bonus, he said.

    Braves’ Move

    Atlanta approved the football stadium plan without extending similar support to Major League Baseball’s Braves, whose Turner Field was built for the 1996 Summer Olympics.

    The Braves in November announced plans to build a $672 million stadium in suburban Cobb County. The 42,000-seat venue will be paid for in part with $450 million in public funds, Reed said in November. The city was unwilling to use public money for a new stadium and wished the Braves well in their future home, the mayor said.

    The city couldn’t afford to finance two deals at the same time, Carlos Campos, a spokesman for the mayor, said in an e-mail.

    “It has nothing to do with choosing one team over the other, ” Campos said. “Cobb County offered the Braves more than we were willing to provide.”

    The case is Georgia v. Atlanta Development Authority, 2014-cv-242035, Superior Court, Fulton County (Atlanta).

    By Sophia Pearson and David Beasley  Apr 10, 2014 9:01 PM PT

     




    Pensions and Bureaucracies Strangle L.A., Panel Says.

    Los Angeles’s future is threatened by a sixfold increase in public pension costs and dueling bureaucracies that hinder its ports and tourism, according to a panel led by former U.S. Commerce Secretary Mickey Cantor.

    The second-largest U.S. city could be more competitive if the nation’s busiest seaport complex, the ports of Los Angeles and Long Beach, were to merge and regional tourism agencies were combined to speak with one voice, according to the report by the L.A. 2020 Commission.

    The recommendations came the week after economists at the University of California, Los Angeles reported that Los Angeles lost 3.1 percent of payroll jobs since 1990, the biggest drop of any U.S. metropolitan area. The panel’s proposals are intended to reverse the trend, Cantor said in a telephone interview from Los Angeles.

    “This will have an effect on the trend,” said Cantor. a partner in the Chicago-based law firm of Mayer Brown LLP. “Will it solve every problem? Of course not. We don’t even pretend that.”

    The report went unmentioned last night by Mayor Eric Garcetti, a 43-year-old Democrat elected last year, in his first state-of-the-city speech.

    Garcetti pledged to rein in the municipal bureaucracy, phase out the city business tax and offer summer jobs training to young people.

    “Simply put, we are creating jobs in Los Angeles that aren’t being filled by L.A. residents,” Garcetti said. “We have failed to train tomorrow’s workforce here in our own neighborhoods. I will change that.”

    Pension Costs

    He did not propose any changes to city pensions, which the commission said now consume 18 percent of the city budget, up from 3 percent in 2003.

    Los Angeles relies on an overly optimistic expectation that investments will return 7.75 percent a year, which causes the gap between available assets and obligations to widen, according to the report.

    In contrast, Warren Buffett’s Berkshire Hathaway (BRK/A) Inc. counts on annual returns of 6 percent for its pensions, according to the report.

    “The city should use the discount rate and pension plan earnings assumptions Buffett uses,” the commission said.

    As of June 30, 2013, the Los Angeles pension plan for non-safety employees was 68.7 percent funded. The pension fund had $10.2 billion in assets and $14.9 billion in liabilities, resulting in an unfunded accrued liability of $4.7 billion.

    ‘Accountability’ Office

    The independent commission, established last year by Los Angeles City Council President Herb Wesson, also recommended establishing an “Office of Transparency and Accountability” at City Hall, and empowering an independent five-member commission to set water and power rates.

    Los Angeles’s problems with public education and transit, while “critical” to the region’s future, were beyond the scope of the 13 volunteers who served on the commission, the report said. In addition to Cantor, members included Austin Beutner, a co-founder of New York investment bank Evercore Partners and a former Los Angeles deputy mayor; former California Governor Gray Davis, and former U.S. Labor Secretary Hilda Solis.

    By James Nash  Apr 10, 2014 7:59 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: James Nash in Los Angeles at jnash24@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netPete Young, Theo Mullen




    Parking Lots Transformed as U.S. Cities Seek More Revenue.

    After decades of copying sprawling suburbs by accommodating the automobile, U.S. cities are starting to tear up their slabs of asphalt.

    In Philadelphia, construction will begin by July on a 700-room hotel on a plot near City Hall where vehicles have parked since 1991. In Baltimore, an apartment tower may rise on a parking lot along the Inner Harbor.

    Offering developers tax incentives and zoning changes, officials are seeking to remove parking facilities in favor of projects that will draw more revenue, while making their communities friendlier to pedestrians as people eschew cars.

    “We want to create an environment where people want to walk in, want to bike in and want to take transit in,” said Beth Elliott, principal city planner in Minneapolis, which is pushing redevelopment to bolster use of mass transit. “And that is not a sea of surface parking lots.”

    Cities that have struggled to recover from the 18-month recession that ended in 2009 are gaining traction in their attempts to build revenue. This year, all but seven of 363 metropolitan areas will see economic gains, in contrast to 2013, when 97 had declines, according to a January report by the U.S. Conference of Mayors.

    ‘Lazy Asset’

    Communities are targeting parking facilities for transformation because they’re a “lazy asset,” said Gabe Klein, a senior visiting fellow at the Urban Land Institute in Washington.

    “From an economic standpoint, the cities are not getting the taxes that they should be,” said Klein, who has worked on transportation policies in Washington and Chicago.

    Parking lots are natural for development because there’s often no demolition involved and chances of running into environmental issues are lower.

    At the same time, Americans are driving less than they did eight years ago. From 2001 to 2009, the greatest decline was among people ages 16 to 34, according to a May report by the U.S. Public Interest Research Group,

    Minneapolis is encouraging the use of its light-rail system through zoning changes. Minnesota’s largest city has banned new surface lots downtown and isn’t forcing developers to create additional parking.

    That’s helped builders, because erecting garages is costly, Elliott said. Construction is expected this year on a 320-unit apartment complex on a surface parking lot that would connect to the enclosed Skyway System pedestrian bridge.

    In another downtown project, the Chicago-based parking company InterPark Holdings Inc. is negotiating with developers to build a hotel and shops by its garage adjacent to the Skyway.

    Empty Nesters

    In Baltimore, officials see empty nesters moving downtown without cars and fewer young people with drivers’ licenses, said Kirby Fowler, president of the Downtown Partnership of Baltimore, a non-profit funded by commercial property owners.

    The group is working with city zoning officials on proposed changes that may pass this year, such as barring parking garages as the main use on major streets and phasing out downtown surface lots, which he says “disrupts the urban fabric.”

    “When you have these large gaping holes between buildings, it doesn’t lend itself to a pleasant pedestrian experience,” Fowler said.

    Good Business

    InterPark is seeking to create more than just a garage on a surface lot in the Inner Harbor, said Chuck Murphy, senior vice president in acquisitions and development. He said the company is looking at proposals for a hotel, residences and shops, which would be better for the city — and for its business.

    “What we’re looking to do is to optimize the use of the parking facility to meet customer demand various parts of the day,” Murphy said.

    Incentives have been critical for the Inner Harbor proposals, said Courtenay Jenkins, senior director in the Baltimore office of Cushman & Wakefield, which is assisting InterPark’s search for a development partner.

    That site is eligible for tax credits, and the developer of an apartment tower on another Inner Harbor property can apply for a payment in lieu of taxes, said Fowler.

    Philadelphia’s $280 million hotel project received $33 million in tax-increment financing, in which the increase in tax receipts goes toward repaying debt that funds the development.

    Even parking facilities owned by municipalities are in demand. The parking authority of Allentown,Pennsylvania, last month agreed to sell a downtown lot to a partnership that would build an office and retail site with a nightclub, said executive director Tamara Dolan. Board members haven’t yet decided how to spend the $1.4 million from the sale, she said.

    “This particular project adds a new spin on the activity downtown,” she said.

    For Minneapolis, redeveloping the downtown lots is key to its future, said Elliott, the planner.

    “The more property investment, the more taxes we have to be able to make improvements in roads, in transit, in parks,” she said. “It’s more sustainable for our region if we don’t keep spreading out.”

    By Romy Varghese  Apr 10, 2014 7:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Romy Varghese in Philadelphia at rvarghese8@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netStacie Sherman, Alan Goldstein




    Moody's: Moving Retirees to Exchanges Not Easy Option for Cities Looking to Lessen Healthcare Burden.

     New York, April 09, 2014 — Cities looking to lower their healthcare and benefit expenses by cutting benefits and encouraging retirees to enroll in the healthcare exchanges created by the Affordable Care Act (ACA) will face many challenges, according to a new report from Moody’s Investors Service.

    Citing the experience of Stockton, Chicago and Detroit, which recently cut or eliminated healthcare coverage for retirees, “Affordable Care Act Health Exchanges Will Not Bring Quick Budget Relief to US Cities” discusses the hurdles that may prevent other cities from using exchanges and other provisions of the ACA to reduce their growing healthcare benefits, also known as OPEB (other post-employment benefits).

    “Retiree healthcare costs represent a sizable and mostly unfunded liability for cities,” said Cristin Jacoby, Moody’s Assistant Vice President and Analyst. Stockton and Detroit, both bankrupt, and Chicago, which has the highest pension liability of any municipality Moody’s rates, have tried to lower their budgets by reducing retiree healthcare and pointing retirees to the ACA healthcare exchanges.

    “Retiree lawsuits in these cities have already challenged this move and could deter other cities from trying the same,” cautions Jacoby.

    It may also be politically risky for cities to push retirees toward the healthcare exchanges. Public opinion about the exchanges is low following their troubled rollout, and uncertainty regarding coverage and protection could create a backlash if cities cut or eliminate municipal benefits.

    “Given the slow economic rebound and stagnating household income, cities may find it is easier to cut other services or raise taxes rather than cut retiree healthcare benefits,” said Jacoby.

    For the few cities that ultimately default on their debt, fulfilling these healthcare liabilities may reduce bondholder recovery rates.

    “Affordable Care Act Will Not Bring Immediate Budget Relief to Cities” is available to Moody’s research subscribers athttps://www.moodys.com/research/Affordable-Care-Act-Health-Exchanges-Will-Not-Bring-Immediate-Budget–PBM_PBM167411.

    ***

    Global Credit Research – 09 Apr 2014

    NOTE TO JOURNALISTS ONLY: For more information, please call one of our global press information hotlines: New York +1-212-553-0376, London +44-20-7772-5456, Tokyo +813-5408-4110, Hong Kong +852-3758-1350, Sydney +61-2-9270-8141, Mexico City 001-888-779-5833, São Paulo 0800-891-2518, or Buenos Aires 0800-666-3506. You can also email us at mediarelations@moodys.com or visit our web site at www.moodys.com.

     

     

     

    Cristin Jacoby
    AVP – Analyst
    Credit Policy
    Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
    250 Greenwich Street
    New York, NY 10007
    U.S.A.
    JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
    SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

    Anne Van Praagh
    MD – Sovereign Risk
    Credit Policy
    JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
    SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

    Releasing Office:
    Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
    250 Greenwich Street
    New York, NY 10007
    U.S.A.
    JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
    SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653




    BONDS - TEXAS

    Alejos v. State

    Court of Appeals of Texas, Austin - April 2, 2014 - S.W.3d - 2014 WL 1349018

    This case was an expedited appeal under chapter 1205 of the Government Code, which creates a special proceeding whereby “issuers” of “public securities” can obtain a declaratory judgment—also expedited—as to the legality or validity of such securities and related official acts.

    George Alejos sought to appeal a final judgment validating the issuance of approximately $33 million in sales tax revenue-backed bonds by VIA Metropolitan Transit Advanced Transportation District (the District).  Mr. Alejos also appeals a subsequent order conditioning his continued participation in the litigation on his posting of a $3.6 million bond, the amount the district court found to

    Alejos’s asserted procedural irregularities – that the district court did not afford him the opportunity for notice and a hearing that subchapter E requires.  This was a product of confusion regarding Alejos’s “party” status.  Having concluded that Alejos was a “party” entitled to appeal and who was subject to subchapter E’s bond requirements to the same extent as “named parties,” the court was compelled to agree with Alejos that he was entitled to the notice and hearing procedures that subchapter E requires before setting a bond. As such, the Order Setting Bond was reversed was reversed and remanded for a new bond hearing.

    “The District does not seriously dispute that the Order Setting Bond was, in these respects, procedurally flawed, but urges us to proceed to the merits of Alejos’s Judgment Appeal nonetheless and affirm the final judgment. We conclude we should not do so, as the Legislature has conditioned our jurisdiction to reach those merits on Alejos’s compliance with subchapter E’s bond requirement, and that issue has yet to be resolved. Unless and until our jurisdiction over the Judgment Appeal is firmly established, we should not “jump ahead” to the merits of that appeal—especially where the merits involve quite significant and complex questions regarding the District’s legal authority relative to its taxpayers—lest we exceed our proper role within the constitutional separation of powers.”

     

     

     




    Detroit Settlement A Breakthrough.

    WASHINGTON — Market participants said Detroit’s settlement with three bond insurers is a breakthrough in the city’s bankruptcy proceedings, even though it leaves questions about the city’s financial future unanswered and its impact on other locations remains unclear.

    The settlement announced Wednesday with Ambac Financial Group, National Public Finance Guarantee Inc., and Assured Guaranty, which together insure $388 million of the city’s unlimited-tax general obligation debt, calls for a 74% recovery. That is a large increase from the city’s 15% offer on March 31. More importantly, some market participants said, the deal may bring more of the involved parties to the settlement table.

    “It’s a breakthrough,” said Frank Shafroth, director of the State and Local Leadership Center at George Mason University. “If one of them makes a deal, it makes the rest of them sit up and take notice.”

    All three insurers said they would cover the full payments to their bondholders, making up what isn’t covered by the settlement. The deal calls for the Michigan Finance Authority to issue new bonds to refinance the outstanding debt on or before the city’s exit from bankruptcy. The new bonds would feature a lien on the city’s state aid as additional collateral, ensuring that the bonds are treated as secured in the future. Also on Wednesday, the insurers of the city’s pension obligation bonds announced they want the court to review several offers for the assets of the Detroit Art Institute, a controversial move that could provide as much as $2 billion of outside money to the city. Natalie Cohen, a managing director and muni market researcher at Wells Fargo, said Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr’s decision to recognize the secured status of the ULTGOs could induce others to settle.

    “This, plus the newly announced proposals for the Detroit Art Institute potentially will lead to additional settlements on the way to approval of a plan of adjustment,” Cohen said.

    Susan Collet, senior vice president for government relations with the Bond Dealers of America, said the BDA is pleased with the fact that the deal requires U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes to find that the ULTGOs are secured.

    “In comparison with the original deal, this should be a very welcome development,” Collet said.

    The settlement requires court approval, and observers noted that the deal with the three bond insurers fails to resolve solve other issues Detroit faces or answer market-wide questions about GO bond disclosure and the role of state governments in assisting distressed municipalities. The settlement doesn’t cover any of Detroit’s other debts, but would require the ULTGO’s to be treated more favorably than unsecured bonds.

    “In our view, this underscores the unpredictable nature of the negotiations for bondholders and issuers,” wrote Fitch Ratings analyst Amy Laskey.

    Others said it could be difficult to discern the effect of this development on the wider market.

    “Almost all civil litigation in this country ends with a settlement, without a final resolution of the claims and arguments made by the parties,” said Allen Robertson, president of the National Association of Bond Lawyers. “In light of that fact, the settlement between the City of Detroit and the insurers of its unlimited tax general obligation bonds (contingent upon confirmation of a plan) is unremarkable.

    “For the municipal market,” Robertson said, “the lack of a final resolution means that the questions raised by the Detroit bankruptcy almost certainly will continue to be debated and result in some changes in disclosure. Given the facts relating to Detroit and the settlement, however, it seems unclear whether states will feel compelled to make statutory changes to shore up the status of their general obligation bonds.”

    Shafroth said Detroit can’t be compared directly with other cities that have faced insolvency or that may face it in the future.

    “There are such unique factors here,” Shafroth said.

    Genevieve Nolan, the analyst in charge of Detroit for Moody’s Investors Service, said the deal would bring the recovery level up to the level the agency expected. She said Moody’s must now see whether the court upholds the legality of the settlement.

    “Obviously, this is a development we’re working on very closely right now,” Nolan said.

    Cohen published a commentary which concluded by urging investors to remember that nothing is yet final in these proceedings.

    “It’s not over until it’s over,” Cohen wrote. “Investors should keep in mind that the city’s proposals (and state’s) are just that: proposals. Thus far, Judge Steven Rhodes has proceeded quickly but thoughtfully in our view. Many objections to Orr’s March 31 plan were filed this week and Judge Rhodes scheduled a hearing for April 17 on the disclosure statement that the city is expected to send to creditors for approval in May. We would not be surprised if additional news comes out this week ahead of the hearing.”

    BY KYLE GLAZIER

    APR 10, 2014 2:27pm ET




     




    MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - ALASKA

    Municipality of Anchorage v. Holleman

    Supreme Court of Alaska - March 28, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1266787

    Citizen-sponsors brought declaratory judgment action seeking to repeal municipal ordinance by referendum. The Superior Court granted summary judgment in favor of citizen-sponsors, and ordered that referendum application be accepted. Municipality appealed.

    The Supreme Court of Alaska held that:

    • Referendum application was not preempted by the Public Employment Relations Act (PERA);
    • Referendum application was not preempted by municipal charter;
    • Municipality’s home-rule status to enact labor ordinances was not exclusive of the citizens’ correlative right of direct legislation;
    • Referendum sought by citizen-sponsors did not violate the Constitution’s prohibition against application of a referendum to dedications of revenue or appropriations, or municipal charter’s corresponding prohibitions against use of a referendum for establishing budgets or appropriating funds; and
    • Municipal ordinance, and therefore the referendum seeking to repeal it, were legislative rather than administrative.



    IMMUNITY - ARIZONA

    Ponce v. Parker Fire Dist.

    Court of Appeals of Arizona, Division 1 - March 27, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1257140

     Homeowner whose house was almost completely destroyed by fire sued neighbor, in whose home the fire apparently began, and filed amended complaint adding claim of negligence against fire department for failing to fully extinguish fire. Fire department moved for summary judgment. The Superior Court granted motion. Homeowner appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Fire department waived its notice of claim defense by actively litigating the merits and failing to seek prompt judicial resolution of the defense, and
    • Genuine issue of material fact existed as to fire department standards in the use of thermal imaging equipment, precluding summary judgment.

    Genuine issues of material fact existed as to fire department standards in the use of thermal imaging equipment, and whether department breached standard of care, precluding summary judgment in homeowner’s action alleging that fire department negligently failed to detect ember that had settled in attic insulation following earlier fire that had damaged garage.




    SCHOOLS - COLORADO

    Lawrence v. School Dist. No. 1

    United States Court of Appeals, Tenth Circuit - March 28, 2014 - Fed.Appx. - 2014 WL 1259588

     African-American woman who had worked as a social worker in the Denver public school system brought action against school district and board, alleging, inter alia, that she was terminated in retaliation for her decision to file a racial discrimination complaint with the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC).  The District Court granted defendants’ motion for summary judgment, and plaintiff appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Plaintiff failed to establish that her protected activity was the cause of her former employer’s materially adverse action in assigning her to split her time at four different locations;
    • Even assuming that plaintiff’s suspensions qualified as materially adverse actions, neither the school district nor the school board was liable for plaintiff’s supervisor’s decision to suspend her; and
    • Even assuming that a “cat’s paw” claim could be brought here, plaintiff failed to establish that her supervisor’s alleged bias proximately caused her termination.

     




    EASEMENTS - GEORGIA

    Fulton County v. City of Sandy Springs

    Supreme Court of Georgia - March 28, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1266247

     City and two individual homeowners brought action against county, county board of commissioners, and county director of public works, asserting that county retained ownership of and responsibility for two drainage retention ponds and a dam located within the city, and seeking declaratory judgment, mandamus, and injunctive relief.  The Fulton County Superior Court entered judgment in favor of city. County appealed.

    The Supreme Court of Georgia held that:

    • County that was granted easement to construct, maintain, and use dam and detention pond was responsible for maintaining the easements as long as it held them;
    • Constitutional provision stating that a county may not provide storm water and sewage collections and disposal systems inside the boundaries of another municipality except by contract with the affected municipality did not prohibit county from maintaining easements;
    • Easements granted on portion of unincorporated county property did not automatically terminate when city was subsequently created in that location; and
    • County’s responsibility to maintain easements would continue only until easements were legally transferred, terminated, or prospectively abandoned.



    IMMUNITY - ILLINOIS

    Suchy v. City of Geneva

    Appellate Court of Illinois, Second District - March 28, 2014 - N.E.3d - 2014 IL App (2d) 130367

    Independent administrator of decedent’s estate brought personal injury and wrongful death action against city, park district, and county arising from decedent’s death from injuries sustained when he jumped into river downstream from dam to save child. City, park district, and county moved to dismiss. The Circuit Court granted motions. Independent administrator appealed.

    The Appellate Court held that the city, park district, and county did not owe decedent duty to warn of or protect against open and obvious risks presented by river and dam.

    City, park district, and county did not owe duty to bystander who died after he jumped into river downstream from dam to save child. The water and dam were open and obvious conditions, making the likelihood of injury low, it was not foreseeable that a person in bystander’s position would conclude that advantages of jumping into water to save child’s life would outweigh risk of drowning himself or sustaining injuries that subsequently took his life, and installation of fences and other measures, in addition to existing warning signs, would impose significant burden.

    Deliberate encounter exception to the open-and-obvious doctrine, providing that harm may be foreseeable when landowner has reason to expect that invitee would proceed to encounter the obvious danger because doing so would outweigh the apparent risk, did not apply to analysis of whether city, park district, and county owed duty to bystander who died after he jumped into river downstream from dam to save child.  The exception required the presence of compulsion or impetus, and there was no legal or economic compulsion to rescue.




    CHURCHES - LOUISIANA

    Parents of Minor Child v. Charlet

    Supreme Court of Louisiana - April 4, 2014 - So.3d - 2013-2879 (La. 4/4/14)
     Parents of child sexual abuse complainant brought action against priest and church, alleging priest, as a mandatory reporter, had failed to report complainant’s abuse allegations against another parishioner and that church was vicariously liable for the priest’s failure to act. The District Court denied defendants’ motion to exclude evidence of complainant’s confession with priest. The Court of Appeal reversed order denying motion to exclude evidence and, on its own motion, entered peremptory exception of no cause of action.  Parents petitioned for certiorari review.
    The Supreme Court of Louisiana held that:
    • Priest could not assert priest-penitent privilege on his own behalf, and
    • Factual dispute as to whether priest violated mandatory reporting requirements precluded entry of peremptory exception of no cause of action.

    The priest-penitent privilege belonged exclusively to child sexual abuse complainant, as the penitent-communicant who had reported alleged sexual abuse to priest during a confession, not to the priest, and thus, priest could not assert the privilege to protect himself in a civil action in which complainant’s parents petitioned for damages based on allegation that priest, as a mandatory reporter, had a duty to report complainant’s allegations of abuse.  Evidence of the confession was admissible in its entirety, as complainant was free to testify and introduce evidence as to her own confession.

    Genuine issue of material fact existed as to whether communications between child sexual abuse complainant and priest were confessions per se and whether the priest obtained knowledge outside the confessional that would trigger his duty, as a mandatory reporter, to report complainant’s allegations against an adult parishioner, thus precluding entry of peremptory exception of no cause of action.

     

     




    SCHOOLS - LOUISIANA

    Sinclair v. School Bd. of Allen Parish

    United States Court of Appeals, Fifth Circuit - March 31, 2014 - Fed.Appx. - 2014 WL 1273843

    Teacher commenced civil rights action against school board and school officials, alleging that she had been deprived of right without due process to be returned to “same position” following sabbatical leave.  The District Court  granted judgment for defendants after jury trial in their favor. Teacher appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that term “position,” in Louisiana statute providing for sabbatical leaves for teachers and for their return to same position, meant that of teacher.




    HOUSING - MASSACHUSETTS

    Loring Towers Associates ex rel. NHPMN Management, LLC v. Furtick

    Appeals Court of Massachusetts, Essex - March 27, 2014 - N.E.3d - 85 Mass.App.Ct. 142

     Landlord brought summary process action in District Court Department, Salem Division, against tenant, after Boston Housing Authority (BHA) terminated tenant’s section 8 housing assistance benefits and stopped paying subsidized portion of tenant’s rent. Tenant filed third-party complaint against BHA, seeking reinstatement of benefits. BHA moved to dismiss third-party complaint. Following transfer, the Housing Court Department denied the motion to dismiss and instead ordered BHA to reinstatement benefits retroactive to date of termination. BHA appealed.

    The Appeals Court held that:

    • Tenant could be allowed to file third-party complaint against BHA, and
    • BHA violated due process in terminating tenant’s benefits.

    In landlord’s summary process action, tenant could be allowed to file third-party complaint against BHA seeking reinstatement of Section 8 housing assistance benefits, under rule permitting a defendant to bring in a third party who is or may be liable to him for all or part of the plaintiff’s claim against him, since BHA was potentially liable for contribution for a portion of tenant’s rent arrearage; nothing in summary process statute prohibited tenant from filing third-party complaint.

    BHA violated tenant’s due process rights in terminating his Section 8 housing assistance benefits under the Federal Housing Choice Voucher Program.  Termination notice incorrectly stated that decision was final and that there was no further right to appeal, and BHA grievances and appeals administrator denied tenant’s request for a late hearing and upheld the termination decision without any hearing officer having made a compelling circumstances evaluation.




    EMINENT DOMAIN - MINNESOTA

    Great River Energy v. Swedzinski

    Court of Appeals of Minnesota - March 31, 2014 - Not Reported in N.W.2d - 2014 WL 1272381

    Appellants are public utilities engaged in the business of generating and transmitting electric power throughout Minnesota, North Dakota, South Dakota, and Wisconsin. Under the name “CapX2020,” appellants have undertaken to construct a 345 kilovolt high voltage transmission line from Brookings, S.D. to Hampton, MN. The Minnesota Public Utilities Commission (MPUC) issued appellants the required certificate of need and route permit for the power line, thereby authorizing appellants to exercise their eminent-domain powers to acquire the right-of-way for the project.

    In August 2012, appellants initiated a condemnation action, seeking to acquire easements for the power-line project. In October 2012, respondent landowners notified appellants of their “buy-the-farm” election under Minn.Stat. § 216E.12, subd. 4 (2012), requiring appellants to acquire fee title to their 218.85 acres of land instead of taking only the 8.86 acre easement needed for the project.

    The District Court granted landowner’s buy-the-farm election.  Appellants appealed the election, arguing that the District Court failed to consider the law’s reasonableness requirement, given that the total amount of respondents’ land was so much greater than the actual amount of land needed for the power line easement.  The Court of Appeals affirmed the election, finding that it fell within the provisions of the statute.

     




    ZONING - NEBRASKA

    Rodehorst Brothers v. City of Norfolk Board of Adjustment

    Supreme Court of Nebraska - March 28, 2014 - N.W.2d - 287 Neb. 779

    Partnership owned a fourplex apartment building in Norfolk, Nebraska. The building’s use as a fourplex (to house up to four families), in an area zoned R–2 for one- and two-family use, was a legal, nonconforming use.

    Neb.Rev.Stat. § 19–904.01 (Reissue 2012), as well as the applicable zoning ordinance, both provide that the right to continue such a use is lost if it has been discontinued for 1 year.

    The partnership argued that although some of the apartments in the building were unoccupied for several years, the building’s use as a fourplex never changed, primarily because it had all the trappings of a fourplex and the units were available for use.

    The Supreme Court of Nebraska affirmed the City of Norfolk Board of Adjustment’s ruling that the partnership had forfeited its right to continue the use due to the fact that two of the four apartment units had been unoccupied for more than one year.  Relevant to this conclusion was the fact that the owners had not attempted to find new tenants for the unoccupied apartments.

    The court also held that the City of Norfolk Board of Adjustment lacked authority under Neb.Rev.Stat. § 19–910 (Reissue 2012) to grant a “use” variance to otherwise allow the use to continue and that there was no “taking” of the property.

     

     




    BONDS - NEVADA

    Goldman, Sachs & Co. v. City of Reno

    United States Court of Appeals, Ninth Circuit - March 31, 2014 - F.3d - 14 Cal. Daily Op. Serv. 3511

    Underwriter and broker-dealer commenced action against municipality to enjoin arbitration that municipality had initiated before Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) to resolve its claims against underwriter arising out of their contractual relationship. The District Court denied underwriter’s motion for injunctive relief and entered final judgment in favor of municipality. Underwriter appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • FINRA Rule 12200 that described certain circumstances under which FINRA Director could deny access to FINRA arbitration forum did not require FINRA members to consent to FINRA determination of issue of arbitrability;
    • Municipality qualified as “customer” of underwriter; and
    • Forum selection clause superseded default obligation of underwriter Rule 12200 to arbitrate.

    Municipality qualified as “customer” of underwriter and broker-dealer, and thus FINRA rule required it to arbitrate at request of municipality unless municipality disclaimed its right to arbitrate through contract, where municipality issued approximately $211 million in auction rate securities (ARS) to finance series of city projects, underwriter and broker-dealer provided services in course of its securities business activities, and municipality compensated it in form of underwriter’s discounts and annual broker-dealer fees.

    Forum selection clause superseded default obligation of underwriter and broker-dealer under FINRA rule to arbitrate, where parties agreed to bring claims that arose out of their contractual relationship in District of Nevada.  Presumption in favor of arbitrability did not apply, express waiver of arbitration was not required, requirement to bring “all actions and proceedings” in District of Nevada included arbitration, and waiver of “all right to trial by jury” merely stated the obvious as to arbitration.

     

     




    PUBLIC UTILITIES - NEW YORK

    Borough of Upper Saddle River, N.J. v. Rockland County Sewer Dist. No. 1

    United States District Court, S.D. New York - March 31, 2014 - Slip Copy - 2014 WL 1311770

    Citizens’ brought suit  under the Clean Water Act and state common law, alleging that, in the course of operating a sewage treatment facility, Rockland County Sewer District # 1 has polluted-and will likely continue to pollute-the Saddle River.  Plaintiffs brought four causes of action: continuing violations under section 301 of the Clean Water Act; private nuisance, public nuisance and trespass claims under state common law.

    Both parties moved for summary judgment.  The issue was to what extent Defendant could be held liable for its sewage spills through a citizen suit brought under the Clean Water Act and state common law.

    The District Court:

     

     




    NONPROFITS - NEW JERSEY

    Kaplan v. Saint Peter's Healthcare System

    United States District Court, D. New Jersey - March 31, 2014 - Slip Copy - 2014 WL 1284854

    Plaintiff class action on behalf of participants and beneficiaries of the Saint Peter’s Healthcare System Retirement Plan (the “Plan”), alleging that the Plan was being improperly maintained by SPHS as a “church plan” under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act (“ERISA”), 29 U.S.C. § 1001 et seq.

    The question posed was whether a non-profit healthcare corporation may establish and maintain a church plan if it is controlled by or associated with a church. If answered in the affirmative, the Court must then determine whether this interpretation of the church plan definition violates the Establishment Clause of the United States Constitution.

    The Court concluded, as a matter of law, SPHS’s employee pension Plan was not a church plan because it had not been established by a church, notwithstanding the fact that the IRS had issued a private letter ruling to the contrary.




    STANDING - NEW YORK

    Association for a Better Long Island, Inc. v. New York State Dept. of Environmental Conservation

    Court of Appeals of New York - April 1, 2014 - N.E.3d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 02216

    Association dedicated to economic growth of region, land-owning limited liability company (LLC) and its managing partner, and town and its community development agency (CDA) commenced hybrid Article 78 petition/declaratory judgment action challenging regulatory amendments, made by Department of Environmental Conservation’s (DEC) Division of Fish, Wildlife and Marine Resources, establishing a formal process through which individuals could obtain permits to allow for incidental taking of endangered or threatened species. The Supreme Court, Albany County, granted Department’s motion to dismiss. Petitioners appealed. The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, affirmed. Leave to appeal was granted to town and its community development agency.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Town and CDA sufficiently alleged an injury in fact, as required for standing to challenge Department’s procedures for adopting the amended regulations;
    • Town and CDA satisfied “zone of interests” requirement for standing to challenge Department’s procedures for adopting the amended regulations; but
    • Alleged economic injuries did not support standing to bring claim asserting that Department issued negative declaration without taking a hard look; and
    • Substantive challenges to amended regulations were not ripe.

     




    ZONING - NEW YORK

    Christian Airmen, Inc. v. Town of Newstead Zoning Bd. of Appeals

    Supreme Court, Appellate Division, Fourth Department, New York - March 28, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 02171

    Airport operator petitioned for Article 78 review of a decision of town’s zoning board of appeals (ZBA), which denied the operator’s request for a use variance to authorize the paving of an existing turf runway at the airport. In a special proceeding under Article 78, the Supreme Court, Erie County, vacated and annulled ZBA’s decision, and granted operator’s request. ZBA appealed.

    The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, held that substantial evidence supported finding of town’s ZBA that airport operator failed to demonstrate unnecessary hardship, and thus supported ZBA’s decision to deny operator’s request for use variance to authorize paving of existing turf runway at airport.  Nothing in record supported operator’s contention that runway predated enactment of town’s first zoning ordinance, precluding any finding of prior nonconforming use, operator failed to establish that, in absence of variance, it would not realize reasonable return on property, and, because deeds proffered by ZBA demonstrated that operator did not acquire portions of subject property until nearly ten years after enactment of ordinance, any alleged hardship was self-created.




    TAX - OHIO

    Laborde v. City of Gahanna

    United States Court of Appeals, Sixth Circuit - April 1, 2014 - Fed.Appx. - 2014 WL 1282546

    Taxpayers brought putative class action in state court against city, city official, and Ohio Regional Income Tax Agency, alleging city used a tax form that resulted in the overpayment of municipal income taxes, and asserting takings claims under the United States and Ohio Constitutions, as well as unjust enrichment. Following removal to federal court, the District Court granted defendants’ motions for judgment on the pleadings, and taxpayers appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Alleged overpayment and city’s retention of taxes was not a taking under the Fifth Amendment;
    • Tax Injunction Act (TIA) applied; and
    • TIA barred prosecution of takings claim in federal court.

    Taxpayers’ alleged overpayment of municipal taxes, allegedly caused by city’s use of tax form that understated the amount of tax credit taxpayers were entitled to receive for income taxes paid to other municipalities, was not a taking of private property under the Fifth Amendment.  Tax credits were part and parcel of the municipal income tax system, and Fifth Amendment takings clause was not implicated by the collection of taxes.

    Tax Injunction Act (TIA) applied in taxpayers’ action alleging that city used tax form that allegedly resulted in the overpayment of municipal income taxes by understating the amount of tax credit taxpayers were entitled to receive for income taxes paid to other municipalities, which allegedly amounted to a taking under the Fifth Amendment.  Tax credit impacted taxpayers’ tax liability and was a credit for taxes already paid to another municipality, and taxpayers’ takings claims implicated the correct interpretation of the city code and sought relief that would have the effect of limiting their tax liability.

    Taxpayers had a plain, speedy, and efficient remedy under Ohio statute, which allowed any person to obtain a declaration of their rights under, inter alia, municipal ordinances, and thus Tax Injunction Act (TIA) barred prosecution of taxpayers’ Fifth Amendment takings claims, based on city’s use of tax form that allegedly resulted in the overpayment of municipal income taxes by allegedly understating the amount of tax credit taxpayers were entitled to receive for income taxes paid to other municipalities, in federal court.

     

     




    BALLOT INITIATIVE - OKLAHOMA

    In re Initiative Petition No. 397, State Question No. 767

    Supreme Court of Oklahoma - April 1, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 OK 23

    Proponents of initiative to amend state constitution appealed ballot title prepared by the Attorney General regarding proposal to fund storm shelters and campus security for local school districts and career technology districts.

    The Supreme Court of Oklahoma held that:

    • Proponents were required to file or submit a copy of the petition and a copy of the ballot title to the Attorney General when filing them with the Secretary of State;
    • Attorney General had five business days to file response to ballot title after filing with Secretary of State;
    • Attorney General’s late response was statutorily effective;
    • Proponents bore burden to show that the title was clearly contrary to either statutory law or the Oklahoma Constitution;
    • Attorney General’s ballot title complied with statutory requirements of impartiality and correctness;
    • Ninety-day period of time to collect signatures commences when the ballot title appeal is final.

     Petitioners’ initially proposed ballot title, now the substitute ballot title offered on appeal, states as follows:

    This measure amends the Oklahoma Constitution. It adds a new section 44 to Article 10. Bonds could be sold. Up to Five Hundred Million Dollars ($500,000,000.00) could be available. Bond money would be used for school districts and career technology districts. Bond money would be used for storm shelters or secure areas. State franchise taxes would repay these bonds. If money from franchise tax was not enough, the Legislature could use the General Revenue Fund to repay the bonds. State bond money could be used by school districts or career technology districts to reduce local debt or eliminate local debt incurred for storm shelters or secure areas. If enough money from franchise tax remains after state bonds are paid for, the balance of franchise tax could be used for grants for storm shelters for people and businesses. When state bonds are paid off, additional bonds could be sold to keep the programs funded. Laws would be written for details about using bond money. State agencies could make rules about state bond money. These rules would have the effect of law. The Oklahoma State Constitution is being amended to allow state bond money to pay for shelters and secure areas in schools.

    The current ballot title for the initiative, the ballot title prepared by the Attorney General, states as follows:

    This measure adds Article 10, Section 44 to the Oklahoma Constitution. The new section authorizes the issuance of up to 500 million dollars in State bonds. The bond money would be used by local school districts and career technology districts for storm shelters and campus security.
    The measure does not provide for new State revenues to pay for the bonds. Under the measure the State franchise tax revenues would no longer go into the General Revenue Fund, which is the primary fund used to pay for State Government. Rather, franchise taxes revenues would be used for annual bond payments (principal and interest).
    In any year in which the franchise tax revenues are not sufficient to make annual payments, the Legislature, at its discretion, could use General Revenue Fund monies to make the annual bond payment.
    In years in which not all the franchise tax revenues are needed to make payments, the remaining franchise tax revenues—with Legislative approval—could be used for storm shelter grants to individuals and businesses.

    In authorizing these bond and grant programs, the measure creates exceptions to the Constitution’s prohibitions on gifts and the use of the state’s credit.

     

     




    TORT CLAIMS ACT - OKLAHOMA

    Hall v. GEO Group, Inc.

    Supreme Court of Oklahoma - April 1, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 OK 22

     Inmate brought negligence action against private prison facility after inmate was injured while being transported to a medical appointment. The District Court granted summary judgment in favor of facility. Inmate appealed.

    The Supreme Court of Oklahoma held that:

    • Compliance with notice provisions of Governmental Tort Claims Act (GTCA) was required to bring tort action against private prison facility;
    • Application of notice provisions of GTCA to actions against private prisons did not violate equal protection; and
    • Application of notice provisions of GTCA to private prisons did not constitute unconstitutional special law.



    IMMUNITY - PENNSYLVANIA

    Boyden v. Township of Upper Darby

    United States District Court, E.D. Pennsylvania - March 24, 2014 - F.Supp.2d - 2014 WL 1152149

    Arrestee brought action against township and police officer, who used stun gun during arrest, pursuant to § 1983 and state tort law, alleging officer used excessive force in violation of the Fourth Amendment and committed assault and battery under state law and asserting a claim for municipal liability against township. Defendants moved to dismiss for failure to state a claim and on qualified immunity grounds.

    The District Court held that:

    • Arrestee stated a claim for excessive force;
    • Officer was not entitled to qualified immunity; and
    • Arrestee stated a claim for municipal liability against township.

    Arrestee’s allegations that he was already in custody and restrained by handcuffs, showing no attempt to resist, when arresting officer used stun gun on him were sufficient to state a claim against officer for use of excessive force in violation of the Fourth Amendment.

    Arresting officer was not entitled to qualified immunity in arrestee’s § 1983 action alleging officer used excessive force in violation of the Fourth Amendment by using stun gun on him.  A reasonable law enforcement officer should know that excessive uses of stun guns to effectuate an arrest would constitute a Fourth Amendment violation.

    Arrestee’s allegations that two township police officers were fired for use of excessive force and were then reinstated, that there were two cases in which officers were sued for use of excessive force, and that arresting officer participated in the beating of another individual, during which he allegedly used his stun gun repeatedly, were sufficient to allege that township officers acted pursuant to a municipal custom condoning the use of excessive force during arrests, as required to state a claim for municipal liability under § 1983 against township based on arresting officer’s use of stun gun on arrestee.

     




    ASSESSMENTS - RHODE ISLAND

    Commerce Park Associates 1, LLC v. Houle

    Supreme Court of Rhode Island - March 31, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1281862

    Property owners brought declaratory judgment action challenging the legality of sewer assessments, naming as defendants town tax collector, finance director, town, and sewer authority. The Superior Court granted town’s motion to dismiss, but denied its request for sanctions. Property owners appealed, and town cross appealed.

    The Supreme Court of Rhode Island held that:

    • The appeals process set forth in statute governing petitions for relief from any assessment of taxes did not apply to any sewer assessments or charges levied by the town pursuant to its authority under its enabling act, and
    • Superior Court did not abuse its discretion in denying property owners’ request for sanctions.

    Sewer assessments and charges did not constitute “taxes” for appeal purposes, and thus, the appeals process set forth in statute governing petitions for relief from any assessment of taxes did not apply to any sewer assessments or charges levied by the town pursuant to its authority under town’s enabling act.  Town enabling act referred to the means of raising funds in order to cover the cost and maintenance of sewer system as assessments and annual charges, and specifically distinguished between that portion of the cost and construction of the sewer works that would be paid for by the town through its general taxation and the portion to be paid for by assessments and annual charges against individual parcels of property.

     




    MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - VIRGINIA

    Amin v. County of Henrico

    Court of Appeals of Virginia, Richmond - April 1, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1281726

     Defendant was convicted in the Circuit Court of carrying concealed weapon in violation of county ordinance. Defendant appealed. The Court of Appeals affirmed. Defendant appealed. The Supreme Court reversed and remanded.

    On remand, the Court of Appeals held that:

    • County ordinance, criminalizing as a violation of county law all conduct that would be criminal under certain provisions of the Virginia Code, could not have validly incorporated statute proscribing the act of carrying a concealed weapon, and
    • Because trial court convicted defendant of violating a county ordinance that could not punish the conduct alleged in the final order, a violation of the ordinance was a legally insufficient basis for a criminal conviction, such that defendant’s conviction was void ab initio.

     




    TAX - WASHINGTON

    APL Ltd. v. Washington State Dept. of Revenue

    Court of Appeals of Washington, Division 1 - March 31, 2014 - Not Reported in P.3d - 2014 WL 1289567

    At issue in this retail sales tax refund action was whether five 800–ton cranes leased by plaintiff from the Port of Seattle constitute personalty, which is subject to retail sales tax, or fixtures, which is not.

    Because the record failed to show one of the three essential elements to prove a fixture—the Port’s intent—the appeals court affirmed the trial court’s judgment denying a refund of taxes that APL paid.

     




    MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - WASHINGTON

    Cannabis Action Coalition v. City of Kent

    Court of Appeals of Washington, Division 1 - March 31, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1284870

    Interest group brought declaratory judgment action challenging validity of city zoning ordinance prohibiting medical marijuana “collective gardens.”  The Superior Court dismissed claims. Plaintiffs appealed.

    The Court of Appeal held that:

    • Amendments to Medical Use of Cannabis Act (MUCA) did not legalize medical marijuana or collective gardens;
    • Governor’s veto message was the sole source of relevant legislative history to be considered in interpreting amendments that were enacted following sectional veto;
    • Cities were authorized to enact zoning requirements to regulate or exclude collective gardens; and
    • Ordinance did not conflict with state law.

     




    INVERSE CONDEMNATION - WISCONSIN

    Fromm v. Village of Lake Delton

    Court of Appeals of Wisconsin - April 3, 2014 - Slip Copy - 2014 WL 1316607

    Homeowner brought a takings claim under the inverse condemnation statute, WIS. STAT. § 32.10 (2009–10), and the takings clause of the Wisconsin Constitution, against Village after sustaining the destruction of his home due to severe flooding and resulting erosion in June 2008.  Homeowner alleged that the Village unconstitutionally took his property without providing just compensation.

    Homeowner made two arguments on appeal as to why the circuit court erred in dismissing his complaint on summary judgment.  First, he argued that actions of the Village caused the flooding event and, thus, the Village must compensate him under the takings clause of the Wisconsin Constitution and the inverse condemnation statute.  Second, he argued in the alternative that, whether or not he can point to proof of specific Village action, this court “should find a per se taking under the facts of this case.”  Essentially, homeowner contended that the court should apply the following as a per se rule: any time a governmental unit controls a dam and there is a loss of private property due to flooding associated with the dam’s operation, the governmental unit is liable for a taking.

    The court concluded that the Village did not act in a manner that unconstitutionally took homeowner’s property, and also rejected his request that the court apply or create a per se rule.




    San Antonio: Innovative, Creative, Environmentally Conscious. And Still Running Out of Water.

    To understand the legendary culture of water conservation that this city has cultivated in the last 20 years, consider that an 11-foot tall model of a low-flow toilet adorns the lobby of its water utility’s headquarters. The toilet recently was the subject of many photo opportunities when a group of more than 80 lawmakers, legislative staffers and water planners toured San Antonio’s water facilities.

    “We’ve got cities coming from all over the world,” Greg Flores, the spokesman for San Antonio Water System, or SAWS, told the visitors over a home-cooked brisket lunch. Later, the group gawked at the utility’s underground reservoir storage system, drank treated wastewater from its award-winning water recycling plant and learned of plans for a desalination plant. The message was clear: The state’s thirsty cities should follow San Antonio’s lead.

    Yet even with recent accolades from federal officials and a featured role in a public television documentary, San Antonio is grappling with explosive growth and dwindling water resources, just like rest of Texas. The city has long hunted for a new source of water beyond the inexpensive and clean Edwards Aquifer, which it has depended on for decades. But critics say that pursuit is happening at the expense of more rural communities. And they also fear it endangers San Antonio’s reputation as a “green” city that has been able to successfully balance growth and water conservation.

    “We have to go outside the Edwards,” said Amy Hardberger, an assistant professor at St. Mary’s University in San Antonio who teaches water law and land use. “But how we do it and how much we do it means everything.”

    San Antonio’s aggressive conservation efforts started in the early 1990s, when a federal judge ordered the city to pump less water from the Edwards Aquifer to protect endangered species. Ever since, attempts to secure new sources of water have had limited success. More than half of the 80 billion gallons of water SAWS delivered to 1.7 million consumers last year came from the Edwards, of which San Antonio is by far the biggest user, but that will probably be curtailed this year because of drought conditions and to protect the endangered animals who depend on the aquifer’s springs.

    Overtures to buy groundwater from underneath rural South Texas counties have led to fears that the city will drain those aquifers. The utility says that is not its intention, but points out that if San Antonio does not get those water supplies, another city will.

    Other regional water authorities that have pursued joint water projects with San Antonio have felt rebuffed. Ever since the utility backed out of a collaboration with the Guadalupe-Blanco River Authority in 2005, the two entities have fought constantly over water supplies in various river basins in South-Central Texas. “It’s the same as Lucy yanking the football away when Charlie Brown tries to kick it. We always feel that we are Charlie Brown,” an official at the river authority, Todd Votteler, said.

    Even some legislators have said that San Antonio has insisted too aggressively that they relax local groundwater regulations, which would ease their attempts to buy water from other counties.

    “When San Antonio comes into the room, there’s definitely a reaction that I’ve noticed: ‘Who loses on this deal for the benefit of San Antonio?’” said state Rep. Lyle Larson, R-San Antonio. “We’ve got to change that reputation. It’s created some regional confrontations.”

    Both Larson and Flores say that the utility’s president, former state Rep. Robert Puente, has helped foster a more diplomatic approach since he was appointed in 2008.

    Last month, yet another search for water supplies appeared to have failed. After more than three years of evaluating multiple proposals from the private sector to make the biggest addition to San Antonio’s water supply in history — 16 billion gallons a year — Puente appeared to throw up his hands and abandon the endeavor. All the projects were too risky because local opponents could cut off the supply, he said.

    While environmental advocates  applauded the decision, the business community was appalled. “It was a very surprising and disappointing announcement,” said City Councilman Joe Krier, former president of The Greater San Antonio Chamber of Commerce. Krier said businesses constantly ask him, “Are you going to have enough water for me 20 years from now? And we can’t give them an answer.”

    Under pressure, Puente agreed to reconsider a proposal to pipe water from underneath rural lands northeast of Austin. But he also said the project would cost the utility $2.6 billion over 30 years and could require a 12 percent  increase in water rates  in just a single year. That would not be an easy sell in a region whose water rates have jumped more than 50 percent in the last decade. A large chunk of those increases are paying for $1 billion in sewer improvements after leaky pipes spilled more than 20 million gallons of raw sewage from 2006 to 2012, prompting the federal government to sue SAWS.

    Such a large contract could also discourage conservation, environmental groups have pointed out, because the utility must pay for all the water whether residents use it or not. By contrast, the utility will own and operate the desalination plant it is currently building, which will treat water from a nearby salty aquifer, so it could cut production if demand lessens, saving costs.

    A debate also still persists as to how much San Antonio has conserved, and how much new water it will need. Puente has championed the fact that from 1984 to 2009, water use decreased despite huge population growth. But data from the time frame of 1988 to 2013 shows consumption by ratepayers went up 24 percent, in part because SAWS absorbed a large new customer base in 2012.

    The utility also serves sprawling areas outside city limits, where it has no say on how new developments are planned. Planners say that new homes are much more likely to include automatic irrigation systems, which can significantly increase water use. The city has long used off-duty police officers to build up one of the most robust enforcement programs of lawn-watering restrictions in the country, but that can only go so far.

    But most believe that no matter what the city does to quench its thirst, decades of conservation habits will continue to be an emphasis.

    “You’ve got to recognize that as the price of water goes up — and it will go up, because it is a scarce resource — that’s going to encourage more conservation,” said Reed Williams, a member of the SAWS board.

    And it is indeed the water utility that prizes such a culture above everyone else. When Larson called El Paso the state’s best water conserver at a recent water law conference, Puente, sitting right next to him, could not help but whisper audibly, “second only to San Antonio.”

    By Neena Satija

    BY  | MARCH 31, 2014




    Detroit's New Bankruptcy Plan Proposes Lower Pension, Creditor Payouts.

    The City of Detroit on Monday proposed slightly lower payouts for some pensioners and unsecured bondholders as feverish negotiations continue in the largest municipal bankruptcy in U.S. history.

    In an amended bankruptcy restructuring plan filed electronically in federal bankruptcy court in Detroit, the city maintained its previous proposal to invest $1.5 billion over 10 years to improve services while delivering steep cuts to unsecured creditors, including retirees and debt holders.

    Among the biggest changes in the revised plan of adjustment and accompanying disclosure statement:

    — The city said police and fire retirees would get a 14% cut to their monthly pension checks if they reject the city’s restructuring plan. The original figure was a 10% cut a month ago.

    — The city proposed paying general obligation bondholders 15 cents on the dollar instead of 20 cents on the dollar.

    — The revised plan also includes a proposal for the elimination of the current board of trustees for the city’s general retiree pension fund and the police and fire retirement fund.

    — More information on how the city plans to claw back some of the bonus payments distributed to active workers’ retirement annuity accounts — bonuses generally known as the “13th check.”

    — Fresh details about the city’s reinvestment plans — including $78.7 million to hire civilian police employees so that officers can be redeployed, $25 million for a Department of Transportation security force and $90.6 million for software and servers to improve the city’s dilapidated IT systems.

    “The City continues to make progress with its creditors and retirees and hopes to reach agreement in the near term on a number of outstanding issues,” Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr said in a statement. “We believe that the Plan we have proposed, and continue to refine, is feasible and allows the City to reduce its staggering $18 billion in debt and live within its means. The Plan puts the focus back on providing essential public services to the City’s nearly 700,000 residents.”

    The city maintained its proposal of 26% cuts to monthly pension checks for general retirees if they vote in favor of the restructuring plan and 34% if they reject it. The city also maintained its proposal of 6% cuts to monthly pensions of police and fire retirees if they accept the restructuring plan.

    But the city acknowledged that its proposal to slash annual cost-of-living adjustments to pensions increases the overall benefit cut to retirees. The loss of COLA represents an 18% benefit cut for police and fire retirees and a 13% cut for general retirees.

    About 32,000 people are entitled to pension checks from the city, including about 22,000 retirees.

    Orr proposed a new structure for the General Retirement System and Police and Fire System pension boards, saying they both are underfunded in part because of alleged mismanagement and poor investment decisions. That move is generally viewed as necessary before Republican state legislators agree to vote in favor of providing $350 million toward the city’s restructuring.

    Tina Bassett, a spokeswoman for the city’s general retirement pension board, said she hadn’t reviewed the amended documents and couldn’t comment extensively on them.

    “We’re still negotiating in good faith, and those numbers may not be the same numbers you see at the end of the deal,” Bassett said.

    Bruce Babiarz, a spokesman for the police and fire pension board, also said the pension fund needed more time to review the amended plan of adjustment, but said the “POA,” or plan of adjustment, is still “DOA.”

    While the police and fire pension plan remains “committed to negotiating in good faith toward a consensual agreement,” Babiarz said, “pushing a POA with continued blanks is an affront to good-faith negotiations and the court-ordered mediation process.”

    He said he was restrained by confidentiality rules from commenting on negotiations, but said the PFRS has proposed options that would reduce or eliminate the need for pension cuts, ideas he said he hopes are addressed in private mediation talks moderated by U.S. District Chief Judge Gerald Rosen.

    Orr has argued that significant cuts are necessary to improve public safety and restore basic services for the city.

    But creditors, including major financial investors and the city’s retirees, have fiercely objected to the plan of adjustment, saying the cuts are too steep.

    In the new documents filed today, the city also included a proposed settlement with UBS and Bank of America Merrill Lynch, which would collectively receive $85 million to eliminate a $288-million financial obligation called swaps.

    U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes will determine the fate of Orr’s updated proposed restructuring plan. In a hearing currently scheduled for April 14, Rhodes will decide whether the disclosure statement contains enough information about the city’s plans.

    In a trial starting July 16, Rhodes will hear arguments and weigh evidence about whether the city’s restructuring plan is feasible.

    Creditors, including retirees, will get a chance to vote on the plan of adjustment. To implement the plan, the city must get a majority of creditors representing two-thirds of the city’s debt to vote yes. Alternatively, however, the city could pursue a forcible restructuring plan in a legal process called a “cram down,” which would allow Rhodes to implement debt cuts over the objections of creditors.

    The city said it plans to file additional amendments to the restructuring plan before April 14.

    In the new restructuring documents, the city said bonus payments paid to general employees’ annuity accounts between 2003 and 2013 were “imprudent and excessive” and should have been devoted to growing pension assets.

    The new restructuring plan does not estimate the amount of money lost to the GRS fund through these bonus credits, but the Free Press has previously reported that the “13th check” bonuses totaled close to $1 billion over time.

    To take back some of those excess interest credits, the annuity accounts of those workers will be recalculated to reflect the actual investment returns enjoyed by the general pension fund during those years, Orr proposed.

    Among the new documents filed today is one outlining terms of the “grand bargain,” a deal in which foundations, the State of Michigan and the DIA would collectively provide $816 million to reduce pension cuts and allow the museum to be transferred to an independent nonprofit.

    State lawmakers have yet to approve the funding, in part because retirees haven’t agreed to accept the conditional offer.

    Orr has said he wants to avoid selling art. But retirees would have to vote for the deal, thus giving up their right to sue the State of Michigan over pension cuts.

    While the largest foundation pledges have been previously reported — including $125 million from the Ford Foundation and $100 million from the Kresge Foundation — amounts from all local foundations were listed in the new restructuring documents. They include $25 million from the William Davidson Foundation; $10 million each from the Community Foundation for Southeast Michigan, Hudson-Webber Foundation, Fred A. and Barbara M. Erb Family Foundation and Charles Stewart Mott Foundation; and $6 million from the McGregor Fund.

    A combined $7.5 million from the Paul and Carol C. Schaap Foundation ($5 million) and Max M. and Marjorie S. Fisher Foundation ($2.5 million) will be credited against the DIA’s commitment to raise $100 million for the grand bargain, according to the new documents.

    The city also revealed today that it has been in contact with 41 companies or investors about the private management and operation of its water and sewer department. Of those, 16 have told the city they intend to respond by the April 7 deadline the city included in a request for information it issued earlier in March.

    If the city decides to accept a bid for the private management and operation of the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department it would scuttle plans to create regional authority that involves Oakland, Macomb and Wayne counties.

    The possibility of hiring a private company to operate or purchase the water and sewer system was not included in the first version of the documents.

    The city plans to review the responses it receives by April 7 and then ask qualified companies for more detailed bids by June 1.

    By Nathan Bomey, Matt Helms, Brent Snavely and Alisa Priddle

    BY  | APRIL 1, 2014

     

     




    Rural Hospitals Are on Life Support.

    Hospitals may be rural America’s single most important and most endangered institution. Between having to serve some of the sickest and most expensive populations and federal cuts, can small town America save more from closing?

    Forkland, Ala., is about as remote and as poor as towns in the United States get. Located on the western edge of Alabama’s “black belt”—50 miles south of Tuscaloosa—its 645 residents earn just over $10,000 per capita a year, less than half the state average. The town has just one store—a squat whitewashed building next to city hall—with a smattering of soft drinks, candy bars and potato chips on its otherwise empty shelves. What Forkland does have is kin and community. Get off Highway 43 and the potholed county roads that connect to it, and you’ll find that sense of community down the red clay roads winding through the pines that lead to the shacks, single-wides and small homes where generations of family live. When newborns enter this world, they do so at nearby Bryan Whitfield Memorial Hospital.

    Forkland is small, poor and overwhelmingly African-American. Next-door Demopolis is larger (population 7,500), wealthier and equally divided between blacks and whites. With two paper mills and a cement factory, Demopolis has a significant industrial economy. It also has another economic driver that supports and supplements local industry: health care. Bryan Whitfield isn’t simply a vital provider of medical services for its residents and those in the surrounding areas. It is one of the region’s largest employers with about 260 people on its payroll. To put the hospital’s impact in context, its budget is more than three times larger than the city and county budget combined.

    Like most rural hospitals, Bryan Whitfield is in many ways a creature of government. Built with the help of federal funds under the Hill-Burton Act of 1948, the hospital is organized under Alabama state law as an independent health authority. The city of Demopolis appoints five of the hospital board’s nine members and, under the terms of a court settlement, appropriates $125,000 a year to provide indigent care to town residents. Marengo County, in which the hospital is situated, pays an even larger sum—$360,000 a year—under the terms of the same settlement. By far the biggest contributors to the hospital’s bottom line, though, are Medicare and Medicaid. Roughly 75 percent of the hospital’s $73 million-plus budget comes from those programs, a significantly higher percentage than the average hospital.

    In rural Alabama, $73 million is a large number. Even so, Bryan Whitfield’s profit margins are razor thin—and recently got thinner. About two years ago, the federal recovery audit program found that the hospital had improperly billed Medicare; the federal government demanded that the hospital repay $1.3 million immediately. That presented hospital administrator Mike Marshall with tough choices. In December, he announced that the board had voted to lay off 40 employees and shut down the hospital’s labor and delivery unit, which delivered 231 babies last year, but which did not collect enough revenue to cover its costs. If the labor and delivery unit shuts down, the residents of Demopolis and the areas that surround it, like Forkland, will be forced to drive to Tuscaloosa, Selma or Meridian, Miss., to receive prenatal care and to give birth.

    “Some simply won’t make it,” says Forkland Mayor Derrick Biggs. “You’ll have the baby on the way.”

    Tiffany Ward, one of the two doctors in Demopolis who delivers babies, warns of even more dire consequences. Many pregnant women depend on neighbors or on public transport to get to a doctor’s office for a checkup, she points out. With prenatal care and delivery services an hour or more away at best, she says, “babies are going to die.”

    Unborn babies aren’t the only ones at risk. Many residents of Demopolis see the debate about the future of labor and delivery as a proxy for something larger—whether their community will be able to maintain a full-service hospital. Similar debates are playing out in rural communities around the country, engendered by the costs of health care for small populations, by the way the federal Affordable Care Act (ACA) affects hospital financing and by decisions about what mix of services can best serve the health needs of a community that can’t afford to have it all.

    The stakes are high—and not just in terms of the availability of medical services. “Health care is actually the fastest-growing job in rural America,” notes Maggie Elehwany, government affairs and policy vice president of the National Rural Health Association (NRHA). “If the hospital closes, a lot of these towns wither on the vine.”

    The numbers are startling. Rural America is sicker, poorer, older and more overweight than the country as a whole. That puts financial pressure on the hospitals that serve it.

    “They are in more isolated areas, which means they have lower patient volumes overall,” says Adam Higman, a vice president with Soyring Consulting, a firm that works with rural hospitals. Lower volume leads to lower staffing levels, which makes it hard to roll out new technology and implement new rules. “You can’t get the same utilization out of the equipment,” Higman says. “Every case is a higher cost to them than it would be to another facility.”

    They are also more dependent on Medicaid and Medicare, which tend to reimburse providers at lower levels than private insurance. According to Keith Mueller, who heads a center for rural health policy analysis at the University of Iowa, some 18 percent of rural Americans are Medicaid recipients, compared with 15 percent of urban Americans. Doctors in rural America receive an average of 25 percent of their reimbursements from Medicaid, as compared with 20 percent for nonrural doctors.

    Not every rural hospital is struggling. In the energy-rich Mountain West and Great Plains, some rural hospitals enjoy monopoly positions that allow them to earn huge profits. But in areas where the economy is sluggish, as in rural Alabama, hospitals aren’t just hurting, they are starting to close. The state has lost six hospitals in the past 18 months, more than in the previous 20 years, according to Don Williamson, the state health officer and acting head of the state’s Medicaid agency. Another 22 hospitals are operating in the red. Many are serving areas with high numbers of uninsured patients, a combination that will make it extremely difficult for them to survive.

    It’s not just Alabama. More than 40 percent of rural hospitals nationwide are operating in the red, according to the NRHA. Even hospitals that are profitable typically operate with narrow profit margins. Many of these facilities are subsidized or owned outright by local or county governments, making what to do about the local hospital one of the most challenging issues faced by local officials. It’s a challenge greatly magnified by the controversies surrounding the ACA.

    When the reform was signed into law four years ago, the expectation was that virtually all of the nation’s 48 million uninsured would gain health insurance, either through subsidized health insurance policies purchased on health exchanges or through expanded state Medicaid programs. In anticipation of this outcome, significant changes were made to the Medicare and Medicaid payments system. Most notably, the ACA requires that the federal government begin making deep cuts in so-called Disproportionate Share Hospital (DSH) payments to hospitals serving areas with high numbers of Medicaid patients and people without insurance. Other adjustments that have benefited rural hospitals are already being phased out. That might have been tolerable if hospitals were seeing a surge of new customers with health insurance. They are not. The U.S. Supreme Court’s summer 2012 ruling on the constitutionality of the ACA gave states the ability to opt out of Medicaid expansion. As of today, only 25 states (and the District of Columbia), have chosen to expand. The result, says Tennessee Hospital Association president Craig Becker, is a slow-motion disaster.

    “Between the ACA and other cuts, we are looking at $7.4 billion in cuts over a 10-year period,” says Becker. “The cuts”—which begin in earnest in 2016—“are so catastrophic to some of our hospitals, not only rural hospitals but some of our big city hospitals as well, that I don’t know how they are going to survive, particularly without a [Medicaid] expansion in place.”

    The situation poses challenges for state and local government officials. State officials must contend with the politically hot question of expanding Medicaid. Local officials in communities such as Demopolis are looking at committing ever-larger amounts of public funds to the local hospital or risking the loss of valuable services. In the process, they are making life-and-death decisions, both literally and figuratively, for their constituents and their communities.

    The debate over the future of Demopolis’ labor and delivery unit is many things: a debate about the value of life; about a community’s demands and its limits; and about the future of rural medical care, a future embodied by people like Tiffany Ward and her husband Johnny.

    Ward is Demopolis’ newest physician. At the age of 30, she is also by far its youngest—and the kind of physician smalltown America dreams of. She grew up in a town of 350 people in rural Nebraska. When she decided to become a doctor, she wanted to be a generalist, someone who delivered babies, performed surgery and provided care in a rural area. When she completed her residency, she was recruited to be a doctor in Demopolis. Ward and her husband decided to move, even though it meant that Johnny would have to give up his high-paying job. Three months after arriving in Demopolis, Tiffany read in the local paper that the board had voted to close the labor and delivery unit.

    Ward felt betrayed. She felt that she had been clear about her passion for obstetrics, even discussing strategies for increasing the number of kids born at Bryan Whitfield with the hospital board. She and other physicians in the community also worried about the effect a closure would have on patients.

    “Transportation is a problem,” says Dr. Alex Curtis, who divides his time between private practice and Bryan Whitfield’s emergency room. “We have women who live two or three miles from the clinic and can’t make it to their visit. We’re now going to expect them to drive 50 miles?”

    It’s a concern that a significant number of Demopolis residents seem to share. On Jan. 30, the city council and county board of commissioners held an unusual joint meeting to explore whether some joint effort to preserve the unit might be possible. Among the ideas discussed was the possibility of enacting a small property tax increase or submitting a larger tax increase to voters as a whole.

    It didn’t happen. While the city offered $68,000 to keep labor and delivery open for an extra two months, the county board of commissioners balked at the suggestion that the county should make a matching contribution. Nor did county commissioners embrace the idea of raising property taxes.

    “How would you like to run [for re-election] on the platform, ‘I’ve raised taxes so we can help people from surrounding counties have babies here?’” asks hospital board member and local businessman Jay Shows, who notes that only 40 percent of the babies born at Bryan Whitfield are Marengo County residents. By a 3-2 vote, the board of commissioners voted the proposal down.

    As Bryan Whitfield struggles to shut down unprofitable hospital operations, the town of Thomasville, 45 miles to the south, is doing something very different. It’s preparing to open a brand-new hospital in 2016. The primary reason for doing so is economic. Thomasville is trying to supplement its paper and lumber mill economy with steel and pipe fabricators. It’s betting that the city’s location—100 miles north of the port of Mobile, which is expecting a surge in business after the widening of the Panama Canal is completed—will attract new industry. The documents on Mayor Sheldon Day’s desk make it clear where he thinks such investment will come from: A brochure touting Thomasville’s attractions is in Chinese.

    According to Day, in the past seven years Thomasville has attracted $700 million in investments that Day says will create 1,500 new jobs. However, these are not low-risk jobs. Injuries are common and employers want treatment for injured workers to be readily available. “We recruited industries here with the understanding that a new hospital would be built,” Day says.

    Thomasville had a small, 49-bed private hospital—until its parent company went bankrupt three years ago. Now the city is partnering with a group of investors to build a facility that will be three times larger than the old one. The new hospital, however, will have only 29 beds. Instead of inpatient hospital beds, the new facility will have a large emergency room and spaces that can be used for more profitable undertakings, such as outpatient care.

    “That’s where the business is today, whether you like Obamacare or not,” says Day. “At the end of the day, Obamacare is designed to keep people out of the hospital, which means outpatient services are what will be easier to get paid for.”

    The old hospital had a labor and delivery unit. The new hospital will not.

    Back in Demopolis, hospital administrator Mike Marshall isn’t surprised. “I came here from the for-profit sector,” he says. “I told board members, ‘If you want me to make this profitable, I can make it extremely profitable, but there are things you will lose as a result of that.’” The challenge, says Marshall, is finding the right balance. Ultimately, he says, “it’s a community hospital, and we are trying to do everything we can to serve the needs of the community.”

    Marshall’s actions in Demopolis—and Thomasville’s plans for the future—illustrate something important. At the national and state level, debates about Medicaid expansion and the impact of health-care reform on hospitals tend to portray outcomes in binary terms: Hospitals stay open or they close. Sometimes that is exactly what happens. After all, rural hospitals in states such as Alabama and Georgia, which did not expand their Medicaid program, are already beginning to fail—and more failures are a virtual certainty in other states that refuse to expand Medicaid coverage.

    What is more common, however, is that the mix of services rural hospitals offer will change. Instead of offering a full range of services, hospitals will focus on revenue opportunities. Rather than operating as stand-alone facilities, hospitals will join in the hospital industry’s movement toward greater consolidation. Profitable rural hospitals, for instance, might join a for-profit chain, bringing the community the fiscal relief of a major new taxpayer but also a loss of control over what services will be available in the community. Other rural hospitals will affiliate with a larger institution that can offer technical assistance with the latest technological and quality initiatives as well as access to capital. This could bring real benefits, but it also creates the risk that facilities that once offered a full range of services become little more than glorified emergency rooms. That’s better than nothing but worse than what many communities have now—hospitals that serve their communities as their communities want to be served.

    In the end, the decision about what direction health services go will be made by elected officials. To get a new hospital, Thomasville passed a half-cent sales tax increase. Mayor Day estimates that it will raise at least half a million dollars a year for the new facility. Some in Demopolis hope for something similar, among them Dan England, the sole Republican on the Marengo County board of supervisors.

    “It may surprise people, me being a Republican and all, but I think the hospital is kind of like the fire department,” England says. “We don’t expect the fire department to fund itself. There has to be public support.”

    But that doesn’t mean that England is wholly enthusiastic about providing it. He’d prefer that the city of Demopolis step up.

    Hospital administrator Mike Marshall and the majority of his board believe they are fighting for the community too. A positive cash flow isn’t about greed. It’s about maintaining the ability to recruit doctors, invest in equipment and undertake capital improvements. In short, it’s about maintaining the hospital’s viability.

    “Look at the needs of the community,” says Marshall, noting that the number of deliveries has been declining for years. The hospital, in short, is allocating $1.4 million a year to serve 145 residents. “Every year at budget time we talk about it,” he says. “It has become such a drain that it is harming our ability as a hospital to be viable as a whole.”

    As for the idea that babies will die if labor and delivery closes, Marshall and his board don’t buy it. “It will be a hardship on our citizens,” says board member Shows. But “it is not the end of the world. And if they come in at 2 in the morning, we will deliver the baby.”

    As for Tiffany Ward, she has made her position clear: If the labor and delivery room closes, she’s leaving. “We fell in love with this city,” she says. Still, she says, “I don’t want to waste a skill I went to school for 11 years for, either.”

    Demopolis Mayor Mike Grayson admits that, from a business perspective, keeping labor and delivery open doesn’t make sense. But, he adds quickly, “I have yet to hear a good alternative.”

    What does seem clear is this. The decisions to come will only get more difficult—and not just in Demopolis. As Don Williamson, Alabama’s health officer, points out, in rural areas there are not enough physicians, there is poor access to specialty physicians plus some of the more lucrative revenue-generating procedures are not available. “Keeping a rural hospital in play,” Williamson says, “is a difficult, difficult thing.”

    BY  | APRIL 2014




    Bartolotta Takes Over as Chair of SIFMA's Muni Division.

    WASHINGTON — FirstSouthwest vice chairman Michael Bartolotta has taken over the chairmanship of the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association’s municipal securities division.

    Bartolotta, who was a vice chair of the division, replaced Stratford Shields as chairman. Shields is moving from Morgan Stanley to RBC Capital Markets to be head of its Midwestern banking business.  He is currently on a 90-day “garden leave” from Morgan Stanley and is not expected to start his new position until June.

    Bartolotta, a former chairman of the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board, is co-manager of FirstSouthwest’s public finance group in Houston and is also responsible for the firm’s information technology infrastructure. He has been at that firm for 18 years, but has more than 25 years of experience in the public finance industry. He is also a member of SIFMA’s municipal executive steering committee.

    David Stephens, a managing director at Bank of America Merrill Lynch, will continue as the municipal securities division’s vice chair and John Rolander, a managing director at Fifth Third Capital Markets, will remain the division’s treasurer, SIFMA said in a release.

    BY LYNN HUME

    MAR 28, 2014 12:27pm ET




    IRS Declines to Limit Retroactive Effect of Revocation of Exemption.

    In technical advice, the IRS declined to provide relief from retroactive revocation of an organization’s tax-exempt status. On its exemption application, the organization said it would provide Bible-based financial education. But the IRS subsequently discovered that the organization’s primary activity was promoting and enrolling people in debt management plans for a for-profit entity that processed the debt management plans. The organization also did not offer any educational seminars or workshops even though it had said on its exemption application that it would do so, and it charged fees for services after having said on its exemption application that it would not do that. Also, contrary to what it said on its exemption application, the organization was a direct outgrowth of its founders’ family and marriage counseling organization. The organization did not inform the IRS of these changes in its operations.

    Therefore, the IRS concluded that revocation may be retroactive to the year under examination when the agency determined that the organization had made material changes to its operations.

     

    UIL: 7805.03-00
    Release Date: 3/28/2014

    Date: January 3, 2014

    Area Director, Area 4 TEGE Appeals,
    Philadelphia, PA

    Taxpayer’s Name: * * *
    Taxpayer’s Address: * * *
    Taxpayer’s ID No.: * * *
    Year(s) Involved: * * *
    Conference Held: * * *

    LEGEND:

    Taxpayer = * * *

    ISSUE

    Whether the Commissioner, TE/GE, should exercise discretion to grant the Taxpayer relief under § 7805(b) of the Internal Revenue Code to limit the retroactive effect of revocation of its exempt status under § 501(c)(3).

    FACTS

    Application for ExemptionTaxpayer applied for tax-exempt status, describing its activities on the Form 1023. It stated it was formed “to meet the needs of persons experiencing financial difficulties by offering Biblical based financial counseling, education, encouragement and empowerment.” Further, its organizing documents provide it is organized and operated exclusively for religious purposes within the meaning of § 501(c)(3). It was founded by two persons who are both clinical psychologists and licensed family and marriage counselors (“Founders”). Its Board of Directors consisted of one of the founders serving as Chairman and President, the other founder as Vice President, and three other individuals; none of the directors were to be compensated.

    To achieve its objectives, Taxpayer stated the following programs would form the basis of its services:

        (1)

    Telephone Counseling

         — Provide telephone financial counseling for those individuals who are unable to physically access its facilities.

    (2) Face-to-Face Counseling — Provide face-to-face financial counseling for those seeking assistance with restoration of credit, financial management, debt management, and debt elimination. This will be accomplished within the context and with the partnership of the local church.

    (3) Seminars — Provide seminars and workshops that disseminate information about financial management, budgeting, stewardship and Biblical financial principles, primarily through the local church.

    (4) Resource Support — Produce and make available to clients, resources that support its efforts to fulfill its mission. These products will be made available to its clients as they interface with its programs.

    (5) Media Ministry — Produce and broadcast various media programs such as radio, television, and Internet communications that fulfill its mission and purpose.
    Taxpayer’s financial support, listed in order of size, was to consist of (1) Donations, and (2) a third party organization will provide debt management services. It described its fundraising program as “Initial start-up and seed monies will be acquired from individual donors. Monies acquired from seminars and workshops will be based upon free will offerings. Products will be provided for a suggested donation.”Taxpayer answered “No” when asked if it was the outgrowth of (or successor to) another organization, or had a special relationship with another organization by reason of interlocking directorates or other factors. Taxpayer also answered “No” when asked if recipients are required to pay for Taxpayer’s benefits, services, or products.

    Based on these representations, the Service issued a favorable determination letter and classified Taxpayer as a public charity.

    Examination

    The examination found that Taxpayer’s primary activity was enrolling individuals in debt management plans (“DMP”) in return for fees from debtors and fair share payments from its creditors. Taxpayer’s phone counselors enrolled callers; it did not process the DMP applications itself, but rather forwarded completed DMP packages to a for-profit company for processing. Taxpayer’s DMP agreement required clients to make a monthly “suggested donation” of $29, in addition to payments to creditors. DMP clients made payments directly to the for-profit company. The for-profit company disbursed the payments to creditors, and on a weekly basis, paid Taxpayer for its portion of the “fair share” payments and monthly DMP client’s suggested donation. The examination revealed that 99 percent of Taxpayer’s revenue came from DMP activity.

    Taxpayer’s training manual instructed counselors and administrators to aggressively pursue potential clients. It provided a specific script to keep the conversations short, but to collect all the information required by the creditors for DMP enrollment. The manual appears to instruct the counselors to do one thing — sell DMPs to potential clients.

    Taxpayer acknowledged that it did not conduct any educational seminars or workshops, through the local church or elsewhere, during the tax years under exam. Taxpayer spent less than $800 on educational activities during the years under exam. The only “resources” that it made available to its clients consisted of a PowerPoint presentation on subjects of money management and finding meaningful employment posted on its website. It did not produce or broadcast any educational programs for a “media ministry.”

    The examination revealed that Taxpayer had been conducting transactions with several related for-profit businesses and exempt entities. Such relationships were not disclosed during the application process, including the fact that Taxpayer was an outgrowth of the founders’ family and marriage counseling organization. The Founders received compensation from Taxpayer and the related organizations. However, Taxpayer had no written employment agreements with Founders, and did not offer evidence of the hours each Founder devoted to his position at Taxpayer. Furthermore, Taxpayer paid one of the related organizations rent during one of the exam years.

    Taxpayer did not report any of these changes in operation to the Service.

    Taxpayer appealed the proposed revocation. Appeals sustained the revocation. Following the appeals process, the National Office received this request for relief from retroactive revocation as a mandatory TAM.

    Legal Standard:

    Section 7805(b)(8) provides that the Secretary may prescribe the extent, if any, to which any ruling (including any judicial decision or any administrative determination other than by regulation) relating to the internal revenue laws shall be applied without retroactive effect.

    Section 1.501(a)-1(a)(2) of the Income Tax Regulations states that an organization that the Commissioner has determined to be exempt under § 501(a) may rely upon such determination so long as there are no substantial changes in the organization’s character, purposes, or methods of operation, and subject to the Commissioner’s inherent power to revoke rulings because of a change in the law or regulations, or for other good cause.

    Section 301.7805-1(b) of the Procedure and Administration Regulations grants the Commissioner authority to prescribe the extent to which any ruling issued by his authorization shall be applied without retroactive effect.

    Section 4.04 of Rev. Proc. 2013-5, 2013-1 I.R.B.170, states that all requests for relief under § 7805(b) must be made through a request for technical advice (TAM). Section 19.04 states further that when, during the course of an examination by EO Examinations or consideration by the Appeals Area Director, a taxpayer is informed of a proposed revocation, a request to limit the retroactive application of the revocation must itself be made in the form of a request for a TAM and should discuss the items listed in § 18.06 of Rev. Proc. 2013-5, as they relate to the taxpayer’s situation.

    Section 18 of Rev. Proc. 2013-5 lists the criteria necessary for granting § 7805(b) relief as well as the effect of such relief. Section 18.06 states, in part, that a TAM that revokes a determination letter is not applied retroactively if:

        (1) there has been no misstatement or omission of material facts;

    (2) the facts at the time of the transaction are not materially different from the facts on which the determination letter was based;

    (3) there has been no change in the applicable law; and

    (4) the taxpayer directly involved in the determination letter acted in good faith in relying on the determination letter, and the retroactive revocation would be to the taxpayer’s detriment.
    Rev. Proc. 2013-9, 2013-2 I.R.B. 255, sets forth procedures for issuing determination letters (from EO Determinations) and rulings (on applications for recognition of exempt status by EO Technical) on the exempt status of organizations under § 501. These procedures also apply to revocation or modification of determination letters or rulings.Section 12.01 of Rev. Proc. 2013-9 states, in part, that the revocation or modification of a determination letter or ruling recognizing exemption may be retroactive if the organization omitted or misstated a material fact, or operated in a manner materially different from that originally represented. In certain cases an organization may seek relief from retroactive revocation or modification of a determination or ruling under § 7805(b) using the procedures set forth in Rev. Proc. 2013-5, §§ 18 and 19.

    Section 12.01(1) of Rev. Proc. 2013-9 states that where there is a material change inconsistent with exemption in the character, purpose, or method of operation of an organization, revocation or modification will ordinarily take effect as of the date of such material change.

    In Automobile Club of Michigan v. Commissioner, 353 U.S. 180, 184 (1957), the Supreme Court held that the Commissioner has broad discretion to revoke a ruling retroactively. It further held that a retroactive ruling “may not be disturbed unless . . . the Commissioner abused his discretion vested in him . . .” Id.

    In Stevens Bros. Foundation, Inc. v. Commissioner, 324 F.2d 633, 641 (1963), the court found the Foundation’s efforts “far from convincing” to demonstrate that its information reports were adequate and sufficient to apprise the Commissioner of its entry into the business activities which led to denial of its tax-exempt status. Shortly after receiving its tax-exempt ruling, the Foundation contracted with a for-profit company, but failed to disclose this fact to the Commissioner on its Forms 990. The court upheld the Service’s retroactive revocation.

    In Variety Club Tent No. 6 Charities, Inc. v. Commissioner, 74 T.C.M. (CCH) 1485 (1997), the court held that petitioner “operated in a manner materially different from that originally represented.” The organization represented in its exemption application and articles of incorporation that no part of its net income would inure to the benefit of any private shareholder or individual. But the court found instances of inurement over several years, and upheld the Service’s retroactive revocation for such years.

    ANALYSIS

    During the years under examination, Taxpayer’s operations were materially different from the description it provided in its exemption application. See Variety Club Tent No. 6 Charities, T.C. Memo 1997-575; Rev. Proc. 2013-9, § 12.01; Rev. Proc. 2013-5 at § 18.06 (no misstatement or omission of material facts or materially different facts). In its application, Taxpayer described multiple plans for Bible-based financial education through in-person counseling, seminars and workshops, resource support, and public media. However, the examination established that Taxpayer’s primary activity was promoting, marketing, and enrolling individuals in DMPs for the for-profit entity that processed the DMPs. It also failed to offer any educational seminars or workshops, or media activities, as it had represented in its Form 1023. Contrary to Taxpayer’s representation in its Form 1023, the examination also established that Taxpayer charged customers fees for its services, including a monthly service fee for DMPs. Furthermore, despite representing its source of revenue would be derived from “donations”, Taxpayer did not receive public support nor public donations. Taxpayer also represented in its Form 1023 that it was not the outgrowth of another organization; however, the exam revealed it was a direct outgrowth of the founders’ family and marriage counseling organization. Contrary to Taxpayer’s representations, the examination revealed that it had several business relationships with other related entities that it did not disclose. Taxpayer did not apprise the Service of these material changes in its operations. See Stevens Bros. Foundation, 324 F.2d at 641 (failure to adequately and sufficiently inform the Service of material changes in operations).Therefore, revocation may be retroactive to the year under examination when the Service determined Taxpayer had made material changes in its operations. See Automobile Club of Michigan, 353 U.S. at 184 (Commissioner has broad discretion to revoke a ruling retroactively); Rev. Proc. 2013-9, section 12.01(1) (revocation ordinarily applies as of the date of the material changes in operations).

    CONCLUSION

    The Commissioner, TEGE, has declined to exercise discretion to limit the retroactive effect of revocation of exempt status under § 501(c)(3). Revocation is effective as of * * *.

    Citations: TAM 201413013




    Court Holds Document's Privilege Was Waived in Exempt Status Suit.

    A U.S. district court denied a foundation’s motion to preclude the use of an allegedly privileged document in a suit challenging the revocation of its tax-exempt status, finding that attorney-client privilege was waived by the inadvertent disclosure of the document and the privilege holders’ failure to act promptly to assert the privilege.

     

    EDUCATIONAL ASSISTANCE FOUNDATION
    FOR THE DESCENDANTS OF HUNGARIAN IMMIGRANTS
    IN THE PERFORMING ARTS, INC.,
    Plaintiff,
    v.
    UNITED STATES OF AMERICA,
    Defendant.

    UNITED STATES DISTRICT COURT
    FOR THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

    MEMORANDUM OPINION

    The plaintiff, Educational Assistance Foundation for the Descendants of Hungarian Immigrants in the Performing Arts, Inc. (“Foundation”), challenges the Internal Revenue Service’s (“IRS”) decision to revoke its status as a tax-exempt organization under 26 U.S.C. § 501(c)(3) (2006). Amended Complaint for Declaratory Judgment (“Am. Compl.”) ¶¶ 1, 12, 27-31. In reaching its decision to revoke the Foundation’s tax-exempt status, the IRS relied in part upon a document that the Foundation asserts is protected by attorney-client privilege. Plaintiff’s Motion to Preclude the Government From Introducing Privileged Letter From Barrett Weinberger to Attorney Stephen Bolden and the Entire Administrative Record, and For Related Relief (“Pl.’s Mot.”) at 3-4; United States’ Memorandum Regarding Allegedly Privileged Document (“Def.’s Opp’n”) at 2. The Foundation’s motion to preclude the introduction of the allegedly privileged document in these proceedings and a related motion to intervene are currently before the Court. For the reasons set forth below, the Court concludes that it must deny the motion to preclude the introduction of the contested document and deny the motion to intervene as moot.1

    I. BACKGROUND

    Effective December 24, 2003, the IRS recognized the Foundation as a tax-exempt organization under 26 U.S.C. § 501(c)(3) “created to assist the educational development of descendants of Hungarian [i]mmigrants who had a particular interest and talent in the arts.” Pl.’s Mot. at 5; see also Def.’s Opp’n at 5. The Foundation is funded entirely with a charitable bequest by the Estate of Julius Schaller. Pl.’s Mot. at 5; Def.’s Opp’n at 5. Prior to his death, Julius Schaller engaged attorney Gary B. Freedman to draft his will. Pl.’s Mot. at 5. The will drafted by Freedman was subsequently executed, and Schaller later died on December 28, 2003. Id.In 2005, the co-executors of Schaller’s will, Barrett Weinberger and Frances Odza, along with the will’s beneficiaries, retained attorney Stephen R. Bolden to bring suit against Freedman for malpractice in drafting Schaller’s will. Id. at 6; Def.’s Opp’n at 6. A December 18, 2005 letter from Barrett Weinberger to Stephen Bolden is at the center of the dispute before the Court. In it, Weinberger describes the relationship between the Estate of Julius Schaller and the Foundation. See Pl.’s Mot., Exhibit (“Ex.”) 2 (December 18, 2005 Letter from Barrett Weinberger to Stephen R. Bolden (“Weinberger-Bolden Letter”)).

    In March 2007, the IRS initiated an audit of the Foundation. See Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 8 (Case Chronology) at 2.2 The IRS subsequently commenced a criminal investigation of Barrett Weinberger, Pl.’s Mot. at 8 n.4; Def.’s Opp’n at 7, and, in January 2008, conducted an audit of the Schaller Estate’s tax return, Pl.’s Mot. at 7. On April 20, 2009, the IRS sent an Information Document Request to the Foundation in connection with the ongoing investigation. See Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 6 (April 20, 2009 Information Document Request (“April 20 Request”)). In addition to asking for further documentation from the Foundation, the IRS enclosed several documents, including the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, with the following instructions:

      Enclosed with this [Information Document Request] are records received from another IRS operating division with regards to the arrangement between the Estate of Julius Schaller and The Educational Assistance Foundation For Descendants of Hungarian Immigrants in the Performing Arts, Inc. Such records are being provided to you for comment so they can be included in the administrative record. If you have any comments on such records, please respond in writing.

    Id. at 6. Barrett Weinberger responded in a letter dated April 29, 2009, with the following:

        I am in receipt of your Information Document Requests #4, #5, and #6 (Form 4564) addressed to the Educational Assistance Foundation for Descendants of Hungarian Immigrants in the Performing Arts, Inc.

    While I remain committed to my previous promise to cooperate as fully as possible with your ongoing audit, due to the ongoing and concurrent criminal investigation (from which you obtained some of the records on which you have asked me to comment) and on the advice of my counsel, I cannot presently provide you with any testimony, comment on any documents, nor address any of your inquiries.
    Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 9 (April 29, 2009 Letter from Barrett Weinberger to IRS) at 2. In June 2009, the IRS discontinued the criminal investigation of Weinberger. See Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 8 (Case Chronology) at 32.The audit of the Foundation continued, however, culminating in a November 13, 2009 letter to the Foundation proposing the revocation of its tax-exempt status and enclosing a Report of Examination detailing the agency’s reasoning for the proposed revocation. Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 7 (November 13, 2009 Proposed Revocation (“Proposed Revocation”)) at 2. The Weinberger-Bolden Letter is referenced and quoted in the Proposed Revocation. Id. at 14-15. By letter dated January 11, 2010, Weinberger, on behalf of the Foundation, submitted a protest to the Proposed Revocation. Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 10 (January 11, 2010 Protest (“Protest”)) at 3. The Protest raised the following concerns about the records relied upon by the IRS in reaching its decision:

      The letter referenced in the [Proposed Revocation] is problematic in this investigation and action for it is clearly and facially protected from review by the attorney-client privilege. The letter is a correspondence from the undersigned, individually, to Stephen [R.] Bolden, Esq., a partner of the law firm of Fell and Spalding. Mr. Bolden represented the plaintiffs in their claim against Gary Freedman. While it is unclear how this letter found its way into the administrative file for this matter, it is clear that it should be excised and not relied upon.

    Id. at 7. A footnote immediately following the quoted passage states that “[i]n an August 17, 2007 Information Document Request . . . from [IRS agent] Andrew Hay to the Taxpayer, Mr. Hay indicates that this letter was obtained ‘from another IRS operating division[,]’ yet requested comment on its contents.”3 Id. at 7 n.5. Aside from disputing the summary of the letter’s contents as “taken out of context and poorly summarized for the purpose of connoting a malicious intent” and as “impl[ying] inappropriate conduct,” these are the sole references to the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in the Foundation’s Protest. Id. at 7, 8-9. The IRS ultimately issued a final revocation of the Foundation’s tax-exempt status. Def.’s Opp’n at 6; see also Pl.’s Mot. at 4.The concurrent audit of the Schaller Estate’s tax return resulted in an assessment for additional taxes and penalties based on the IRS’ disallowance of the Estate’s charitable contribution to the Foundation. Pl.’s Mot. at 7. On December 19, 2008, the Estate filed a petition with the United States Tax Court challenging the assessment. Def.’s Opp’n, Ex. F (Notification of Receipt of Petition and Petition); see also Pl.’s Mot. at 7. During discovery in the litigation before the Tax Court, the IRS produced portions of its criminal investigation file created during the investigation of Barrett Weinberger. Pl.’s Mot. at 7-8. After discovering the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in the file, counsel for the Estate of Julius Schaller sent a letter to the IRS on December 1, 2010, asserting that the letter was a privileged communication and “request[ing] the IRS immediately segregate [the Weinberger-Bolden Letter] from the rest of its files, and return all copies of said document to [the Estate] as soon as possible.” Id. at 8; Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 3 (December 1, 2010 Letter from Ian Comisky to IRS (“Comisky-IRS Letter”)). The Estate also asked the IRS to “advise [it] as to any use that the IRS has made of this document to date, and the manner in which this document came into your possession.” Pl.’s Mot. at 8; Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 3 (Comisky-IRS Letter). The IRS did not respond to the Estate’s letter, Pl.’s Mot. at 8; Def.’s Opp’n at 17, and the Estate subsequently filed a motion with the Tax Court to preclude the IRS from using the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in those proceedings, Pl.’s Mot. at 8. However, the motion was not resolved before the Tax Court litigation was stayed pending resolution of this case. See id. at 6 n.2.

    This case was initiated by the Foundation on August 30, 2011. Following the parties’ settlement of issues raised by the United States in a motion to dismiss, the parties filed a joint statement on August 2, 2012, in advance of the initial scheduling conference that was conducted in this case. Joint Report by the Parties, ECF No. 26. In the joint statement, the Foundation stated that it “believes that the administrative record in this matter contains information protected by the attorney-client privilege, and that the IRS used privileged information in making its determination to revoke [the Foundation’s] tax exempt status.” Id. at 6. The Foundation further indicated its intent to file a motion “challenging the use of information protected by the attorney-client privilege during its audit of [the Foundation]” and asserted its position that the administrative record compiled by the IRS should not be filed on the public docket until this motion is resolved by the Court. Id. During the initial scheduling hearing in this case, the Foundation again raised a concern about the inclusion of what it believed were privileged documents in the administrative record. SeeTranscript of August 9, 2012 Initial Scheduling Conference at 4:2-6:1, ECF No. 34. Before the Foundation filed its motion, the United States filed the administrative record containing the Weinberger-Bolden Letter and a memorandum quoting portions of the letter, and the Foundation moved to seal the administrative record and to strike the memorandum from the docket. See Plaintiff’s Motion to Seal Administrative Record and for Related Relief at 1, ECF No. 35; Plaintiff’s Motion to Strike the United States’ Memorandum Regarding Scope of Review in 26 U.S.C. § 7428 Declaratory Judgment Action and for Related Relief at 1, ECF No. 39. The Court granted both motions and ordered both the administrative record and the United States’ memorandum referring to the Weinberger-Bolden Letter stricken from the record. See ECF Nos. 37, 40, 41.

    The Foundation subsequently filed the motion currently before the Court challenging the inclusion of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in the administrative record and its use by the IRS. As its explanation for how it acquired the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, the United States submitted with its opposition to the Foundation’s motion an affidavit from Shaun Thurston, a Special Agent with the IRS Criminal Investigation Division. Def.’s Opp’n, Ex. 1 (Thurston Affidavit) ¶ 1. In it, Thurston avers

        [a]lthough I am not absolutely certain, to the best of my recollection the [Weinberger-Bolden Letter] was provided to me under IRS Summons by the accountant who had been retained with respect to the filing of the federal estate tax return for the Estate of Julius Schaller. That accountant was Craig Cohen. . . .

    To the best of my recollection, the [Weinberger-Bolden Letter] was provided to me by Mr. Cohen intentionally, and not inadvertently.
    Id. ¶¶ 4-5. In response to Agent Thurston’s representations, the Foundation submitted affidavits from Barrett Weinberger and Craig Cohen. Pl.’s Reply, Ex. 1 (Weinberger Affidavit), Ex. 2 (Cohen Affidavit). In his affidavit, Weinberger asserts that he has never intentionally disclosed the Weinberger-Bolden Letter to any third party and never provided a copy of the letter to Craig Cohen. Pl.’s Reply, Ex. 1 (Weinberger Affidavit) ¶¶ 12, 14. For his part, Cohen states that while he did provide Thurston with documents in response to a summons,

      I have . . . reviewed my files relating to the Estate of Julius Schaller, including copies of the documents my firm provided to IRS Special Agent Thurston. The [Weinberger-Bolden Letter] is not in our files. At no time did I (or anyone else at my firm) ever provide a copy of the [Weinberger-Bolden Letter] to IRS Special Agent Thurston.

    Pl.’s Reply, Ex. 2 (Cohen Affidavit) ¶¶ 4, 6.Simultaneously with the filing of the Foundation’s reply brief, Barrett Weinberger and Frances Odza, as co-executors of the Estate of Julius Schaller, and the entire class of beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller moved to intervene in this litigation in order to assert attorney-client privilege with respect to the Weinberger-Bolden Letter. Mot. Intervene at 1. The Court now turns to the parties’ arguments regarding the acquisition and use of the letter.

    II. ANALYSIS

    A. Standing to Assert the Attorney-Client PrivilegeAs an initial matter, the United States argues that the Foundation lacks standing to assert the attorney-client privilege as to the Weinberger-Bolden Letter because the privilege is held by Weinberger, Frances Odza, and the beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller.4 Def.’s Opp’n at 13-14. The Foundation argues in response that Barrett Weinberger, who serves as the president and director of the Foundation, can properly assert the privilege here because Stephen Bolden represented him in the malpractice litigation regarding the Schaller will. Pl.’s Reply at 11. Nonetheless, Weinberger, Odza, and the beneficiaries of the Schaller Estate have moved to intervene in order to assert the privilege in the event that the Court disagrees with the Foundation’s arguments on this point, Pl.’s Reply at 11-12; Mot. Intervene at 1, and have adopted the Foundation’s arguments regarding the Weinberger-Bolden Letter as their own,5 Intervene Reply at 2 n.2.

    As explained below, the Court finds that the actions taken to assert the privilege of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter and to recover it from the IRS after discovery of its disclosure were inadequate to protect any privilege with respect to the document and that the privilege has therefore been waived. It is undisputed that Barrett Weinberger learned that the IRS had acquired the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in April 2009. Whether he learned this information while he was acting in the capacity of president of the Foundation rather than as a beneficiary of the Estate of Julius Schaller (and thus the client of Stephen Bolden), Weinberger may not willfully ignore his knowledge that this document was disclosed simply because he learned of the disclosure while acting on behalf of the Foundation. Such indifference to the disclosure of the letter is inconsistent with the principle that “the confidentiality of communications covered by the privilege must be jealously guarded by the holder of the privilege lest it be waived.” In re Sealed Case, 877 F.2d 976, 980 (D.C. Cir. 1989). Armed with knowledge of the disclosure, Weinberger had the ability to act to preserve the privilege, yet, he did not. Consequently, the Court need not determine whether the Foundation can raise the privilege because regardless of who holds the privilege, the actions taken by any of the parties involved here were insufficient to preserve it. The motion to intervene by the co-executors and beneficiaries of the Schaller Estate is thus denied as moot.

    B. Acquisition of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter

    As noted previously, the parties offer differing theories as to how the IRS acquired a copy of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter. Both the Foundation and the United States agree that the letter was likely obtained during the criminal investigation of Barrett Weinberger, see Pl.’s Mot. at 12; Def.’s Opp’n at 7, consistent with the IRS’ initial representations to the Foundation regarding the source of the letter, Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 6 (April 20 Request) at 6 (identifying the records enclosed with the Information Document Request, including the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, as “received from another IRS operating division”). Relying on IRS Special Agent Shaun Thurston’s affidavit, the United States contends that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter “was voluntarily and intentionally provided to it, most likely by the accountant retained to prepare the Schaller Estate’s estate tax return.” Def.’s Opp’n at 7 (citing Def.’s Opp’n, Ex. 1 (Thurston Affidavit) ¶¶ 4-5). However, as the Foundation correctly points out, see Pl.’s Reply at 7, Thurston does not possess personal knowledge of the source of the letter, averring that while “to the best of [his] recollection,” the Weinberger-Bolden Letter was intentionally provided to him by Craig Cohen, he is “not absolutely certain” about how he received it, Def.’s Opp’n, Ex. 1 (Thurston Affidavit) ¶¶ 4-5.

    In addition to disputing that Craig Cohen intentionally provided the Weinberger-Bolden Letter to Thurston, Pl.’s Reply at 8 (citing Pl.’s Reply, Ex. 1 (Weinberger Affidavit) ¶¶ 12, 14, Ex. 2 (Cohen Affidavit) ¶ 6), the Foundation asserts that the IRS obtained the letter improperly, see Pl.’s Mot. at 12 n.9; Pl.’s Reply at 8-11. In support of its contention that the IRS illegally acquired the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, the Foundation points to “[t]he conflicting positions taken by the government in its responses” regarding how the IRS acquired the letter, Pl.’s Reply at 8 & n.5, the United States’ inability to conclusively state how the IRS obtained the letter, id. at 10, and the United States’ failure to produce a case chronology log for the criminal investigation of Barrett Weinberger, id. at 10-11, as suggestive of wrongdoing. As to the argument that the alleged inconsistency in the United States’ explanations regarding the acquisition of the letter supports the position that it was improperly obtained, the Court first notes that it discerns no inconsistency in the representations provided by the United States to this Court or the Tax Court, which uniformly maintain that the document was either intentionally or inadvertently provided to the IRS during the criminal investigation of Barrett Weinberger. See Pl.’s Mot. at 11 (quoting counsel for the United States during the initial scheduling hearing in this case as stating that “we believe the document they are referring to was actually submitted to the Internal Revenue Service”); id. at 12 (quoting counsel for the United States during a motion hearing in this case as stating that “[w]e believe it was obtained as part of the . . . criminal investigation . . . of Mr. Weinberger”); Pl.’s Reply at 7 (citing Thurston’s affidavit, which states that he believes the letter was provided to him by Craig Cohen during the criminal investigation of Barrett Weinberger); Pl.’s Reply at 8 n.5 (stating that during briefing on this issue before the Tax Court, the United States represented that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter “was freely provided to Special Agent Thurston and was either a voluntary disclosure or an inadvertent disclosure,” but not identifying that Thurston allegedly received the document from Cohen) (emphasis removed). While the United States’ representations include varying levels of detail regarding the acquisition of the letter, they all reflect the general contention that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter was either intentionally or inadvertently provided to Shaun Thurston during the criminal investigation of Barrett Weinberger.

    Most importantly though, like the deficiency identified by the Foundation in Thurston’s affidavit, the Foundation similarly can produce no individual with personal knowledge that the IRS improperly obtained the Weinberger-Bolden Letter and the documents submitted to the Court with its motion provide no evidence whatsoever of such wrongdoing.6 Absent evidence demonstrating the contrary, courts generally accord agencies the presumption of administrative regularity and good faith. FTC v. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., 626 F.2d 966, 975 (D.C. Cir. 1980) (citations omitted). The Court will not impute wrongdoing to the IRS based on nothing more than the Foundation’s speculation that IRS agents acted improperly, particularly when human error appears to be at least an equally plausible explanation for how the IRS acquired the Weinberger-Bolden Letter. See United Mine Workers of Am. Int’l Union v. Arch Mineral Corp., 145 F.R.D. 3, 6 (D.D.C. 1992) (declining to infer wrongdoing in the acquisition of allegedly privileged documents because the party asserting the privilege produced no evidence to support its allegations).

    Having rejected the Foundation’s assertion that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter was improperly acquired by the IRS, the Court concludes that the letter was either intentionally or inadvertently disclosed to the IRS. As noted previously, the parties have produced contradictory evidence regarding whether the disclosure of the letter was made by Craig Cohen. And as to the possibility that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter was inadvertently produced, neither party has proffered evidence on this point. Indeed, the very nature of inadvertent production would in all likelihood result in the individual who accidentally disclosed the document not having a current recollection of disclosure. The Court need not resolve this remaining dispute, however, because, even if the disclosure was inadvertent, the Court finds that the privilege has been waived, as explained below.

    C. Waiver of the Privilege

    With respect to disclosure of a communication covered by the attorney-client privilege, Federal Rule of Evidence 502 provides that

        [w]hen made in a federal proceeding or to a federal office or agency, the disclosure does not operate as a waiver in a federal or state proceeding if:

    (1) the disclosure is inadvertent;

    (2) the holder of the privilege or protection took reasonable steps to prevent disclosure; and

    (3) the holder promptly took reasonable steps to rectify the error, including (if applicable) following Federal Rule of Civil Procedure 26(b)(5)(B).
    Fed. R. Evid. 502(b). The party asserting the privilege, even if disclosure of the communication was inadvertent, bears the burden of establishing each of these three elements. Williams v. District of Columbia, 806 F. Supp. 2d 44, 48 (D.D.C. 2011) (citations omitted). The Advisory Committee Notes for Rule 502(b) set forth several non-dispositive factors often used to evaluate whether an inadvertent disclosure has effected a waiver of the privilege, including “the reasonableness of precautions taken, the time taken to rectify the error, the scope of discovery, the extent of disclosure and the overriding issue of fairness.” Fed. R. Evid. 502 advisory committee’s note (2007).The Foundation argues at the outset that Rule 502 does not apply because Federal Rule of Evidence 101 states that the Rules “apply to proceedings in United States courts,” and when the Foundation first learned that the IRS possessed the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, “there was no litigation, only an administrative audit by the IRS of the Foundation” and thus there was “no ‘proceeding’ in any United States court at that time.” Pl.’s Reply at 17. The plain language of Rule 502, however, expressly contemplates an inadvertent disclosure of a communication “to a federal office or agency,” and sets forth the circumstances under which “the disclosure does not operate as a waiver in a federal or state proceeding.” Fed. R. Evid. 502(b). Moreover, the Advisory Committee Notes specifically state that Rule 502(b) “applies to inadvertent disclosures made to a federal office or agency, including but not limited to an office or agency that is acting in the course of its regulatory, investigative or enforcement authority,” Fed. R. Evid. 502 advisory committee’s note (2007), and courts have used Rule 502(b) to determine whether disclosure to an agency prior to litigation waives any privilege asserted regarding a document in subsequent litigation, see SEC v. Welliver, No. 11-CV-3076 (RHK/SER), 2012 WL 8015672, at *6-8 (D. Minn. Oct. 26, 2012) (assessing whether attorney-client privilege was waived by inadvertent disclosure of documents during pre-litigation investigation by the Securities and Exchange Commission). Rule 502 therefore applies in this proceeding to determine whether the prior inadvertent disclosure of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter to the IRS precludes the assertion of any claim of privilege concerning the letter.

    Alternatively, the Foundation contends that even if Rule 502(b) applies, it has taken adequate steps to assert the privilege and redress the disclosure of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter by raising the issue in its January 11, 2010 Protest to the Proposed Revocation and in motions it has filed with this Court and the Tax Court. Pl.’s Reply at 17. The Court disagrees that these half-hearted and untimely attempts to assert the privilege are sufficient to preserve any claim of privilege as to the document. Barrett Weinberger first learned that the IRS possessed a copy of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter when it enclosed a copy of the letter in its April 20, 2009 Information Document Request, but took no action whatsoever to assert the privilege until January 11, 2010, over eight months later. Even then, the Foundation did not make any attempt to recover the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, but merely asserted its position that the document was protected by the privilege and thus “should be excised and not relied upon.” Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 10 (Protest) at 7. Neither the Foundation nor the Schaller Estate beneficiaries demanded the return of the document until December 1, 2010, nearly two years after Weinberger learned that the IRS possessed it. Such an inordinate delay in action to recover the document is inconsistent with the confidentiality objective which underlies the attorney-client privilege. See United States v. Ary, 518 F.3d 775, 784 (10th Cir. 2008) (reasoning that expeditious claims of privilege serve the purposes of the attorney-client privilege by preserving the confidentiality of the allegedly privileged communication); United States v. de la Jara, 973 F.2d 746, 750 (9th Cir. 1992) (concluding that the defendant’s delay in seeking recovery of privileged communication “allowed ‘the mantle of confidentiality which once protected the document[ ]’ to be ‘irretrievably breached,’ thereby waiving his privilege”); see also In re Sealed Case, 877 F.2d at 979-80 (“[I]f a client wishes to preserve the privilege, it must treat the confidentiality of attorney-client communications like jewels — if not crown jewels.”). Indeed, much shorter delays in seeking recovery of privileged documents have been deemed to waive the privilege. See, e.g.Ary, 518 F.3d at 785 (finding assertion of privilege six weeks after learning of disclosure to be untimely); Murray v. Gemplus Int’l, S.A., 217 F.R.D. 362, 366 (E.D. Pa. 2003) (finding eleven week delay to be incompatible with maintaining privileged character of communications); see also Amobi v. D.C. Dep’t of Corrs., 262 F.R.D. 45, 55 (D.D.C. 2009) (commenting that it was a “debatable proposition” that attempting to rectify an inadvertent disclosure fifty-five days after discovery qualified as sufficiently prompt to protect attorney-client privilege but finding privilege waived on different ground in any event).

    On this point, the Foundation contends that Weinberger’s failure to assert the privilege with respect to the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in response to the April 20, 2009 Information Document Request did not effect a waiver because he did not comment on it and instead, on the advice of counsel, invoked his Fifth Amendment right against self-incrimination due to the ongoing criminal investigation. Pl.’s Reply at 12-13. The Foundation offers no explanation, however, for Weinberger’s continuing failure to act after June 2009 when the criminal investigation was discontinued. While the record is unclear regarding when Weinberger learned that the IRS had decided not to prosecute him, Weinberger’s assertion of the privilege in the Foundation’s January 11, 2010 Protest indicates that he knew he was no longer under investigation by that point. Yet, nearly a year elapsed before anyone affiliated with the Foundation or the Estate of Julius Schaller made any attempt to actually recover the document. While the concurrent criminal investigation may have excused Weinberger’s failure to act immediately in response to the Information Document Request, it cannot absolve him of his obligation to act for the entire period of time at issue here.

    Even if the Court could find that the Foundation or the beneficiaries of the Schaller Estate made timely efforts to recover the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, the intermittent nature of these efforts also weighs in favor of a finding that the privilege was waived. While the Foundation and the beneficiaries of the Schaller Estate have raised the claim of privilege on several occasions since learning of the disclosure of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in April 2009, long periods of inaction have followed most of the attempts to recover the document. For example, when the IRS failed to respond to the December 1, 2010 letter requesting the segregation and return of all copies of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter, the Foundation identifies no further efforts to assert the privilege or recover the document until the issue was raised in a motion before the Tax Court one year later. See Pl.’s Mot. at 8; Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 4 (December 7, 2011 Order) at 2. Isolated efforts to recover privileged communications do not absolve the party asserting privilege of any further action, but rather put the privilege holder on notice that further action is required. See Williams, 806 F. Supp. 2d at 52 (rejecting alleged privilege holder’s argument that its notification of the inadvertent disclosure and demand for return of the document was sufficient to preclude a finding of waiver under Rule 502(b) because privilege holder took no further steps to recover the document after receiving no response); IMC Chems. v. Niro, Inc., No. 98-2348-JTM, 2000 WL 1466495, at *27 (D. Kan. July 19, 2000) (finding four letters, two of which specifically demanded return of the documents, to be insufficiently persistent to maintain privilege). Here, the IRS consistently ignored the Foundation’s and the Estate’s occasional efforts to retrieve the Weinberger-Bolden Letter. Instead of taking additional steps to recover the letter, the alleged privilege holders allowed the letter to remain with the IRS with full knowledge that the agency continued to use it without limitation. As another court put it, “[t]hat is not how one protects privileged documents.” IMC Chems., 2000 WL 1466495, at *27.

    The Foundation claims that “[t]here were no other avenues that Mr. Weinberger, the beneficiaries, the Foundation, or the Estate could have pursued in order to claim this document is privileged and has been wrongfully obtained and used by the government,” other than raising the issue in the litigation pending before this Court and the Tax Court. Pl.’s Reply at 15-17. To be sure, seeking judicial intervention is a powerful way to assert a privilege and seek to recover a privileged communication that has been inadvertently disclosed. Cf. Bowles v. Nat’l Ass’n of Home Builders, Inc., 224 F.R.D. 246, 254-57 (D.D.C. 2004) (holding that failure to seek judicial intervention for fifteen months even though privilege holder repeatedly asserted privilege in correspondence fatally undermined privilege claim). However, the fact that the Foundation and the Estate did seek judicial intervention on two occasions does not excuse their failure to take other steps to protect the privilege, such as engaging in a consistent course of correspondence with the IRS demanding the return of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter. The Court discerns no reason why more persistent and prompt efforts could not have been taken to recover the document, even when litigation was not pending.

    This Circuit’s opinion in SEC v. Lavin, 111 F.3d 921 (D.C. Cir. 1997), does not change the result here. Lavininvolved an assertion of the marital privilege as to conversations recorded on tapes in the possession of Jack Lavin’s employer. 111 F.3d at 923-24. In reversing the district court’s finding that the Lavins had waived any privilege in the conversations by failing to promptly assert the privilege and take adequate steps to recover possession of the tapes, the Circuit declined to find an affirmative duty to preemptively assert the privilege when “there was no event that should have triggered their assertion of the privilege,” instead finding it sufficient that the Lavins claimed the privilege once they learned that the Federal Reserve Bank of New York sought production of the tapes. Id. at 931. The Circuit also rejected the district court’s emphasis on the Lavins’ failure to obtain physical possession of the tapes as “irrelevant” because “any access [to the tapes] was encumbered by the Lavins’ assertion of the privilege.” Id. at 931-32. Lavin, however, pre-dates the 2007 revisions to Rule 502 which addressed waiver by inadvertent disclosure. Moreover, the Lavins made far more significant efforts to preserve their privilege, including securing an agreement to maintain confidentiality of the tapes with the possessor of the tapes and immediately asserting the privilege upon learning that the tapes had been requested by the Federal Reserve Bank,id. at 931-32, in contrast to the two discontinuous attempts to assert privilege and protect the confidentiality of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter.

    The Foundation further argues that no additional actions should be required of it because “[t]he IRS was aware that the Foundation was not represented by counsel [during the Foundation audit], and it is the IRS [that] should have strictly adhered to its ethical obligations and notified the Foundation, the Estate, and its beneficiaries that a privileged communication had been obtained.” Pl.’s Reply at 13-14. Whether an attorney’s failure to return an allegedly privileged document upon learning of its inadvertent disclosure constitutes an ethical breach has no bearing on this Court’s assessment of whether the privilege holder acted reasonably to rectify the inadvertent disclosure of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter under Rule 502(b), which puts this burden squarely on the shoulders of the privilege holder, not the recipient of a potentially privileged communication. Additionally, the Court notes that while the Foundation was not represented by counsel during its audit by the IRS, the record indicates that Barrett Weinberger holds a juris doctor and was a practicing attorney from 1983 to 1995. See Pl.’s Mot., Ex. 10 (Protest) at 6. The Court thus presumes that Weinberger has some familiarity with the attorney-client privilege and accordingly finds the Foundation’s suggestion that its pro se status imparts some additional obligations on IRS counsel unpersuasive. Cf. Richards v. Duke Univ., 480 F. Supp. 2d 222, 234 (D.D.C. 2007) (holding that pro se plaintiff who is an attorney is “presumed to have a knowledge of the legal system” and thus is not given great latitude normally afforded to pro se litigants).

    In addition to the delay in asserting the privilege in the Weinberger-Bolden Letter and seeking its recovery, the Court finds that other factors weigh in favor of finding that the privilege has been waived. The proceedings between the IRS, the Foundation, and the Estate of Julius Schaller did not involve thousands of documents, but rather a relatively small set of records that could be easily reviewed and controlled. Fairness and the extent of the disclosure here also support a finding of waiver. The IRS has possessed and relied on the Weinberger-Bolden Letter since 2009 in reaching decisions in three separate investigations regarding the relationship between the Estate of Julius Schaller and the Foundation. And its ongoing use of the document was well-known to all interested parties. To expunge this document now would require a wholesale rewriting of history between the IRS, the Foundation, and the Schaller Estate. As this Circuit opined with respect to a similar request, “it would be unfair and unrealistic now to permit the privilege’s assertion as to th[is] document[ ] which ha[s] been thoroughly examined and used by the Government for several years” because “the disclosure cannot be cured simply by a return of the document[ ].” In re Grand Jury Investigation of Ocean Transp., 604 F.2d 672, 675 (D.C. Cir. 1979); see also Ary, 518 F.3d at 784 (noting that a consequence of failing to expeditiously assert a privilege is that a government investigation “may irreparably rely on the protected information, thereby tainting the investigation,” resulting in waiver). Here too, the Court finds that “[t]he privilege has been permanently destroyed.” In re Grand Jury Investigation of Ocean Transp., 604 F.2d at 675.

    III. CONCLUSION

    For the foregoing reasons, the Court concludes that any attorney-client privilege that would otherwise protect the Weinberger-Bolden Letter has been waived through the document’s inadvertent disclosure and the failure of the alleged privilege holders to take appropriate steps to promptly assert the privilege and aggressively seek to recover the letter. Accordingly, the Court must deny the Foundation’s motion regarding the United States’ use of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter in these proceedings and its inclusion of the letter in the administrative record, and deny the motion to intervene as moot.SO ORDERED this 27th day of March, 2014.7

                    Reggie B. Walton
                    United States District Judge
    FOOTNOTES

    1 In addition to the documents already referenced, the Court considered the following filings in reaching its decision: (1) the Plaintiff’s Reply Memorandum in Support of Its Motion to Preclude the Government from Introducing Privileged Letter from Barrett Weinberger to Attorney Stephen Bolden and the Entire Administrative Record, and for Related Relief (“Pl.’s Reply”), (2) the Motion to Intervene Filed by Barrett Weinberger and Frances Odza, Co-Executors of the Estate of Julius Schaller, and the Entire Class of Beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller (“Mot. Intervene”), (3) the Supplement to Motion to Intervene Filed by Barrett Weinberger and Frances Odza, Co-Executors of the Estate of Julius Schaller, and the Entire Class of Beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller (“Intervene Supp.”), (4) the United States’ Opposition to Motion to Intervene by Barrett Weinberger, Frances Odza, and the Beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller (“Intervene Opp’n”), and (5) the Reply Brief in Support of Motion to Intervene Filed by Barrett Weinberger and Frances Odza, Co-Executors of the Estate of Julius Schaller, and the Entire Class of Beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller (“Intervene Reply”).2 For ease of reference, the Court has assigned page numbers to each of the parties’ exhibits beginning in each case with the exhibit cover page followed by the order of the pages as submitted to the Court.

    3 Although the Foundation’s Protest lists the date of the Information Document Request which referenced the Weinberger-Bolden Letter as August 17, 2007, all other references to this Information Document Request have indicated that it was dated April 20, 2009. Accordingly, the Court assumes that designating the date of the Information Document Request as August 17, 2007 in the Foundation’s Protest is a typographical error.

    4 The United States also argues that the Foundation has not established that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter is a privileged communication. Def.’s Opp’n at 9-13. Because the Court determines that any privilege as to the document was waived, it will assume without deciding that the Weinberger-Bolden Letter would otherwise be protected by attorney-client privilege if not for its inadvertent disclosure.

    5 The only argument regarding the Weinberger-Bolden Letter advanced solely by the movants is that Barrett Weinberger “did not have the authority to unilaterally waive the privilege on behalf of the entire class of beneficiaries of the Estate of Julius Schaller.” Intervene Reply at 5-6. Relying on In re Teleglobe Communications Corp., 493 F.3d 345 (3d Cir. 2007), and Magnetar Technologies, Corp. v. Six Flags Theme Park Inc., 886 F. Supp. 2d 466 (D. Del. 2012), the movants argue that waiver of a joint-client privilege requires the consent of all joint-clients and that the United States has not shown that all of the Estate beneficiaries consented to waive a claim of privilege in regard to the Weinberger-Bolden Letter. Intervene Reply at 5-6. The movants’ reliance on this line of authority is misplaced, however, because the requirement of universal consent applies when one client seeks to intentionally waive the privilege. By contrast, the question before the Court here is whether the attorney-client privilege was unintentionallywaived by the inadvertent disclosure of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter.

    6 In a footnote in its reply brief, the Foundation suggests that discovery should be conducted regarding “the Special Agent’s report and chronology as to when he obtained the [Weinberger-Bolden Letter]; who the Special Agent consulted with at IRS counsel before providing the letter to the revenue agent handling the Foundation audit; and who the revenue agent consulted with before employing the [Weinberger-Bolden Letter] and using it to support the revocation of the Foundation’s tax exempt status.” Pl.’s Reply at 11 n.6. To be sure, “[a] claim of privilege must be ‘presented to a district court with appropriate deliberation and precision’ before a court can rule on the issue.” SEC v. Lavin, 111 F.3d 921, 928 (D.C. Cir. 1997) (citation omitted). Neither party suggests here that the record is insufficiently developed to permit the Court to rule on this issue based on the filings submitted to the Court and the attached exhibits, many of which were culled from an administrative record with which both parties are already familiar. Moreover, the discovery contemplated by the Foundation is focused primarily on the use of the Weinberger-Bolden Letter by the IRS rather than the letter’s acquisition and thus would be of little assistance in reaching a determination on the issues at hand. Accordingly, the Court declines to permit discovery on the issues raised by the Foundation prior to ruling on the Foundation’s motion.

    7 An Order consistent with this Memorandum Opinion will be issued contemporaneously.

    Citations: Educational Assistance Foundation for the Descendants of Hungarian Immigrants in the Performing Arts Inc. v. United States; No. 1:11-cv-01573




    Bond Issuers Encouraged to Request Refunding Guidance.

    Issuers should let the IRS know if refunding guidance is needed on Build America Bonds and whether a lack of clarity in section 54AA has a negative effect on bond issuance, James Polfer, branch 5 chief, IRS Office of Associate Chief Counsel (Financial Institutions and Products), said March 27.

    When it is unclear whether an issuer can currently refund, it would be helpful for the IRS to know, Polfer said at the National Association of Bond Lawyers’ Tax and Securities Law Institute in Boston.

    “We are aware that in many of these one-off bond programs that it is ambiguous whether or not you can currently refund, so generally requests for guidance about currently refunding a specific program helps us to know that the ambiguity has a real-world effect,” said Polfer.

    Some attendees indicated that guidance is needed. “We don’t have guidance on what to do or how to refund a Build America Bond,” said Brent L. Feller of Chapman and Cutler LLP.

    Polfer noted that the IRS has issued guidance on current refunding for other types of bonds, most recently in Notice 2014-9, 2014-5 IRB 455, which was released in January and provides that issuers can currently refund a recovery zone facility bond on a tax-exempt basis.

    A recovery zone facility bond was an American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 bond that had to be issued in 2009 or 2010 for recovery zone property in the recovery zone. The bonds were tax-exempt private activity bonds, and the notice provides criteria for currently refunding them. The notice expressly states that it does not apply to Build America Bonds; recovery zone economic development bonds were a taxable variety of those bonds.

    The notice provides that if an issuer met the criteria to issue the bonds in 2009 and 2010 and if the current refunding bonds are not in an amount greater than the refunded bonds, a current refunding is available. The values of the refunding and refunded bonds are measured by looking at the issue price of the refunded bonds versus the outstanding principal amount of the refunded bonds. But if the refunded bonds have more than the de minimis original issue discount, the present value must be used to determine the maximum issue price of the current refunding issue. Under the guidance, the current refunding bonds must meet the criteria as well.

    Feller noted that the IRS has issued similar notices before: In 2012 a notice was issued regarding Gulf Opportunity Zone Bonds (Notice 2012-3, 2012-3 IRB 289), and in 2003 there was a notice on refunding of New York Liberty Bonds (Notice 2003-40, 2003-2 C.B. 10).

    Polfer said the recovery zone facility bond and Liberty Zone Bond notices came about because issuers requested the guidance. “It was pointed out to us that it was not only an ambiguous provision and in the abstract was unclear, but this ambiguity has real-world effects and was holding up actual issuances,” he said.

    Feller noted that in the president’s fiscal 2015 budget proposal, there is a measure providing for current refunding for bonds that don’t have a statutory framework for refunding.

    “This seems to be a goal of the executive branch to provide guidance on current refunding of [American Recovery and Reinvestment Act] bonds,” said Feller.

    Polfer agreed with Feller’s point and added, “It’s good to point out that this has been discussed in a number of budget proposals now and reflects a uniform view in tax administration about the policy advantages for current refunding, both to save interest rates for the reissuer and also to lower the subsidy.”

    However, Polfer added, “The fact that this has been memorialized in budget proposals also reflects a view that a widespread, all-encompassing piece of administrative guidance stating that current refundings will be allowed absent a statutory provision that says otherwise is probably beyond the authority of Treasury.”

    Polfer said that because comprehensive current refunding guidance is probably beyond Treasury’s power, the result has been piecemeal guidance. “The three notices we put out do reflect the view that it is an advantage to refund these, both from the administration standpoint and the issuer standpoint,” he said. “And we also encourage that if there are any suggestions, comments, or views about the ability to currently refund other programs, we would definitely like to hear that.”

    by William R. Davis




    Bond Provisions in Camp Draft Warrant Attention.

    It’s important to pay close attention to the tax-exempt bond provisions in the tax reform discussion draft  of House Ways and Means Committee Chair Dave Camp, R-Mich., because even if they are unlikely to pass anytime soon, they will likely be used as revenue raisers for future tax proposals, a Treasury official said March 27.

    “While it is indicated in the press that the Camp reform bill is likely to go nowhere, I would encourage you to look at some of the provisions to view it as a scorecard of revenue offsets that can be used for other tax proposals,” Vicky Tsilas, attorney-adviser, Treasury Office of Tax Legislative Counsel, said at the National Association of Bond Lawyers’ Tax and Securities Law Institute in Boston. “I would not look at some of those proposals and discount them as not happening.”

    Several proposals, many contrary to President Obama’s fiscal 2015 budget, could affect the bond market, including terminating the tax exemption for private activity bonds and advanced refunding bonds, repealing tax credit bonds, and repealing the alternative minimum tax, Tsilas said.

    Perry Israel of the Law Office of Perry Israel agreed that the draft’s provisions could end up in other bills. In the 1980s, there were tax reform bills almost every year, and many of the provisions in those bills made it into the Tax Reform Act of 1986, he said. “What you are seeing here are markers that we could very well be talking about in the very near future, so don’t ignore them,” Israel said.

    Israel said the Joint Committee on Taxation estimates that the cost of tax-exempt bonds over a five-year period is about $190 billion. Some argue that the estimate is incorrect, but regardless, it’s a large tax expenditure, Israel said. “Tax-exempt bonds are going to consistently be viewed as being a way to give rise to revenue to pay for other things in tax reform,” he said.

    Democrats, including Senate Budget Committee Chair Patty Murray, D-Wash., have shown an interest in culling revenue raisers from Camp’s draft, but Republicans have said they remain committed to keeping those provisions intact as part of a comprehensive tax reform effort.

    Also on Capitol Hill, discussions have resumed about national infrastructure banks, Tsilas said. The Partnership to Build America Act of 2014 (S. 1957) would create a $50 billion bank with taxable bonds. The administration’s budget includes a proposal for a national infrastructure bank to invest in a broad range of infrastructure projects. Those measures could have significant effects on the tax-exempt bond market, she said.

    Tsilas also highlighted a proposal in the administration’s budget for providing a permanent America Fast Forward bond program with expanded eligible uses compared with Build America Bonds. Under the proposal, the bonds would have a 28 percent rate versus 35 percent for Build America Bonds.

    Beyond Build America Bonds’ financings for governmental projects, America Fast Forward bonds could be used for current re-fundings of prior capital projects, short-term governmental working capital financings, financing of section 501(c)(3) projects, and all the qualified private activity bond categories.

    by William R. Davis




    IRS Releases Publication Providing Guidance for Religious Groups.

    The IRS has released Publication 1828 (rev. Nov. 2013), Tax Guide for Churches and Religious Organizations, explaining benefits and responsibilities under the federal tax system for churches and religious organizations to encourage voluntary compliance.




    Citi Top Muni Bond Underwriter in First-Quarter Amid Lagging Supply.

    (Reuters) – Citigroup was the top underwriter of U.S. municipal bonds in the first quarter of 2014 as total supply shrank to $60.4 billion, down 25.7 percent from the same period in 2013, Thomson Reuters reported on Tuesday.

    The investment bank underwrote 75 deals totaling $8.16 billion, according to the report. Bank of America Merrill Lynch (BAC.N) ranked second with 68 deals totaling $6.17 billion.

    Puerto Rico was the biggest issuer in the quarter with a $3.5 billion bond sale last month aimed at shoring up the commonwealth’s shaky finances. California ranked second with $1.8 billion of bonds.

    Insured bonds totaled $2.77 billion, up 28.4 percent from the first quarter of 2013. Assured Guaranty Municipal (AGO.N) and its subsidiary Municipal Assurance Corp held onto the top spot among insurers with 117 deals totaling $1.43 billion. Build America Mutual ranked second with 135 deals totaling $1.33 billion.

    Meanwhile, bonds backed by letters of credit plummeted to $402.8 million in the quarter, a 91.4 percent drop from the same period in 2013, Thomson Reuters reported. Royal Bank of Canada was the top provider, followed by the Bank of New York Mellon.




    Gross Joins Bond Investors in North Las Vegas Crosshairs.

    Nevada lawmakers are studying the unprecedented step of penalizing bondholders as North Las Vegas, the state’s fourth-largest city, faces insolvency.

    Once among the nation’s fastest-growing municipalities, the city located less than 10 miles from the famed Strip has seen its property taxes collapse 70 percent since 2009. Funds run by Bill Gross, co-founder of the world’s biggest bond manager, hold almost a fifth of the municipality’s $420 million in general obligations, data compiled by Bloomberg show. The bonds were cut to junk by Standard & Poor’s in March after a judge ordered the city to pay unionized workers raises withheld during a fiscal emergency declared two years ago.

    With no provisions for municipal bankruptcy in Nevada, lawmakers are considering ways to make investors share the pain of distressed municipalities. The approach takes a page from bankruptDetroit, where an emergency financial manager proposed paying some bondholders 15 cents on the dollar, and from the insolvent California city of Stockton, which offered real estate to satisfy creditors after missing debt payments.

    “Something’s going to have to give at some point,” said Marilyn Kirkpatrick, the Democratic speaker of the state assembly, who represents North Las Vegas, said in a telephone interview. “Somebody’s got to sacrifice, and I can tell you, the residents have been making a lot of sacrifices.”

    Rebound Struggle

    The third-fastest-growing U.S. city from 2000 to 2009, North Las Vegas is an example of a municipality that has struggled to rebound from the longest recession since the 1930s. Property values in the community of about 223,500 fell for four straight years beginning in 2009, according toits annual community report. Moody’s Investors Service has cut it 10 steps since 2011, making it the only city among the nation’s 100 most populous with a junk grade, excluding those in bankruptcy.

    The city has reduced its workforce nearly in half as property-tax collections sank to $7.6 million last year, from $25.1 million in 2009, according to its annual fiscal report. Facing a $31 million budget deficit, city council declared a fiscal emergency in 2012 to suspend provisions of union contracts including annual raises.

    Bond Financing

    While property values began to rebound last year, casinos sagged. From July through February, wagers at North Las Vegas casinos fell 2.5 percent from a year earlier, while bets statewide rose 0.9 percent, according to Nevada’s Gaming Control Board.

    Even as the local economy crashed, North Las Vegas, situated about 8 miles (13 kilometers) from the casinos of the Las Vegas Strip, spent $257 million on a water-reclamation plant and $130 million on a new city hall. The facilities, funded with bonds, opened in 2011.

    S&P was the last of the three biggest rating companies to cut the community to junk. It has been rated speculative grade by Moody’s since August 2012, and since July 2013 by Fitch Ratings.

    In January, Clark County District Court Judge Susan Johnson ruled that North Las Vegas had overreached by denying the raises and ordered it to pay about $16.2 million to workers including police and firefighters. City officials are negotiating with unions over how much to pay.

    Payments Made

    North Las Vegas has yet to miss a payment to bondholders, Mayor John Lee said in his ninth-floor office overlooking expanses of undeveloped desert and the Strip in the distance.

    The Democratic former state lawmaker said North Las Vegas’s plight demonstrates the lack of options for struggling municipalities in Nevada under state law. With Chapter 9 bankruptcy off the table, cities are left with the prospect of finances run by a receiver from the state Taxation Department.

    That has happened twice, in 2000 with the school district of eastern Nevada’s White Pine County, with 1,400 students; and in 2005 with White Pine County itself, population 10,000.

    North Las Vegas must submit a balanced budget proposal to the state Taxation Department by April 15, said Terry Rubald, the department’s deputy director. Failure to do so is among criteria for a state financial takeover, although that’s no guarantee, she said. The law governing state intervention doesn’t provide for reduced payments to bondholders.

    “This happening here definitely has elevated the issue,” said Lee, who has discussed the city’s options with Kirkpatrick and Republican Governor Brian Sandoval. “The legislature has a remedy that could help not only North Las Vegas but a lot of other cities in the state.”

    Concession Idea

    Lee and Kirkpatrick said their discussions focus on creating a law that, short of bankruptcy, could force concessions on bondholders of municipalities that meet certain criteria.

    Any discussion on changing Nevada law to force concessions on investors would be “premature,” as North Las Vegas hasn’t yet satisfied the state’s conditions for intervention, said Mac Bybee, a spokesman for Sandoval.

    Changes to Nevada law probably wouldn’t have broader implications for municipal debt as Nevada represents just $30 billion of the $3.7 trillion market, said Matt Fabian, managing director of Municipal Market Advisors in Concord, Massachusetts.

    The city’s debt includes about $119 million of federally taxable Build America Bonds maturing in June 2040, North Las Vegas’s longest-maturity debt, Bloomberg data show.

    Gross’s Funds

    About $83 million of the maturity is held in funds run by Gross, chief investment officer at Pacific Investment Management Co., according to the latest filings to Bloomberg. That represents 19 percent of the city’s general obligations.

    The company’s largest allocations of North Las Vegas bonds are in the $236 billion Pimco Total Return Fund (PTTRX) and the $6.4 billion Harbor Bond Fund (HABDX), which combined own about $57 million of the securities, Bloomberg data show.

    Mark Porterfield, a spokesman for Pimco in Newport Beach, California, said no one at the firm was available to comment on the bond holdings.

    The Build America debt traded last week for the first time in about two years. Yesterday, it changed hands at an average price of 77.5 cents on the dollar to yield 8.78 percent, or about 5.4 percentage points above Treasuries. It priced in May 2010 to yield about 2.3 percentage points above Treasuries.

    Van Eck Associates Corp., another bondholder, hasn’t been approached by the city or state on the debt, said Jim Colby, who helps manage $1.8 billion of munis as a senior strategist with the company in New York.

    Pressure’s On

    Given Detroit’s case and bankruptcies by California cities, “it doesn’t surprise me that’s the talk from lawmakers,” Colby said. Legislators probably want to “put the pressure on bondholders, and if bankruptcy isn’t an option, do something totally different to get out from under the obligation.”

    Market Vectors High Yield Muni Index ETF (HYD), which Colby helps manage, owns about $2 million of the city’s general obligations.

    Lee and leaders of North Las Vegas’s three public-safety unions oppose a state takeover of city finances, they said in separate interviews.

    Receivership would mean a potentially “lasting historic stigma for city and region,” Barclays Plc said in a Jan. 9 report commissioned by the city.

    State Improvement

    Nevada’s economy improved more than any other state’s from the fourth quarter of 2012 through the end of 2013, according to the Bloomberg Economic Evaluation of States. Nevada’s 8.5 percent jobless rate in February, while the lowest since 2008, was still third-highest among states, according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

    With a deadline looming for a budget proposal, North Las Vegas and its unions are attempting to agree on back pay and to free up money to balance the ledger. City council voted last month to lowerthe fund reserve to 6 percent from 8 percent, freeing $2 million toward a settlement on wages.

    “A receivership would kill the economy of the whole region,” Scott Sauer, a resident who has attended council meetings for close to a decade, said in an interview after a session last month. “North Las Vegas is one of the largest cities in the state. What does this say about the whole state?”

    By James Nash and Brian Chappatta  Mar 31, 2014 7:19 PM PT

    To contact the reporters on this story: James Nash in Los Angeles at jnash24@bloomberg.net; Brian Chappatta in New York at bchappatta1@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netMark Tannenbaum, Pete Young




    S&P: Tender Option Bonds And The Volcker Rule: An Update.

    Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services has received many questions about the Volcker Rule (Section 13 of the Dodd-Frank Act), in particular as the rule relates to tender option bonds (TOBs). Standard & Poor’s currently rates securities issued by approximately 2,375 TOB trusts, which have a total par value of approximately $65 billion. This article is a brief update to our Dec. 19, 2013, article “Q&A On The ‘Volcker Rule’ And Tender Option Bonds“.

    Because there are currently no explicit exemptions for TOB programs under the Volcker Rule, we understand that TOB market participants are working to develop possible ways of structuring TOB programs to enable them to qualify for an exemption under the Volcker Rule. Although we expect to see revisions to existing TOB documents, as of the date of publication of this article, we have not been asked to review any such revisions. The responses to the following questions provide some insight to the potential solutions currently being discussed by TOB market participants.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    What solutions are currently being contemplated?

    We understand that several different types of TOB program restructurings are being discussed to enable TOB programs to qualify as exempt under the Volcker Rule. However, two possible TOB program restructurings have been in the forefront of possibilities: restructuring the TOB program as a joint venture or restructuring the TOB program so that the banking entity would be participating as an unaffiliated third party.

    Under the joint venture scenario, existing TOB programs would be restructured as joint ventures. The Volcker Rule restricts a banking entity’s investments in and interactions with what are defined in the rule as “covered funds”. Under certain circumstances, a joint venture, however, is excluded from the definition of covered fund if the joint venture (i) is between a banking entity or any of its affiliates and no more than 10 unaffiliated co-venturers, (ii) is in the business of engaging in activities that are permissible for the banking entity other than investing in securities for resale or other disposition, and (iii) is not and does not hold itself as being, an entity or arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise trading in securities.

    Under the unaffiliated third-party scenario, existing TOB programs would be restructured so that the banking entity would participate in the program only as an unaffiliated third party. The Volcker Rule prohibits a banking entity from providing credit or liquidity support if it serves in a capacity covered by section 13(f) of the Bank Holding Company Act. But if a banking entity is an unaffiliated third party and does not have a relationship with the TOB sponsor, the banking entity may provide the TOB with credit or liquidity enhancement. Our understanding is that this would be accomplished by having the banking entity provide credit or liquidity enhancement for a TOB program that is not its own TOB program. Therefore, the banking entity’s participation in the program would be exempt under the Volcker Rule. Under this scenario, the sponsor of the TOB program must be unaffiliated with the liquidity provider.

    How will Standard & Poor’s view the proposed solutions?

    We have not yet reviewed any revisions to TOB documents that have been designed to enable a TOB program to potentially qualify for an exemption under the Volcker Rule. That being said, however, to maintain our ratings on TOB-issued securities, or to assign new ratings on such securities, we will look for comfort that any current or new TOB structures that issue rated securities fall under one of the exemptions to the Volcker Rule. Although we will evaluate each situation on a case-by-case basis as the structures are presented to us, we expect such confirmation to be presented to us in the form of an opinion of counsel that the program or transaction at issue is exempt under the Volcker Rule.

    What happens if there are no solutions for creating a Volcker Rule exemption?

    Barring any extensions, if banking entities that sponsor TOB programs are not able to comply with the Volcker Rule by July 21, 2015, we expect to see an unwinding of trusts resulting in a sale of trust assets along with draws on liquidity facilities supporting such trusts.

    Primary Credit Analysts: Santos Souffront, New York (1) 212-438-2197;
    santos.souffront@standardandpoors.com
    Beatriz Peguero, New York (1) 212-438-2164;
    beatriz.peguero@standardandpoors.com
    Secondary Contacts: Mikiyon W Alexander, New York (1) 212-438-2083;
    mikiyon.alexander@standardandpoors.com
    Valerie D White, New York (1) 212-438-2078;
    valerie.white@standardandpoors.com



    Senate Finance Committee Passes Extenders Bill.

    On Thursday, April 3, 2014, the Senate Finance Committee passed an $85 billion tax extenders package that includes two years of extensions, including several related to bonds. The bill would provide $400 million of volume per year for the qualified zone academy bond program, and require that those bonds be issued as tax-credit and not direct-pay bonds. It also included an extension for empowerment zone tax incentives, including empowerment zone facility bonds. The bill now goes to the full Senate for vote. More information on the Finance Committee action is available here.




    US CFTC Pledges Swaps Relief for Public Utilities.

    (Reuters) – The U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission plans to ease its new swaps rules to help public power utilities using swaps to hedge price risk, the head of the derivatives regulator said on Thursday.

    The agency will propose to make it easier for electricity and natural gas utilities to continue to use these products without incurring the cost that comes from tighter new swaps laws written after the financial crisis.

    “The Commission must continue to remain open to revisiting certain rules and making adjustments as necessary,” Acting Chairman Mark Wetjen said in a statement released during a public roundtable with members of the industry.

    The 2010 Dodd-Frank law contains a fundamental overhaul of the swaps market, which total $690 trillion globally, subjecting banks engaging in swaps with clients to tight capital, reporting and registration standards.

    The CFTC gives special protection to public utilities, forcing anyone trading more than $25 million in swaps with them to meet its rules, far lower than the $8 billion threshold for swap dealers doing business with other clients.

    But the utilities complained that had caused an exodus of companies providing swaps they use to hedge energy prices, ramping up their cost of business. On March 21, the CFTC said in a letter it would not enforce the rule.

    Wetjen said he would now offer a planned rule to address those concerns and amend the threshold.

    BY DOUWE MIEDEMA

    WASHINGTON, April 3 Thu Apr 3, 2014 5:47pm BST

    (Reporting by Douwe Miedema; Editing by Sofina Mirza-Reid)




    IRS LTR: Churches Aren't Required to Apply for Exempt Status.

    The IRS advised that although there is no application requirement for a church to operate as a tax-exempt organization, many churches seek recognition of tax-exempt status because it assures church leaders, members, and contributors that the IRS recognizes the church as exempt and that it qualifies for tax-related benefits.

    Person to Contact and ID Number: * * *
    Contact Telephone Number: * * *
    Uniform Issue List 508.02-00
    Release Date: 3/28/2014
    Date: December 23, 2013
    The Honorable Jim Cooper
    House of Representatives
    Washington, D.C. 20515
    Attention: * * *

    Dear Mr. Cooper:

    I am responding to your inquiry dated July 30, 2013, on behalf of your constituents and the tax-exempt organizations they represent. You asked questions about the policy of U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services that requires religious organizations to provide a determination letter from us with an application for an R-1 (Temporary Religious Worker) visa that the organization is tax-exempt under section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code (IRC), even if that religious organization is otherwise not required to have a determination letter. Specifically, you requested information on the application requirements for places of worship.

    I apologize for the delay in responding to your inquiry.By law, churches, their integrated auxiliaries, and conventions or associations of churches are not required to apply with us to operate as tax-exempt organizations. The law also excludes churches from the requirement to file federal annual returns. Churches are excluded from Federal Unemployment Tax (FUTA) liability, but generally are liable for Federal Insurance Contributions Act (FICA) taxes. State and local governments have various exemptions for churches.

    Although there is no requirement to do so, many churches seek recognition of tax-exempt status from us because such recognition assures church leaders, members, and contributors that we recognize the church as exempt, and it qualifies for related tax benefits. For example, contributors to a church we recognize as tax exempt would know that their contributions generally are tax-deductible. To get such recognition, the church must file a Form 1023, Application for Recognition of Exemption Under Section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code, and pay the user fee. When we do formally recognize a church’s exempt status, we provide a determination letter to that organization.

    Your constituents can find more information about religious organizations and federal tax exemption on our website, www.irs.gov/Charities-&-Non-Profits and clicking on “Churches & Religious Organizations” in the left column. Additionally, your constituents can find information regarding applying for a determination letter of tax-exempt status on our website, www.irs.gov/Charities-&-Non-Profits and clicking in “How to Apply to Be Tax-Exempt.”

    This letter is for informational purposes only and provides general statements of well-defined law. It is not a ruling and taxpayers cannot rely on it as such.(Rev. Proc. 2013-1, 2013-1 I.R.B. 1; Rev. Proc. 2013-4, 2013-1 I.R.B. 126). We will make this letter available for public inspection after deleting names, addresses and other identifying information, as appropriate, under the Freedom of Information Act (Announcement 2000-2, 2000-2 I.R.B. 295). I have enclosed a copy of this letter with the proposed deletions.

    I hope this information is helpful. If you have any questions, please contact me at * * * or * * * (Identification Number * * *) at * * *.

    Enclosure




    IRS LTR: IRS Discusses Income Exclusion Relating to Public Utilities.

    The IRS advised that income from any public utility or the exercise of any essential governmental function that otherwise qualifies for exclusion under section 115 will not cease to qualify for that treatment merely because the entity earning the income is a co-owner of an electric generating facility as long as certain requirements are met.

    UIL: 115.00-00
    Release Date: 3/28/2014
    Date: June 25, 2012
    Refer Reply To:
    CC:TEGE:EOEG:E0 – GENIN-113227-12

    Dear * * *:

    This letter responds to your request for information dated February 29, 2012. You requested information about whether the income an entity derives from any public utility or the exercise of any essential governmental function can qualify for exclusion from gross income under section 115 of the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”) if the entity and a nongovernmental entity each own an undivided interest in an electric generating facility under a structure that would not result in private business use of the entity’s interest by the nongovernmental co-owner under the tax-exempt bond rules.

    Section 115(1) of the Code provides that gross income does not include income derived from any public utility or the exercise of any essential governmental function and accruing to a State or any political subdivision thereof or the District of Columbia.

    Section 115(1) of the Code applies not to the income of a State or political subdivision resulting from its own direct participation in industry, but rather to income of a separate entity engaged in the operation of a public utility or the performance of some governmental function that accrues to a State or political subdivision. See Rev. Rul. 77-261, 1977-2 C.B. 45. Rev. Rul. 77-261 concludes that income of a State investment fund “accrues” to the State and the participating political subdivisions because the State and the political subdivisions have an unrestricted right to receive in their own right their proportionate share of the investment fund’s income as it is earned. Rev. Rul. 90-74, 1990-2 C.B. 34, concludes that income of an organization formed by political subdivisions to pool their casualty risks “accrues” to the member political subdivisions because the organization’s income is used to reimburse casualty losses incurred by the members or to reduce the annual fees that they otherwise would be required to pay to the organization, and upon dissolution the organization will distribute its assets to its member political subdivisions.

    Section 141 of the Code defines obligations of a State or political subdivision thereof that are “private activity bonds.” It distinguishes between government use and private business use of bond-financed facilities. The Treasury Regulations under Section 141 describe circumstances in which a governmental entity’s undivided ownership interest in an electric generating facility is not treated as used by the other, nongovernmental owner of the facility and, therefore, the bonds are not private activity bonds. Example 1 of section 1.141-7(i) of the Treasury Regulations involves a facility that is owned under a co-ownership structure involving both governmental and nongovernmental co-owners, and concludes that this arrangement does not result in “private business use” by the nongovernmental co-owner of the governmental co-owner’s tax-exempt bond financed portion of the facility. This example describes the ownership structure as joint ownership as tenants in common, with each of the participants sharing in the ownership, output, and operating expenses of the facility in proportion to its contribution to the cost of the facility. The governmental entity funded its portion of the cost of the facility using tax-exempt bond proceeds and the nongovernmental entity used its own funds to pay its share of the facility’s costs.

    Co-ownership of an electric generating facility that is structured in the manner described in Example 1 of section 1.141-7(i) of the Treasury Regulations will not prevent the income of a governmental co-owner of the facility from accruing to a State or a political subdivision. Thus, income derived from any public utility or the exercise of any essential governmental function that otherwise qualifies for exclusion from gross income under section 115 will not cease to qualify for such treatment merely because the entity earning the income is a co-owner of an electric generating facility if the co-ownership arrangement is structured in accordance with Example 1 of section 1.141-7(i) of the Treasury Regulations.

    This letter has called your attention to certain general principles of the law. It is intended for informational purposes only and does not constitute a ruling. See Rev. Proc. 2012-1, I.R.B. 2012-1 (Jan. 3, 2012). If you have any additional questions, please contact me at * * *.

                      Sincerely,
                      Sylvia F. Hunt
                      Assistant Branch Chief,
                      Exempt Organizations Branch
                    (Tax Exempt & Government Entities)



    Jacksonville, Fla., Creates Scorecard for Government Services.

    Opaque governments, pay attention. Jacksonville, Fla., is showing how to do transparency right.

    On March 5, Mayor Alvin Brown announced the city’s new open data webpage, called JaxScore 1.0, which provides basic metrics about various city services for all to see. This transparency effort, officials say, is a push toward Brown’s goals of improving performance and efficiency, and increasing public participation in government.

    JaxScore 1.0 displays boxes in a grid format; each box shows a metric for a city agency, such as Animal Care & Protective Services, Information Technologies Division and the Jacksonville Children’s Commission. If residents want to know how many jobs were created in one year by the Office of Economic Development, for instance, it’s easy to see that the number is 1,712 (as of March 31). Clicking on that box brings up a PDF where users can view basic trend data in a graph, and a chart outlining more advanced data.

    To make this data available, the city first had to begin collecting it — which has changed how employees are working.

    Having the data published online is great for the public, but it also helps the city see how it’s matching up to its goals, said Karen Bowling, Jacksonville’s chief administration officer.

    “We’re all used to being graded,” she said. “From first grade, kindergarten, we measure everything, so our employees really appreciate the opportunity to have this objective data so that it feeds right into the employee evaluation process. Rather than having to rely on anecdotal information, they can, on a monthly basis, know how they’re doing against their goals. It’s a thing of competence – they know where they’re at.”

    How did the concept originate? From budget cuts, Bowling said. The city took a long hard look in the mirror, and decided that to make the most of their resources, it would need to benchmark its performance — something it previously had not been doing thoroughly, she said.

    And it is a big change for city employees, said Cleveland Ferguson, deputy chief administration officer for the city. Pockets of government have done things in the same way for a long time, he said, so getting people to track their progress has been a bit of a culture shift — but it’s worth it to get focused around the Mayor’s goal of making government more efficient.

    The data is available to the public through the JaxScore website, as well as to city employees internally through a dashboard. The data is collected by each departmental division, each of which has been assigned a data analytics person. The analytics employees along with a process improvement internal team work together to collect data each month, and that data is published quarterly. Eventually, Ferguson said, this data will build and allow them to recognize trends.

    Now that employees started that habit of collecting the data and paying attention to performance, they’re getting comfortable with the process — and enjoying the benefits the system brings, Ferguson said. Each month, employees can look back and see what they’ve done and how that compares to their goals.

    The system was developed internally, with no outside procurement, and there was no cost other than a time investment, Ferguson said. It took about four months of intense dedication from a small team to get the system to where it is today, he said — and the response has been positive. “We’ve gotten glowing feedback from many constituencies that are into transparency and more open government,” he said. “It has been overwhelmingly positive and we are very appreciative of that.”

    The culture shift and change in work processes is important, but the technology was a big piece too, Ferguson said — and the city will keep updating and improving the system. The city is now looking at several new interfaces that would allow employees to input data themselves, which would further streamline the data collection process, he said. The city plans to eventually add that functionality, as well as more public facing data, he said. The city’s complaint system allows officials to monitor complaints, comments and questions in near-real time, and in a future iteration of Jaxscore, he said, that data will become available online, too.

    Strong executive leadership from CIO Usha Mohan also was an important key to getting this project launched and having it be a success, Ferguson said. Mohan’s background in health care, a sector that places emphasis on analytics, played a critical role in her understanding the importance of the city’s transparency efforts, he said.

    “We made a conscious decision to use IT strategically and not as merely providing a service,” he said. “And she’s the perfect CIO to appreciate the strategic nature of IT being change.”

    By Colin Wood

    BY  | MARCH 31, 2014




    Pennsylvania Schools Shun Debt Amid Austerity Push: Muni Credit.

    Pennsylvania school districts are selling the least municipal debt in seven years as localities nationwide respond to calls for austerity even with yields close to generational lows.

    From urban cores such as Philadelphia to rural communities in Lancaster County, Pennsylvania school officials are holding off on construction projects as budgets are buffeted by rising costs and dwindling aid, while local tax receipts struggle to recover almost five years after the recession.

    The issuance drop in the Keystone State reflects an ebbing reliance on debt by U.S. localities amid voter antipathy to new projects, said John Donaldson, who helps manage $750 million in munis at Haverford Trust Co. At the same time, states facing their own fiscal strains are giving cities and towns less support, said Todd Sisson, senior analyst for tax-exempt fixed income at Wells Capital Management in CharlotteNorth Carolina.

    “The states are pushing the problem down to the local level,” said Sisson, whose company oversees $31 billion in munis. “They’re not rescuing local towns, and school districts fall into that bucket.”

    As the U.S. municipal market shrank in 2013 for the third straight year, Pennsylvania schools sold $2.8 billion of bonds, the lowest amount since at least 2006, data compiled by Bloomberg show. Nationally, schools offered about $54 billion, down almost 12 percent from the previous year.

    Scarcity Boost

    The scarcity may be helping the debt. Securities from school districts and universities have earned almost 4 percent this year, beating the 3.7 percent return for the entire $3.7 trillion municipal market, according to Bank of America Merrill Lynch indexes.

    The borrowing dropoff may harm Pennsylvania’s economy, said Dan Burton, manager of the mid-Atlantic region for RBC Capital Markets.

    “It has not only an effect on the local economy, but it has an effect on the quality of education,” said Burton, who has offices in Lancaster and Philadelphia. Without investment, “it makes it much harder to perform at a high level.”

    Crisis Mode

    In Philadelphia, the nation’s fifth-most populous city, schools are in crisis mode. The district of 130,000 students last borrowed money in 2012 — to keep schools open, not to invest in them. Officials warn of a drop of about 26 percent in federal and state grants in the year that begins in July from fiscal 2013, documents show.

    Fernando Gallard, a district spokesman, didn’t respond to requests for comment on bond plans andcapital investment.

    Officials elsewhere in the state say debt plans are on hold in part because Pennsylvania has stopped allowing new capital projects into a program that reimburses for part of the expenditures.

    Governor Tom Corbett, a Republican, has proposed that the moratorium, in effect since October 2012, should extend to June 2015, said Tim Eller, spokesman for the state Education Department. In the meantime, Pennsylvania has allocated $300 million this year for reimbursements, while 207 districts are due a combined $1.7 billion, according to Eller.

    The state is dealing with its own fiscal stress. Standard & Poor’s grades it AA, the third-highest level, though with a negative outlook, partly because of growing pension costs.

    Savings Redirected

    Jay Pagni, a Corbett spokesman, said the governor wants the legislature to pass changes that would deal with escalating retirement contributions for the state and school districts as well asPennsylvania’s unfunded pension liability.

    Savings “from pension reform could be used in other areas such as capital projects and classroom investment,” Pagni said.

    Schools face climbing pension payments as they are restricted from raising property taxes above state-mandated caps. The districts’ required pension contributions are set to rise to $1.3 billion for the year beginning in July, from $980 million this year, according to Pagni.

    Districts have cut programs and personnel to cope, said Jay Himes, executive director of the Harrisburg-based Pennsylvania Association of School Business Officials. Elementary and secondary schools employed 256,664 people as of 2012, down about 23,000 from 2010, according to the most recent data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

    Voters’ Choice

    “Districts aren’t spending any discretionary dollars because of the significant issues we have around state funding and our exploding pension payments,” Himes said. “It’s not a good time to be talking about building new schools when you’re laying off teachers.”

    Nor are voters eager to take on such projects. Of 16 ballot questions since 2006 on raising school taxes above state caps to pay for uses such as new bonds, only one has passed, according to the schools association.

    In May, voters in Clearfield and Clinton counties, northeast of Pittsburgh, defeated a referendum that would have raised revenue for the West Branch Area School District. The board wants to renovate its elementary school, built in 1974 when open educational spaces were popular, to put doors on classrooms, said Michelle Dutrow, the superintendent.

    “In this day and age, it presents a very significant safety issue should we have any sort of intruder event,” she said.

    ‘Budget Pressures’

    Officials in Solanco School District west of Philadelphia have been planning a project since 2008 to combine two middle schools in one campus and free up space for more elementary students, said business manager Tim Shrom.

    The combination of higher expenses, the state moratorium on the building program and the weak economic recovery has stymied the plan, he said. Income-tax receipts this year, while better than in 2010, may still be less than in 2008, and pension costs next year are slated to rise 26 percent from this year, he said.

    “There’s just way too much uncertainty to move forward,” Shrom said. “We have a lot of budget pressures that we’re sitting on.”

    By Romy Varghese  Apr 3, 2014 5:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Romy Varghese in Philadelphia at rvarghese8@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netMark Tannenbaum, Mark Schoifet




    Moody's Requests Comments on Proposed Changes to Rating US Housing Finance Agencies.

    New York, April 02, 2014 — Moody’s Investors Service is seeking comments from market participants on proposed changes to its approach to assigning issuer ratings to US housing finance agencies (HFAs). The rating agency does not expect these changes, if adopted, to result in any issuer rating changes.

    “Request for Comment: US Housing Finance Agency Issuer Rating Methodology” describes the two proposed key changes to its current methodology: (1) introducing a scorecard and (2) incorporating a new rating factor entitled, “Risk Profile.”

    The scorecard would assess an HFA’s creditworthiness based on four key credit factors to which Moody’s assigns weights: (1) financial position, 40%; (2) loan portfolio, 20%; (3) risk profile, 20%; and (4) management and operating environment, 20%.

    “These scores round out our quantitative and qualitative analysis by including specific sector attributes,” says Omar Ouzidane, Moody’s Assistant Vice President and Analyst. “They allow us to further break out strengths and weaknesses that can have a significant effect on credit quality.”

    Moody’s also proposes assigning a Risk Profile for HFAs at each given rating level, assessing the HFA according to degree of risk, ranging from Low to Highest.

    “The Risk Profile will allow us to classify the risks that HFAs take on and assess their risk management capacity in a way that incorporates the underlying credit fundamentals in the sector,” adds Ouzidane.

    Moody’s invites market participants to provide feedback on the request for comment by 2 May 2014, by submitting their comments on the Request for Comment Page on www.moodys.com.

    “Request for Comment: US Housing Finance Agency Issuer Rating Methodology” is available at https://www.moodys.com/research/US-Housing-Finance-Agency-Issuer-Rating-Methodology–PBM_PBM163618.

     







    ZONING - GEORGIA

    Noble Parking, Inc. v. Centergy One Associates, LLC

    Court of Appeals of Georgia - March 21, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1097955

     Adjacent property owners brought action against operator of a park-for-hire business seeking to enjoin operation of business. City intervened and also sought injunctive relief. The trial court granted property owners and city summary judgment. Business operator appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Operator was not required to exhaust administrative remedies with city in order to defend action brought against it by neighboring property owners, and
    • Operator’s use of parking lot property for an outdoor horse show did not act to supersede its nonconforming use of property for park-for-hire business.

    Operator of park-for-hire business was not required to exhaust administrative remedies with the city in order to defend action brought against it by neighboring property owners seeking to enjoin operation of business based on city code violation.  Although city intervened in the action, operator was not seeking to circumvent the review process by instituting a collateral attack on the city’s decision that its nonconforming use of property for a park-for-hire business had been superseded, but rather operator chose to resume its parking business after the city informed it of the decision regarding nonconforming use, thereby assuming the risk of the city would pursue a penalty for violation of the city code.

    Park-for-hire business operator’s use of parking lot property for an outdoor horse show did not act to supersede its nonconforming use of property for park-for-hire business pursuant to city code provision that allowed for a nonconforming use to be superseded by a permitted use.  Use of property for outdoor show was a use that was only permitted or allowed by a special administrative permit, and because no such permit was issued, operator’s use could not act to supersede the nonconforming use.




    LIABILITY - GEORGIA

    Battlefield Investments, Inc. v. City of Lafayette

    Court of Appeals of Georgia - March 20, 2014 - S.E.2d - 2014 WL 1061491

    Property owner whose building was damaged when sewer system backed up and overflowed brought negligence action against city. The trial court awarded summary judgment to city. Owner appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Doctrine of res ipsa loquitur did not apply, and
    • Owner’s motion to recuse trial judge was untimely.

    Doctrine of res ipsa loquitur did not apply to incident in which sewer system at property owner’s building backed up and overflowed and, thus, could not be used to establish city’s negligent operation of the sewer system.  There was evidence that the injury was produced by the intermediary cause of a flooding event of historic proportions, and property owner could have prevented the backflow incident by installing a valve on its property.

     




    MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - ILLINOIS

    Henderson Square Condominium Ass'n v. LAB Townhomes, L.L.C.

    Appellate Court of Illinois, First District, Fifth Division - March 21, 2014 - N.E.3d - 2014 IL App (1st) 130764

    Condominium association and its board of managers brought action against developers, alleging breach of the implied warranty of habitability, fraud, negligence, breach of city prohibition against misrepresenting material facts in the course of marketing and selling real estate, and breach of a fiduciary duty. The Circuit Court dismissed claims. Plaintiffs appealed.

    The Appellate Court held that:

    • Limitations periods provided for real estate construction claims, rather than statute of limitations applicable to unwritten contracts, governed action;
    • Plaintiffs’ allegations triggered fraud exception to the running of limitations period;
    • City ordinance created a separate cause of action that could be based on representations made prior to completion of construction; and
    • Plaintiffs sufficiently pleaded cause of action for breach of fiduciary duty.

    City ordinance prohibiting the misrepresenting of material facts in the course of marketing and selling real estate created a cause of action separate from common law fraud, which was not limited to preexisting facts, but could be based on representations made prior to completion of construction.

     




    IMMUNITY - ILLINOIS

    American Islamic Center v. City of Des Plaines

    United States District Court, N.D. Illinois, Eastern Division - March 24, 2014 - Not Reported in F.Supp.2d - 2014 WL 1243870

    American Islamic Center (AIC) is a religious institution incorporated under the Illinois Not–For–Profit Corporation Act.  On February 6, 2013, AIC contracted to buy certain property on the condition that Des Plaines would adopt a zoning map amendment that would allow AIC to use the property for religious and educational activities. On July 15, 2013, the five city council members named as defendants voted against the amendment, outvoting three other city council members who voted in favor of the amendment.

    In this decision, the Court considered defendants’ remaining arguments, namely that: 1) the city council members are entitled to absolute legislative immunity, 2) the Tort Immunity Act bars recovery under Count 6 (IRFRA), and 3) the Illinois statute that AIC cites in its state-law claim seeking review of the zoning decision, 65 ILCS 5/11–13–25, does not provide an independent basis for a cause of action.

    The Court concluded that: 1) the city council members are entitled to absolute legislative immunity, 2) the Tort Immunity Act does not bar recovery under the Illinois Religious Freedom Restoration Act (IRFRA), and 3) AIC may challenge the city’s zoning ordinance under Illinois law even if section 11–13–25 does not provide an independent cause of action.




    EMINENT DOMAIN - KANSAS

    In re Eminent Domain

    Supreme Court of Kansas - March 21, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1133418

    School district filed eminent domain petition. The District Court entered judgment on jury verdict of $249,000 for landowners, and they appealed.

    The Supreme Court of Kansas held that:

    • Trial judge properly allowed landowner, who did not have appraisal expertise, to express a valuation opinion in eminent domain action, but appropriately excluded testimony that was not relevant to the jury’s determination, and
    • Given landowner’s admission that he did not have appraisal expertise, landowner was not qualified to perform a cost appraisal, and therefore, trial judge did not abuse his discretion in excluding this evidence in eminent domain proceeding.

     




    ANNEXATION - KENTUCKY

    City of Lebanon v. Goodin

    Supreme Court of Kentucky - March 20, 2014 - S.W.3d - 2014 WL 1101471

    Property owners brought action challenging annexation by city. The Circuit Court granted summary judgment in favor of property owners. City appealed. The Court of Appeals affirmed. City petitioned for discretionary review.

    The Supreme Court of Kentucky  held that:

    • As a matter of first impression, state annexation statute allows a city to annex territory that is either touching the boundary of the city or nearby;
    • As a matter of first impression, territory was suitable for annexation under annexation statute; and
    • Annexation did not violate property owners’ rights under state constitution’s provision barring governmental entities from exercising absolute and arbitrary power over lives, liberty, and property.

    In interpreting terms “adjacent” and “contiguous” in annexation statute, which allowed extension of city to areas that were adjacent or contiguous to city’s boundaries, application of commonly understood meaning of terms was appropriate, where General Assembly did not define terms, language used by General Assembly was clear and unambiguous, no absurdity would arise in giving terms their plain and commonly understood meanings, and apparent intent of General Assembly would, at the very least, not be frustrated in any way.

    Territory was suitable for annexation by city under annexation statute, although territory was irregular in shape; northern boundary of territory touched city’s current municipal border for 4,780.5 feet, territory was sought by city as location of new store, and territory included city-owned industrial park.

    City’s annexation of territory did not violate non-consenting property owners’ rights under state constitution’s provision barring governmental entities from exercising absolute and arbitrary power over lives, liberty, and property.  City’s decision to annex territory was rationally connected to its power to act, annexing territory would potentially increase commercial development or revenue, and city fully complied with statute governing selection of territory for annexation.




    TAX - MARYLAND

    Victoria Falls Committee for Truth in Taxation, LLC v. Prince George's County

    Court of Appeals of Maryland - March 21, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1128391

     Taxpayers in special taxing district challenged resolution enacted by county creating the tax district. The Tax Court denied claims. On appeal, the Circuit Court affirmed. Taxpayers appealed, and the Court of Special Appeals affirmed. Taxpayers were granted writ of certiorari.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • County did not have to determine whether any change in land ownership occurring after application for district might have affected requirement that a super-majority of landowners in proposed district request creation of district, and
    • County’s approval of request to create district that did not include 25 of the 609 lots within community was lawful under act’s requirement that district be used to finance infrastructure improvements in any defined geographic region.

    Plain language of state enabling act allowing for the creation of special taxing districts did not require that county determine whether any change in land ownership occurring after the time of application for creation of the district might have affected the requirement that a super-majority of landowners in the proposed district request creation of district.  Act only required a super-majority at the time the application was made.

    County’s approval of the request to create a special taxing district that did not include 25 of the 609 lots within the planned community was lawful under the state enabling act’s requirement that the district be used to finance infrastructure improvements in any defined geographic region within the county, even though the 25 excluded lots were located throughout non-contiguous parts of the planned community.   The act did not require the special taxing district to have a particular shape or include particular properties, nor did it contain any reference to contiguity or a specific subdivision.




    ZONING - MARYLAND

    Dugan v. Prince George's County

    Court of Special Appeals of Maryland - March 27, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1258135

    Homeowners sought review of county’s approval of application for water and sewer amendment by religious congregation which sought to build a church and school on neighboring property. The Circuit Court affirmed. Homeowners appealed.

    The Court of Special Appeals held that:

    • Appropriate vehicle for appealing the council’s resolutions was administrative mandamus;
    • Council’s resolutions articulated the basis of the council’s decision at a level sufficient for judicial review of the legality of the decision;
    • Substantial evidence supported county council’s decision to amend water and sewer plans; and
    • Maryland–National Capital Park and Planning Commission’s review of proposed amendment to county’s water and sewer plan substituted fully for the two step review and certification process for adopting such amendments.

    County council acted in a quasijudicial capacity when it approved amendments to water and sewer plan to allow religious congregation to build church and school on property, and thus, the appropriate vehicle for appealing the council’s resolutions was administrative mandamus rather than a declaratory judgment action.  Although the general process of considering water and sewer category change requests in county was a legislative amendment process, the consideration of religious congregation’s application was unique in that the application was not combined with any other water and sewer category change requests, but was reviewed separately, and the approval was not based on the overall community planning, but rather a specific federal court opinion and order concerning discrimination against congregation’s application.

    County council’s resolutions granting religious congregation’s water and sewer category change requests so that congregation could build church and school on property articulated the basis of the council’s decision at a level sufficient for judicial review of the legality of the decision.  While the council’s resolutions did not include a discussion of how a category change conformed to each of the requirements of the county’s water and sewer plan, the council incorporated the reasoning of federal court opinion that found that county’s original denial of request constituted religious discrimination, and the federal court reviewed the record, made detailed findings, and applied the law, making it unnecessary for the council to repeat the same findings and legal analysis.

    Substantial evidence supported county council’s decision to amend water and sewer plans to allow religious congregation to build church and school on property.  County’s department of environmental resources (DER) analyzed how the application complied with the standards necessary for approval and found that the application was generally consistent with the criteria established in the water and sewer plan, civil engineer testified that the proposed development protected existing wetlands buffer, and federal court opinion in congregation’s religious discrimination action against county, which findings were incorporated into council’s decision, determined that county failed to produce any evidence showing a negative environmental impact from development.

    Maryland–National Capital Park and Planning Commission’s review of proposed amendment to county’s water and sewer plan substituted fully for the two step review and certification process for adopting such amendments.  Statute stated that Maryland–National Capital Park and Planning Commission’s review constituted full compliance with the review process, and thus, county council had legal authority to consider application for water and sewer amendment.




    EMPLOYMENT - MARYLAND

    Baltimore County v. Thiergartner

    Court of Special Appeals of Maryland - March 26, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1245031

     County sought judicial review of decision of Workers’ Compensation Commission awarding permanent partial disability benefits to claimant, who was retired county firefighter and who had coronary artery disease. The Circuit Court denied county’s motion for summary judgment and granted claimant’s cross-motion for summary judgment. County appealed.

    As matters of first impression, the Court of Special Appeals held that:

    • Statute providing that workers’ compensation benefits received by retired firefighter regarding occupational disease will be adjusted so that total of those benefits and retirement benefits does not exceed weekly salary during active employment only applies to weekly retirement and workers’ compensation benefits that are due concurrently, and
    • Lump-sum payment that claimant received from county’s deferred retirement option program could not be used to offset workers’ compensation benefits.

     




    DEVELOPMENT - MARYLAND

    State Center, LLC v. Lexington Charles Ltd. Partnership

    Court of Appeals of Maryland - March 27, 2014 - A.3d - 2014 WL 1258366

     Business owners brought action against state agencies and developer, involved in multi-phase redevelopment project intended to replace aged and obsolete State office buildings with new facilities for State use, seeking a declaratory judgment that the formative contracts for the project were void and an injunction to halt the project. The Circuit Court, Baltimore City, voided formative contracts of the project on the grounds that they violated the State Procurement Law. Defendants petitioned for writ of certiorari.

    The Court of Appeals held that:
    • Business owners were not “bidders or offerors” or “prospective bidders or offerors,” required to exhaust administrative remedies before the State Board of Contract Appeals;
    • Business owners’ properties in city business district were insufficiently proximate to project property to support property owner standing;
    • Business owners established taxpayer standing to bring action; but
    • Business owners’ filing of action in a case involving time-sensitive procurement issues was unreasonably delayed, such that claims were barred by laches.

    “After climbing the foothills to this point and with the mountain almost in sight, Appellees’ surviving claims on the merits shall stumble and fall to a figurative death in the crevasse that is the equitable doctrine of laches.”

     

     




    STATUTE OF LIMITATIONS - MASSACHUSETTS

    Genovesi v. Nelson

    Appeals Court of Massachusetts, Norfolk - March 5, 2014 - N.E.3d - 85 Mass.App.Ct. 43

    Investor brought action against financial advisors, alleging claims of fraud, fraudulent inducement, negligent misrepresentation, breach of fiduciary duty, deceptive business practices, and violation of Massachusetts Uniform Securities Act (MUSA), arising from advisors’ allegedly misleading investor into believing that he had placed $1 million in funds into a low-risk investment, with resulting loss of investor’s entire investment. The Superior Court Department dismissed the complaint on limitations grounds, and investor appealed.

    The Appeals Court held that statutes of limitations were tolled until time that investor learned he had lost his investment.

    Three- and four-year statutes of limitations were tolled, pursuant to discovery rule, on claims against financial advisors by investor alleging fraud, fraudulent inducement, negligent misrepresentation, breach of fiduciary duty, deceptive business practices, and violation of MUSA, from time that investor placed $1 million in funds into an investment based on advisors’ alleged misrepresentations that investment was low-risk until time that investor learned he had lost his entire investment.  Investor first knew that he had been misled in when the investment fund announced that it would not pay interest or return any principal for investor’s shares.




    IMMUNITY - MICHIGAN

    Nash v. Duncan Park Com'n

    Court of Appeals of Michigan - March 20, 2014 - N.W.2d - 2014 WL 1097444

    This wrongful death case arose from a sledding accident that took the life of 11–year–old Chance Nash. The accident occurred at Duncan Park in Grand Haven. The questions presented on appeals centered on the ownership of Duncan Park and whether the governmental tort liability act (GTLA), MCL 691.1401 et seq., barred plaintiff’s claim.

    To answer these questions was required to interpret a document drafted 100 years ago. The circuit court ruled that this instrument transferred the park property from Martha Duncan to the city of Grand Haven. However, the district court concluded that the document created a trust which conveyed legal ownership of the land to three trustees rather than to the City.

    The more difficult issue was whether the Duncan Park Commission, which was established pursuant to Martha Duncan’s trust, constituted a “political subdivision” of the city of Grand Haven. Political subdivision status would cloak the trustees and the Commission with governmental immunity.

    The court concluded that, because the Commission was a private organization empowered by the trust to manage the park without any governmental oversight, it could not invoke governmental immunity to avoid liability for Chance’s death.

     

     




    BONDS - NEW JERSEY

    Morris County Imp. Authority v. Power Partners Mastec, LLC

    Superior Court of New Jersey, Appellate Division - March 24, 2014 - Not Reported in A.3d - 2014 WL 1125378

    In 2011, Power Partners Mastec, LLC (Mastec) and SunLight General Capital, LLC (SunLight) responded to RFPs issued by Morris County Improvement Authority and Somerset County Improvement Authority, and were awarded the contract to design and construct approximately seventy solar energy generating systems on properties owned by governmental entities across Morris, Somerset, and Sussex Counties. Mastec’s and SunLight’s business relationship did not endure. The two entities are currently embroiled in arbitration to determine which one of them is liable for cost overruns and construction delays that have affected their ability to perform under the contract entered into with plaintiffs.

    Before these arbitration proceedings began, Mastec filed notices to assert liens under the Municipal Mechanics’ Lien Law on approximately $50,000,000 in project financing funds plaintiffs received from the sale of government-secured, taxable municipal bonds. These funds are intended to cover the cost of the solar energy program and are held in a trust managed by the U.S. Bank.

    Acting on plaintiffs’ order to show cause and verified complaint, the Law Division discharged any restrictions on the disbursement of these funds by U.S. Bank as trustee that were created by Mastec’s notice under the Municipal Mechanics’ Lien Law. The court found Mastec was not a “subcontractor” under the statute and thus not entitled to the protections afforded by the Municipal Mechanics’ Lien Law. After this ruling, Mastec filed notices of lien under the Construction Lien Law.  On plaintiffs’ challenge, the trial court limited the scope of these liens, by permitting them to attach only to interests in real property held by SunLight, arguably rendering the liens powerless to affect the disbursement of the municipal bond funds managed by U.S. Bank. The court denied Mastec’s motion for reconsideration of this ruling.

    Mastec now appeals arguing the trial court erred when it discharged the municipal mechanics’ liens based on having found Mastec was not a subcontractor as defined under N.J.S.A. 2A:44–126. Mastec also argues it is entitled to have construction liens attach to SunLight’s entire leasehold interest in properties, including any revenue generated by leases that are derived from the municipal bond funds. If we were to reject these arguments, Mastec urges us to remand the matter for the parties to engage in discovery and, if necessary, for the trial court to conduct a plenary hearing. According to Mastec, the limited record developed before the trial court thus far is not sufficient to support a final determination of the issues raised here.

    The appellate court found that the trial court erred in not finding Mastec to be a subcontractor under N.J.S.A. 2A:44–126, but nevertheless affirmed the court’s ultimate judgment denying Mastec the protections available under the Municipal Mechanics’ Lien Law because the County Improvement Authorities Law, N.J.S.A. 40:37A–44 to –135, specifically exempts the property of a county improvement authority from “judicial process.”  N.J.S.A. 40:37A–127. As plaintiffs correctly argued, because a municipal mechanics’ lien can only be enforced through judicial process, the liens are unenforceable as a matter of law.

     

     




    MUNICIPAL ORDINANCE - NEW MEXICO

    Town of Silver City v. Ferranti

    Supreme Court of New Mexico - March 20, 2014 - Not Reported in P.3d - 2014 WL 1153775

    Accused appealed assessment of fines related to determination of guilt for violation of criminal city ordinances for consumption of alcohol and marijuana in public park. After de novo bench trial, the District Court dismissed charges against accused and found that fines were grossly disproportionate to gravity of offenses. City appealed.

    The Supreme Court of New Mexico held that:
    • Ordinance giving police authority to issue citations for violations of criminal ordinances in lieu of arrest was not unconstitutionally vague, and
    • Fines were not excessive and did not constitute cruel and unusual punishment.

    City ordinance allowing police officers authority to issue citations for violations of criminal ordinances in lieu of arrest was not unconstitutionally vague, even though ordinance lacked express guidance regarding exercise of officers’ authority.  Express standards were not required before officer could exercise his discretion to either arrest or issue citation.

    Fines imposed on accused for violations of city ordinances prohibiting accused’s consumption of alcohol and marijuana in public park were not excessive and did not constitute cruel and unusual punishment.  Fine for possession of marijuana was within amount specified under ordinance, and fine for drinking in public place was less than amounts prescribed by ordinance.

     




    ARBITRATION - NEW YORK

    Citigroup Global Markets Inc. v. All Children's Hosp., Inc.

    United States District Court, S.D. New York - March 20, 2014 - F.Supp.2d - 2014 WL 1133401

    Citigroup sought declaratory judgment and injunctive relief against All Children’s Hopsital, Inc. (“ACH”) to enjoin ACH from pursuing an arbitration brought by ACH in Florida.  That arbitration was initiated by a Statement of Claim filed by ACH on September 30, 2013 before the FINRA.   The arbitration asserted claims arising from the market failure of more than $90 million in auction rate securities issued under a Broker–Dealer Agreement executed by the parties on September 1, 2007.

    ACH offered three principal arguments: (1) that the phrase “actions and proceedings” is narrow and does not encompass arbitrations at all, such that the Agreement and FINRA rule can be read to complement each other; (2) that the subject of the arbitration does not “aris[e] out of” the Agreement; and (3) that this Court lacks authority to grant the injunction sought by Citigroup.  The District Court found no merit in any of these arguments.

    “ACH’s first argument raises the linguistic question of whether an arbitration falls under the umbrella of ‘all actions and proceedings.’ These are capacious words. In Black’s Law Dictionary, the many entries under ‘action’ span nine columns across five pages and those for ‘proceeding’ take an entire page. See Black’s Law Dictionary 32–36, 1324 (9th ed.2009). When conjoined together and modified by ‘all’—i.e., ‘all actions and proceedings’—the words appear maximally all-inclusive.”

    The court permanently enjoined ACH from further pursuing its arbitration before FINRA directed it to discontinue that arbitration forthwith.




    IMMUNITY - NEW YORK

    Bower v. City of Lockport

    Supreme Court, Appellate Division, Fourth Department, New York - March 21, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 01868

    A homeowner’s guest brought negligence, battery, and § 1983 excessive force claims against a municipality and police officers, claiming that the officers pushed or failed to prevent him from falling down a flight of stairs. The Supreme Court, Niagara County, denied the defendants’ motion for summary judgment. The defendants appealed.

    The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, held that:

    • The officers did not voluntary assume a duty of care over the guest;
    • The officers were protected by governmental function immunity; and
    • There was no evidence that the officers pushed the guest down the stairs.



    OPEN RECORDS - NEW YORK

    Crawford v. New York City Dept. of Information Technology and Telecommunications.

    Supreme Court, New York County, New York - March 20, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 24072

    Requester brought proceeding pursuant to Article 78 and the Freedom of Information Law (FOIL) against the New York City Department of Information Technology and Telecommunications seeking information regarding location of conduits used for high-speed internet. Agency moved for order directing that papers be filed under seal.

    The Supreme Court, New York County, held that:

    • Information regarding location of conduits used for high-speed internet was exempt from disclosure under FOIL exemption for information technology, and
    • Good cause existed to seal papers related to denial of FOIL request.
    Disclosure of information in map form regarding location of conduits used for high-speed internet would jeopardize security of city’s information technology assets, therefore, such maps were exempt from disclosure under FOIL exemption for information technology, in requester’s FOIL request for such information from New York City Department of Information Technology and Telecommunications.  Release of precise location of conduits would pose substantial threat and make fiber optic network more susceptible to terrorist or other attack.



    SCHOOLS - NEW YORK

    Candino v. Starpoint Central School Dist.

    Supreme Court, Appellate Division, Fourth Department, New York - March 21, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 01852

    Former student brought action against two school districts and their boards of education, and two high schools, alleging that student was exposed to highly contagious virus when he participated in wrestling tournament. The Supreme Court, Erie County, granted student’s application for leave to serve late notice of claim. Defendants appealed.

    The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, held that granting leave to serve late notice of claim was unwarranted.

    Where a claimant does not offer a reasonable excuse for failing to serve a timely notice of claim, a court may grant leave to serve a late notice of claim only if the respondent has actual knowledge of the essential facts underlying the claim, there is no compelling showing of prejudice to the respondent, and the claim does not patently lack merit.

    High school student was not entitled to leave to serve late notice of claim against two school districts and their boards of education, and two high schools, alleging that he was exposed to highly contagious virus when he participated in wrestling tournament; even assuming that respondents suffered no prejudice from delay, and that proposed claim against them did not patently lack merit, respondents asserted that, until student made application for leave, they had no knowledge that he had contracted herpes or otherwise had been injured at tournament, and notice of claim filed by another wrestler only provided respondents with constructive knowledge of student’s claim, since nothing in that notice established that student was infected at tournament.

     

     




    TAX - NEW YORK

    Keyspan Gas East Corp. v. Supervisor of Town of Oyster Bay

    Supreme Court, Appellate Division, Second Department, New York - March 19, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 01719

     A natural gas company brought action against town, its supervisor, and special municipal districts, challenging the imposition of special ad valorem taxes for garbage and refuse collection services on the company’s mass property. Two special districts brought third-party and second-party claims against the county. The Supreme Court, Nassau County, denied the county’s motion to dismiss the third-party and second-party claims. The county appealed.

    The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, held that the county could not charge back the cost of refunding proceeds from invalid ad valorem taxes to the special municipal districts.

    A county’s liability to refund proceeds from a special ad valorem taxes for garbage and refuse collection services that was found to be invalid as applied to certain mass property was not an assessment for benefit of special municipal districts, and thus could not be charged back to the special districts during the following tax year.




    TAX - NEW YORK

    New York Telephone Co. v. Supervisor of Town of Hempstead

    Supreme Court, Appellate Division, Second Department, New York - March 19, 2014 - N.Y.S.2d - 2014 N.Y. Slip Op. 01726

    A phone company brought an action against a town supervisor, various municipal bodies and special districts within a county, challenging the imposition of special ad valorem taxes for garbage and refuse collection services on the company’s mass property. The Supreme Court, Nassau County, found the taxes invalid. The defendants appealed. The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, affirmed. On remand, the Supreme Court, Nassau County, ordered the defendants to refund the improperly assessed taxes. The defendants appealed.

    The Supreme Court, Appellate Division, held that the town and other municipal bodies and districts were liable for refunds of the improper tax payments.

    Phone company’s “mass property,” on which a county sought to impose special ad valorem taxes for garbage and refuse collection services, refers to equipment such as lines, wires, cables, poles, supports, and enclosures for electrical conductors, which constitute a type of real property that is not amenable to human occupation and has been erected on public and private real property owned by persons or entities other than the utility.

    A county administrative provision, in which the county assumed liability for tax refunds, did not relieve a town supervisor, various municipal bodies, and special districts within a county of their liability to refund tax payments in connection with special ad valorem taxes for garbage and refuse collection services that were found to be invalid, where the town played a role in determining what properties were subject to the taxes, and the town, and other municipal bodies and districts could seek indemnification from the county.

     

     




    SPECIAL ASSESSMENTS - NORTH DAKOTA

    Hector v. City of Fargo

    Supreme Court of North Dakota - March 20, 2014 - N.W.2d - 2014 ND 53

    Owner of property located in improvement district brought action against city, challenging special assessments, alleging claims for statutory and equitable reassessment of project benefits, fraud and deceit, violation of fiduciary duties, and denial of federal civil rights. The District Court entered summary judgment in favor city, and owner appealed.

    The Supreme Court of North Dakota held that owner was precluded, pursuant to doctrine of res judicata, from litigating issues that had been or could have been raised in prior appeal of city commissioners’ approval of the assessments.

    Property owner’s prior appeal of decision of city commissioners approving special assessments against property located in improvement district, precluded, pursuant to doctrine of res judicata, litigation of issues that had been raised or could have been raised in owner’s subsequent original action in district court challenging same special assessments, including issues contesting city’s claimed construction costs, whether city committed fraud in its statement of costs, whether city improperly applied federal highway funds for project, and whether city violated due process in approving the assessments.

     




    IMMUNITY - WASHINGTON

    Fabre v. Town of Ruston

    Court of Appeals of Washington, Division 2 - March 19, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1064804

     Casino and its owner filed suit against town, mayor, and members of town council for negligence, negligent misrepresentation, and tortious interference with business expectancy, arising out of town council’s enactment of ordinances, later declared void and/or repealed, which replaced graduated tax on social card games with flat 20% tax and banned house-banked social card games. The Superior Court entered summary judgment for defendants on all claims and dismissed complaint. Plaintiffs appealed.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Town was not performing proprietary function when they enacted ordinances, as required to come within “proprietary function” exception to public duty doctrine on claims negligence and negligent misrepresentation;
    • Negligence claims did not come within “special relationship” exception to public duty doctrine; and
    • Town was immune from suit for tortious interference with business expectancy.

    Town was performing government function, and not propriety function, when it enacted ordinances replacing graduated tax on casino’s revenues on social card games with flat 20 percent tax and banning house-banked social card games, and thus, casino’s claims for negligence and negligent misrepresentation arising out of enactment of such ordinances, both of which were subsequently repealed, did not come within proprietary function exception to public duty doctrine.

    Casino could not have justifiably relied on representations of former mayor that casino would always be allowed to operate, and thus, casino did not have “special relationship” with town, as required for casino’s claims for negligence and negligent misrepresentation arising out of council’s enactment of ordinances replacing graduated tax on social card games with flat 20% tax and banning house-banked social card games to come within “special relationship” exception to public duty doctrine, where mayor did not have independent authority to establish tax or prohibit or allow social card games, mayor could not represent to casino how future town councils would vote and legislate, and mayor had no authority to bind future members of council to such promise.

    Town was engaged in purely legislative acts when it enacted ordinances replacing graduated tax on social card games with flat 20% tax and banning house-banked social card games, and thus, town was immune from suit for tortious interference with business expectancy, in action brought by casino, regardless of whether ordinances were subsequently declared void and/or repealed.

     




    Tax-Exempt Bond Group Not Affected by TE/GE Reorganization.

    The tax-exempt bond group of the IRS Tax-Exempt and Government Entities Division will be unaffected by the recently announced TE/GE reorganization, Rebecca Harrigal, director of tax-exempt bonds at TE/GE, said March 27.

    Responding to an audience question at the National Association of Bond Lawyers’ Tax and Securities Law Institute in Boston about whether counsel functions will be moved from the tax-exempt bond (TEB) group of TE/GE, Harrigal said there will be no change in the TEB group because TEB uses the chief counsel financial institutions and products (FIP) branch 5 and the chief counsel TE/GE as TEB Counsel.

    The IRS announced March 20 that it will move some legal functions, including those responsible for issuing published guidance, from the TE/GE Division to the IRS Office of Chief Counsel.

    “FIP Branch 5 will do the revenue rulings, letter rulings, and TAMs [technical advice memoranda],” Harrigal said. “They have always done that and there is no change there.”

    According to Harrigal, TEB uses TE/GE as their field counsel, by helping prep TAMs, among other functions. “We have within TEB some subject matter experts, and in 2009 we had a significant hiring where we brought in a lot of attorneys, but they have never supplanted what the FIP and TE/GE counsel does for us,” Harrigal said. “So there will be no change in TEB’s operations.”

    Closing Agreements

    Harrigal said that under her leadership, TEB now has a closing agreement team that is designed to ensure consistency and enforceability and to be proactive in the closing agreement area. Closing agreements are how TEB resolves a vast majority of their cases, she said.According to Harrigal, the closing agreement team looks at all the nonstandard closing agreements for consistency and enforceability. “If there are terms in there that are new, we have a procedure and administration person look at it as a member of the closing agreement team. Because we have them as an ad hoc member, there isn’t the lengthy coordination process we would normally face.

    “We found that it is working very quickly and we are turning these closing agreements around very quickly,” Harrigal said.

    The group also creates standard closing agreement terms, Harrigal said, “so when a closing comes in we can pop those terms in [the agreement] so [the field agents] don’t reinvent the wheel.”

    The closing agreement team is also trying to be proactive with the market, Harrigal said. If the team is seeing matters that will be a problem for a significant number of issuers, they will look at consistent resolutions they can put in place before the issuers start getting into problems.

    The closing agreement team will consist of members of the field office, FIP branch 5, and IRS Office of Associate Chief Counsel (Procedure and Administration).

    Currently, the closing agreement team will not negotiate nor sign off on closing agreements, although this could potentially change as the team develops over time, Harrigal said.

    by William R. Davis




    LABOR - WASHINGTON

    City of Vancouver v. State Public Employment Relations Com'n

    Court of Appeals of Washington, Division 2 - March 25, 2014 - P.3d - 2014 WL 1226499

    City sought review of Public Employment Relations Commission decision finding that city committed an unfair labor practice by discriminating against police officers’ guild president out of animus over his union activities. The Clark Superior Court certified the appeal.

    The Court of Appeals held that:

    • Commission was authorized by statute to impose liability on individuals for unfair labor practices;
    • Commission did not impose individual liability on police chief for unfair labor practices;
    • Commission’s error in applying an improper burden of proof in determining the city’s liability was harmless;
    • Fact that police chief did not have notice of assistant police chief’s antiunion animus in making recommendations for officers for motorcycle unit did not preclude a finding of unfair labor practices;
    • Officer’s loss of benefits conferred by selection to the motorcycle unit constituted an adverse employment action for purposes of claim of unfair labor practices;
    • Commission did not engage in rule making with its order finding city liable for unfair labor practice;
    • Substantial evidence supported examiner’s finding that assistant police chief’s statement that he wanted someone for motorcycle unit position who shared police chief’s “vision” betrayed his animus towards police officer; and
    • Substantial evidence supported examiner’s finding that police chief relied on a tainted recommendation from assistant police chief.



    WSJ: For Munis, SEC Offers Carrot, Threatens Stick.

    Officials with the Securities and Exchange Commission’s municipal-enforcement unit are urging local governments and the banks that help them sell bonds to self-report certain violations related to disclosure, indicating that harsher penalties could be sought if the violations are discovered later.

    Earlier this month, the SEC launched a program to encourage municipalities and banks to come forward with violations regarding continuing disclosure agreements. The move comes after the SEC brought charges against a school district last year for falsely saying in bond-offering documents that it had complied with previous disclosure obligations.

    “Think of it as an opportunity to clear your slate, before we come at issuers and underwriters very hard,” Peter Chan, an assistant director with the muni enforcement unit in the SEC’s Chicago office, said on Friday.

    “We’re going to go after the issuers,” Mr. Chan said. “We’re going to find out who was responsible.”

    Mr. Chan spoke at a National Association of Bond Lawyers conference in Boston. The enforcement unit’s chief, LeeAnn Gaunt, said at the conference on Thursday that the SEC had separately been reviewing the past disclosures of financially stressed municipalities, to help ensure investors were not misled about financial conditions.

    The comments come as the SEC turns a more critical eye toward the municipal-bond market, which had been viewed as a relatively safe spot for mom-and-pop investors but has seen large bankruptcies in Detroit and Jefferson County, Ala., in recent years.

    Under the self-reporting program, called the Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initative, cities that come forward must establish policies and procedures regarding their disclosure obligations, but would not have to pay a monetary penalty. Underwriters that come forward would be subject to a financial penalty, but it would be capped at $500,000.

    “We hear complaints from the financial sector and so forth about lack of predictability,” Mr. Chan said. Under the program, “you’re getting predictability,” and Mr. Chan noted it’s unusual that market participants “have a situation where you know exactly the type of settlement terms you’re going to get.”

    Lawyers at the conference, who work with cities and banks to help sell debt, questioned whether the program was necessary, noting that disclosure practices have improved in recent years. Jack McWilliams, a former attorney fellow at the SEC’s Office of Municipal Securities, which is separate from the enforcement unit, said the municipal-bond market isn’t perfect but that there should be other ways to improve it.

    “I find the initiative offensive, I find it bullying,” said Mr. McWilliams, who now works at Lewis Longman & Walker PA. “The idea that you have to prostrate yourself…there must be a better way to make the market better.”

    But Mr. Chan noted that although the bond lawyers at Friday’s conference may be providing good advice to their clients, they are “not the whole universe.” Indeed, the U.S. Census Bureau says there are about 90,000 local governments in the U.S.

    “There are bad actors,” Mr. Chan said. If there weren’t bad actors, “we wouldn’t even be speaking here today.”




    MBIA Muni Wraps Upgraded: BTIG Says Reuters Misses the Point.

    Bond insurer MBIA Inc. (NYSE:MBI)’s National Public Finance Guarantee Corp. recent upgrade to AA- from A by Standard & Poor’s has caused some discussion about how much of a difference there really is between the two ratings for a bond investor. A recent post from Cate Long on Reuter’s MuniLand concluded that the possibility of default is probably too low to merit bond insurance. While he doesn’t disagree with her reasoning, according to bond analyst Mark Palmer at BTIG Research, it’s not the impact on investors that really matters.

    The MuniLand post imagines an investor who already owns bonds (or is thinking of buying some) and then weighs the expected returns with and without buying insurance. AAA and AA bonds don’t really default (0.00% after 10 years according to Fitch), and A rated bonds only default 0.05% of the time after ten years, compared to 1.28% for BBB rated bonds. The A rated bonds that MBIA Inc. (NYSE:MBI) is now able to insure have such a minuscule default rate, that insuring them seems hard to justify.

    Muni bond insurance is normally bought by munis

    “The main problems with this analysis, in our view, are that it regards municipal bond insurance solely from the viewpoint of an investor,” writes Palmer in a March 24 report. “The primary purchasers of bond insurance are the issuers of municipal bonds – the municipalities themselves.”

    Municipalities, particularly those with weak finances and low credit ratings, benefit from insurer’s wraps by getting lower borrowing costs, and in some cases making access to capital markets feasible in the first place. The difference between a AA muni bond and an A rated muni bond is 69 basis points (4.72% versus 4.03% respectively). Even after the cost of the insurer’s wrap is taken into account, that savings represents money that can be invested back into the city.

    The S&P upgrade makes MBIA’s wraps more valuable

    Municipalities aren’t really thinking about the possibility of default when they buy insurance wraps, they are just trying to raise money efficiently. Looked at from this perspective, the upgrade is important for MBIA Inc. (NYSE:MBI) because it means they are able to offer their municipal clients a better product (a better insurance wrap with lower rates) than they could when rated A. MBIA will either be able to sell more muni bond wraps, sell them for a better price, or both – all of which is good for their shareholders.

    by 




    Bonds and the BFF Problem.

    A new rule tries to keep muni market players from getting too friendly.

    The Beatles let us know that we all “get by with a little help from our friends.” Those nine words from the Awesome Foursome capture the essence of the American municipal bond market. Some new developments, however, could redefine how friends help state and local governments get by in the muni market.

    Like all markets, the municipal bond market is about buyers and sellers. The sellers are cities, counties, schools and other public entities that need to borrow money to build roads, bridges, hospitals and other major projects. The buyers are wealthy individuals, property-casualty insurance companies, mutual funds and others who like muni bonds for their secure, tax-free income. In concept, this market is simple and predictable.

    Except that it’s not. There are about a million bonds in the market. These bonds are sold by tens of thousands of governments and are backed by hundreds of different revenue streams. There is no central exchange where a buyer can go to find just the right bond. Different states apply different tax rules to the interest investors earn for holding muni bonds. For these and many other reasons, buyers and sellers work hard to find each other and even harder to agree on fair prices.

    Fortunately, there are intermediaries—friends, if you will—who can help. Underwriters and financial advisers tell issuers how to design bonds that will appeal to just the right type of investors.

    Investors rely on broker-dealers, brokers-brokers and other market makers to deliver the bonds they want. Issuers and investors alike depend on third-party data providers for crucial insights on market prices and dynamics.

    That’s why some recent regulatory changes have set the stage for a major shake-up. The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (MSRB), which oversees advisers and bond dealers, is now implementing rules that redefine the roles and duties of municipal financial advisers. Perhaps the biggest effect is that a bank or other institution that offers an issuer advice leading up to a bond sale cannot buy those bonds once they’re sold. This rule is designed to prevent cozy friendships from morphing into the sort of corruption we saw in places like Jefferson County, Ala. That makes sense. At the same time, small issuers who access the markets infrequently depend heavily on advisers and other friends to make sense of this complicated market. This rule might limit their access to the market expertise they need just to get by.

    Meanwhile, both the MSRB and Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) are considering new rules to promote “pre-trade transparency.” These changes apply to brokers-brokers, alternative trading systems and other intermediaries who help investors buy and sell bonds that have been out for a while (in what is known as the “secondary market”). The systems these intermediaries have developed are a bit like Craigslist for the muni market. Sellers post bonds they’d like to sell and interested buyers respond. Sometimes trades happen, but usually they don’t. Either way, the information these systems collect can tell us a lot about a bond’s “fair” or “actual” market price.

    The SEC and MSRB are considering ways to use that information to improve the market’s transparency and efficiency—a worthy objective. Investors who use these systems, however, are wondering why they should have to share such valuable information with anyone other than their closest trading friends.

    With these actions, the regulators are sending a clear message. If you sell bonds, your real friends are those who work only for you. If you buy bonds, get ready to share friends-only information with the rest of the market. These changes are designed to focus accountability on buyers and sellers, and to keep friends, both well intentioned and otherwise, at arm’s length.




    Scores of Puerto Rico Trades Sub-$100,000 Voided by Dealers.

    Scores of trades in bonds Puerto Rico issued this month have been canceled by dealers, including some that were under the $100,000 minimum transaction level stipulated in deal documents, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

    The self-governing U.S. territory sold $3.5 billion of debt March 11, in the biggest-ever high-yield offering for the $3.7 trillion municipal market. The issue gave the island, which was cut to junk last month, cash to pay bills through June 2015, as officials try to revive a shrinking economy. Hedge funds bought the majority of the bonds at issue.

    Dealers report voided transactions to the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board, said Ernesto Lanza, deputy executive director at the Alexandria, Virginia-based self-regulatory organization. The group removes such trades from its Electronic Municipal Market Access website, though regulatory authorities have access to the trading history, he said in an interview.

    “If a dealer says ‘I need to correct some data or change data,’ they are making a correction that needs to go out to the marketplace,” Lanza said. “Our system allows for modifications, amends and cancellations to make corrections to previous reports.”

    Finra’s Exam

    The canceled Puerto Rico trades included 99 below the minimum purchase threshold of $100,000, and some were nullified as late as this week, Bloomberg data show. Some that exceeded $100,000 were also scrapped, while some below the $100,000 floor remain.

    The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority said March 21 that it was examining trading in Puerto Rico’s new bonds. While offering documents stipulated a $100,000 floor for purchases, scores of transactions below that amount were still completed, according to Bloomberg data.

    George Smaragdis, a Finra spokesman, said in an e-mail that the regulator had no comment on the canceled transactions.

    Puerto Rico sale documents state that “the bonds shall be issued in the minimum denomination of $100,000 and any integral multiple of $5,000 in excess thereof,” unless one of the three largest rating companies raises the commonwealth to investment grade.

    Institutional Intent

    The $100,000 threshold also applies to trading after issuance, said two people with knowledge of the sale who requested anonymity without authorization to speak publicly.

    “These are intended for institutional purchasers, or at least for people that can afford the risk by making it a minimum denomination of $100,000,” Martha Haines, who led the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Municipal Securities office from 2001 to 2011, said in an interview last week.

    Haines teaches municipal finance at the Maurer School of Law at Indiana University in Bloomington.

    The Puerto Rico bonds are tax-free nationwide and mature in July 2035. They priced to yield about 8.73 percent, or 93 cents on the dollar. The securities traded today with an average yield of about 8.66 percent, or about 5.23 percentage points above benchmark municipal bonds.

    The Bond Buyer reported the cancellations earlier yesterday.

    Carol Danko, a spokeswoman in Washington at the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association didn’t have an immediate comment on the canceled trades.

    By Brian Chappatta  Mar 26, 2014 7:39 AM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Brian Chappatta in New York atbchappatta1@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netMark Tannenbaum




    Puerto Rico to Detroit Buoyed by Insurance Comeback: Muni Credit.

    Buyers of debt issued by bankrupt Detroit or junk-rated Puerto Rico are finding it pays to have bond insurance. The backing is even more valuable after upgrades of units of Assured Guaranty Ltd. and MBIA Inc.

    Insured local debt beat the $3.7 trillion municipal market last year for the first time since 2007, before the companies lost their top credit grades during the financial crisis. Standard & Poor’s last week raised subsidiaries of Assured to AA, the third-highest level, and MBIA’s National Public Finance Guarantee Corp. to AA-, one step lower.

    The National increase alone lifted ratings on about $300 billion of bonds, according to research firm Municipal Market Advisors. The upgrades have an amplified effect on distressed issuers. Some uninsured Puerto Rico bonds fell over the past year at more than five times the pace of those backed by Assured. Detroit general obligations with insurance trade at 99 cents on the dollar, while those without it have fallen to about 20 cents, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

    “The insurance protects you from all the downside risk from an impending restructuring that may or may not happen” in Puerto Rico, said Robert DiMella, who oversees about $7.5 billion of local debt as co-head of MacKay Municipal Managers in Princeton, New Jersey. “It’s a very good way for investors to invest in Puerto Rico, and that’s what we’re doing.”

    Double Up

    The rating boost may help the insurers double their market share to 8 percent of issuance this year, S&P said in a report last week. The higher credit standing will make it easier for them to win business should borrowing costs rise and make the backstop more valuable to issuers, according to S&P. Muni yields remain near generational lows as bond sales have slumped.

    The consensus on Wall Street is that interest rates are poised to rise. Ten-year Treasury yields will climb to 3.34 percent in the fourth quarter from about 2.7 percent now, according to the median forecast of 70 analysts surveyed by Bloomberg.

    Insurers were largely stripped of their top ratings in 2008 amid losses on guarantees of subprime-mortgage-backed debt. Build America Mutual Assurance Co. entered the market in 2012 with S&P’s AA rating, becoming the first new insurer for local bonds since 2007. This year, about 4.8 percent of the debt had the protection, up from 3.2 percent in 2013, Bloomberg data show. Insurers once covered more than half the market.

    Credit Equalizer

    The backing had appeal for individual investors, who own about 60 percent of munis, because it gave AAA ratings regardless of the underlying credit. The focus has shifted in part to the insurers’ role in protecting investors in bankruptcy court after Chapter 9 filings by municipalities including Detroit, theCalifornia city of Stockton, and Jefferson County, Alabama.

    “Bond insurance represents a great value for the investor when you’re talking about the very stressed credits like Puerto Rico, or the uncertainty associated with Detroit,” said Patrick Early, chief muni analyst at Wells Fargo Advisors LLC in St. Louis. “Essentially you’re getting a AA at BBB levels.”

    Debt backed by units of Assured Guaranty probably trade with yields as much as 0.75 percentage point higher than uninsured securities from a AA municipality, DiMella said. Heading into this year, MacKay boosted holdings of insured bonds above the amount in the benchmark the firm tracks, he said. MacKay added insured Puerto Rico bonds, he said.

    Value Maintained

    Uninsured 10-year general obligations from the U.S. territory have declined over the past year at more than five times the pace of securities backed by Assured Guaranty (AGO) Municipal Corp.

    Puerto Rico general obligations with Assured’s protection and maturing in July 2024 traded March 24 at 98 cents on the dollar, the highest since August, data compiled by Bloomberg show. At this time last year it traded at about 102 cents on the dollar.

    By comparison, debt with the same maturity that doesn’t have insurance traded yesterday at an average of about 74 cents, a one-month low. A year ago, it changed hands at 99 cents.

    In Detroit, uninsured limited-tax general obligations due in April 2016 traded last week at 22 cents, while debt with identical maturities backed by Assured and National went for about 99 cents and 95 cents, respectively.

    Competitive Strength

    MBIA (MBI)’s new rating “will significantly enhance its financial flexibility,” Chief Executive Officer Jay Brown said in a March 18 statement. Dominic Frederico, CEO of Hamilton, Bermuda-based Assured, said in a separate statement the company was pleased S&P “recognized the strength of our competitive position.”

    A probable target for insured volume is 5 percent, according to a report this week from Municipal Market Advisors, based in Concord, Massachusetts. Business is limited by the fact that about 70 percent of insured bonds in 2013 came from five states: California, TexasPennsylvania, New York and Illinois.

    Issuers using the protection this year include Oyster Bay, New York, with an A- rating from S&P, and Henry Mayo Newhall Memorial Hospital in Valencia, California, with a BBB- grade.

    “There was definite value,” Bob Hudson, the hospital’s chief financial officer, said in an interview. “With Assured, we were able to issue without a debt-service reserve fund, and that, in combination with the interest reduction between BBB-and AA-, made it very favorable.”

    The $70 million tax-exempt deal in January included a portion maturing in October 2043 that yielded 5.3 percent. By comparison, the interest rate on benchmark 30-year hospital bonds rated BBB was5.85 percent.

    “You certainly have to sacrifice some yield, but the sacrifice you’re making today is going to be well worth it down the road” as yield spreads on the bond decline, DiMella said.

    By Brian Chappatta  Mar 26, 2014 5:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Brian Chappatta in New York at bchappatta1@bloomberg.net

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at smerelman@bloomberg.netMark Tannenbaum, Justin Blum




    Moody's: Three risks reduce credit positives of Affordable Care Act for not-for-profit hospitals

    New York, March 27, 2014 — Three risks are emerging to counter benefits not-for-profit hospitals should realize from the Affordable Care Act’s reduction in the number of uninsured, says Moody’s Investors Service. These are higher deductibles on plans sold through the insurance exchanges that could translate into bad debt for hospitals; negative pressures on reimbursements that may arise when insurers cope with possible reduced profitability; and, from lower hospital reimbursement from participating in newer “narrow” healthcare networks.

    “After open enrollment for the ACA health insurance coverage ends on March 31, the credit implications, both positive and negative, will become clearer,” says Daniel Steingart, an Assistant Vice President and Analyst at Moody’s in the report, “US Healthcare Reform: Three Risks Reduce Credit Positives for Not-for-Profit Hospitals.”

    “Key for hospitals will not be the headline number of people purchasing insurance, but whether the ACA actually reduces the number of uninsured,” says Moody’s Steingart.

    An expected reduction in uninsured is the most positive aspect of the ACA for the hospitals, says Moody’s. The net benefit for hospitals has been eroded since the legislation was passed in 2010, first by the Supreme Court granting US states the option to not expand Medicaid insurance coverage in 2012, and now by the three emerging risks.

    First, Moody’s sees significant risk that people covered by the most popular insurance plans will be unable or unwilling to meet their deductibles. As a result, growth in insurance coverage will not necessarily translate into materially lower bad debt exposure for many hospitals, particularly for services where the deductible accounts for a substantial share of the negotiated reimbursement.

    “Today’s high deductibles are tomorrow’s bad debt,” says Moody’s Steingart.

    Second, if the insurers believe they are making little or no profit on plans, they will likely pressure hospitals to accept lower reimbursements or raise premiums, which could discourage people from buying insurance in 2015. The insurance industry’s profitability is a key factor in hospital reimbursement because insurance companies tie their negotiations with hospitals to their own expectations of profitability.

    Moody’s says insurance companies will begin pricing policies for 2015 in the next few months, and negotiations with hospitals will extend through the beginning of open enrollment in November.

    Finally, if narrow healthcare networks are successful, hospital reimbursements are likely to drop. In narrow networks, a group of hospitals, doctors, or other healthcare workers will negotiate lower reimbursement rates in return for the insurer’s using them, leading to higher patient volumes that compensate for lower reimbursements. Hospitals that do not join narrow networks could lose business, while those that join may not see the higher patient volumes that will make up for the lower reimbursements.

    For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report at https://www.moodys.com/research/US-Healthcare-Reform-Three-Risks-Reduce-Credit-Positives-for-Not–PBM_PBM166602.

    Global Credit Research – 27 Mar 2014




    Urban Water: Strategies That Work.

    In the summer of 2013, the Greater New Orleans Foundation (GNOF), with the assistance of Urban Institute, held a series of Workshops, Urban Water: Strategies That Work. The Workshops informed New Orleans stakeholders about innovative green approaches to stormwater management, highlighting five vanguard cities: District of Columbia, Houston, Milwaukee, Philadelphia, and Portland (OR). Green stormwater techniques offer significant cost, environmental, health, and economic advantages over traditional, or gray, approaches. This report describes the emergence of green infrastructure for stormwater management; summarizes the main learnings from the five Workshops; and includes case summaries of the vanguard cities showcased in the Workshops.

    Document date: December 09, 2013
    Released online: March 25, 2014

    Sandra RosenbloomElizabeth Oo, Joseph Cosgrove, Christopher Karakul

    Read complete document: PDF




    Partnerships Unlock the Door to Progress in the Twin Cities: The Central Corridor Light Rail Project.

    This case study examines the strategy employed by the Twin Cities (Minneapolis and St. Paul, Minnesota) as they undertook a major transportation initiative – the Central Corridor light rail project, to connect their downtowns. The set of far reaching partnerships that have enabled this project, along with the leadership roles played by city officials, the philanthropic community, and the civic organizations all provide a template and examples that other cities might find instructive.

    The initial catalyst for the Central Corridor project was the desire to maximize opportunity for the region and to help move people between the job centers in the downtown areas of the Twin Cities, which would help the region to be more competitive. As the vision for the project evolved, city officials began to appreciate that providing mass transit along the Central Corridor could help revitalize the neighborhoods through which the light rail would pass, and make these communities more attractive and better places to live as a result of better transportation access.

    This project has helped orchestrate community redevelopment along the train route and created an environment intended to support mixed income communities and thriving local commerce along the line. The new light rail line, which is scheduled to open in mid-2014, will also provide cost effective transportation to connect residents to jobs in both cities and in the region, and in general strengthen the appeal of living in these communities. As the project falls into place, the communities surrounding the new line will have hundreds of new homes and stronger businesses, and brighter cultural and artistic installations along the major street.

    Read the entire case study »




    WSJ: Detroit Seeks Proposals to Privatize Its Water System.

    Bankrupt City Looks to Unload Assets as Talks With Suburbs Stall

    DETROIT—This bankrupt city is seeking proposals from private companies to run and potentially buy its regional water and sewer system as talks to lease it to the city’s suburbs have stalled.

    The move to at least partially privatize one of the nation’s largest water systems comes as the city considers unloading assets to finalize its debt-cutting plan, which is expected to be voted on by creditors this spring.

    “We need infrastructure for water,” Detroit Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr said Monday at a panel discussion in New York hosted by the Manhattan Institute for Policy Research, a conservative think tank.

    After a year in office, Mr. Orr has said an outright sale of Detroit’s water department, which serves nearly 40% of Michigan’s population, is unlikely. His preferred plan calls for leasing the water system to a new regional authority, which he said would bring in $47 million a year to the city for 40 years.

    But suburban leaders so far have balked at their potential share of future costs for system improvements and unpaid water bills. It is still possible the city-owned system could continue to be run as a municipal department from Detroit, said a person familiar with the matter.

    Privatizing water and sewer service in southeast Michigan could provide a test case for advocates who argue the private sector would bring greater efficiency and needed improvement to aging systems nationally. Opponents of such privatization efforts fear rate increases and question turning a public entity into a profit-making enterprise.

    About 85% of all U.S. water agencies are public despite a swell toward greater privatization in the 1990s and 2000s. The city of Atlanta in a 1999 deal privatized its water system but reversed course after cost-cutting led to customer complaints.

    “If Detroit does this, it will probably be the first really big public-private effort in the last 10 years,” said Peter Gleick, president of the Pacific Institute, a California environmental-research and advocacy group that studies water privatization and other issues.

    The Detroit Water and Sewerage Department provides about 600 million gallons of water a day to Detroit and 127 suburban communities in seven counties. It has nearly $1 billion in annual revenue.

    But like its city, the department has faced challenges. Until last year, it operated for decades under federal court oversight sparked by alleged violations under the Clean Water Act. A former department director pleaded guilty in 2012 to conspiracy as part of the corruption investigation into convicted ex-mayor Kwame Kilpatrick. Thousands of delinquent customers in Detroit who owe the department more than $100 million are being threatened with water shut-offs, according to city officials.

    The city’s 21-page request for proposals sent Friday to prospective buyers described a department that collects more in revenue than it spends. But it faces five-year capital-improvement projects to replace water mains and upgrade treatment plants and pumping stations that are expected to cost $1.4 billion.

    The system also had about $6 billion in debt as of March 15. In the event of a long-term lease or a sale, the city wants potential operators to come up with a way for the department to retire its debt if the transaction would cause the bond debt to lose tax-exempt status or end access to state financing. A potential operator also would have to wrestle with pension obligations for current and future department retirees, which the city estimates would require a payout of $675 million over 10 years.

    In the request for proposals, Mr. Orr wrote that the city would “consider responses that contemplate alternative transaction structures, such as a long-term lease and concession arrangement or sale.”

    The proposed privatization has some protection for ratepayers: An operator would have to cap rate increases at no more than 4% for the first 10 years.

    Traditional city services are being outsourced across Detroit. A quasipublic authority and a private management company run the city’s convention center. Another authority is also taking over the city’s public lighting from a city department. Last month, Detroit’s City Council privatized trash service in a bid to improve service but without expected cost savings.

    By

    MATTHEW DOLAN

    Write to Matthew Dolan at matthew.dolan@wsj.com






    Copyright © 2026 Bond Case Briefs | bondcasebriefs.com